SINUMERIK 840D sl

ShopTurn

01/2008 Edition
Operation/Programming
Introduction
1
Setting up the machine
2
Machining the
workpiece
3
Creating a ShopTurn
program
4
ShopTurn functions
5
Working with manual
machine
6
G-code program
7
Working with a B axis
8
Working with two tool
holders
9
Tool management
10
Program management
11
Messages, alarms,
user data
12
Examples
13
Appendix
A
Index
B
Valid for


Control
SINUMERIK 840D sl/840DE sl
Software Version
NCU System Software for
SINUMERIK 840D sl/840DE sl 1.5
with ShopTurn 7.5



SINUMERIK® Documentation


Printing history

Brief details of this edition and previous editions are listed below.

The status of each version is indicated by the code in the "Remarks" column.

Status code in the "Remarks" column:

A .... New documentation.
B .... Unrevised reprint with new order number.
C .... Revised edition with new status.



Edition Order No. Comment
03/2001 6FC5 298-6AD50-0BP0 A
01/2002 6FC5 298-6AD50-0BP1 C
06/2003 6FC5 298-6AD50-0BP2 C
08/2005 6FC5 398-5AP10-0BA0 C
11/2006 6FC5 398-5AP10-1BA0 C
01/2008 6FC5 398-5AP10-2BA0 C

Registered trademarks
SIMATIC
®
, SIMATIC HMI
®
, SIMATIC NET
®
, SIROTEC
®
, SINUMERIK
®
and SIMODRIVE
®
are
registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining designations found in this publication could be
trademarks whose use by a third party for its own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.





Additional information is available on the Internet at:
http://www.siemens.com/motioncontrol









© Siemens AG 2008



Other functions not described in this documentation might be executable in the
control. This does not, however, represent an obligation to supply such functions
with a new control or when servicing.

We have checked that the contents of this document correspond to the hardware
and software described. Nevertheless, differences might exist and therefore we
cannot guarantee that they are completely identical. The information contained in
this document is, however, reviewed regularly and any necessary changes will be
included in the next edition. Suggestions for improvement are welcome.

Technical data subject to change.


6FC5398-5AP10 - 2BA0
Siemens AG


0

01/2008 Preface


0
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 iii

Preface

SINUMERIK®
Documentation
The SINUMERIK documentation is organized in 3 parts:
• General documentation
• User documentation
• Manufacturer/service documentation

An overview of publications, which is updated on a monthly basis and
provides information about the language versions available, can be
found on the Internet at:
http://www.siemens.com/motioncontrol
Select the menu items "Support" Æ "Technical Documentation" Æ
"Publications Overview.”
The Internet version of DOConCD (DOConWEB) is available at:
http://www.automation.siemens.com/doconweb
Information about training courses and FAQs (Frequently Asked
Questions) can be found at the following website:
http://www.siemens.com/motioncontrol under menu item "Support"
Target group This documentation is geared toward the operator of single-slide
lathes with SINUMERIK 840D sl.
Benefits This document familiarizes you with the operating elements and
commands. Based on the manual, you are capable of responding to
problems and to take corrective action.
Standard version This documentation only describes the functionality of the standard
version of ShopTurn. Extensions or changes made by the machine
manufacturer are documented by the machine manufacturer.
Other functions not described in this documentation might be
executable in the control. However, no claim can be made regarding
the availability of these functions when the equipment is first supplied
or in the event of servicing.
Further, for the sake of simplicity, this documentation does not contain
all detailed information about all types of the product and cannot cover
every conceivable case of installation, operation or maintenance.
0

Preface 01/2008


0
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
iv SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008

Technical Support If you have any technical questions, please contact our hotline:

Europe/Africa
Phone: +49 (0) 180 5050-222
Fax: +49 (0) 180 5050-223
Internet: http://www.siemens.com/automation/support-request

America
Phone: +1 (0) 423 262 2522
Fax: +1 (0) 423 262 2200
E-mail: mailto:techsupport.sea@siemens.com

Asia/Pacific
Phone: +86 (0) 1064 719 990
Fax: +86 (0) 1064 747 474
E-mail: mailto:adsupport.asia@siemens.com

Technology hotline
Phone: +49 (0) 2166 5506-115
The hotline is available on weekdays between 8:00 and 17:00

National telephone numbers for technical support are provided under
the following Internet address:
http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support

Questions on the manual If you have any queries (suggestions, corrections) in relation to this
documentation, please fax or e-mail us:
Fax: +49 (0) 9131 98-63315
E-mail: mailto:docu.motioncontrol@siemens.com
For the fax form, see the response sheet at the end of the document.
SINUMERIK Internet
address
http://www.siemens.com/sinumerik

0

01/2008 Preface


0
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 v

Safety information This manual contains information that must be observed to ensure
your personal safety and to prevent property damage. The notices
referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a
safety alert symbol, notices referring to property damage only, have
no safety alert symbol. Depending on the hazard level, warnings are
indicated in a descending order as follows:
Danger
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper
precautions are not taken.
Warning
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper
precautions are not taken.
Caution
indicates that slight personal injury may result if proper precautions
are not taken.
Caution
without a safety alert symbol, indicates that property damage can
result if proper precautions are not taken.
Notice
indicates that an undesirable result or condition can occur if the
corresponding information is not observed.
In the event of a number of levels of danger prevailing simultaneously,
the warning corresponding to the highest level of danger is always
used. If a warning notice is used with the safety alert symbol to warn
against injury, this same notice may also include a warning regarding
property damage.
Qualified personnel The associated device/system must only be set up and operated
using this documentation. A device/system must only be
commissioned and operated by qualified personnel. For the purpose
of the safety information in this documentation, a "qualified person" is
someone who is authorized to energize, ground, and tag equipment,
systems, and circuits in accordance with established safety
procedures.

0

Preface 01/2008


0
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
vi SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008

Correct usage Please note the following:

Warning
The equipment may only be used for single purpose applications
explicitly described in the catalog and in the technical description and
it may only be used along with third-party devices and components
approved by Siemens. Correct, reliable operation of the product
required proper transport, storage, positioning and assembly, as well
as careful operation and maintenance.

Structure of the
documentation
The following information blocks, marked by pictograms, are used in
this documentation:

Orientation
Background information
Operating sequence
Explanation of the parameters
Additional notes
Software option
The function described is a software option, i.e. the function can be
executed on the control only if you have purchased and enabled the
appropriate option.

Machine manufacturer The following reference appears wherever particular features or
functions might have been changed or supplemented by the machine
manufacturer:
Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

References Whenever specific information can be found in other literature, this is
indicated as follows:
References:
Terminology The meanings of some basic terms are given below in this
documentation.
Program
A program is a sequence of instructions to the CNC which combine to
produce a specific workpiece on the machine.
0

01/2008 Preface


0
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 vii

Contour
The term contour refers generally to the outline of a workpiece.
More specifically, it refers to the section of the program that defines
the outline of a workpiece comprising individual elements.
Cycle
A cycle, such as the tapping cycle, is a subroutine specified by
ShopTurn for carrying out a recurring machining process.
(A cycle is sometimes also referred to as a function.)
Spindles/axes
The various spindles/axes are designated in this documentation as
follows:
S1: Main spindle
S2: Tool spindle
S3: Counter spindle
C1: C-axis main spindle
C3: C-axis counter spindle
Z3: Special axis (e.g. axis to move the counter spindle)
Other designations may have been assigned by the machine
manufacturer.

Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.
Unit of measurement Metric units are used for all parameters in this document. The
equivalent imperial units are shown in the table below.
Metric Inch
mm in
mm/tooth in/tooth
mm/min in/min
mm/rev in/rev
m/min ft/min

0

Preface 01/2008


0
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
viii SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008

Notes


0

01/2008 Contents

0
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 ix
Contents


Introduction 1-17
1.1 ShopTurn .................................................................................................................. 1-18
1.1.1 Work sequence......................................................................................................... 1-19
1.2 Workstation............................................................................................................... 1-20
1.2.1 Coordinate system.................................................................................................... 1-21
1.2.2 Operator panels ........................................................................................................ 1-22
1.2.3 Operator panel keys.................................................................................................. 1-23
1.2.4 Machine control panels............................................................................................. 1-25
1.2.5 Machine control panel elements............................................................................... 1-25
1.3 User interface............................................................................................................ 1-29
1.3.1 Overview................................................................................................................... 1-29
1.3.2 Operation via softkeys and keys............................................................................... 1-32
1.3.3 Program views .......................................................................................................... 1-36
1.3.4 Entering parameters ................................................................................................. 1-40
1.3.5 CNC ISO user interface ............................................................................................ 1-42
1.3.6 ShopTurn Open (PCU 50.3) ..................................................................................... 1-44
Setting up the machine 2-45
2.1 Switching on and off.................................................................................................. 2-46
2.2 Approaching a reference point.................................................................................. 2-46
2.2.1 User agreement with Safety Integrated .................................................................... 2-48
2.3 Modes ....................................................................................................................... 2-49
2.4 Settings for the machine ........................................................................................... 2-50
2.4.1 Switching between units of measurement (millimeters/inches)................................ 2-50
2.4.2 Switching between coordinate systems (MKS/WKS) ............................................... 2-51
2.4.3 Spindles .................................................................................................................... 2-52
2.5 Tools ......................................................................................................................... 2-54
2.5.1 Creating a new tool ................................................................................................... 2-56
2.5.2 Tool list...................................................................................................................... 2-57
2.5.3 Measuring a tool manually........................................................................................ 2-63
2.5.4 Measuring a tool with a probe................................................................................... 2-65
2.5.5 Calibrating the probe................................................................................................. 2-67
2.5.6 Measuring a tool with a magnifying glass................................................................. 2-69
2.6 Measuring the workpiece zero.................................................................................. 2-70
2.7 Zero offsets ............................................................................................................... 2-71
2.7.1 Setting the zero offset ............................................................................................... 2-72
2.7.2 Defining zero offsets ................................................................................................. 2-74
2.7.3 Zero offset list ........................................................................................................... 2-75
2.8 Manual mode ............................................................................................................ 2-77
2.8.1 Selecting a tool and spindle...................................................................................... 2-77
0

Contents 01/2008


0
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
x SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
2.8.2 Traversing axes......................................................................................................... 2-79
2.8.3 Positioning axes ........................................................................................................ 2-81
2.8.4 Simple stock removal of workpiece........................................................................... 2-81
2.8.5 Settings for manual mode ......................................................................................... 2-84
2.9 MDA .......................................................................................................................... 2-86
2.10 Run times .................................................................................................................. 2-87
Machining the workpiece 3-89
3.1 Starting/stopping machining...................................................................................... 3-90
3.2 Running in a program................................................................................................ 3-93
3.3 Displaying the current program block .......................................................................3-94
3.4 Repositioning axes.................................................................................................... 3-95
3.5 Starting execution at a specific program point .......................................................... 3-96
3.6 Controlling the program sequence.......................................................................... 3-101
3.7 Overstoring.............................................................................................................. 3-103
3.8 Testing a program................................................................................................... 3-104
3.9 Correcting a program.............................................................................................. 3-105
3.10 Displaying G and auxiliary functions .......................................................................3-106
3.11 Simulating machining.............................................................................................. 3-107
3.11.1 Simulating prior to machining the workpiece .......................................................... 3-109
3.11.2 Simultaneous recording prior to machining the workpiece..................................... 3-110
3.11.3 Simultaneous recording during workpiece machining ............................................ 3-111
3.11.4 Changing a blank shape for a G code program...................................................... 3-112
3.11.5 Different workpiece views ....................................................................................... 3-113
3.11.6 Changing the cutout ................................................................................................ 3-117
3.12 Settings for automatic mode ...................................................................................3-119
3.12.1 Defining a test run feedrate..................................................................................... 3-119
3.12.2 Parameterizing the workpiece counter....................................................................3-120
Creating a ShopTurn program 4-121
4.1 Program structure ................................................................................................... 4-122
4.2 Fundamentals..........................................................................................................4-124
4.2.1 Machining planes .................................................................................................... 4-124
4.2.2 Machining cycle approach and retraction ............................................................... 4-126
4.2.3 Absolute and incremental dimensions ....................................................................4-128
4.2.4 Polar coordinates .................................................................................................... 4-130
4.2.5 Pocket calculator ..................................................................................................... 4-131
4.2.6 Adjustments............................................................................................................. 4-133
4.3 Sequence program..................................................................................................4-134
4.3.1 Overview .................................................................................................................4-134
4.3.2 Creating a new program.......................................................................................... 4-136
0

01/2008 Contents

0
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 xi
4.3.3 Creating program blocks......................................................................................... 4-140
4.3.4 Changing program blocks....................................................................................... 4-144
4.3.5 Program editor ........................................................................................................ 4-145
4.3.6 Specifying a quantity............................................................................................... 4-148
ShopTurn functions 5-149
5.1 Straight or circular path movements....................................................................... 5-151
5.1.1 Selecting a tool and machining plane..................................................................... 5-152
5.1.2 Straight line ............................................................................................................. 5-154
5.1.3 Circle with known center point ................................................................................ 5-156
5.1.4 Circle with known radius ......................................................................................... 5-157
5.1.5 Polar coordinates.................................................................................................... 5-159
5.1.6 Straight polar........................................................................................................... 5-160
5.1.7 Circle polar .............................................................................................................. 5-162
5.2 Drilling ..................................................................................................................... 5-163
5.2.1 Centered drilling...................................................................................................... 5-164
5.2.2 Thread centered...................................................................................................... 5-166
5.2.3 Drilling and reaming................................................................................................ 5-167
5.2.4 Deep hole drilling .................................................................................................... 5-169
5.2.5 Tapping ................................................................................................................... 5-171
5.2.6 Thread milling ......................................................................................................... 5-173
5.2.7 Positioning and position patterns............................................................................ 5-175
5.2.8 Freely programmable positions .............................................................................. 5-176
5.2.9 Line position pattern................................................................................................ 5-178
5.2.10 Matrix position pattern............................................................................................. 5-179
5.2.11 Box position pattern ................................................................................................ 5-182
5.2.12 Full circle position pattern....................................................................................... 5-184
5.2.13 Pitch circle position pattern..................................................................................... 5-186
5.2.14 Including and skipping positions............................................................................. 5-188
5.2.15 Repeating positions ................................................................................................ 5-189
5.3 Turning.................................................................................................................... 5-190
5.3.1 Roughing cycles...................................................................................................... 5-190
5.3.2 Recessing cycles .................................................................................................... 5-193
5.3.3 Undercut form E and F............................................................................................ 5-196
5.3.4 Thread undercuts.................................................................................................... 5-197
5.3.5 Thread cutting......................................................................................................... 5-199
5.3.6 Thread re-machining............................................................................................... 5-203
5.3.7 Parting..................................................................................................................... 5-204
5.4 Contour turning ....................................................................................................... 5-206
5.4.1 Representation of the contour ................................................................................ 5-208
5.4.2 Creating a new contour........................................................................................... 5-210
5.4.3 Creating contour elements...................................................................................... 5-211
5.4.4 Changing a contour................................................................................................. 5-216
5.4.5 Stock removal ......................................................................................................... 5-218
5.4.6 Stock removal of residual material.......................................................................... 5-222
5.4.7 Grooving.................................................................................................................. 5-224
0

Contents 01/2008


0
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
xii SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
5.4.8 Grooving residual material ......................................................................................5-226
5.4.9 Plunge-turning......................................................................................................... 5-227
5.4.10 Plunge-turning residual material .............................................................................5-229
5.5 Milling ...................................................................................................................... 5-231
5.5.1 Rectangular pocket ................................................................................................. 5-232
5.5.2 Circular pocket ........................................................................................................ 5-236
5.5.3 Rectangular spigot .................................................................................................. 5-240
5.5.4 Circular spigot ......................................................................................................... 5-244
5.5.5 Longitudinal slot ...................................................................................................... 5-247
5.5.6 Circumferential slot ................................................................................................. 5-250
5.5.7 Open slot ................................................................................................................. 5-253
5.5.8 Positions.................................................................................................................. 5-259
5.5.9 Multiple edge........................................................................................................... 5-259
5.5.10 Engraving ................................................................................................................ 5-261
5.6 Contour milling ........................................................................................................ 5-268
5.6.1 Representation of the contour.................................................................................5-271
5.6.2 Creating a new contour ...........................................................................................5-273
5.6.3 Creating contour elements...................................................................................... 5-275
5.6.4 Changing a contour................................................................................................. 5-282
5.6.5 Path milling.............................................................................................................. 5-284
5.6.6 Predrilling a contour pocket..................................................................................... 5-289
5.6.7 Milling a contour pocket (roughing)......................................................................... 5-293
5.6.8 Removing residual material from a contour pocket ................................................ 5-296
5.6.9 Finishing the contour pocket ................................................................................... 5-298
5.6.10 Chamfering a contour pocket .................................................................................. 5-302
5.6.11 Milling a contour spigot (roughing).......................................................................... 5-303
5.6.12 Removing residual material from a contour spigot ................................................. 5-306
5.6.13 Finishing a contour spigot .......................................................................................5-308
5.6.14 Chamfering a contour spigot ...................................................................................5-311
5.7 Calling a subroutine ................................................................................................ 5-313
5.8 Repeating program blocks ......................................................................................5-315
5.9 Machining with the counterspindle..........................................................................5-316
5.10 Changing program settings..................................................................................... 5-322
5.11 Calling zero offsets.................................................................................................. 5-323
5.12 Defining coordinate transformations .......................................................................5-324
5.13 Programming the approach/retraction cycle...........................................................5-326
5.14 Inserting G code into the sequence program.......................................................... 5-328
5.15 Teaching..................................................................................................................5-330
5.15.1 Teaching a cycle ..................................................................................................... 5-330
5.15.2 Teaching a position pattern.....................................................................................5-331
5.15.3 Teaching a contour object....................................................................................... 5-332

0

01/2008 Contents

0
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 xiii
Working with manual machine 6-333
6.1 Manual Machine...................................................................................................... 6-334
6.2 Zero offsets ............................................................................................................. 6-335
6.3 Simple workpiece machining in manual mode ....................................................... 6-335
6.3.1 Traversing axes ...................................................................................................... 6-336
6.3.2 Taper turning........................................................................................................... 6-337
6.3.3 Straight turning........................................................................................................ 6-338
6.4 More complex workpiece machining in manual mode............................................ 6-339
6.4.1 Drilling with Manual Machine.................................................................................. 6-340
6.4.2 Turning with Manual Machine................................................................................. 6-340
6.4.3 Milling with Manual Machine................................................................................... 6-341
6.5 Simulation ............................................................................................................... 6-342
G code program 7-343
7.1 Creating a G code program.................................................................................... 7-344
7.2 Executing a G code program.................................................................................. 7-347
7.3 G code editor .......................................................................................................... 7-349
7.4 Arithmetic variables................................................................................................. 7-352
Working with a B axis 8-353
8.1 Turning machines with a B axis.............................................................................. 8-354
8.2 Tool alignment for turning ....................................................................................... 8-356
8.3 Milling with a B axis................................................................................................. 8-356
8.3.1 Swiveling................................................................................................................. 8-357
8.3.2 Approach/retraction................................................................................................. 8-358
8.4 Position pattern....................................................................................................... 8-360
8.5 Measuring a tool ..................................................................................................... 8-361
8.6 Tool selection for manual mode.............................................................................. 8-362
Working with two tool holders 9-363
9.1 Turning tools with two tool holders ......................................................................... 9-364
9.2 Programming with two tool holders......................................................................... 9-364
9.3 Measuring a tool ..................................................................................................... 9-365
Tool management 10-367
10.1 Tool list, tool wear list and tool magazine............................................................. 10-368
10.2 Entering tools in the tool list .................................................................................. 10-374
10.2.1 Creating a new tool ............................................................................................... 10-374
10.2.2 Creating multiple cutting edges for each tool ....................................................... 10-376
10.2.3 Creating a replacement tool.................................................................................. 10-377
0

Contents 01/2008


0
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
xiv SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
10.3 Sorting tools ..........................................................................................................10-378
10.4 Deleting tools from the tool list ..............................................................................10-378
10.5 Loading/unloading a tool into/out of the magazine ...............................................10-379
10.6 Relocating a tool....................................................................................................10-381
10.7 Positioning a magazine.........................................................................................10-383
10.8 Entering tool wear data .........................................................................................10-383
10.9 Activating tool monitoring......................................................................................10-384
10.10 Managing magazine locations ..............................................................................10-386
Program management 11-387
11.1 Managing programs with ShopTurn......................................................................11-388
11.2 Managing programs with ShopTurn on NCU (HMI Embedded sl)........................11-389
11.2.1 Opening a program...............................................................................................11-391
11.2.2 Executing a program.............................................................................................11-392
11.2.3 Executing a G code program from USB/network drive.........................................11-393
11.2.4 Creating a new directory/program.........................................................................11-394
11.2.5 Selecting several programs...................................................................................11-395
11.2.6 Copying/renaming a directory/program.................................................................11-396
11.2.7 Deleting a directory/program.................................................................................11-397
11.2.8 Saving/reading in tool/zero point data...................................................................11-398
11.3 Managing programs with PCU 50.3 (HMI Advanced)...........................................11-401
11.3.1 Opening a program...............................................................................................11-403
11.3.2 Executing a program.............................................................................................11-404
11.3.3 Loading/unloading a program...............................................................................11-405
11.3.4 Executing a G code program from a hard disk or floppy disk/network drive ........11-406
11.3.5 Creating a new directory/program.........................................................................11-408
11.3.6 Selecting several programs...................................................................................11-409
11.3.7 Copying/renaming/moving a directory/program....................................................11-410
11.3.8 Deleting a directory/program.................................................................................11-412
11.3.9 Saving/reading in tool/zero point data...................................................................11-412
Messages, alarms, user data 12-415
12.1 Messages..............................................................................................................12-416
12.2 Alarms ...................................................................................................................12-416
12.3 User data...............................................................................................................12-417
12.4 Version display......................................................................................................12-419
Examples 13-421
13.1 Standard machinings ............................................................................................13-422
13.2 Contour milling ......................................................................................................13-434

0

01/2008 Contents

0
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 xv
Appendix A-443
A Abbreviations ..........................................................................................................A-444
B Index ........................................................................................................................ I-447


0

Contents 01/2008


0
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
xvi SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
















































1

01/2008 Introduction
1
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 1-17
Introduction

1.1 ShopTurn .................................................................................................................. 1-18
1.1.1 Work sequence......................................................................................................... 1-19
1.2 Workstation ............................................................................................................... 1-20
1.2.1 Coordinate system.................................................................................................... 1-21
1.2.2 Operator panels ........................................................................................................ 1-22
1.2.3 Operator panel keys.................................................................................................. 1-23
1.2.4 Machine control panels............................................................................................. 1-25
1.2.5 Machine control panel elements ............................................................................... 1-25
1.3 User interface............................................................................................................ 1-29
1.3.1 Overview................................................................................................................... 1-29
1.3.2 Operation via softkeys and keys............................................................................... 1-32
1.3.3 Program views .......................................................................................................... 1-36
1.3.4 Entering parameters ................................................................................................. 1-40
1.3.5 CNC ISO user interface ............................................................................................ 1-42
1.3.6 ShopTurn Open (PCU 50.3) ..................................................................................... 1-44




1

Introduction 01/2008
1.1 ShopTurn

1
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
1-18 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
1.1 ShopTurn
ShopTurn is an operating and programming software program for
turning machines that makes it easy for you to operate the machine
and to program workpieces.
These are some of the features the software provides:
Setting up the machine Special measurement cycles make it easier to measure the tools and
the workpiece.
Executing a program You can display the program execution in 3-D on the screen.
This makes it easy for you to check the result of programming and to
observe the progress of workpiece machining at the machine
(software option).
To execute a sequence program, you must have reading and writing
rights.
The execution of sequence programs is a software option.
Creating a program Programming the workpiece with ShopTurn is effortless, since it is
graphically supported and doesn't require knowledge of G-code.
ShopTurn shows the program in a user-friendly work plan and
displays the individual cycles and contour elements in dynamic
graphics.
The powerful contour computer allows any contour to be input.
A stock removal cycle with residual material detection saves extra
machining processes.
Tool management ShopTurn saves your tool data. The software can also manage the
data of tools that are not in the revolver.
Program management Programs can be created simply by copying and modifying similar
programs; there is no need to start again from the beginning.
Remote diagnostics You can switch from ShopTurn to the CNC-ISO operator interface.
There, you can also activate a remote diagnostic which allows the
machine to be operated via an external computer.

1

01/2008 Introduction
1.1 ShopTurn

1
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 1-19
1.1.1 Work sequence
Two typical working situations are considered separately in this Guide.
• You want to execute a program for the purpose of automatically
machining a workpiece.
• You want to create the program to be used for machining a
workpiece.
Executing a program Before you execute a program, you have to set up your machine. To
do this, you must perform the following actions, during which you will
be supported by ShopTurn (see Sec. "Setting up the Machine"):
• Approach the reference point of the machine
(only for incremental position measuring systems)
• Tool measuring
• Define the workpiece zero
• Enter any other work offsets
If you have completely set up the machine, you can select a program
and automatically execute it (see Sec. "Machining a Workpiece").
Creating a program If you create a new program, you can select whether you would like to
make a sequence program or a G-code program (see "Creating a
Sequential Control Program" or "G-code Program").
When creating a sequence program, ShopTurn prompts you to input
all relevant parameters. Programming progress is automatically
indicated in a dashed-line diagram. Help screens that explain the
parameters in each operation also support you with programming.
You can, of course, also insert G code commands in a sequence
program.
A G code program, however, must be created entirely out of G code
commands.

1

Introduction 01/2008
1.2 Workstation

1
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
1-20 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
1.2 Workstation
In addition to the lathe with CNC/positioning control, a ShopTurn
workstation also has an operator panel and machine control panel.


Workstation configuration


Turning machine You can use ShopTurn on a single-slide lathe with three axes, of a
main spindle, of a tool spindle, and of a counter-spindle.
Control ShopTurn runs on the SINUMERIK 840D sl CNC with ShopTurn on
NCU (HMI Embedded sl) and PCU 50.3 (HMI Advanced).
Operator panel Communication with ShopTurn is done via the operator panel.
Machine control panel You operate the lathe using the machine control panel.

Turning machine
complete with control
Operator
panel
Machine
control panel
1

01/2008 Introduction
1.2 Workstation

1
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 1-21
1.2.1 Coordinate system
When machining a workpiece on a lathe, one basically uses a right-
angled coordinate system. This consists of the three coordinate axes
X, Y, and Z which are parallel to the machine axes. The coordinate
axis Y does not have to be set up. Spindle axis Z is an independently
rotating axis and is designated with the letter C.
The positions of the coordinate system and the machine zero depend
on the type of machine used.

W
M
X+
Z+
Y+
W = Workpiece zero
C
M = Machine zero


Position of the coordinate system, machine zero
and workpiece zero (example)

1

Introduction 01/2008
1.2 Workstation

1
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
1-22 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
1.2.2 Operator panels
You can use one of the following operator panels for the PCU:
OP 010
OP 010C
OP 010S
OP 012
OP 015
OP 015A
OP 015AT
TP 015A
TP15AT

In this example, the OP 010 operator panel front is used to illustrate
the components that are available for operating the control and
machine tool.

The keys are described in the next section.

Operator panel OP 010


3
4
2
1
6
.
5
2

Operator panel OP 010

1 Screen
2 Screen keys
3 Horizontal softkey bar
4 Vertical softkey bar
5 Alphanumeric keypad
Correction/cursor pad with control keys and input key
6 USB interface




1

01/2008 Introduction
1.2 Workstation

1
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 1-23
1.2.3 Operator panel keys


Alarm Cancel
Cancels the alarm that is marked with this symbol.


Channel
Has no meaning for ShopTurn.


Help
Toggles between the process plan and programming graphics as well
as between the parameterization screen form with programming
graphics and the parameterization screen form with the help display.


Next Window
Has no meaning for ShopTurn.


Page Up or Page Down
Page upward or downward in the directory or in the process plan.


Cursor
Navigate between different fields or lines.
Use Cursor right to open a directory or program.
Use Cursor left to switch to the next highest level in the directory tree.


Select
Chooses one of a number of options presented.
This key has the same function as the "Alternat." softkey.


End
Moves the cursor to the last input field in a parameterization screen
form.


Backspace
• Delete the value in the input field.
• In insertion mode, it deletes the character after the cursor.


Tab
Has no meaning for ShopTurn.


Shift
Depress the Shift key to enter the upper character shown on the dual
input keys.

1

Introduction 01/2008
1.2 Workstation

1
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
1-24 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008


Ctrl
Use the following key combinations to navigate in the process plan
and in the G code editor:
• Ctrl + Pos1: Jump to the beginning.
• Ctrl + End: Jump to the end.


Old
Has no meaning for ShopTurn.


Del
• Deletes the value in the parameter field.
• In insertion mode, it deletes the character marked by the cursor.
• Deletes the machining lines during parallel drawing and in the
simulation.


Insert
Activates insertion mode or the pocket calculator.


Input
• Terminates entry of a value in the input field.
• Opens a directory or program.


Alarm - only OP 010 and OP 010C
Opens the "Messages/Alarms" operating area.
This key has the same function as the "Alarm list" softkey.


Program - only OP 010 and OP 010C
Opens the "Program" operating area.
This key has the same function as the "Prog. edit" softkey.


Offset - only OP 010 and OP 010C
Opens the "Tools/Offsets" operating area.
This key has the same function as the "Tool zero point" softkey


Program Manager - only OP 010 and OP 010C
Opens the "Program Manager" operating area.
This key has the same function as the "Program" softkey.

1

01/2008 Introduction
1.2 Workstation

1
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 1-25
1.2.4 Machine control panels
The lathe can be equipped with a machine control panel by Siemens
or with a specific machine control panel from the machine
manufacturer.
You perform actions on the lathe via the machine control panel, for
example, traversing axes or starting the machining of the workpiece.
When functions are active, the LEDs on the corresponding keys on
the machine control panel light up.

1.2.5 Machine control panel elements


EMERGENCY OFF pushbutton
Press this pushbutton in an emergency, i.e. when there is a danger to
life or there is a risk of damage to the machine or workpiece.
All drives will be stopped with the greatest possible braking torque.

For additional responses to pressing the Emergency Stop button,
please refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.


Reset

Reset
• Interrupts execution of the current program.
The CNC control remains synchronized with the machine.
It is in its initial state and ready for a new program run.
• Cancels an alarm

Jog

Jog
Select Machine Manual operating mode.

Teach In

Teach In
Has no meaning for ShopTurn.

MDA

MDA
Selects MDA mode.

Auto

Auto
Selects Machine Auto operating mode.

1

Introduction 01/2008
1.2 Workstation

1
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
1-26 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008

Single Block

Single Block
Executes the program block by block (single block).

Repos

Repos
Repositions, re-approaches the contour.

Ref Point

Ref. Point
Approach reference point.

VAR

Inc Var (incremental feed variable)
Incremental mode with variable increment size.

1
...
10000


Inc (Incremental feed)
Incremental mode with predefined increment size of
1, ..., 10,000 increments.
A machine data code defines how the increment value is interpreted.

Please refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

Cycle Start

Cycle Start
Starts execution of a program.

Cycle Stop

Cycle Stop
Stops execution of a program.

+X
...
Z

Axis keys
Traverse axis in corresponding direction.

Rapid

Rapid
Traverses axis at rapid traverse (fastest speed).

WCS MCS

WCS MCS
Switches between the workpiece coordinate system (WCS = work)
and machine coordinate system (MCS = machine).

1

01/2008 Introduction
1.2 Workstation

1
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 1-27

%

Feedrate/Rapid Traverse Override
Raises or lowers the programmed feedrate or rapid traverse.
The programmed feedrate or rapid traverse is set to 100% and can be
adjusted between 0% and 120% (only up to 100% for rapid traverse).
The new feedrate setting appears in the feedrate status display on the
screen as an absolute value and as a percentage.


Feed Stop

Feed Stop
Stops execution of the running program and shuts down axis drives.

Feed Start

Feed Start
Continues execution of the program in the current block and ramps up
to the feedrate specified in the program.

%

Spindle override
Increases or decreases the programmed spindle speed.
The programmed spindle speed is set to 100% and can be controlled
from 50 to 120%. The new spindle speed setting appears in the
spindle status display on the screen as an absolute value in percent.


Spindle Dec.

Spindle Dec. – only OP032S machine control panel
Decreases the programmed spindle speed.

Spindle Inc.

Spindle Inc. – only OP032S machine control panel
Increases the programmed spindle speed.

100%

100% – only OP032S machine control panel
Restores the programmed spindle speed.

Spindle Stop

Spindle Stop
Stop spindle.

Spindle Start

Spindle Start
Start spindle.

1

Introduction 01/2008
1.2 Workstation

1
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
1-28 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
Key-operated switch
You can use the keyswitch to set various access rights. The keyswitch
has four settings for protection levels 4 to 7.
Machine data can be programmed to interlock access to programs,
data, and functions at various protection levels.

Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

The keyswitch has three keys of different colors that you can remove
in the specified positions:











Position 0
No key
Level of protection 7

Position 1
Key 1 black
Level of protection 6

Position 2
Key 1 green
Level of protection 5

Position 3
Key 1 red
Level of protection 4

Lowest
access rights










Increasing
access authorization










Highest
access rights

When you change the key position to change the access
authorization, this is immediately not visible on the operator interface.
You have to initiate an action first (e.g. close or open a directory).



If the PLC is in the Stop state (LED of the machine control panel is
flashing), ShopTurn does not evaluate the keyswitch positions during
boot up.
The machine manufacturer can set up protection levels 0 to 3 using a
password. When the password is set, ShopTurn does not evaluate the
keyswitch position.

1

01/2008 Introduction
1.3 User interface

1
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 1-29
1.3 User interface
1.3.1 Overview
Screen layout


User interface

1 Active operating mode/operating area and secondary mode
2 Alarm and message line
3 Program name
4 Program path
5 Channel state and program control
6 Channel operational messages
7 Position display of the axes
8 Display for
• active tool T
• current feedrate F
• active spindle (S1 = main spindle, S2 = tool spindle,
S3 = counter spindle)
• spindle utilization in percent
9 Display of active work offsets and rotation
10 Working window
11 Dialog line for additional explanatory text
12 Horizontal softkey bar
13 Vertical softkey bar
14 Softkeys
15 Screen buttons
1

Introduction 01/2008
1.3 User interface

1
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
1-30 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
Secondary mode REF: Approaching a reference point
REPOS: Repositioning
INC1 ... INC10000: Fixed increment
INC_VAR: Variable increment

Channel status
RESET
Active
Interrupted

Program control SKP: Skip G code block
DRY: DRY run feedrate
!ROV: Feedrate override only (not feedrate and rapid traverse override)
SBL1: Single-block (stop after each block that has a function on the
machine)
SBL2: Selection not possible in ShopTurn (stop after each block)
SBL3: Single-block fine (stop after each block, also within a cycle)
M01: Programmed stop
DRF: DRF offset
PRT: Program test

Channel operational
messages
Stop: An operator action is required.
Wait: No operator action is required.

If a dwell time is active, the remaining dwell time is displayed. It is either
displayed in seconds or as spindle revolutions.

Position display of the
axes
The actual value display in the position display refers to the SZS
coordinate system (settable zero system). The position of the active tool
relative to the workpiece zero is displayed.

Symbols for axis displays:
Linear axis clamped
Rotary axis clamped
Feedrate status
Feed is not enabled

Spindle status
Spindle not enabled
Spindle is stationary
Spindle is turning clockwise
Spindle is turning counter-clockwise

The display of the spindle utilization as a percentage can be 200%.
Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.
1

01/2008 Introduction
1.3 User interface

1
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 1-31
Key to the meaning of the symbol colors:
Red: Machine is stationary
Green: Machine is running
Yellow: Waiting for operator to take action
Gray: Miscellaneous

Screen buttons


Machine
Call active operating mode (Machine Manual, MDA, or Machine Auto).


Return jump
Has no meaning for ShopTurn.


Extension
Changes the horizontal softkey bar.


Menu Select
Calls the main menu:



The machine manufacturer can display defined symbols instead of the
program path (4). The program path is then displayed together with
the program name (3).
Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

1

Introduction 01/2008
1.3 User interface

1
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
1-32 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
1.3.2 Operation via softkeys and keys
The ShopTurn operator interface consists of various screen forms in
which there are eight horizontal and eight vertical softkeys
respectively. You operate the softkeys with the keys next to the
softkey bars.
Each softkey displays a new screen form.
ShopTurn has 3 modes (Manual Machine, MDA, and Machine Auto)
and 4 operating areas (Program Manager, Program Messages/
Alarms, and Tools/Zero-point offsets).


To switch from one operating mode/operating area to another, press
the "Menu Select" key. The main menu is displayed, in which you can
select the appropriate operating area via a softkey.


Alternatively, you can call the operating areas via the hardkeys on the
operator panel.


Jog

MDA

Auto

You can activate an operating mode directly at any time via the keys
on the machine control panel.
If you select the "Machine" softkey in the main menu, the screen form
for the currently active mode appears.
1

01/2008 Introduction
1.3 User interface

1
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 1-33
If you select another operating mode or operating area, the horizontal
and vertical softkey bars change.
Main menu

Machine Manual operating mode

1

Introduction 01/2008
1.3 User interface

1
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
1-34 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
If you press a horizontal softkey within an operating mode or operating
area, only the vertical softkey bar will change.
Machine Manual operating mode

Function within Machine Manual operating mode


1

01/2008 Introduction
1.3 User interface

1
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 1-35


When the symbol appears to the right of the dialog line on the
operator interface, you can change the horizontal softkey bar within an
operating area. This is done by pressing the "Expansion" key.
Pressing the "ETC" key again will take you back to the original
horizontal softkey bar.


Within an operating mode or operating area, you can use the "Back"
softkey to return to the next highest screen form.



Use the "Abort" softkey to exit a screen form without accepting the
entered values and return to the next highest screen form.



When you have entered all the necessary parameters in the
parameterization screen form correctly, you can close the screen form
and save the parameters using the "Accept" softkey.




Use the "OK" softkey to initiate an action immediately, e.g. to rename
or delete a program.

On
Some softkeys are displayed with a black background when you
activate the function assigned to them.

Program
test
Off

In that case, you can deactivate the function by pressing the softkey
again. The softkey will then have a gray background again.

1

Introduction 01/2008
1.3 User interface

1
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
1-36 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
1.3.3 Program views
You can display a work step program in various views.
Program manager In the program manager, you manage all your programs. You can also
select a program here for machining the workpiece.

Program manager


-or-
Select the program manager with the "Program" softkey or "Program
Manager" key.


You can move around within a directory using the "Cursor up" and
"Cursor down" keys.


Use the "Cursor right" key to open a directory.


Use the "Cursor left" key to move up to the next-higher directory level.

-or-
Use the "Cursor right" or "Input" key to open the process plan for a
program.

1

01/2008 Introduction
1.3 User interface

1
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 1-37
Process plan The process plan provides an overview of the separate machining
steps of a program.

Process plan



You can move between the program blocks in the process plan using
the "Cursor up" and "Cursor down" keys.


Use the "Help" key to switch between the process plan and the
programming graphics.

Programming graphics The programming graphics show the contour of the workpiece as a
dynamic graphic with dashed lines. The program block selected in the
process plan is color-highlighted in the programming graphics.

Programming graphics

1

Introduction 01/2008
1.3 User interface

1
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
1-38 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008


Use the "Cursor right" key to open a program block in the process
plan. The appropriate parameterization mask complete with
programming graphics is then displayed.


Parameter screen with
programming graphics
The programming graphics in a parameterization screen form show
the contour of the current machining step in broken-line graphics
complete with the parameters.

Parameter screen with programming graphics



Use the cursor keys to move between the input fields within a
parameterization screen form.


Use the "Help" key to switch between the programming graphics and
the help display.


1

01/2008 Introduction
1.3 User interface

1
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 1-39
Parameter screen with
help display
The help display in the parameterization screen form explains the
parameters of the machining step individually.

Parameter screen with help display

The colored symbols in the help displays have the following meaning:
Yellow circle = reference point
Red arrow = tool traveling at rapid traverse
Green arrow = tool traveling at machining feedrate

1

Introduction 01/2008
1.3 User interface

1
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
1-40 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
1.3.4 Entering parameters
On setting up the machine and during programming, you must enter
values in the white fields for various parameters.
Parameters, whose input fields have a gray background, are
automatically calculated by ShopTurn.


Parameter
White field
input
Unit
Gray field
input

Parameterization screen form

Selecting parameters

Some parameters require you to select from a number of options in
the input field. Fields of this type do not allow you to type in a value.

-or-
Press the "Alternat." softkey or the "Select" key until the required
setting is displayed.
The "Alternat." softkey is only visible when the cursor is positioned on
an input field that presents a choice of options. The "Select" key is
also only active in this situation.


Entering parameters

For the remaining parameters, enter a numerical value in the input
field using the keys on the operator panel.
Enter the desired value.


Press the "Input" key to terminate entry.


-or-
If you do not want to enter a value, i.e. not even "0", press the
"Backspace" or "Del" key.


1

01/2008 Introduction
1.3 User interface

1
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 1-41
Selecting the unit

For certain parameters, you can choose between different units.

-or-
Press the "Alternat." softkey or the "Select" key until the required
unit is displayed.
The "Alternat." softkey is only visible when you have a choice of units
for this parameter. The "Select" key is also only active in this situation.


Deleting parameters

If an input field contains an invalid value, you can delete it completely.

-or-
Press the "Backspace" or "Del" key.


Changing or calculating
parameters

If you only want to change individual characters in an input field rather
than overwriting the entire entry, switch to insertion mode. In this
mode, the pocket calculator is also active. You can use it during
programming to calculate parameter values.


Press the "Insert" key.
Insertion mode and the pocket calculator are activated.
You can navigate within the input field using the "Left cursor" and
"Right cursor" keys.
Use the "Backspace" or "Del" key to delete individual characters.
For more information on the pocket calculator, see Section "Pocket
calculator".

Accepting parameters

When you have correctly entered all the necessary parameters in the
parameterization screen form, you can close the screen form and
save the parameters.

-or-
Press the "Accept" softkey or the "Cursor left" key.
If there are several input fields in a line and you want to use the
"Cursor left" key to accept the parameters, you must position the
cursor in the leftmost input field.
You cannot accept the parameters if they are incomplete or obviously
erroneous. In this case, you can see from the dialog line which
parameters are missing or were entered incorrectly.

1

Introduction 01/2008
1.3 User interface

1
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
1-42 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
1.3.5 CNC ISO user interface
From the ShopTurn operator interface, you can switch to the CNC
operator interface.
There, you can activate remote diagnostics. This allows the controller
to be operated via an external computer.

The machine manufacturer must have released the change from the
ShopTurn operator interface to the CNC-ISO operator interface.
Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

You can find a detailed description of the CNC-ISO operator interface
in:
References: /BEMsl/, Operating Manual HMI Embedded sl
SINUMERIK 840D sl
/BAD/, Operating Manual HMI Advanced
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/840D sl
/PG/, Programming Manual Fundamentals
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/840D sl
/PGA/, Programming Manual Advanced
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/840D sl

The remote diagnosis is a software option.
For further information about remote diagnosis, please refer to:
References: /FB/, Description of Functions, Extension Functions,
F3 Remote diagnosis

Interface utilisateur CNC
ISO



Press the "CNC ISO" softkey in the horizontal softkey bar.
-and-


Then press the "CNC ISO" softkey in the vertical softkey bar.
1

01/2008 Introduction
1.3 User interface

1
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 1-43

CNC-ISO operator interface



¾ Press the "Menu Select" key if you want to return to the ShopTurn
operator interface.
-and-

ShopTurn

¾ Press the "ShopTurn” softkey.

Remote diagnosis


¾ Press the "Menu Select" key in the CNC-ISO operator interface.

Diagnosis

¾ Press the "Diagnosis” softkey.

Remote
diagnosis

¾ Press the "Remote diagnosis” softkey.

1

Introduction 01/2008
1.3 User interface

1
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
1-44 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
1.3.6 ShopTurn Open (PCU 50.3)
There is ShopTurn software for the PCU 50.3 in the ShopTurn Open
version.

In ShopTurn Open, the HMI Advanced operating areas "Services",
"Diagnosis", "Commissioning" and "Parameters" (without tool
management and zero-point offsets) are located directly on the
expanded horizontal softkey bar.



You can find a detailed description of the integrated HMI Advanced
operating areas in:
References: /BAD/, Operating Manual HMI Advanced
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/840D sl
Some of the softkeys in the basic menu or extended menu bars may
be assigned to other operating areas by the machine manufacturer.
Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

2

01/2008 Setting up the machine
2
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 2-45
Setting up the machine

2.1 Switching on and off.................................................................................................. 2-46
2.2 Approaching a reference point.................................................................................. 2-46
2.2.1 User agreement with Safety Integrated .................................................................... 2-48
2.3 Modes ....................................................................................................................... 2-49
2.4 Settings for the machine ........................................................................................... 2-50
2.4.1 Switching between units of measurement (millimeters/inches) ................................ 2-50
2.4.2 Switching between coordinate systems (MKS/WKS) ............................................... 2-51
2.4.3 Spindles .................................................................................................................... 2-52
2.5 Tools ......................................................................................................................... 2-54
2.5.1 Creating a new tool ................................................................................................... 2-56
2.5.2 Tool list...................................................................................................................... 2-57
2.5.3 Measuring a tool manually........................................................................................ 2-63
2.5.4 Measuring a tool with a probe................................................................................... 2-65
2.5.5 Calibrating the probe................................................................................................. 2-67
2.5.6 Measuring a tool with a magnifying glass................................................................. 2-69
2.6 Measuring the workpiece zero.................................................................................. 2-70
2.7 Zero offsets ............................................................................................................... 2-71
2.7.1 Setting the zero offset ............................................................................................... 2-72
2.7.2 Defining zero offsets ................................................................................................. 2-74
2.7.3 Zero offset list............................................................................................................ 2-75
2.8 Manual mode ............................................................................................................ 2-77
2.8.1 Selecting a tool and spindle...................................................................................... 2-77
2.8.2 Traversing axes ........................................................................................................ 2-79
2.8.3 Positioning axes........................................................................................................ 2-81
2.8.4 Simple stock removal of workpiece .......................................................................... 2-81
2.8.5 Settings for manual mode......................................................................................... 2-84
2.9 MDA.......................................................................................................................... 2-86
2.10 Run times.................................................................................................................. 2-87




2

Setting up the machine 01/2008
2.1 Switching on and off

2
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
2-46 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
2.1 Switching on and off


To switch the controller or machine on and off, please see the
machine manufacturer’s specifications.

After running up the controller, the basic "Manual Machine" screen
appears.

Basic manual machine screen

2.2 Approaching a reference point
Your turning machine can be equipped with an absolute or
incremental path measuring system. An incremental path measuring
system must be calibrated after being switched on, but an absolute
path measuring system does not.
For the incremental path measuring system, all the machine axes
must therefore first approach a reference point, the coordinates of
which are known to be relative to the machine zero-point.

The sequence in which you must refer the axes is preset by the
machine manufacturer. The axes can also all approach the reference
point simultaneously, depending on the manufacturer’s settings.

Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

During the reference point traversing, the feedrate override is in effect.

2

01/2008 Setting up the machine
2.2 Approaching a reference point

2
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 2-47

Notice
Before approaching the reference point, the coordinates of the actual
value display are incorrect.
In addition, the path limitations of the axes set by the machine
manufacturer are not yet in effect.

Warning
During the reference point approach, the axes travel along a direct
path to the reference point.
Therefore, first move the axes to a safe position in order to avoid
collisions when during the approach to the reference point.
It is important that you observe the movement of the axes on the
machine during the approach to the reference point.

Referencing axes

Jog

Select "Machine Manual" mode.

Ref Point

Press the "Ref Point" key on the machine control panel.

X


Select the axis to be traversed.


+

Press the "-" or “+” key.


The selected axis moves to the reference point and stops. The
coordinate of the reference point is displayed. The axis is marked with
an icon.
If an axis key in the wrong direction is selected, the axis does not
move.
Interrupting axis motion

Feed Stop

Press the "Feed Stop" key.
The axis stops.

Approach again with
axis


X
...

Select the axis to be moved and press the desired direction key.
The axis resumes moving in the direction of the reference point.
After the all machine axes have traversed to the reference point, the
path measuring system is calibrated and the path limitations of the
axes are in effect. The correct coordinates of the reference point are
displayed in the actual value display.
2

Setting up the machine 01/2008
2.2 Approaching a reference point

2
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
2-48 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
2.2.1 User agreement with Safety Integrated
If you are using Safety Integrated (SI) on your machine, you will need
to confirm that the current displayed position of an axis corresponds to
its actual position on the machine when you reference an axis. Your
confirmation is the precondition for the availability of other Safety
Integrated functions.

You can only give your user agreement for an axis after it has
approached the reference point.
The displayed axis position always refers to the machine coordinate
system (MCS = machine).
User agreement with Safety Integrated is only possible with a software
option.
For more information on user agreement, please refer to:
References: /FBSI/, Description of Functions SINUMERIK Safety
Integrated


Jog

Select "Machine Manual" mode.

Ref Point

Press the "Ref Point" key on the machine control panel.

X

Select the axis to be traversed.


+

Press the "-" or “+” key.


The selected axis moves to the reference point and stops. The
coordinate of the reference point is displayed. The axis is marked with
an icon.

User
agreement

Press the "User agreement" softkey.
The "User agreement" window opens.
It shows a list of all machine axes with their current and SI positions.
Position the cursor in the "Agreement" field for the axis in
question.

-or-
Give your agreement by pressing the "Alternat." softkey or the
"Select" key.
The selected axis is marked with a cross meaning "safely referenced"
in the "Agreement" column.
By pressing the "toggle keys," you again deactivate the agreement.
2

01/2008 Setting up the machine
2.3 Modes

2
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 2-49
2.3 Modes
There are various modes in which you can work in ShopTurn:
• Machine Manual
• MDA (Manual Data Automatic)
• Machine Auto


Machine Manual In "Machine Manual“ mode, there is a provision for the following
preparatory actions in manual mode:
• Approaching the reference point, i.e. calibrating the machine’s path
measuring system
• Preparing a machine for executing a program in automatic mode,
i.e. measuring tools, measuring the workpiece and, if necessary,
defining the work offsets used in the program
• Traversing axes, e.g. during a program interruption
• Positioning axes
• Simple stock removal of workpiece


Jog

You can select the "Manual Machine“ mode using the "Jog" key.
The parameters set under "T, S, M..." affect all movements in manual
mode with the exception of reference point approach.
Manual machine If you have the "Manual Machine" option, you are working in "Machine
Manual" for the manual mode. Under "Machine Manual," you have the
option of carrying out the following machining processes without
having to write a program for them:
• Setting-up and simple traversing movements
• Taper turning
• Straight (plan or longitudinal turning)
• Drilling (axial drilling, axial threads, drilling, reaming, deep-drilling,
threads)
• Turning (stock removal, groove, undercut, threads, tapping)
• Milling (pocket, shank, groove, multi-edged, engraving)
MDA In MDA mode, you can enter and execute G code commands non-
modally to set up the machine or to perform a single action.

MDA

You can select MDA mode via the "MDA" key.


2

Setting up the machine 01/2008
2.4 Settings for the machine

2
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
2-50 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
Machine Auto In automatic mode, you can execute a program completely or only
partially. You can also trace execution of the program in a graphical
display on the screen.

Auto

You can select "Machine Auto" via the "Auto" key.

2.4 Settings for the machine
2.4.1 Switching between units of measurement (millimeters/inches)
You can set millimeters or inches as the unit of measure. Switching
the unit of measure is done for the entire machine, i.e. ShopTurn
automatically converts all the specifications to the new unit of measure
such as:
• Positions
• Tool offsets
• Zero offsets
Independently of the general machine setting, you can change the unit
of measure for manual mode (see Sec. "Settings for Manual Mode") or
change it again for individual programs (see Sec. "Creating a New
Program"). These settings for the unit of measure are only relative to
the programmed positions. Tool offsets, zero-point offsets, etc. remain
in the unit of measure of the entire machine.
If, for example, you have set millimeters as the unit of measure for the
machine, but a workpiece drawing is scaled in inches, you can select
inches as the unit of measure for this program. This means that during
programming, you can directly specify the positions in inches. On the
other hand, tool offsets, feedrates, etc. must be set in millimeters as
usual.


Jog

Open the extended horizontal softkey bar in "Machine Manual"
mode.


Press the "ShopT. sett." softkey.

Inch

Press the “Inch” softkey.
Inch
Unit of measurement: millimeters (softkey is
deselected.)
Inch
Unit of measurement: Inch (softkey is selected.)
A prompt asks you whether the unit of measure should really be
switched.


Press the "OK" softkey.
The unit of measure for the entire machine is adapted.
2

01/2008 Setting up the machine
2.4 Settings for the machine

2
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 2-51
2.4.2 Switching between coordinate systems (MKS/WKS)
The coordinates in the actual value display are relative to either the
machine coordinate system or the workpiece coordinate system. The
machine coordinate system (MKS), in contrast to the workpiece
coordinate system (WKS), does not take into consideration any zero-
point offsets (see Sec. "Zero-point Offsets"). By default, the workpiece
coordinate system is set as a reference for the actual value display.


WCS MCS


Press the "WCS MCS" key.
-or-

Jog
-or-
Auto

Select the "Machine Manual" mode or "Machine Auto" mode.
-and-

Actual
value MCS

Press the "Actual value MCS" softkey in order to select or
deselect this coordinate system.
Actual
value MCS
WKS (softkey is deselected.)
Actual
value MCS
MKS (softkey is selected.)

2

Setting up the machine 01/2008
2.4 Settings for the machine

2
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
2-52 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
2.4.3 Spindles
In the "Spindles" screen form, you store the dimensions of the
spindles on your machine.

Measuring a manual tool If you want to use the collet of the main or counter spindle as a
reference point during manual measuring, specify the collet
dimensions ZL0 or ZL1.

Counterspindle You can measure either the forward edge or stop edge of the counter-
spindle. The forward edge or stop edge automatically serves as the
valid reference point when traversing the counter-spindle. This is
especially important when gripping the workpiece with the counter-
spindle (see Sec. "Machining with the Counter-spindle").

Front edge Stop edge

Dimensioning of the counter-spindle

Please observe the machine manufacturer’s specifications for the
parameter "Tensioning."
Main spindle

Dimensioning of the main spindle
2

01/2008 Setting up the machine
2.4 Settings for the machine

2
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 2-53
Tailstock

Dimensioning of the tailstock
The length of the tailstock (ZR) and the diameter of the tail stock (XR)
of the spindle screen are needed for the display of the tailstock in the
simulation.



¾ Select the "Tools WOs" operating area.


¾ Press the "Expansion" key.


¾ Press the "Spindles” softkey.
¾ Enter the parameters.
The settings take effect immediately.

Parameter Description Unit
S1 Speed limit for the main spindle rev/min
Tensioning Main spindle: Tensioning the tool outside or inside
ZL0 Main spindle collet dimensions (inc) mm
S3 Speed limit for the counter-spindle rev/min
Tensioning Counterspindle: Tensioning the tool outside or inside
Endpiece type Dimensions of the forward edge or stop edge
ZL1 Counter-spindle collet dimensions (inc) mm
ZL2 Counter-spindle stop dimensions (inc) mm
ZL3 Counter-spindle endpiece dimensions (inc) - (only for dimensioning the stop edge) mm
XR Tailstock diameter mm
ZR Tailstock length mm

2

Setting up the machine 01/2008
2.5 Tools

2
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
2-54 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
2.5 Tools
The various tool geometries must be taken into consideration while
the program is being executed. These are entered in the tool list as
so-called tool offset data. For each call-up of a tool, the controller
takes the tool offset data into consideration.
When programming therefore, you only have to enter the workpiece
dimensions from the finishing drawing. After this, the controller
independently calculates the individual tool path.

Tool length offset The tool length offset compensates for the length differences between
the various tools in the X and Z direction.
The tool length is the distance between the tool-carrier reference point
T and tool tip P. If the tool is tensioned in the revolver for a new
machining direction, other tool length offsets will result.

T
T
Length Z Length Z
L
e
n
g
t
h

X

L
e
n
g
t
h

X

P
P
X
Z


Tool length offsets
You can determine the tool length offset using the "Measure tool"
function or manually with a probe or a magnifying glass.
The control calculates the traversing movements from the tool length
offset and wear values (see Sec. "Entering Tool Wear Data").

2

01/2008 Setting up the machine
2.5 Tools

2
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 2-55
Tool/cutting edge radius
offset


The workpiece contour and the traversing path of a tool are not
identical, since a tool should not move with its center-point along the
contour that is to be finished.
ShopTurn shifts the programmed tool path, depending on the radius of
the tool and on the machining direction, such that the tool's cutting
edge traverses exactly along the desired contour. This shifted tool
path is called the equidistant.

Equidistant
Equidistant


Equidistants during turning and milling
The controller calculates the shifted tool path from the tool radius
entered in the tool list and the wear values (see Sec. "Entering Tool
Wear Data").
You can find further information on radius offset in Sec. "Program
blocks".

2

Setting up the machine 01/2008
2.5 Tools

2
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
2-56 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
2.5.1 Creating a new tool
Before you can work with a new tool, you must first enter it in the tool
list. When setting-up a new tool, ShopTurn makes a variety of tool
types available to you. The tool type determines which geometry data
are required and how they will be computed.


Possible tool types
The rotary drill can be used for centric drilling and turning. As with a
turning tool, the direction of rotation must be specified.

Install the new tool in the revolver (see Sec. "Selecting the Tool
and Spindle").



Select the "Tool list" softkey in the "Tools WOs" operating area.
Position the cursor on the location in the tool list that the tool
occupies in the revolver. The location must still be empty in the
tool list.

New >
tool

Press the "New tool" softkey.

Roughing
tool
...
3D_Probe


Select the desired tool type and position using the softkeys.
Using the "Additional" softkey, additional tool types or cutting edge
positions are made available to you.
The new tool is created and automatically assumes the name of the
selected tool type.
2

01/2008 Setting up the machine
2.5 Tools

2
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 2-57
Enter a unique tool name.
You can edit the tool name as required. A tool name may contain
a maximum of 17 characters. You can use letters, digits, the
underscore symbol (_), periods (".") and slashes ("/").
Enter the offset data of the tool.

2.5.2 Tool list
In the tool list, enter all the tool parameters that are needed:
• for calculating the tool length or radius offset,
• for calculating the machining cycles,
• for displaying the tools during the simulation of the program
execution.

Depending on the tool type, various parameters are required.

L
e
n
g
t
h

X
Cutter radius
Length Z
P
l
a
t
e

l
e
n
g
t
h
Toolholder
angle
Plate angle
Cutting direction

Rougher/Finisher

2

Setting up the machine 01/2008
2.5 Tools

2
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
2-58 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008

P
l
a
t
e

l
e
n
g
t
h
Radius Plate width
L
e
n
g
t
h

X
Length Z

Recessing tool
L
e
n
g
t
h

X
Length Z
Diameter

Milling tool

L
e
n
g
t
h

X
Diameter
Length Z
Tip angle

Drill

L
e
n
g
t
h

X
Length Z
Radius

Threading tool
2

01/2008 Setting up the machine
2.5 Tools

2
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 2-59

L
e
n
g
t
h

X
Radius
Length Z

Button
D
i
a
m
e
t
e
r
Length Z
L
e
n
g
t
h

X

Stop


L
e
n
g
t
h

X

Length Z
Bore Ø
Radius

Rotary drill
Toolholder angle
Plate angle
88°
90°

Rotary drill
2

Setting up the machine 01/2008
2.5 Tools

2
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
2-60 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008


L
e
n
g
t
h

X

Length Z
Diameter
P
i
t
c
h


Screw tap
Length Z
L
e
n
g
t
h

X
D
i
a
m
e
t
e
r

3D probe

Tool list
The tool list is adapted by the machine manufacturer if necessary.
Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

Loc. Location number in the magazine
The tool’s location number, which is located in the revolver in the
machining position, has a gray background.
If you are working with several magazines, then you will first see the
magazine number and then the location number inside the magazine
(e.g. 1/10). Tools that are not currently located in the magazine are
displayed without a location number. (You will find these tools when
sorting for a magazine location at the end of the tool list.)
For chain and disk magazines, the locations for a spindle and a dual-
gripper can also be displayed.
2

01/2008 Setting up the machine
2.5 Tools

2
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 2-61
Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.
Spindle location
Locations for grippers 1 and 2
Type Tool type and cutting edge position
Using the "Alternat." key, you can change the tool’s cutting edge
position.
Tool name The tool is identified by its name. You can enter the name as text or a
number (see Sec. "Setting-up a New Tool").
DP Duplo-number of the sister tool (replacement tool)
(DP 1 = original tool, DP 2 = first replacement tool,
DP 3 = second replacement tool, etc.)

Tool offset data
Cutting edge Tool offset data for a selected cutting edge of a tool (D No.)
Length X Tool length offset in direction X
You can determine this value using the "Measure Tool" function (see
Sec. "Measure tool manually" or "Measure tool with the magnifying
glass"). If the tool is measured externally, you can enter the value
here.
Length Z Tool length offset in direction Z
You can determine this value using the "Measure Tool" function (see
Sec. "Measure tool manually" or "Measure tool with the magnifying
glass"). If the tool is measured externally, you can enter the value
here.
Radius or ∅ Radius or diameter of the tool
For milling and drilling tools, you can also specify the diameter. For
turning tools, you can only specify the cutting edge radius. A machine
data code is used to switch from radius to diameter specification.
Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.


Reference direction for the holder angle


The holder angle of a cutting tool
The holder angle of a cutting tool is taken into consideration when
machining rear cuts.


The plate angle of a cutting tool
The plate angle of a cutting tool is taken into consideration when
machining rear cuts.
Pitch Thread pitch of a tap drill in mm/rev or thread intervals/''
2

Setting up the machine 01/2008
2.5 Tools

2
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
2-62 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
Drill ∅ Diameter of the drill hole for a rotary drill
Plat.width Plate width of a pin
The plate width needs ShopTurn for calculating the groove cycles.
Plat.length The plate length of a cutting tool or pin
The plate length needs ShopTurn for displaying the tools during the
program execution simulation.
H The "H" column is displayed only if ISO dialects are set up.
The number of the tool offset memory that belongs to the tool is
displayed in the H column.
N The number of teeth for a milling machine
From this, the controller internally calculates the rotational feedrate if
the feedrate is set in mm/tooth in the program.


Angle of the tool tip for a drill
When drilling, if you want to plunge as far as the shaft and not only as
far as the tool tip, the controller takes the angle of the drill tip into
consideration.
Tool-specific functions



Specification of the spindle’s direction of rotation
The direction of the spindle’s rotation is relative to the tool spindle for
powered tools (drilling and milling machines) and to the main or
counter-spindle for turning tools.
If you are using a drilling or milling machine for "axial drilling" or "axial
threading", the specified direction of rotation is relative to the cutting
direction of the tool. The main spindle then rotates adapting to the
tool.

CW spindle rotation
CCW spindle rotation
Spindle not switched on
2

01/2008 Setting up the machine
2.5 Tools

2
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 2-63


Coolant supplies 1 and 2 (e.g. internal and external cooling) on/off



Coolant ON


Coolant OFF
The coolant supply on the machine does not necessarily have to be
set-up.
Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

¾ Enter the desired tool name and the values for the tool offset data
in the tool list.

-or-
¾ Press the "Alternat." softkey or the "Select" key to carry out the
desired settings for the tool-specific functions.

2.5.3 Measuring a tool manually
When measuring manually, manually traverse the tool to a known
reference point in order to determine the tool dimensions in the X and
Z directions. ShopTurn then calculates the tool offset data from the
position of the tool-carrier reference point and the reference point.

You can also use the workpiece edge as a reference point or, when
measuring in the Z direction, you can also use the main spindle or
counter-spindle collets.
You specify the position of the workpiece edge during the
measurement, However, you must make the position of the collet
known before the measurement (see Sec. "Spindles").

Reference Point
Workpiece Edge


Jog

¾ Select the "Meas. tool" softkey in "Machine Manual" mode.

Manual >

¾ Press the "Manual" softkey.

X
-or-
Z

¾ Press the "X" or "Z" softkey, depending on which tool length you
want to measure.

Tools

¾ Press the "Tools" softkey.
¾ Select the tool to be measured from the tool list. The cutting edge
position and the radius or diameter of the tool must already be
entered in the tool list.
2

Setting up the machine 01/2008
2.5 Tools

2
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
2-64 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008

Back to
manual

¾ Press the "Back to manual" softkey.
The tool is accepted into the Measure Tool screen form.
¾ Select the tool cutting edge D and the duplo number DP for the
tool.
¾ Traverse the tool in the direction that is to be measured and
scratch it (see Sec. "Traversing the Axes").



Measure length X Measure length Z
¾ Enter the position of the workpiece edge in X0 or Z0.
If no value is entered for X0 or Z0, the value is taken from the
actual value display.

Set
length

¾ Press the "Set length" softkey.
The tool length is calculated automatically and entered in the tool list.
During this, the cutting edge position and tool radius or diameter are
automatically taken into consideration as well.

Store
position

If you want to save the position of the tool after scratching the tool,
press the "Store position" softkey. Then, for example, you can
traverse the axes in order to manually measure the position of the
workpiece edge X0 more easily.

Reference Point Collet

Jog

¾ Select the "Meas. tool" softkey in "Machine Manual" mode.

Manual >

Z

¾ Press the "Manual" and "Z" softkeys.
¾ Select the "main spindle collet" or "counter-spindle collet"
reference point.

Tools

¾ Press the "Tools" softkey.
¾ Select the tool to be measured from the tool list. The cutting edge
position and the radius or diameter of the tool must already be
entered in the tool list.

Back to
manual

¾ Press the "Back to manual" softkey.
The tool is accepted into the Measure Tool screen form.

2

01/2008 Setting up the machine
2.5 Tools

2
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 2-65
¾ Select the tool cutting edge D and the duplo number DP for the
tool.
¾ Traverse to the collet and scratch it (see Sec. "Traversing the
Axes").



Measure length Z

Set
length

¾ Press the "Set length" softkey.
The tool length is calculated automatically and entered in the tool list.
During this, the cutting edge position and tool radius or diameter are
automatically taken into consideration as well.

2.5.4 Measuring a tool with a probe
During automatic measuring, you determine the tool dimensions in the
directions X and Z with the aid of a probe. ShopTurn then calculates
the tool offset data from the known position of the tool-carrier
reference point and the probe.

If you want to measure your tools with a probe, a special cycle for that
purpose must be set-up by your machine manufacturer.
If there is a second probe on the counter-spindle, the machine
manufacturer must disclose this in a machine data element.
Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.
Before the actual measurement, you must enter the cutting edge
position and the radius or diameter of the tool in the tool list. You must
also calibrate the probe beforehand.
2

Setting up the machine 01/2008
2.5 Tools

2
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
2-66 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008

Change-in the tool that you want to measure (see Sec. "Selecting
the Tool and Spindle").

Jog

Select the "Meas. tool" softkey in "Machine Manual" mode.

Autom. >

Press the "Autom.” softkey.

X
-or-
Z

Press the "X" or "Z" softkey, depending on which tool length you
want to measure.



Measure length X Measure length Z
Select the cutting edge number (D number) of the tool.
In the event that there are two probes on the machine, select
whether you want to use the probe on the main or counter-
spindle.
Manually position the tool in the vicinity of the probe in such a way
that any collisions can be avoided when the probe is being
traversed in the corresponding direction.

Cycle Start

Press the "Cycle Start" key.
The automatic measuring process is started, i.e. the tool is traversed
at the measurement feedrate to the probe and back again.
The tool length is calculated and entered in the tool list. During this,
the cutting edge position and tool radius or diameter are automatically
taken into consideration as well.

2

01/2008 Setting up the machine
2.5 Tools

2
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 2-67
2.5.5 Calibrating the probe
If you want to automatically measure your tools, you must first
determine the position of the probe in the machine space in reference
to the machine zero-point.

The "Calibrate probe" function is only available if an adequate level of
protection is set.

Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.
You must approach the probe from 4 directions (+X, -X, +Z, -Z) for
calibration purposes.
To do this, use a calibrating tool that you can use to approach the
probe in all the required directions.

Z
X

Calibrating the tool probe with a calibration tool
The type (rougher or finisher) must be set for the probe. During this,
the cutting edge must always point in the –X and –Z direction (cutting
edge position 3). You must enter the length and the radius or diameter
of the calibrating tool in the tool list.
If there is a second probe on the counter-spindle, the machine
manufacturer must disclose this in a machine data element.
Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.
2

Setting up the machine 01/2008
2.5 Tools

2
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
2-68 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008

Change the calibrating tool.

Jog

Select the "Meas. tool" softkey in "Machine Manual" mode.

Calibrate
meas. cal.

Press the "Calibrate meas. cal.” softkey.

X
-or-
Z

Press the "X" or "Z" softkey, depending on which point of the
probe you wish to determine first.



Calibrate probe in X Calibrate probe in Z
In the event that there are two probes on the machine, select
whether you want to use the probe on the main or counter-
spindle.
Select the direction (+ or -), in which you would like to approach
the probe.
Position the calibrating tool in the vicinity of the probe in such a
way that any collisions can be avoided when the first point of the
probe is being approached.

Cycle Start

Press the "Cycle Start" key.
The calibration process is started, i.e. the calibrating tool is
automatically traversed at the measurement feedrate to the probe and
back again.
The position of the probe is determined and saved in an internal data
area.
Repeat the process for the other 3 points of the probe.

2

01/2008 Setting up the machine
2.5 Tools

2
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 2-69
2.5.6 Measuring a tool with a magnifying glass
You can also use a magnifying glass to determine the tool
dimensions, if this is available on the machine.
During this, ShopTurn calculates the tool offset data from the known
positions of the tool-carrier reference point and the cross-hairs of the
magnifying glass.


Jog

¾ Select the "Meas. tool" softkey in "Machine Manual" mode.

Magnifying
glass >


¾ Press the "Magnifying glass” softkey.

Tools





Back to
manual

¾ Press the "Tools" softkey.
¾ Select the tool to be measured from the tool list. The cutting edge
position and the radius or diameter of the tool must already be
entered in the tool list.
¾ Press the "Back to manual" softkey.
¾ Traverse the tool to the magnifying glass (see Sec. "Traversing
the Axes").
¾ Bring the tool tip P into alignment with the cross-hairs of the
magnifying glass.

Set
length

¾ Press the "Set length" softkey.
The tool lengths are calculated automatically and entered in the tool
list. During this, the cutting edge position and tool radius or diameter
are automatically taken into consideration as well.

2

Setting up the machine 01/2008
2.6 Measuring the workpiece zero

2
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
2-70 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
2.6 Measuring the workpiece zero
The reference point for programming a workpiece is always the
workpiece zero. To determine this zero, measure the length of the
workpiece and save the position of the cylinder's face surface in the
direction Z in a zero-point offset. This means that the position is stored
in the coarse offset and existing values in the fine offset are deleted.

The prerequisite for measuring the workpiece is that a tool with known
lengths is in the machining position (see Sec. "Select Tool and
Spindle").


Jog

Select the "Meas. workp." softkey in "Machine Manual" mode.


Select the desired offset in which the position of the cylinder front
surface is to be saved.
-or-

Work
offset

Press the "Work offset” softkey.
-and-
Position the cursor on the desired zero-point offset.
-and-

Back to
manual

Press the "Back to manual" softkey.
Traverse the tool in the direction Z and scratch it (see Sec.
"Traversing the Axes").
Enter the desired position of the workpiece edge Z0.

Set work
offset

Press the "Set work offset” softkey.
The workpiece zero-point and the accompanying zero-point offset are
calculated. The tool length is automatically included in the calculation.
Example: Workpiece edge position setpoint Z0 = 0
Tool length offset Z = 37.6 mm
⇒ Z = -37.6

2

01/2008 Setting up the machine
2.7 Zero offsets

2
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 2-71
2.7 Zero offsets
Following reference point approach, the actual value display for the
axis coordinates is based on the machine zero (M) of the machine
coordinate system (MCS = machine). The program for machining the
workpiece, however, is based on the workpiece zero (W) of the
workpiece coordinate system (WCS = work).
The machine zero and workpiece zero are not necessarily identical.
The distance between the machine zero and workpiece vary in
accordance with the type of tool and how it is clamped. This zero
offset is taken into account during execution of the program and can
be a combination of different offsets.
For ShopTurn, the actual value display of the positions is relative to
the ENS coordinate system. The position of the active tool relative to
the workpiece zero is displayed.

The offsets are summated as follows:
Basic offset MCS
M
WCS
W
Total
offset
Work offset coarse
Coordinate transformation
Work offset fine

Zero offsets

When the machine zero is not identical to the workpiece zero, at least
one offset (base offset or work offset) exists in which the position of
the workpiece zero is saved.
Base offset The base offset is a work offset that is always active. If you have not
defined a base offset, its value will be zero. You determine the base
offset via "Zero-point workpiece" (see Sec. "Measuring the workpiece
zero") or "Setting the zero offset" (see Sec. "Setting the zero offset").

2

Setting up the machine 01/2008
2.7 Zero offsets

2
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
2-72 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
Zero offsets Every zero offset (G54 to G57, G505 to G599) consists of a coarse
offset and a fine offset. You can call the work offsets from any
sequence program (coarse and fine offsets are added together).
You can save the workpiece zero, for example, in the coarse offset,
and then store the offset that occurs when a new workpiece is
clamped between the old and the new workpiece zero in the fine
offset.
Fine offsets must be set up by the machine manufacturer.
Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.
For instructions on specifying and calling work offsets, see Sections
"Defining zero offsets" and "Calling work offsets".
Coordinate
transformations
You always program coordinate transformations for a specific
sequence program. They are defined by:
• Translation
• Rotation
• Scaling
• Mirroring
(See Sec. "Defining the coordinate transformations")
Total offset The total offset is calculated from the sum of all offsets and coordinate
transformations.

2.7.1 Setting the zero offset
As an alternative to "Workpiece Zero-point," you can also save the
zero-point of the workpiece via "Set ZPO".

The offset (active zero-point offset or base offset) in which the new
zero-point is saved is set in machine data.
Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.
If the values are stored in the active work offset, they are stored in the
coarse offset and existing values in the fine offset are deleted.
The currently active work offset is displayed under the position window
for the axes.

Traverse the machine axes to the desired position, e.g. to the
front surface of the workpiece (see Sec. "Traversing Axes").
2

01/2008 Setting up the machine
2.7 Zero offsets

2
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 2-73
If you do not want to save the zero-point in the currently active
zero-point offset or in the base offset, select another zero-point
offset (see Sec. "Settings for Manual Mode").

Jog

Select the "Set WO" softkey in "Machine Manual" mode.


Setting the base zero-point offset


Enter the desired new position value for Z or X or Y directly into
the actual value display. You can use the cursor keys to switch
between axes.


Press the "Input" key.
-or-

Z=0

Press the "Z=0" softkey in case the position value is to be set to
zero.
The new zero-point is saved in the currently active zero-point offset or
the base offset.

Delete

If you want to delete the saved zero-point, press the "Delete" softkey.

2

Setting up the machine 01/2008
2.7 Zero offsets

2
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
2-74 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
2.7.2 Defining zero offsets
Enter work offsets (coarse and fine) directly in the work offset list.
Fine offsets must be set up by the machine manufacturer.
The number of possible zero-point offsets is set in machine data.
Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.




Select the "Work offset" softkey in the "Tools WO" operating
section.
The work offset list appears.
Position the cursor on the coarse or fine offset that you wish to
define.
Enter the desired coordinates for the axis in question You can use
the cursor keys to switch between axes.
-or-

Set X
...
Set Z

Press the "Set X", "Set Y" or "Set Z" softkey to accept the position
value of an axis from the position display for a coarse offset.
-or-

Set
all

Press the "Set all" softkey to accept the position values of all axes
from the position display for a coarse offset.
The new coarse offset is set. The values from the fine offset are
included in the calculation and then deleted.

Delete
WO

Press the "Delete WO" softkey to delete the coarse and fine offset
values at the same time.

Further
axes

With the "Further axes" softkey, you can display another three axes
(2 round axes, 1 linear axis) and determine their offsets. These
additional axes must be activated via machine data.
Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

2

01/2008 Setting up the machine
2.7 Zero offsets

2
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 2-75
2.7.3 Zero offset list
The individual work offsets as well as the total offset are all displayed
in the work offset list. The currently active work offset is displayed on a
gray background. The work offset list also includes the current axis
positions in the machine and workpiece coordinate systems.

If the turning machine has a counter-spindle, a display in the column
completely to the right also shows which zero-point offset for the
machining with a counter-spindle was mirrored. If required, you can
also deselect the mirroring of the zero-point offset.


Work offset list
Base offset

Basic reference The coordinates of the base offset appear.
You can change these here in the list.
Zero offsets

ZPO1 ... ZPO4 The coordinates of the individual zero-point offsets (1st line coarse
offset, 2nd line fine offset) are displayed. You can change these at this
point in the list (see Sec. "Defining zero offsets").
Fine offsets must be set up by the machine manufacturer.
Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.
2

Setting up the machine 01/2008
2.7 Zero offsets

2
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
2-76 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008



You can display more work offsets with the "Page Down" key.
Coordinate
transformations

Program The active coordinates of the "Offset" transformation are displayed as
well as the angle set in the "Rotation" transformation by which the
coordinate system rotates.
You cannot edit these values here.
Scale The active scaling factor for the "Scaling" transformation is displayed
for the respective axis.
You cannot edit these values here.
Mirror The mirror axis that was defined by means of the "Mirroring"
transformation is displayed.
You cannot edit these values here.
Total offset
Total The total offset resulting from the base offset and all active work
offsets and coordinate transformations appears.

Further
axes

With the "Further axes" softkey, you can display another three axes
(2 round axes, 1 linear axis) and determine their offsets. These
additional axes must be activated via machine data.
Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.




Select the "Work offset" softkey in the "Tools WO" operating
section.
The work offset list appears.

2

01/2008 Setting up the machine
2.8 Manual mode

2
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 2-77
2.8 Manual mode
Always use "Machine Manual" mode when you want to set up the
machine for the execution of a program or to carry out simple
traversing movements on the machine.

2.8.1 Selecting a tool and spindle
Where preparatory actions in manual mode are concerned, the tool is
selected and the spindle controlled centrally in a single screen form.
In addition to the main spindle (S1), there is another tool spindle (S2)
for powered tools. Your turning machine can also be equipped with a
counter-spindle (S3).

In manual mode, you can select a tool on the basis of either its name
or its revolver location number. If you enter a number, ShopTurn first
searches for a name and then for a location number. This means that
if you enter "5", for example, and no tool with the name "5" exists, the
tool is selected from location number "5".
Using the revolver location number, therefore, you can swing around
an empty space into the machining position and then comfortably
install a new tool.

Selecting a tool

Jog

Select the "T, S, M" softkey in "Machine Manual" mode.
Enter the name or the number of the tool T.
-or-

Tools
-or-
Call up the tool list by pressing the "Tools" softkey or the "Offset"
key.
-and-
Place the cursor on the required tool in the tool list.
Only one tool can be selected from the revolver.
-and-

Back to
manual

Press the "Back to manual" softkey.
The tool is accepted into the "T, S, M... windows."
Select the tool cutting edge D or enter the number directly in the
field.
2

Setting up the machine 01/2008
2.8 Manual mode

2
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
2-78 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008

Cycle Start


Press the "Cycle Start" key.
The tool is automatically swung into the machining position and the
name of the tool displayed in the tool status bar.
Start spindle

Jog

Select the "T, S, M" softkey in "Machine Manual" mode.
Select the main spindle (S1), the tool spindle (S2), or the counter-
spindle (S3) in the left input field of the spindle parameter.
Enter the desired spindle speed or cutting speed in the right-hand
entry field.
If the machine has a gearbox for the spindle, set the gearing step.
In the field below it, select the direction of spindle rotation:
Spindle rotates clockwise
Spindle rotates counter-clockwise
The M function is displayed next to the field.

Cycle Start

Press the "Cycle Start" key.
The spindle rotates.

Stopping the spindle

Jog

Select the "T, S, M" softkey in "Machine Manual" mode.


In the lower spindle field, select the "Spindle stop" function.

Cycle Start

Press the "Cycle Start" key.
The spindle stops.

Changing the spindle
speed


Jog

Select the "T, S, M" softkey in "Machine Manual" mode.
Specify the desired spindle speed.

Cycle Start

Press the "Cycle Start" key.
The spindle continues rotating at a new speed.

2

01/2008 Setting up the machine
2.8 Manual mode

2
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 2-79

Positioning the spindle

Jog

Select the "T, S, M" softkey in "Machine Manual" mode.
Select the main spindle (S1), the tool spindle (S2), or the counter-
spindle (S3).


In the lower field, select the "Spindle position" function.
In the "Stop-Pos." parameter field, enter the desired spindle
position (in degrees).

Cycle Start

Press the "Cycle Start" key.
A stationary spindle is positioned via the shortest possible route.
A rotating spindle is positioned as it continues to turn in the same
direction.

2.8.2 Traversing axes
You can traverse the axes in manual mode via the Increment and Axis
keys or handwheels. During a traverse initiated from the keyboard, the
selected axis moves by a specified increment with the programmed
setup feedrate.

Depending on the machine manufacturer’s settings, you can
simultaneously traverse the axes.
Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.
The feedrate/rapid traverse override is in effect during traversing.

Traversing the axes
using the keyboard

If required, select a tool (see Sec. "Selecting a tool and spindle").

Jog

Open the extended horizontal softkey bar in "Machine Manual"
mode.


Press the "ShopT. sett." softkey.
Enter the desired value for the "Set-up feedrate" parameter in
mm/min and mm/rev.
As to which of the two feedrates are used during the traversing of the
axes, please see the machine manufacturer’s specifications.

As to which of the two feedrates are used during the traversing of the
axes, please see the machine manufacturer’s specifications.
2

Setting up the machine 01/2008
2.8 Manual mode

2
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
2-80 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008

You can move the axes in fixed or variable increments.

1

10000

Press one of the keys [1], [10], ..., [10000], in order to traverse the
axis in a fixed increment.
The numbers on the keys indicate the traverse path in
micrometers or micro-inches.
Example: For an increment of 100 µm
(= 0.1 mm), press the "100" key.
-or-

Jog

Open the extended horizontal softkey bar in "Machine Manual"
mode.
-and-


Press the "ShopT. sett." softkey.
-and-
Enter the desired value for the "Variable increment" parameter.
Example: For an increment of 500 µm
(= 0.5 mm), enter 500.
-and-

VAR

Press the "Inc Var" key.

+X

Press an axis key in the corresponding direction.
Each time you press an axis key, the axis will traverse by the selected
increment.
If you want to traverse several axes simultaneously, you must press
the corresponding axis keys.
Traversing the axes with
the handwheel
For information on the selection and function of the handwheels,
please see the machine manufacturer’s specifications.

2

01/2008 Setting up the machine
2.8 Manual mode

2
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 2-81
2.8.3 Positioning axes
In manual mode, you can traverse the axes to certain positions, in
order to implement simple machining sequences.
The feedrate/rapid traverse override is in effect during traversing.

If required, select a tool (see Sec. "Selecting a tool and spindle").

Jog

Select the "Position" softkey in "Machine Manual" mode.
Enter the target position for the axis or axes to be traversed.


Rapid
traverse

Specify the desired value for the feedrate F.
-or-
Press the "Rapid traverse" key.

Cycle Start

Press the "Cycle Start" key.
The axis is traversed to the specified target position. If target positions
were specified for several axes, the axes are traversed
simultaneously.

2.8.4 Simple stock removal of workpiece
Some blanks have a smooth or even surface. For example, you can
use the stock removal cycle to turn the face surface of the workpiece
before machining actually takes place.

The prerequisite for the simple stock removal of a workpiece in
manual mode is that a tool with known measurements is in the
machining position (see Sec. "Selecting a Tool and Spindle").
If you want to turn out a collet using the stock removal cycle, you can
program an undercut (XF2) in the corner.

Caution
The tool moves along a direct path to the start point of the stock
removal. First move the tool to a safe position in order to avoid
collisions during the approach.
You cannot use the "Repos" function during simple stock removal.
2

Setting up the machine 01/2008
2.8 Manual mode

2
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
2-82 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008


Jog

Select the "Stock removal" softkey in "Machine Manual" mode.
Enter values for the parameters.


Press the "OK" softkey.
The input screen form closes.

Stock removal in manual mode

Cycle Start


Press the "Cycle Start" key.
The "Stock removal" cycle is started.


You can return to the parameter screen form at any time to check and
correct the inputs.


Press the "Cursor right" key to jump back to the input screen form.

2

01/2008 Setting up the machine
2.8 Manual mode

2
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 2-83
Parameter Description Unit
F, S, V See Section "Creating program blocks".
In the left input field of the parameter spindle, you can choose between the main
spindle (S1) and a counter spindle (S3). In the right input field, enter the spindle
speed or the cutting speed.

Machining
protection
Roughing

Finishing

Position Stock removal position:


Direction Roughing direction (flat or lengthwise) in the coordinate system:

Außen Innen
Z
X
parallel zur X-Achse (Plan) parallel zur Z-Achse (Längs)
Z
X
Z
X
Z
X
Stirnseite
Z
X
Z
X
Z
X
Z
X
Rückseite
parallel to Z axis (longitudinal)
Outside Inside Face Rear
parallel to X axis (plane)



X0 Reference point ∅ (abs) mm
Z0 Reference point (abs) mm
X1 End point ∅ (abs) or end point (inc) mm
Z1 End point (abs or inc) mm
FS Chamfer (n=1...3) alternative to R mm
R Radius (n=1...3) alternative to FS mm
XF2 Undercut (alternative to FS2 or R2) mm
D Infeed depth (inc) – (for roughing only) mm
UX Final machining allowance in X direction (inc) – (for roughing only) mm
UZ Final machining allowance in Z direction (inc) – (for roughing only) mm

2

Setting up the machine 01/2008
2.8 Manual mode

2
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
2-84 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
2.8.5 Settings for manual mode
For manual mode, you can select the central machine functions and
work offsets and set the unit of measurement.
Machine functions (M functions) are functions such as "Close door" or
"Release collet," for example, that were made available as extras by
the machine manufacturer.
Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.
In manual mode, you can display the axis positions and distance-
defining parameters either in "mm" or "inches". However, tool offsets
and zero-point offsets remain in the original unit of measure, in which
the machine was set (see Sec. "Switching the Unit of Measure
(Millimeters/Inches)").


Selecting an M function

Jog

Select the "T, S, M" softkey in "Machine Manual" mode.
Enter the number of the desired M function in the "Misc M fct."
parameter field.
Refer to the machine manufacturer's table for the correlation
between the meaning and number of the function.
Example:

M function Description
... ...
M88 Close door
... ...

"88" must be entered in the input field,
so that the door will be closed.
The M function will be active the next time you press the "Cycle Start"
key.
Selecting work offset

Jog

Select the "T, S, M" softkey in "Machine Manual" mode.
Select the desired zero-point offset.
-or-

Work
offset





Press the "Work offset” softkey.
-and-
Position the cursor on the desired zero-point offset.


2

01/2008 Setting up the machine
2.8 Manual mode

2
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 2-85
Back to
manual

-and-
Press the "Back to manual" softkey.
The work offset will be active the next time you press the "Cycle Start"
key.
Setting the unit of
measurement


Jog

Select the "T, S, M" softkey in "Machine Manual" mode.
Select the unit of measure.
The unit of measurement will be active in manual mode the next time
you press the "Cycle Start" key.

2

Setting up the machine 01/2008
2.9 MDA

2
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
2-86 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
2.9 MDA
In "MDA" mode (Manual Data Automatic mode), you can enter G-code
commands block-by-block and immediately execute them for setting
up the machine.

When executing the G-code commands, you can control the sequence
as follows:
• Executing the program block-by-block
• Testing the program
• Setting the test-run feedrate
(see Sec. "Machining the workpiece")


MDA

Press the "MDA" key.
The MDA editor opens.

MDA

Input the desired G-code commands using the operator’s
keyboard.

Cycle Start


Press the "Cycle Start" key.
The control executes the input blocks.

Delete
MDA Prog.

Depending on the machine manufacturer’s setting, the program
created in MDA mode is automatically deleted after the complete
execution, or you can delete it using the "Delete MDA Prog." softkey.
Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.


2

01/2008 Setting up the machine
2.10 Run times

2
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 2-87
2.10 Run times
ShopTurn provides a status window so that you can have an overview
of the most important machine run times at any time. It shows the
following operating times.
Program Measurement of the program run time starts as soon as you press the
"Cycle Start" key and stops on NC Stop or NC Reset.
If you start a new program, timing starts again from the beginning.
Timing continues if dwell time is active, or during program runs with
program test or dry run feedrate. Upon NC-Stop or feedrate override =
0, the timing stops.
Loaded By means of a program progress display, you can track what
percentage of the called up program has already loaded.
The display only appears when a program or subroutine is called up
via an EXTCALL command or if a program is executed from the hard-
disk.
Workpiece

The current repetition and the programmed number of program
repetitions (e.g. Workpiece: 15/100) are displayed in work-step and G-
code programs. In work-step programs, the number appears, but only
if the number of programmed repetitions N is greater than 1 (see Sec.
"Specifying the Quantity").
After a programmed number of repetitions (100,000), only the current
program repetition is displayed due to lack of space (e.g. workpiece:
15).
If no information is yet available about the current program repetition,
only two dashes are displayed (e.g. Workpiece: - -/100).
After the start of a program, the counter shows 0 for the current
repetition.
For counting workpieces, specify the actual and desired numbers of
workpieces as pre-settings (see Sec. "Parameterize workpiece
counter").
Time The current time is displayed here.
Date Today's date is displayed.
Machine The machine run time displays how much time has elapsed since the
control was last switched on.
Machining The machining time displays the total run time of all programs
executed since the control was last switched on.
Machine statistic The system calculates the actual machine utilization from the timed
machining time and the current machine run time.
The ratio of machining time to machine run time is displayed as a
percentage.
2

Setting up the machine 01/2008
2.10 Run times

2
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
2-88 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008

A setting in the machine data determines which run times are
displayed.

Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.


Jog
or
Auto

Select "Machine Manual" or "Machine Auto" mode.

Run times

Press the "Run times" softkey.
The T,F,S display window turns into the "Run times" window.
Pressing the "Run times" softkey again, takes you back to the T,F,S
display window.




3

01/2008 Machining the workpiece
3
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 3-89
Machining the workpiece

3.1 Starting/stopping machining...................................................................................... 3-90
3.2 Running in a program............................................................................................... 3-93
3.3 Displaying the current program block ....................................................................... 3-94
3.4 Repositioning axes.................................................................................................... 3-95
3.5 Starting execution at a specific program point.......................................................... 3-96
3.6 Controlling the program sequence.......................................................................... 3-101
3.7 Overstoring.............................................................................................................. 3-103
3.8 Testing a program................................................................................................... 3-104
3.9 Correcting a program.............................................................................................. 3-105
3.10 Displaying G and auxiliary functions....................................................................... 3-106
3.11 Simulating machining.............................................................................................. 3-107
3.11.1 Simulating prior to machining the workpiece .......................................................... 3-109
3.11.2 Simultaneous recording prior to machining the workpiece..................................... 3-110
3.11.3 Simultaneous recording during workpiece machining ............................................ 3-111
3.11.4 Changing a blank shape for a G code program...................................................... 3-112
3.11.5 Different workpiece views ....................................................................................... 3-113
3.11.6 Changing the cutout ................................................................................................ 3-117
3.12 Settings for automatic mode ................................................................................... 3-119
3.12.1 Defining a test run feedrate..................................................................................... 3-119
3.12.2 Parameterizing the workpiece counter ................................................................... 3-120




3

Machining the workpiece 01/2008
3.1 Starting/stopping machining

3
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
3-90 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
3.1 Starting/stopping machining
During execution of a program, the workpiece is machined in
accordance with the programming on the machine.
After the program is started in automatic mode, workpiece machining
is performed automatically.

You must load the program in "Machine Auto" mode. Only then can
you start it. You can, however, stop the program at any time and then
resume execution later. Apart from this, you have the option of
graphically displaying the execution on the screen.
Once the program is loaded in "Machine Auto" mode, and "Automatic"
mode is also activated on the machine control panel, you can start the
program whatever your current operating area, even if you are not in
"Machine Auto" mode.
This start option must be enabled in a machine data code.
Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.
The following prerequisites must be met before executing a program:
• The measuring system of the control is synchronized with the
machine.
• A program created in ShopTurn is available.
• The necessary tool offsets and zero offsets have been entered.
• The necessary safety interlocks implemented by the machine
manufacturer are activated.
Sequence programs that you created in earlier versions of ShopTurn
can also be executed in your current version. Once an older sequence
program has been executed in the current version of ShopTurn, it is
treated as a current ShopTurn program.

Select program (total)

-or-


Press the softkey or the "Program" key.
The directory overview is displayed.
Place the cursor on the directory containing the program that you
want to select.
3

01/2008 Machining the workpiece
3.1 Starting/stopping machining

3
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 3-91

-or-
Press the "Input" or "Cursor right" key.
The program overview is displayed.
Place the cursor on the required program.

Execute

Press the "Execute" softkey.
ShopTurn automatically switches to "Machine Auto" mode and loads
the program.

Select program
(by program block)


-or-
Press the softkey or the "Program" key.
The directory overview is displayed.
Place the cursor on the directory containing the program that you
want to select.

-or-


Press the "Input" or "Cursor right" key.
The program overview is displayed.
Place the cursor on the required program.

-or-

Press the "Input" or "Cursor right" key.
The selected program is opened in the "Program" operating area. The
machining plan of the program is displayed.
Place the cursor on the program block at which the program run
must begin.


Press the "Execute" softkey.
ShopTurn automatically switches to "Machine Auto" mode, loads the
program, and carries out a block search to the highlighted program
block (see Section "Starting at a Specific Point in the Program").

3

Machining the workpiece 01/2008
3.1 Starting/stopping machining

3
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
3-92 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008


Example for the program view in "Machine Auto" mode
When you select a program for the first time for execution, that
contains the cycles "Stock removal towards contour" or "Contour
pocket", the individual stock removal steps or solid machining steps
for the contour pocket are calculated automatically. This process may
take several seconds depending on the complexity of the contour.

Starting machining

Cycle Start

Press the "Cycle Start" key.
The program is started and executed from the beginning or from the
highlighted program block.
Stopping machining

Cycle Stop


Press the "Cycle Stop" key.
Machining stops immediately, individual blocks do not finish execution.
At the next start, execution is resumed at the same location where it
stopped.
Canceling machining

Reset

Press the "Reset" key.
Execution of the program is interrupted. On the next start, machining
will start from the beginning.

Starting program
execution from an
operating area
The program is loaded in "Machine Auto" mode and "Automatic" mode
is activated on the machine control panel.

Cycle Start

Press the "Cycle Start" key.
The program is started and executed from the beginning. However,
the interface of the previously selected operating area remains on the
screen.
3

01/2008 Machining the workpiece
3.2 Running in a program

3
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 3-93
3.2 Running in a program
When running-in a program, ShopTurn can interrupt the machining of
the workpiece after each program block, which triggers a movement or
auxiliary function on the machine. In this way, you can control the
machining result block-by-block during the initial run-through of a
program on the machine.

For drilling and pocket milling, the entire machining process and a
plane machining process (respectively) are compiled into one block.
Drilling and pocket machining processes can be split up into single
blocks using the "Single block fine" function. In addition, machining at
this setting is stopped after each individual contour element of a
contour.

Single block Load a program in "Machine Auto" mode (see Section
"Starting/stopping program execution").

Single Block


Press the "Single Block" key.

Cycle Start

Press the "Cycle Start" key.
The first block of the program is executed. Then the machining stops.
In the channel status line, the text “Stop: Block in single block ended"
appears.

Cycle Start

Press the "Cycle Start" key.
The next block of the program is executed. Then the machining stops
again.

Single Block

Press the "Single Block" key again, if the machining is not
supposed to run block-by-block. (The key is then deselected
again.)
If you now press the "Cycle Start" key again, the program is executed
to the end without interruption.

Single block, fine Load a program in "Machine Auto" mode (see Section
"Starting/stopping program execution").


Single
Block Fine



Press the softkeys "Prog. Cntrl.“ and "Single Block Fine," in order
to execute each individual drilling position and each individual
pocket milling movement as its own block.

Single Block

Press the "Single Block" key.
Continue as described under "Single Block".
3

Machining the workpiece 01/2008
3.3 Displaying the current program block

3
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
3-94 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008

3.3 Displaying the current program block
If you want precise information about axis positions and key G
functions during a trial run or execution of the program, you can show
the basic block display.

You can use the basic block display both in test mode and when
machining the workpiece on the machine. All G code commands that
initiate a function on the machine are displayed in the "Basic block"
window for the currently active program block:
• Absolute axis positions
• G functions for the first G group
• Other modal G functions
• Other programmed addresses
• M functions
The basic block display function must be set up by the machine
manufacturer.
Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

¾ Load a program in "Machine Auto" mode (see Section
"Starting/stopping program execution").

Basic Block

¾ Press the "Basic Block" softkey.

Single Block

¾ Press the "Single Block" key if you wish to execute the program
block by block.

Cycle Start

¾ Start program execution.
The precise axis positions, modal G functions, etc., are displayed in
the "Basic block" window for the currently active program block.

3

01/2008 Machining the workpiece
3.4 Repositioning axes

3
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 3-95
3.4 Repositioning axes
After a program interruption in automatic mode (e.g. after a tool
breaks) you can move the tool away from the contour in manual
mode. ShopTurn saves the coordinates of the position at the time of
the interruption and displays the path differences that the axes
traversed in manual mode in the actual value window. This path
difference is called "Repos-offset".
Using the "Repos" function, you can return the tool to the contour in
order to continue executing the program.

You cannot traverse the interrupt position, because it is blocked by the
control system.
The feedrate/rapid traverse override is in effect.

Warning
When repositioning, the axes move with the programmed feedrate and
linear interpolation, i.e. in a straight line from the current position to the
interrupt point. Therefore, you must first move the axes to a safe
position in order to avoid collisions.
If you do not use the "Repos" function and subsequently move the
axes in manual mode after a program interrupt, ShopTurn
automatically moves the axes during the switch to automatic mode
and the subsequent start of the machining process in a straight line
back to the interrupt point.
The following prerequisites must be met when repositioning the axes:
• The program execution was interrupted using "Cycle Stop".
• The axes were moved from the interrupt point to another position in
manual mode.


Repos

Press the "Repos" key.

+X


Select each axis that is to be moved sequentially in the
corresponding direction.
The axes are moved to the interrupt position.

3

Machining the workpiece 01/2008
3.5 Starting execution at a specific program point

3
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
3-96 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
3.5 Starting execution at a specific program point
If you only want to execute a particular section of a program on the
machine, there is no obligation to start execution of the program from
the beginning; you can also start processing from a specific program
block or text string.

The point in the program at which you wish to start machining is called
the "target".
ShopTurn distinguishes between 3 different types of targets:
• ShopTurn cycle
• Misc. ShopTurn block or G-code block
• Any text
For target type "misc. ShopTurn block or G-code block", you can
again specify the target on 3 different paths:
• Position cursor on target block
This is ideal for straightforward programs.
• Choose point of interruption
Machining resumes at the point at which it was interrupted earlier.
This is especially convenient in large programs with multiple
program levels.
• Specify target directly
This option is only possible if you know the precise data (program
level, program name etc.) of the target.
After specifying the target, ShopTurn then calculates the exact start
point for the program execution.
For the target types "ShopTurn cycle" and "any text" the calculation is
always done to the end point of the block. When calculating the start
point of all other ShopTurn blocks and G-code blocks, you can choose
between four variants.
Calculation variants

1. Calculation to contour:
During the block search, ShopTurn performs the same calculations
as for the execution of the program. The program is executed from
the start of the target block, identically to normal program
execution.
2. Calculation to end point:
During the block search, ShopTurn performs the same calculations
as for the execution of the program. The program is executed from
the end of the target block or from the next programmed position of
the target block.
3

01/2008 Machining the workpiece
3.5 Starting execution at a specific program point

3
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 3-97
3. Without calculation
During the block search, ShopTurn does not perform any
calculations, i.e. calculation is skipped until the target block. The
parameters within the control contain the values valid before the
block search.
This option is only available for programs that exclusively comprise
G code blocks.
4. External - without calculation
This method is performed in the same way as calculation to end
point, except that subroutines called via EXTCALL are skipped in
the calculation. In the same way, with G code programs that are
executed entirely by external drives (disk drive/network drive),
calculation is skipped until the target block is reached.
This helps to speed up the calculation process.
Notice
Modal functions included in the part of the program that is not
calculated are not taken into account for the part of the program to be
executed. In other words, with the "Without calculation" and "External
– without calculation" methods, you should choose a target block after
which all the information needed for machining is included.
Specifying a target
directly
In the "Search pointer" screen form, directly specify the target for the
target type "miscellaneous ShopTurn block or G-code block."
Each line of the screen form represents one program level. The actual
number of levels in the program depends on the nesting depth of the
program. Level 1 always corresponds to the main program and all
other levels correspond to subroutines.
You must enter the target in the line of the screen form corresponding
to the program level in which the target is located. For example, if the
target is located in the subroutine called directly from the main
program, you must enter the target in program level 2.
The specified target must always be unambiguous. This means, for
example, that if the subroutine is called in the main program in two
different places, you must also specify a target in program level 1
(main program).
The parameters in the "Search pointer" screen form have the following
meaning:
Number of program level
Program: Program name (the name of the main program is
automatically entered.)
Ext: File extension
P: Continuous counter (if part of a program is repeated
several times, you can specify the repetition number
at which you wish machining to be resumed.)



3

Machining the workpiece 01/2008
3.5 Starting execution at a specific program point

3
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
3-98 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
Line: Parameter is given by ShopTurn
Type: " " Search target is ignored on this level
N no. Block number
Marker Jump marker
Text Character string
Sub-r. Subprogram call
Line Line number
Search target: Point in the program at which machining is to start

Selecting the ShopTurn
cycle

Load a program in "Machine Auto" mode (see Section
"Starting/stopping program execution").
Position the cursor on the desired target block.


Start
search run



Press the "Block search" and "Start search run" softkeys.
Where chained program blocks have several technology blocks,
select the desired technology block in the "Search run" window.
The prompt does not appear in the case of single program blocks.


Press the "Accept" softkey.
For chained program blocks, enter the number for the desired
starting position.
The prompt does not appear in the case of single program blocks.
During the block search run on the position pattern, the skipped
positions are not counted.


Press the "Accept" softkey.

Cycle Start

Press the "Cycle Start" key.
ShopTurn sets all the necessary parameters.

Cycle Start

Press the "Cycle Start" key again.
The new starting position is approached. The workpiece is then
machined from the beginning of the target block.

Reset


You can abort the search by pressing the "Reset" key.

3

01/2008 Machining the workpiece
3.5 Starting execution at a specific program point

3
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 3-99
Selecting the misc.
ShopTurn block or
G-code block
Position cursor on target block
Load a program in "Machine Auto" mode (see Section
"Starting/stopping program execution").
Position the cursor on the desired target block.


Press the "Block search" softkey.

To
contour
...
External -
without cal.


Select a calculation technique.

Cycle Start

Press the "Cycle Start" key.
ShopTurn sets all the necessary parameters.

Cycle Start

Press the "Cycle Start" key again.
The new starting position is approached. The program executes from
the beginning or end of the target block, depending on the calculation
technique.

Reset

You can abort the search by pressing the "Reset" key.

Select point of interruption
Program execution must have been interrupted by pressing the
"Reset" key. (ShopTurn automatically remembers this point of
interruption)
Switch back to "Machine Auto" mode.


Search
pointer

Press the "Block search" and "Search pointer" softkeys.

Interrupt
point

Press the "Interrupt point" softkey.
ShopTurn inserts the saved interrupt point as a target.

To
contour
...
External -
without cal.


Select a calculation technique.

Cycle Start

Press the "Cycle Start" key.
ShopTurn sets all the necessary parameters.

Cycle Start

Press the "Cycle Start" key again.
The new starting position is approached. The program executes from
the beginning or end of the target block, depending on the calculation
technique.

Reset

You can abort the search by pressing the "Reset" key.

3

Machining the workpiece 01/2008
3.5 Starting execution at a specific program point

3
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
3-100 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
Specify target directly
Load a program in "Machine Auto" mode (see Section
"Starting/stopping program execution").


Search
pointer

Press the "Block search" and "Search pointer" softkeys.
Specify the desired target.

To
contour
...
External -
without cal.


Select a calculation technique.

Cycle Start

Press the "Cycle Start" key.
ShopTurn sets all the necessary parameters.

Cycle Start

Press the "Cycle Start" key again.
The new starting position is approached. The program executes from
the beginning or end of the target block, depending on the calculation
technique.

Reset

You can abort the search by pressing the "Reset" key.

Searching for any text
Load a program in "Machine Auto" mode (see Section
"Starting/stopping program execution").


Search

Press the "Block search" and "Search" softkeys.


Enter the text string that you want to locate.
Select whether the search is to commence at the start of the
program or the current cursor position.

Search

Press the "Search" softkey.
The program block that contains the text string is marked.

Continue
search

Press the "Continue search" softkey, if you want to continue the
search.


Start
search run



Press the "Abort" and "Start search run" softkeys.


Where chained program blocks have several technology blocks,
select the desired technology block in the "Search run" window
and press the "Accept" softkey.
The prompt does not appear in the case of single program blocks.


For chained program blocks, enter the number for the desired
starting position and press the "Accept" softkey.
The prompt does not appear in the case of single program blocks.
3

01/2008 Machining the workpiece
3.6 Controlling the program sequence

3
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 3-101

Cycle Start

¾ Press the "Cycle Start" key.
ShopTurn sets all the necessary parameters.

Cycle Start

¾ Press the "Cycle Start" key again.
The new starting position is approached. The workpiece is then
machined from the beginning of the target block.

Reset

You can abort the search by pressing the "Reset" key.

3.6 Controlling the program sequence
If you want to check previously obtained results while machining a
workpiece, you can have the machining stop at specially marked
points (programmed stop). Within the sequence program, the stop
occurs at the “safety distance” position.
Conversely, if you do not want to execute certain machining steps
programmed in G codes on every program run, you can mark these
blocks accordingly (skip G code blocks). This is not possible with
sequence blocks.
You can also choose to allow DRF offsets, i.e. offsets with the
handwheel, during machining. This function must be set up by the
machine manufacturer.
Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

Programmed stop ¾ Load a program in "Machine Auto" mode (see Section
"Starting/stopping program execution").


¾ Press the "Prog. Cntrl." softkey.

Program.
stop

¾ Press the "Program. stop" softkey.

Cycle Start

¾ Press the "Cycle Start" key.
Execution of the program starts. The program stops at each block for
which the G-code command "M01" was programmed (see Sec. "G-
code in the sequence program").

Cycle Start

¾ Press the "Cycle Start" key again each time.
Execution of the program is continued.

Program.
stop

¾ Press the "Program. stop" softkey again if you want the program
to be executed without a programmed stop. (The softkey is
deactivated again.)



3

Machining the workpiece 01/2008
3.6 Controlling the program sequence

3
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
3-102 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
Skipping G code blocks Load a program in "Machine Auto" mode (see the section titled
"Starting/stopping program execution").


Press the "Prog. Cntrl." softkey.

Skip

Press the "Skip" softkey.

Cycle Start

Press the "Cycle Start" key.
Execution of the program starts. G code blocks with the "/" character
(slash) in front of the block number are not executed.

Skip

Press the "Skip" softkey again if you want the marked G code
blocks to be executed again during the next run. (The softkey is
deactivated again.)

Allowing DRF offset Load a program in "Machine Auto" mode (see Section
"Starting/stopping program execution").


Press the "Prog. Cntrl." softkey.
DRF
offset

Press the "DRF offset" softkey.

Cycle Start

Press the "Cycle Start" key.
Execution of the program starts. Offsets with the handwheel affect the
machining process directly.
DRF
offset

Press the "DRF offset" softkey again if you no longer want to allow
handwheel offsets during machining. (The softkey is deactivated
again.)

3

01/2008 Machining the workpiece
3.7 Overstoring

3
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 3-103
3.7 Overstoring
In "Machine Auto" mode, you can overstore technological parameters
(auxiliary functions, programmable instructions, etc.) in the work
storage unit of the NCK. You can also enter and execute any NC
block.
Overstore does not alter the programs stored in the part program
memory.

Overstore with single
block

¾ Load a program in "Machine Auto" operating mode (see Section
"Selecting a program for execution").

Single Block

¾ Press the "Single Block" key to execute the program block by
block.
The program automatically stops at the next block boundary.


¾ Press the "Overstore" softkey.
The "Overstore" window is opened.
¾ Enter the NC blocks to be processed.

Cycle Start

¾ Press the "Cycle Start" key.
The blocks you have entered are stored. You can observe execution
in the "Overstore" window.
After "Overstore", a subroutine with the content REPOSA, which you
can observe, is executed.

Overstore without single
block

¾ Load a program in "Machine Auto" operating mode (see Section
"Selecting a program for execution").

Cycle Stop

¾ Press the "Cycle Stop" key.


¾ Press the "Overstore" softkey.
The "Overstore" window is opened.
¾ Enter the NC blocks to be processed.

Cycle Start

¾ Press the "Cycle Start" key.
3

Machining the workpiece 01/2008
3.8 Testing a program

3
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
3-104 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
The blocks you have entered are stored. You can observe execution
of the blocks in the "Overstore" window.
After the entered blocks have been executed, you can append blocks
again.

Stopping overstore


Press the "Back" key to exit "Overstore".
The window is closed.
You can switch modes now.

Cycle Start

After you have pressed "Cycle Start" again, the selected program
continues before overstore.

3.8 Testing a program
To prevent incorrect machining of the workpiece during the first pass
of the program on the machine, first test the program without moving
the machine axes.

During testing, ShopTurn checks the program for the following
inadmissible conditions:
• Geometric incompatibility
• Missing data
• Non-executable instruction sequences and jumps
• Violation of working area
ShopTurn automatically detects syntax errors when it is loading a
program in "Machine Auto" mode.
Whether ShopTurn executes auxiliary functions (M and H functions)
during the program test is dependent upon the machine
manufacturer’s settings.
Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

The following functions can be used during the program test:
• Stop execution with “Programmed Stop” (see Section “Controlling
the program run”)
• Graphical display on the screen (see Section "Simultaneous
recording before machining a workpiece")
3

01/2008 Machining the workpiece
3.9 Correcting a program

3
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 3-105

Load a program in "Machine Auto" mode (see Section
"Starting/stopping program execution").


Press the "Prog. Cntrl." softkey.

Program
test

Press the "Program test" softkey.

Cycle Start

Press the "Cycle Start" key.
The program is tested without traversing of the machine axes.

Program
test

Press the "Program test" softkey again to deactivate test mode on
completion of the program. (The softkey is deactivated again.)

3.9 Correcting a program
As soon as ShopTurn detects a syntax error while loading a program
in "Machine Auto" mode, the error is displayed in the alarm line. You
can then correct the program in the program editor.

Depending on whether the program is in the NC stop or reset state
after being interrupted by ShopTurn, you can make various
corrections.
• NC Stop status:
You can only modify blocks that have not yet been executed on the
machine or read by the NCK.
• Reset status:
You can modify all blocks.



Press the "Prog. corr.” softkey
The program appears in the "Program" operating area and the
erroneous block is highlighted.


Press the "Right cursor" key.
The parameter screen form is displayed.
Input the corrections.


Press the "Accept" softkey.
The correction is applied to the current program.


Press the "Execute" softkey.
The program is reloaded in "Machine Auto" mode and you can start
the machining of the workpiece.

3

Machining the workpiece 01/2008
3.10 Displaying G and auxiliary functions

3
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
3-106 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
3.10 Displaying G and auxiliary functions
While the workpiece is being machined, if you want to know, for
example, whether the tool tip radius compensation is currently active
or which unit of measurement is being used, you can activate display
of the G functions or auxiliary functions.

16 different G groups are displayed under "G function". Within a G-
group, only the G functions that are currently active in the NCK
appear. In addition, you can see the currently active transformation in
the top line of the window.
As an alternative, all G groups with all associated G functions are
listed in "All G Func.".
Auxiliary functions include M and H functions preprogrammed by the
machine manufacturer, which pass parameters to the PLC to trigger
reactions defined by the manufacturer.
Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.
A maximum of five M functions and three H functions are displayed.
You can have the G functions that are currently active in the NCK
displayed during execution of a sequence program too, since the
ShopTurn functions are internally translated into G-code.


G function

Press the "G function" softkey in "Machine Manual" or "Machine
Auto" mode.
Instead of parameters T, F and S, the currently active G functions
within a G group will be displayed.
If you press the "G function" softkey again, the "T, F, S" status display
reappears.
-or-

All G
func.

Press the "All G func." softkey.
Instead of parameters T, F and S, all G groups with G functions are
now listed. If you select the "All G func." softkey again, the "T, F, S"
status display reappears.
-or-

Auxiliary
function

Press the "Auxiliary function" softkey.
Instead of parameters T, F and S, the currently active auxiliary
functions will be displayed. If you press the "Auxiliary function" softkey
again, the "T, F, S" status display reappears.

3

01/2008 Machining the workpiece
3.11 Simulating machining

3
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 3-107
3.11 Simulating machining
You can graphically display the execution of the program on the
screen, in order to easily control the programming result without
moving the machine axes. In this way, you can detect incorrectly
programmed machining steps early on and prevent erroneous
machining of the workpiece.
In addition, you can conveniently track the machining of the workpiece
on the machine via the graphical display, if the view of the working
area is blocked by coolant, for example.

In this graphical display, ShopTurn shows the workpiece, the tools, the
counterspindle and the headstock on the screen in the correct
proportions, i.e. the programmed blank dimensions from the program
header are used for the workpiece and the tools are displayed with
various symbols, depending on the the tool type and size. For
displaying the counter spindle and headstock, the dimensions are
taken from the “spindle” input screen form (see Sec. "Spindles").
For the graphical display of G-code programs, ShopTurn displays a
pre-defined blank shape, which you can modify as you wish.
Finished-part contour If you have programmed turning machining processes in the main
program, ShopTurn displays the corresponding finished-part contour
for them at the start of the graphical display. Thus, you can easily
compare the current contour with the finished-part contour, and also
detect where possible residual material might remain when machining.
Display variants You can choose between three variants of graphical display:
• Simulation before machining the workpiece
Before machining the workpiece on the machine, you can
graphically display the execution of the program in a quick run-
through. The machine axes do not move during this.
• Simultaneous recording before machining the workpiece
Before machining the workpiece on the machine, you can
graphically display the execution of the program with a test run
feedrate. The machine axes do not move during this. In contrast to
the simulation, you can use the functions for program control, i.e.
you can stop the graphical execution or have it run block-by-block.
• Simultaneous recording during machining of the workpiece
While the program is being executed on the machine, you can
track the machining of the workpiece on the screen as well.
3

Machining the workpiece 01/2008
3.11 Simulating machining

3
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
3-108 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
Views For all three variants, the following views are available:






• 3-window view
• Side view
• Face view
• Volume model
The traverse paths for the tools are shown in color:
Red line = tool is moving at rapid traverse
Green line = tool is moving at machining feedrate
In all views, a clock is displayed during graphical processing. The
displayed machining time (in hours/minutes/seconds) indicates the
approximate time that would actually be required to execute the
machining program on the machine (incl. tool change).
If a program is interrupted during simultaneous recording, the clock
stops.
In addition, the current axis coordinates, the override, and the program
block currently being executed are also displayed.
The active tool with the cutting edge number and feedrate are also
displayed in the simulation.
Transformations Transformations are displayed differently during simulation and
simultaneous recording:
• Coordinate transformations (translation, scaling, …) are displayed
as programmed.
• In the graphical display, zero-point offsets (G54, ...) only lead to
the offsetting of the zero-point in the Z direction.
Counter spindle If you open or close the collet of the main spindle or counter-spindle
during programming via M functions, ShopTurn can only display this
graphically if the M functions are assigned via machine data cycles.
Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

3

01/2008 Machining the workpiece
3.11 Simulating machining

3
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 3-109
3.11.1 Simulating prior to machining the workpiece
Before machining the workpiece on the machine, you can graphically
display the execution of the program in a quick run-through on the
screen in order to easily monitor the result of the programming.

Feedrate override is also active during simulation.
0%: The simulation stops.
≥ 100%: The program is executed as fast as possible.
Feedrate override for simulation must be activated via a machine data
code.
Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

Starting the simulation

-or-
¾ Press the softkey or the "Program" key.
The directory overview is displayed.
¾ Place the cursor on the directory in which you would like to
simulate a program.

-or-
¾ Press the "Input" or "Cursor right" key.
The program overview is displayed.
¾ Place the cursor on the program that you would like to simulate.

-or-
¾ Press the "Input" or "Cursor Right" key.
The selected program is displayed in the "Program" operating area.


¾ Press the "Simulation" softkey.
Program processing will be graphically displayed on the screen. The
machine axes do not move during this.

Details

Single
Block

¾ Press the "Details" and "Single Block" softkeys if you wish to
process the program block by block.
3

Machining the workpiece 01/2008
3.11 Simulating machining

3
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
3-110 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
Stop simulation


Press the "Stop" softkey.
Simulation is stopped.
Aborting simulation


Press the "Reset" softkey.
Simulation is aborted and the unmachined blank shape of the
workpiece is displayed again.
Resuming simulation


Press "Start" softkey.
Simulation is resumed.
End simulation

End

Press the "End" softkey.
The machining plan or programming graphic for the program is
displayed again.


3.11.2 Simultaneous recording prior to machining the workpiece
Before machining the workpiece on the machine, you can graphically
display the execution of the program on the screen in order to easily
monitor the result of the programming.
Simultaneous recording is a software option.

You can replace the programmed feedrate with a test-run feedrate in
order to control the execution speed (see Sec. "Establishing the test-
run feedrate").

In addition, you can interrupt or control the graphical execution, i.e.
the functions for program control such as "NC Stop," "Single Block,"
"Feedrate override," etc. are in effect.
If you would like to view the current program blocks again instead of
the graphical display, you can switch to the program view.
This function must be set-up via machine data.
Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

3

01/2008 Machining the workpiece
3.11 Simulating machining

3
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 3-111
Load a program in "Machine Auto" mode (see Section
"Starting/stopping program execution").


Program
test

Press the "Prog. Cntrl." and "Program test" softkeys.

Dry run
feedrate

Press the "Dry run feedrate" softkey, if the programmed feedrate
speed is to be replaced by a test-run speed.


Press the "Real-sim." softkey.

Cycle Start

Press the "Cycle Start" key.
Program processing will be graphically displayed on the screen. The
machine’s axes do not move.

Dry run
feedrate

Press the "Dry run feedrate" softkey again, if the parallel drawing
is to run in the programmed feedrate speed. (The softkey is
deactivated again.)

Program
view

Press the "Program view" softkey if you would like to switch away
from the graphical display into the program view of the "Machine
Auto" mode.
Recording of the graphical data continues in the background.


Press one of the 4 softkeys for the graphical views, if you would
like to return to the graphical display.



3.11.3 Simultaneous recording during workpiece machining
If the view of the work space is blocked by coolant, for example, while
the workpiece is being machined, you can also track the program
processing on the screen.
Simultaneous recording is a software option.

You can switch on the function for simultaneous recording of the
machining process even if workpiece machining has already begun to
take place on the machine.
This function must be set-up via machine data.
Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

3

Machining the workpiece 01/2008
3.11 Simulating machining

3
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
3-112 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
Load a program in "Machine Auto" mode (see Section
"Starting/stopping program execution").


Press the "Real-sim." softkey.

Cycle Start

Press the "Cycle Start" key.
Workpiece machining is started and graphically displayed on the
screen.

3.11.4 Changing a blank shape for a G code program
G-code programs typically do not contain a description of the shape of
the blank. For the graphical display, ShopTurn therefore uses a pre-
defined shape for the blank. You can modify it as you wish.


-or-

Select "Simulation" or "Real-sim."


Details
>

Press the softkeys "Side View" and "Details".

Settings

Press the "Settings" softkey.
Select the shape of the blank (cylinder, tube, square, or N-angle).
Input the desired dimensions.


Press the "Back" softkey.
During the next graphical display of a G-code program, the input
dimensions are taken into consideration.


3

01/2008 Machining the workpiece
3.11 Simulating machining

3
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 3-113
3.11.5 Different workpiece views
In the graphical display, you can choose between different views so
that you constantly have the best view of the current workpiece
machining, or in order to display details or the overall view of the
finished workpiece.

The following views are available:
• Side view
The display shows the workpiece, partly in the longitudinal view,
and partly the peripheral surface.
• Face view
The workpiece is displayed in cross-section. The face of the
workpiece is displayed by default. The viewing direction is always
from the front to the cutting surface even if machining is to be
performed from behind or from the back side.
• Volume model
The volume model is a 3-D display of the workpiece that does not
appear while the simulation is running but only if you stop the
simulation.
The volume model is a software option.

• 3-window view
The 3-window view shows the side and front view and, on the PCU
50.3, a volume model. A cut-away change occurs synchronously
for the side and front view. The cut-away of the volume model
cannot be changed here.
In the volume model, ShopTurn only displays drilling and milling
work continuously. The turning work is only updated when you
change to drilling or milling work.
You can still move the displayed cutout in any view.
If there is no longer sufficient storage space for the graphical display,
ShopTurn fades out the blank. You can still see the side and front
view as dashed-line graphics.


3

Machining the workpiece 01/2008
3.11 Simulating machining

3
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
3-114 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
Side view


Press the "side view" softkey.

Side view

You can find information on changing the cut-away in Sec. "Changing
the cut-away".
3

01/2008 Machining the workpiece
3.11 Simulating machining

3
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 3-115
Face view


Press the "Face view” softkey.

Face view


Details
>

Press the "Details" softkey, if you want to pan the cross-section in
the Z direction.
-and-

Z Cut
+
or
Press the "Z Cut +" or "Page Up" key in order to pan the cross-
section in a positive Z direction.
-or-

Z Cut
-
or
Press the "Z Cut -" or "Page Down" key in order to pan the cross-
section in a negative Z direction.
You can find further information on changing the cut-away in
Sec. "Changing the cut-away".
3

Machining the workpiece 01/2008
3.11 Simulating machining

3
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
3-116 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
Volume model


¾ Press the "Volume model” softkey.

Volume model

Displaying the volume model


¾ Press the "Stop" softkey if you would like to display the volume
model at the current point in the machining.


¾ Press the "Side view" and "Start" softkeys if you would like to
continue the simulation.

Changing the view

Details
>

¾ Press the "Details" softkey if you want to change the view.
-and-

or

¾ Press the "View Å" or "View Æ" softkey to rotate the workpiece
about the X axis.
-or-


¾ Press the "View 3" softkey to rotate the workpiece about the
Z axis.
-or-

Cut

¾ Press the "Cut" softkey to cut up the workpiece.
-and-

Cut

¾ Press the "Cut" softkey again if the volume model is to be
displayed in full again.

You can find further information on changing the cut-away in
Sec. "Changing the cut-away".

3

01/2008 Machining the workpiece
3.11 Simulating machining

3
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 3-117
3-window view


¾ Press the "3-window view” softkey.


3-window view

You can find information on changing the cut-away in Sec. "Changing
the cut-away".

3.11.6 Changing the cutout
If you would like to pan, enlarge, or decrease the size of the cut-away
on the graphical display, e.g. to view details or display the complete
workpiece, use the Zoom or magnifying glass.

Increase or decrease the size of the existing cut-away from the center
using the zoom function. Then you can pan the new cut-away.
Using the magnifying glass, you can first define the cut-away and then
increase or decrease its size.
The zoom/magnifying settings are program-specific, i.e. the settings
are retained if you change the cut-away and switch to the work plan
and then back to the graphics, for example. If you then simulate the
new program, ShopTurn will use the default settings of zoom and the
magnifying glass.
But you can also return to the default display of the workpiece from a
changed cut-away.
In addition, you can delete the previously drawn machining lines in the
graphics in order to get a clear display.

3

Machining the workpiece 01/2008
3.11 Simulating machining

3
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
3-118 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008

Details
>

¾ Press the "Details" softkey.
Original cut-away

Back to
original


¾ Press the "Back to original" softkey to restore the original size of
the viewport.
The workpiece on the main spindle or counter-spindle appears.

Zoom

Zoom
+
or
+

¾ Press the "Zoom +" or "+" softkey if you would like to enlarge the
cut-away.
-or-

Zoom
-
or
¾ Press the "Zoom -" or "-" softkey if you would like to decrease the
size of the cut-away.
-or-


¾ Press a cursor key if you want to pan the cut-away up, down, left,
or right.
The new cut-away appears.

Magnifying glass
Magnifying
glass

¾ Press the "Magnifying glass” softkey.
A magnifying glass in the shape of a rectangular frame appears.


¾ Press a cursor key if you want to move the magnifying glass up,
down, left, or right.

Magnifying
glass +

¾ Press the "Magnifying glass +" softkey if you want to enlarge the
cut-away that you selected with the magnifying glass.
-or-

Magnifying
glass -

¾ Press the "Magnifying glass -" softkey if you want to decrease the
size of the cut-away that you selected with the magnifying glass.

Magnifying
glass zoom

¾ Press the "Magnifying glass zoom” softkey.
The new cut-away appears.

Deleting machining lines



¾ Press the "Del" key.
The previous machining lines are deleted.

3

01/2008 Machining the workpiece
3.12 Settings for automatic mode

3
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 3-119
3.12 Settings for automatic mode

For automatic mode, configure the pre-settings for the following
functions:
• Program sequence under Automatic
For graphical display of a program, the feedrate of the test-run can
be specified.
• Workpiece counter
For counting workpieces in G-code programs, counters are
available, which display the number of needed workpieces as well
as the total number of workpieces produced.

3.12.1 Defining a test run feedrate

Before machining a workpiece, test the program without moving the
machine axes. For early detection of programming errors, the parallel
drawing function is available to you. For this, you can use your own
preset test-run feedrate (see Section "Parallel drawing before
machining the workpiece").
The feedrate can be changed while the operation is running.


Auto

Switch to "Machine Auto" mode in the expanded horizontal
softkey bar.


Press the "ShopT. sett." softkey.
In "Test-run feedrate", enter the desired test-run speed.

3

Machining the workpiece 01/2008
3.12 Settings for automatic mode

3
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
3-120 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
3.12.2 Parameterizing the workpiece counter
With the aid of the "ShopTurn Settings," you can control the counter
activation and the time of the zeroing.
The display of the needed and currently machined workpieces is
displayed in the machine run-time window (see Section "Run-times").

Number of workpieces

Auto

Switch to "Machine Auto" mode in the expanded horizontal softkey
bar.


Press the "ShopT. sett." softkey.
Enter the number of workpieces needed in the "Desired
workpieces" field.
The number of workpieces finished since the program started is
displayed in the "Actual workpieces" field.
After the defined number of workpieces is reached, the current
workpieces display is automatically reset to zero.

The choice of counter depends on the machine data setting.

Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

The desired and actual numbers for the workpiece counter can also
be changed during program execution.



4

01/2008 Creating a ShopTurn program
4
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 4-121
Creating a ShopTurn program

4.1 Program structure ................................................................................................... 4-122
4.2 Fundamentals ......................................................................................................... 4-124
4.2.1 Machining planes .................................................................................................... 4-124
4.2.2 Machining cycle approach and retraction ............................................................... 4-126
4.2.3 Absolute and incremental dimensions .................................................................... 4-128
4.2.4 Polar coordinates .................................................................................................... 4-130
4.2.5 Pocket calculator..................................................................................................... 4-131
4.2.6 Adjustments ............................................................................................................ 4-133
4.3 Sequence program ................................................................................................. 4-134
4.3.1 Overview................................................................................................................. 4-134
4.3.2 Creating a new program......................................................................................... 4-136
4.3.3 Creating program blocks......................................................................................... 4-140
4.3.4 Changing program blocks....................................................................................... 4-144
4.3.5 Program editor ........................................................................................................ 4-145
4.3.6 Specifying a quantity............................................................................................... 4-148




4

Creating a ShopTurn program 01/2008
4.1 Program structure

4
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
4-122 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
4.1 Program structure
A sequence program is divided into three sub-areas:
• Program header
• Program blocks
• End of program
These sub-areas form a machining plan.

Program
header
Program
end
Program
blocks

Program structure

Program header

The program header contains parameters that affect the entire
program, such as blank dimensions or retraction planes.
Program blocks

You determine the individual machining steps in the program blocks.
In doing this, you specify the technology data and positions, among
other things.

Technology data and
positions
Plain text, e.g. type
of machining
Block number allocated
by control
Symbol of machining cycle

Program block

Linked program blocks

For the "Contour turning", "Contour milling", "Milling", and "Drilling"
functions, program the technology blocks and contours or positioning
blocks separately. These program blocks are automatically linked by
the controller and connected by brackets in the work plan.
In the technology blocks, specify how and in what form the machining
should take place, e.g. centering first, and then drilling. In the
positioning blocks, determine the positions for the drilling or milling
machining, e.g. position the drill-holes in a full circle on the front
surface.
4

01/2008 Creating a ShopTurn program
4.1 Program structure

4
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 4-123

Technology blocks
Positioning blocks

Technology block and positioning block

Technology blocks
Contours

Contour and technology block
End of program

End of program signals to the machine that the machining of the
workpiece has ended. In addition, you can specify the number of
workpieces that you would like to machine.

4

Creating a ShopTurn program 01/2008
4.2 Fundamentals

4
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
4-124 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
4.2 Fundamentals
4.2.1 Machining planes
A workpiece can be machined on different planes. Two coordinate
axes define a machining plane. On turning machines with X, Z, and C
axes, three planes are available:
• Turning
• Face
• Peripheral
The face and peripheral machining planes require the CNC-ISO
functions "Front surface machining" (Transmit) and "Cylindrical
peripheral transformation" (Tracyl) to be set up.
These functions are a software option.

For turning machines with an additional Y axis, the machining planes
are expanded to include two more planes:
• Face Y
• Peripheral Y
Therefore, the face and peripheral planes are called Face C and
Peripheral C.
If the Y axis is an oblique axis (i.e. the axis is not perpendicular to the
others), you can also select the "Face Y" and "Peripheral Y"
machining planes and program the traversing movements in Cartesian
coordinates. The control system then automatically transforms the
programmed traversing movements of the Cartesian coordinate
system into the traversing movements of the oblique axis.
For the transformation of the programmed traversing movements,
ShopTurn needs the CNC-ISO function "Oblique Axis" (Traang).
This function is a software option.

The machining plane selection is integrated into the parameter screen
forms of the individual drilling and milling cycles. For turning cycles
and for "axial drilling" and "axial threads", ShopTurn automatically
selects the Turning plane. For the "straight" and "circle" functions, you
must specify the machining plane separately.
The settings for the machining plane always act modally, i.e. until you
select another plane.
4

01/2008 Creating a ShopTurn program
4.2 Fundamentals

4
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 4-125
The machining planes are defined as follows:

Z
X
Y
F
a
c
e
T
u
r
n
i
n
g
P
e
r
i
p
h
e
r
a
l


s
u
r
f
a
c
e


Machining planes
Turning

The Turning machining plane corresponds to the Z/X plane (G18).
Face/Face C

The Face/Face C machining plane corresponds to the X/Y plane
(G17).
For machines without a Y axis, however, the tools can only move in
the Z/X plane. ShopTurn therefore automatically transforms the X/Y
coordinates you entered into a movement in the X and C axis.
You can use face surface machining with a C axis for drilling and
milling if, for instance, you want to mill a pocket on the face surface.
You can choose between the forward or rear face surface for this
purpose.
Peripheral/Peripheral C

The Peripheral/Peripheral C machining plane corresponds to the Y/Z
plane (G19). For machines without a Y axis, however, the tools can
only move in the Z/X plane. ShopTurn therefore automatically
transforms the Y/Z coordinates you entered into a movement in the C
and Z axis.
You can use peripheral surface machining with a C axis for drilling and
milling if, for instance, you want to mill a slot with constant depth on
the peripheral surface. You can choose between the inner or outer
surface for this purpose.
Face Y

The Face Y machining plane corresponds to the X/Y plane (G17).
You can use the face surface machining with a Y axis for drilling and
milling if, for instance, you want to mill a pocket on the front surface.
You can choose between the forward or rear face surface for this
purpose.
4

Creating a ShopTurn program 01/2008
4.2 Fundamentals

4
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
4-126 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
Peripheral Y

The Peripheral Y machining plane corresponds to the Y/Z plane
(G19).
You can use peripheral surface machining with a Y axis for drilling and
milling if, for instance, you want to mill a pocket with a level bottom on
the peripheral or create drill holes that do not point to the center. You
can choose between the inner or outer surface for this purpose.

4.2.2 Machining cycle approach and retraction
Approaching and retracting during the machining cycle always follows
the same pattern if you have not defined a special approach/retraction
cycle (see Sec. "Programming the approach/retraction cycle"). If the
machine has a tailstock, you can also take this into consideration
when traversing.
The retraction for a cycle ends at the safety distance. Only the
subsequent cycle moves to the retraction plane. This allows the use of
the special approach/retraction cycle (see Sec. "Programming the
approach/retraction cycle").
When selecting the traversing paths, ShopTurn always takes the tool
tip into account; i.e. the elongation of the tool is not taken into
consideration. Therefore, you should ensure that the retraction planes
are an appropriate distance away from the workpiece.


Safety distance
Retract plane
Tool change point
Rapid traverse
Machining feedrate

Machining cycle approach/return
• The tool travels in rapid traverse along the shortest path from the
tool change point to the retraction plane, which runs parallel to the
machining plane.
• After this, the tool travels in rapid traverse to the safety distance.
• Following this, the workpiece is machined at the programmed
machining feedrate.
• After machining, the tool retracts vertically in rapid traverse to the
safety distance.
• The tool then continues to travel vertically in rapid traverse to the
retraction plane.
4

01/2008 Creating a ShopTurn program
4.2 Fundamentals

4
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 4-127
• From there, the tool travels in rapid traverse along the shortest
path to the tool change point.
If the tool does not need to be changed between two machining
processes, the tool travels from the retraction plane to the next
machining cycle.
The spindle (main, tool, or counter-spindle) begins to rotate
immediately after the tool change.
You define the tool change point, the retraction plane, and the safety
distance in the program header (see Sec. "Creating a new program").
Taking the tailstock into
consideration
Safety distance
Retract plane
Tool change point
Rapid traverse
Machining feedrate
XR


Approach/return allowing for a tailstock
• The tool travels in rapid traverse from the tool change point along
the shortest path to the protective plane XR from the tailstock.
• After this, the tool moves in rapid traverse on the retraction plane in
the X direction.
• After this, the tool travels in rapid traverse to the safety distance.
• Following this, the workpiece is machined at the programmed
machining feedrate.
• After machining, the tool retracts vertically in rapid traverse to the
safety distance.
• The tool then continues to travel vertically in rapid traverse to the
retraction plane.
• After this, the tool travels in the direction X to the protective plane
XR from the tailstock.
• From there, the tool travels in rapid traverse along the shortest
path to the tool change point.
If the tool does not need to be changed between two machining
processes, the tool travels from the retraction plane to the next
machining cycle.
You define the tool change point, the retraction plane, the safety
distance, and the protective area for the tailstock in the program
header (see Sec. "Creating a new program").

4

Creating a ShopTurn program 01/2008
4.2 Fundamentals

4
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
4-128 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
4.2.3 Absolute and incremental dimensions
When creating a sequence program, you can input positions in
absolute or incremental dimensions, depending on how the workpiece
drawing is scaled.
You can also use a combination of absolute and incremental
dimensions, i.e. one coordinate as an absolute dimension and the
other as an incremental dimension.

For the plan axis (the X axis, in this case), in the machine data it is
established whether the diameter or radius is programmed in absolute
or incremental dimensions.

Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.
Absolute dimensions
(ABS)
With absolute dimensions, all position specifications refer to the zero
point of the active coordinate system.

Z
X
7.5
15
25
35
P4
P3 P2
P1
Ø

2
5
Ø

4
0
Ø

6
0


Absolute dimensions
The position specifications for the points P1 to P4 in absolute
dimensions refer to the zero-point:
P1: X25 Z-7.5
P2: X40 Z-15
P3: X40 Z-25
P4: X60 Z-35

4

01/2008 Creating a ShopTurn program
4.2 Fundamentals

4
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 4-129
Incremental dimensions
(INC)

With incremental dimensions (also referred to as sequential
dimensions) a position specification refers to the previously
programmed point, i.e. the input value corresponds to the path to be
traversed. As a rule, the plus/minus sign does not matter when
entering the incremental value. ShopTurn only evaluates the amount
of the increment. For some parameters, the plus/minus sign specifies
the traversing direction. These exceptions are identified in the
parameter table of the individual functions.

Z
X
7.5 10
P4
P3 P2
P1
7.5 10
1
0
7
.
5


Incremental dimensions
The position specifications for points P1 to P4 in incremental
dimensions are as follows:
P1: X25 Z-7.5 (relative to the zero-point)
P2: X15 Z-7.5 (relative to P1)
P3: Z-10 (relative to P2)
P4: X20 Z-10 (relative to P3)

4

Creating a ShopTurn program 01/2008
4.2 Fundamentals

4
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
4-130 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
4.2.4 Polar coordinates
You can specify positions using right-angled coordinates or polar
coordinates.
If a point in a workpiece drawing is defined by a value for each
coordinate axis, you can easily input the position into the parameter
screen form using right-angled coordinates. For workpieces that are
dimensioned with arcs or angular data, it is often easier if you input
the positions using polar coordinates.

You can only program polar coordinates for the functions "Straight
circle" and "Contour milling."
The point from which dimensioning starts in polar coordinates is called
the "pole".

Pole
X
Z
P1
P2
P3
30
3
0
3
0
30°
30°
30°


Polar coordinates
The position specifications for the pole and points P1 to P3 in polar
coordinates are:
Pole: X30 Z30 (relative to the zero-point)
P1: L30 α30° (relative to the pole)
P2: L30 α60° (relative to the pole)
P3: L30 α90° (relative to the pole)

4

01/2008 Creating a ShopTurn program
4.2 Fundamentals

4
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 4-131
4.2.5 Pocket calculator
You can use the pocket calculator to quickly calculate parameter
values during programming. If, for example, the diameter of a
workpiece is only dimensioned indirectly in the workpiece drawing, i.e.
the diameter must be derived from the sum of several other dimension
specifications, you can calculate the diameter directly in the input field
of this parameter.

The calculation of a parameter value is always done in the input field
of the parameter. In doing this, you can perform as many calculations
as you wish using the following kinds of calculations.
• Operators
+ Addition
- Subtraction
* Multiplication
/ Division
() Parentheses
MOD Modulo Operation
AND AND operator
OR OR operator
NOT NOT operator
• Constants
PI 3.14159265358979323846
TRUE 1
FALSE 0
• Functions
SIN(x) Sine of x, (x in degrees)
COS(x) Cosine of x, (x in degrees)
TAN(x) Tangent of x, (x in degrees)
ATAN2(x,y) Inverse tangent of x/y, (x and y in degrees)
SQRT(x) Square root of x
ABS(x) Absolute value of x
You can input a maximum of 256 characters in a field.

4

Creating a ShopTurn program 01/2008
4.2 Fundamentals

4
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
4-132 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
Position the cursor on the input field of a parameter screen form.

or
=


Press the "Insert" or “=” key.
The calculator is active.
Input the arithmetic statement.
You can use arithmetic symbols, numbers, and commas.

or
=


Press the "Input" or “=” key.
The new value is calculated and displayed in the input field. The
calculator is switched off.



If you would first like to delete an old value in an input field, press the
"Backspace" key.
Example: Tool wear +0.1 Position the cursor on the input field "∆LengthX" in the tool wear
list.




Press the "Insert" key.
Input the calculating instructions: + 0.1


Press the "Input" key.


Example: Calculating the
diameter
40
160
3
0

5
0

A

1
2
0

Workpiece drawing
4

01/2008 Creating a ShopTurn program
4.2 Fundamentals

4
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 4-133
Position the cursor on the input field “X” in a parameter screen
form.




Press the "Insert" key.
Input the calculating instructions: 30 * 2 + 50


Press the "Input" key.



4.2.6 Adjustments
If you would like to finish your workpiece to an exact fit, you can input
the master dimension directly into the parameter screen form during
programming.

Specify the master dimension as follows:
F<Diameter/Length> <Tolerance class> <Tolerance quality>
For this, "F" identifies that a master dimension follows.
Example: F20h7
Possible tolerance classes:
A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, J, T, U, V, X, Y, Z
Upper case letter: Drill-holes
Lowercase letters: Shafts
Possible tolerance qualities:
1 to 18, if they are not restricted by DIN standard 7150.

Position the cursor on the input field of a parameter screen form.
Input the fit.


Press the "Input" key.
The control system automatically calculates the mean value from the
upper and lower limit value.


If you would like to input a lowercase letter, highlight the input
uppercase letter with the cursor and press the "Select" key. If you
press the key again, the uppercase letter reappears.

4

Creating a ShopTurn program 01/2008
4.3 Sequence program

4
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
4-134 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
4.3 Sequence program
For sequence programs that you create directly at the machine, you
require a software option.
4.3.1 Overview
When creating a sequence program, always proceed according to the
following diagram:
• Create a new program
• Assign a program name
• Fill out the program head
• Program individual machining steps
The following listed machining steps can be selected.

Æ
Tool
>




Straight
>


Circle center
point >


Circle
radius >


Polar
>


Approach/
Retract >


Æ
Drilling
centric >




Thread
centric >


Drilling
reaming >


Deep hole
drilling >


Thread
>
Æ
Tapping


Thread
drilling


Positions
>


Repeat
position >


Æ
Stock
removal >

4

01/2008 Creating a ShopTurn program
4.3 Sequence program

4
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 4-135

Recess
>


Undercut
>


Thread
>


Parting
>


Æ
New
contour >




Stock
removal >


St. remov.
resid. >


Grooving
>


Grooving
resid. >


Plunge-
turning >


Plunge-turn.
resid. >


Æ
Pocket
>




Spigot
>


Slot
>


Multiple
edge >


Engraving


Contour
milling >
Æ
New
contour >


Path
milling >


Predrilling
>


Pocket
milling


Pocket
resid. mat.


Spigot
milling


Spigot
resid. mat.

4

Creating a ShopTurn program 01/2008
4.3 Sequence program

4
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
4-136 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008

Æ
Set
marker >




Repeat >


Sub-
routine >


Counter-
spindle >


Settings
>


Transfor-
mations >
Æ
Work
offset >


Offset
>


Rotation
>


Scaling
>


Mirroring
>


Rotation
C axis


4.3.2 Creating a new program
For each new workpiece that you would like to finish, create an
individual program. The program contains the individual machining
steps that must be performed for finishing the workpiece.

If you create a new program, a program header and program end are
automatically defined. In the program header, you must set the
following parameters, which are active during the entire program.
WO The zero-point offset in which the zero-point of the workpiece is
saved.
You can also delete the pre-setting of the parameter if you do not
want to specify a zero-point offset.
Unit of measurement

The unit of measure (millimeters or inches) in the program header is
set in relation to the position specifications in the current program. All
other specifications, such as feedrate or tool offsets, are entered in the
unit of measure that you have set for the entire machine.
Blank

For the blank of the workpiece, you must define the shape (cylinder,
tube, rectangle, or N-angle) and the dimensions.
W: Blank width – only for rectangle
L: Blank length – only for rectangle
N : Number of edges – only for N-angle
4

01/2008 Creating a ShopTurn program
4.3 Sequence program

4
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 4-137
L: Edge length (alternative to SW) – only for N-angle
SW: Key width (alternative to L) – only for N-angle
XA: Outside diameter (abs) – only for cylinder and tube
XI: Inside diameter (abs or inc) – only for tube
ZA: Initial dimension (abs)
ZI: End dimension (abs or inc)
ZB: Machining dimension (abs or inc)


Cylinder blank

Tube blank
Retraction

The retraction area indicates the area outside of which collision-free
traversing of the axes must be possible.
For each infeed direction, you define a retraction plane that is only
traversed in that direction during positioning. The retraction planes
depend on the shape of the blank and the type of retraction (simple,
expanded, or all).
XRA: Outer retraction plane in direction X (abs. or inc.)
XRI: Inner retraction plane in direction X (abs. or inc.)
ZRA: Outer retraction plane in direction Z (abs. or inc.)
ZRI: Inner retraction plane in direction Z (inc.)
The retraction planes XRA and XRI are always placed in a circle
around the blank, even for rectangular and N-angle blanks.


Retraction tube: Simple


Retraction tube: all
4

Creating a ShopTurn program 01/2008
4.3 Sequence program

4
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
4-138 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
The retraction for a cycle ends at the safety distance. Only the
subsequent cycle moves to the retraction plane. This allows the use of
the special approach/retraction cycle (see Sec. "Programming the
approach/retraction cycle").
A change to the retraction plane is already in effect during retraction
from the previous machining (see Sec. "Changing program settings").
When selecting the traversing paths, ShopTurn always takes the tool
tip into account; i.e. the elongation of the tool is not taken into
consideration. Therefore, you should ensure that the retraction planes
are an appropriate distance away from the workpiece.
Tailstock

If your machine has a tailstock, you can further expand the retraction
area so that collisions with the tailstock will be avoided when
traversing the axes.
Enter the retraction plane XRR of the tailstock in absolute dimensions.
Tool change point

The revolver travels to the tool change point with its zero point and
then positions the required tool in the machining position. The tool
change point must be far enough outside the retraction area that it is
not possible for any tool to protrude into the retraction area while the
revolver is moving.
Either you establish the current tool position as a tool change point
(teaching a tool change point) or you must input the coordinates of the
tool change point XT and ZT directly into the parameter screen form.
Teaching in the tool change point is only possible if you have selected
the machine coordinate system (MKS).
Ensure that the tool change point is relative to the zero point of the
revolver and not the tool tip.


Tool change point
4

01/2008 Creating a ShopTurn program
4.3 Sequence program

4
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 4-139
Safety distance

The safety distance SC defines how close the tool can approach the
workpiece in rapid traverse.
You must input the safety distance incremental dimensions without a
preceding symbol.
Speed limits

If you want to machine the workpiece with a constant cutting speed,
ShopTurn must increase the spindle speed once the workpiece
diameter becomes smaller. Since the speed cannot be increased at
will, you can set a speed limit for the main spindle (S1) and for the
counter-spindle (S3), depending on the shape, size, and material of
the workpiece or collet.
The machine manufacturer only sets one speed limit for the machine,
i.e. none that are dependent on the workpiece.
Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.



Press the "Program" softkey.
Select the directory in which you want to create a new program.

New

ShopTurn
program

Press the "New" and "ShopTurn program" softkeys.
Enter a program name.
Program names may be a maximum of 24 characters in length.
You can use any letters (except umlauts), digits or the underscore
symbol (_). ShopTurn automatically replaces lowercase letters
with uppercase letters.

-or-

Press the "OK" softkey or the "Input" key.
The parameter screen form “Program Header” is displayed.

Set program header parameters
4

Creating a ShopTurn program 01/2008
4.3 Sequence program

4
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
4-140 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008

Work
offset

Select a zero-point offset or input a zero-point offset directly into
the input field or call up the zero-point offset list using the "Work
offset" softkey if you want to select a zero-point offset there.
Input the other parameters.

Teach TC
position


Press the "Teach TC position" softkey if you want to set the
current position of the tool as a tool change point.
The tool’s coordinates are adopted by the parameters XT and ZT.
Press the "Accept" softkey.
The work plan is displayed.
ShopTurn has automatically defined the end of the program.


4.3.3 Creating program blocks
After a new program is created and the program header is filled out,
define the individual machining steps in program blocks that are
necessary for finishing the workpiece.

A large amount of memory is available for one program.
However, depending on the storage space required, you can only
program a limited number of blocks.
• ShopTurn on NCU (HMI Embedded sl)
You can program a maximum of 1,000 blocks using the "Straight"
function or a maximum of 600 blocks using the "Pocket" function.
• PCU 50.3 (HMI Advanced)
You can program a maximum of 3,500 blocks using the "Straight"
function or a maximum of 2,100 blocks using the "Pocket"
function.
You can only create the program blocks between the program header
and the program end. The following function groups are available to
you for programming:
• Straight/Circle
• Drilling
• Turning
• Contour turning
• Milling
• Contour milling
• Transformations
4

01/2008 Creating a ShopTurn program
4.3 Sequence program

4
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 4-141
Fill out an individual parameter screen form for each machining step.
Parameter entry is supported by various "help displays" that explain
the parameters.
The parameters tool, feedrate, speed, and machining are explained in
the following:
T (Tool)


Each time a workpiece is machined, you must program a tool. Tools
are selected by name, and the selection is integrated in all parameter
screen forms of the machining cycles (with the exception of the
straight line/circle).
The tool length offsets become active as soon as the tool is changed.
Tool selection is modal for the straight line/circle, i.e. if the same tool
is used to perform several machining steps occur in succession, you
only have to program one tool for the first straight line/circle.
D (cutting edge)

In the case of tools with several cutting edges, there is a separate set
of individual tool offset data for each edge. For these tools, you must
select or specify the number of the cutting edge that you would like to
use for machining.

Caution
Collisions may occur if you specify the wrong cutting edge number for
some tools (e.g. a flat chamfering drill with guide spigot or step drill)
and then traverse the tool. Always ensure that you enter the correct
cutting edge number.

Radius compensation

ShopTurn automatically takes the tool radius compensation into
account during all machining cycles, with the exception of track milling
and straight. For track milling and straight lines, you have the option of
programming the machining with or without radius compensation. The
tool radius compensation is modal for straight lines, i.e. you have to
deselect the radius compensation if you want to traverse without
radius compensation.
Radius compensation to right of contour
Radius compensation to left of contour
Radius compensation off
Radius compensation remains as previously set
4

Creating a ShopTurn program 01/2008
4.3 Sequence program

4
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
4-142 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
F (feedrate)

The feedrate F (also referred to as the machining feedrate) specifies
the speed at which the axes move during machining of the workpiece.
The machining feedrate is entered in mm/min, mm/rev or in mm/tooth.
The feedrate for milling cycles is automatically converted when
switching from mm/min to mm/rev and vice versa.
It is only possible to enter the feedrate in mm/tooth during milling; this
ensures that each cutting edge of the milling cutter is cutting under the
best possible conditions. The feedrate per tooth corresponds to the
linear path traversed by the milling cutter when a tooth is engaged.
For milling and turning cycles, the feedrate during roughing is relative
to the milling or cutting center point. This is also applies to finishing,
with the exception of contours with inner curves. In this case, the
feedrate is relative to the contact point between the tool and the
workpiece.
The maximum feedrate is determined via machine data.
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

S (spindle speed)

The spindle speed S specifies the number of spindle revolutions per
minute (rpm) and is programmed along with a tool. The speed
specified relates to the main spindle (S1) or counter-spindle (S3)
during turning machining and axial drilling, and to the tool spindle (S2)
during drilling and milling machining.
The spindle starts immediately after the tool change. The spindle
stops upon reset, program end, or a tool change. The spindle's
direction of rotation is specified in the tool list for each tool.
As an alternative to the spindle speed, you can also program the
cutting speed. During the milling cycles, the spindle speed is
automatically recalculated into the cutting speed and vice versa.
V (cutting speed)

The cutting speed V is a circumferential speed (m/min) and is
programmed together with a tool, as an alternative to the spindle
speed. The cutting speed is relative to the main spindle (V1) or the
counter-spindle (V3) for turning machining and axial drilling, and
corresponds to the circumferential speed of the workpiece at the point
that is currently being machined.
For drilling and milling machining, meanwhile, the cutting speed is
relative to the tool spindle (V2) and corresponds to the circumferential
speed at which the cutting edge of the tool machines the workpiece.

4

01/2008 Creating a ShopTurn program
4.3 Sequence program

4
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 4-143
Machining

You can choose between roughing, finishing, or complete machining
for the machining of some cycles. For certain milling cycles, finishing
edge or finishing bottom are possible.
• Roughing
One or more machinings with depth setting
• Finishing
One-time machining
• Finishing edge
Only the edge of the object is finished
• Finishing bottom
Only the bottom of the object is finished
• Complete machining
Roughing and finishing with a tool in a machining step
If you want to rough and finish using two different tools, you must call
the machining cycle twice (1st block = roughing; 2nd block = finishing).
The programmed parameters are retained when the cycle is called for
the second time.

Position the cursor in the work plan on the line behind which a
new program block is to be inserted.




Using the softkeys, select the desired function (see following
section).
The corresponding parameter screen form is displayed.
Enter the values for the individual parameters.


Press the "Help" key if you want to see the help screen, which
explains the individual parameters.

Tools

Press the "Tools" softkey if you want to select a tool from the tool
list for parameter "T".
-and-
Place the cursor on the tool that you want to use for machining.
-and-

To
program

Press the "To program" softkey.
The selected tool is accepted into the parameter screen form.



Press the "Accept" softkey.
The values are saved and the parameterization screen form is closed.
The process plan is displayed and the newly created program block is
marked.

4

Creating a ShopTurn program 01/2008
4.3 Sequence program

4
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
4-144 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
4.3.4 Changing program blocks
You can later optimize the parameters in the programmed ShopTurn
blocks or adapt them to new situations, e.g. if you want to increase the
feedrate or shift a position. In this case, you can change all the
parameters in every program block directly in the associated
parameter screen form.



Press the "Program" softkey.
The directory overview is displayed.
Place the cursor on the directory that contains the program that
you want to open.

-or-

Press the "Input" or "Cursor Right" key.
All the programs in this directory are displayed.
Select the program that you want to change.

-or-
Press the "Input" or "Cursor Right" key.
The machining plan of the program is displayed.
Place the cursor on the desired program block in the machining
plan.


Press the "Right cursor" key.
The parameter screen for the selected program block appears.
Make the desired changes.

-or-

Press the "Accept" softkey or the "Cursor left" key.
The changes are accepted in the program.

4

01/2008 Creating a ShopTurn program
4.3 Sequence program

4
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 4-145
4.3.5 Program editor
You use the program editor when you want to change the sequence of
program blocks within a program, delete program blocks or copy
program blocks from one program to another.

The following functions are available in the program editor:
• Select
You can select several program blocks simultaneously, for
example, for cutting and pasting them subsequently.
• Copy/paste
You can copy and paste program blocks within a program or
between different programs.
• Cut
You can cut and therefore delete program blocks. However, the
program blocks remain in the buffer, so you can still paste them in
somewhere else.
• Search
You can search for a specific block number or any character string
in a program.
• Rename
You can rename a contour in the program editor, e.g. if you have
copied the contour.
• Numbering
When you insert a new or copied program block between two
existing program blocks, ShopTurn automatically assigns a new
block number. This block number may be higher than the one in
the following block. With the "Numbering" function, you can
renumber the program blocks in ascending order.

4

Creating a ShopTurn program 01/2008
4.3 Sequence program

4
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
4-146 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
Opening the program
editor
Select a program.


Press the "Expansion" key.
The softkeys for the program editor are displayed in the vertical
softkey bar.


Selecting a program
block

Place the cursor in the machining plan on the first or last block
you want to select.

Mark

Press the "Mark" softkey.
Use the cursor keys to select any further program blocks.
The program blocks are marked.


Copying a program block

Select the program block(s) in the machining plan.

Copy

Press the "Copy" softkey.
The program blocks are copied into buffer memory.


Cutting a program block

Select the program block(s) in the machining plan.

Cut

Press the "Cut" softkey.
The program blocks are removed from the machining plan and stored
in buffer memory.


Pasting a program block

Copy or cut the desired program blocks in the machining plan.
Place the cursor on the line after which the program block(s) is
(are) to be inserted.

Insert

Press the "Insert" softkey.
The program blocks are inserted in the machining plan of the program.


4

01/2008 Creating a ShopTurn program
4.3 Sequence program

4
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 4-147
Search

Search
>

Press the "Search" softkey.
Enter a block number or text.
Select whether the search is to commence at the start of the
program or the current cursor position.

Search

Press the "Search" softkey.
ShopTurn searches throughout the program. The cursor highlights the
search hit.

Continue
search

Press the "Continue search" softkey to continue the search, as
necessary.


Renaming a contour

Place the cursor on a contour in the machining plan.

Rename

Press the "Rename" softkey.
Enter a new name for the contour.


Press the "OK" softkey.
The name of the contour is changed and displayed in the machining
plan.


Numbering program
blocks


Renumber

Press the "Renumber" softkey.
The program blocks are renumbered in ascending order.


Closing the program
editor




Press the "Back" softkey to close the program editor.

4

Creating a ShopTurn program 01/2008
4.3 Sequence program

4
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
4-148 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
4.3.6 Specifying a quantity
If you want to finish a certain number of the same kind of workpiece,
you can input the desired quantity at the program end. When you start
the program, the program will be repeatedly executed for as many
times as you specified.

If your machine has a bar loader, you can program the reloading of
the workpiece and then the actual machining at the beginning of the
program. Finally, remove the finished workpiece and enter the desired
quantity at the program end.
In this way, workpiece finishing can take place fully automatically.

Open the "Program end" block, if you want to machine more than
one workpiece.
Enter the number of workpieces that you want to machine.


Press the "Accept" softkey.
When you later start the program, the program will be repeatedly
executed for as many times as you specified.


Endless

If you want to repeat the program execution an unlimited number of
times, press the "Endless" softkey.
You can abort the program execution with "Reset."




5

01/2008 ShopTurn functions
5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 5-149
ShopTurn functions

5.1 Straight or circular path movements ....................................................................... 5-151
5.1.1 Selecting a tool and machining plane..................................................................... 5-152
5.1.2 Straight line ............................................................................................................. 5-154
5.1.3 Circle with known center point ................................................................................ 5-156
5.1.4 Circle with known radius ......................................................................................... 5-157
5.1.5 Polar coordinates .................................................................................................... 5-159
5.1.6 Straight polar........................................................................................................... 5-160
5.1.7 Circle polar .............................................................................................................. 5-162
5.2 Drilling ..................................................................................................................... 5-163
5.2.1 Centered drilling...................................................................................................... 5-164
5.2.2 Thread centered...................................................................................................... 5-166
5.2.3 Drilling and reaming................................................................................................ 5-167
5.2.4 Deep hole drilling .................................................................................................... 5-169
5.2.5 Tapping ................................................................................................................... 5-171
5.2.6 Thread milling.......................................................................................................... 5-173
5.2.7 Positioning and position patterns............................................................................ 5-175
5.2.8 Freely programmable positions............................................................................... 5-176
5.2.9 Line position pattern................................................................................................ 5-178
5.2.10 Matrix position pattern............................................................................................. 5-179
5.2.11 Box position pattern ................................................................................................ 5-182
5.2.12 Full circle position pattern ....................................................................................... 5-184
5.2.13 Pitch circle position pattern..................................................................................... 5-186
5.2.14 Including and skipping positions ............................................................................. 5-188
5.2.15 Repeating positions ................................................................................................ 5-189
5.3 Turning.................................................................................................................... 5-190
5.3.1 Roughing cycles...................................................................................................... 5-190
5.3.2 Recessing cycles .................................................................................................... 5-193
5.3.3 Undercut form E and F............................................................................................ 5-196
5.3.4 Thread undercuts.................................................................................................... 5-197
5.3.5 Thread cutting......................................................................................................... 5-199
5.3.6 Thread re-machining............................................................................................... 5-203
5.3.7 Parting..................................................................................................................... 5-204
5.4 Contour turning ....................................................................................................... 5-206
5.4.1 Representation of the contour................................................................................. 5-208
5.4.2 Creating a new contour........................................................................................... 5-210
5.4.3 Creating contour elements...................................................................................... 5-211
5.4.4 Changing a contour................................................................................................. 5-216
5.4.5 Stock removal ......................................................................................................... 5-218
5.4.6 Stock removal of residual material.......................................................................... 5-222
5.4.7 Grooving.................................................................................................................. 5-224
5.4.8 Grooving residual material ...................................................................................... 5-226
5.4.9 Plunge-turning......................................................................................................... 5-227
5.4.10 Plunge-turning residual material ............................................................................. 5-229

5

ShopTurn functions 01/2008


5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
5-150 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
5.5 Milling ...................................................................................................................... 5-231
5.5.1 Rectangular pocket ................................................................................................. 5-232
5.5.2 Circular pocket ........................................................................................................ 5-236
5.5.3 Rectangular spigot .................................................................................................. 5-240
5.5.4 Circular spigot ......................................................................................................... 5-244
5.5.5 Longitudinal slot ...................................................................................................... 5-247
5.5.6 Circumferential slot.................................................................................................. 5-250
5.5.7 Open slot ................................................................................................................. 5-253
5.5.8 Positions.................................................................................................................. 5-259
5.5.9 Multiple edge........................................................................................................... 5-259
5.5.10 Engraving ................................................................................................................ 5-261
5.6 Contour milling ........................................................................................................ 5-268
5.6.1 Representation of the contour................................................................................. 5-271
5.6.2 Creating a new contour ........................................................................................... 5-273
5.6.3 Creating contour elements ...................................................................................... 5-275
5.6.4 Changing a contour ................................................................................................. 5-282
5.6.5 Path milling.............................................................................................................. 5-284
5.6.6 Predrilling a contour pocket..................................................................................... 5-289
5.6.7 Milling a contour pocket (roughing) ......................................................................... 5-293
5.6.8 Removing residual material from a contour pocket................................................. 5-296
5.6.9 Finishing the contour pocket ................................................................................... 5-298
5.6.10 Chamfering a contour pocket .................................................................................. 5-302
5.6.11 Milling a contour spigot (roughing) .......................................................................... 5-303
5.6.12 Removing residual material from a contour spigot.................................................. 5-306
5.6.13 Finishing a contour spigot ....................................................................................... 5-308
5.6.14 Chamfering a contour spigot ................................................................................... 5-311
5.7 Calling a subroutine................................................................................................. 5-313
5.8 Repeating program blocks ...................................................................................... 5-315
5.9 Machining with the counterspindle.......................................................................... 5-316
5.10 Changing program settings..................................................................................... 5-322
5.11 Calling zero offsets.................................................................................................. 5-323
5.12 Defining coordinate transformations ....................................................................... 5-324
5.13 Programming the approach/retraction cycle ........................................................... 5-326
5.14 Inserting G code into the sequence program.......................................................... 5-328
5.15 Teaching..................................................................................................................5-330
5.15.1 Teaching a cycle ..................................................................................................... 5-330
5.15.2 Teaching a position pattern..................................................................................... 5-331
5.15.3 Teaching a contour object ....................................................................................... 5-332


5

01/2008 ShopTurn functions
5.1 Straight or circular path movements

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 5-151
5.1 Straight or circular path movements
When you want to perform straight or circular path movements or
machining without defining a complete contour, you can use the
functions "Straight" or "Circle" respectively.

To program simple machining operations, proceed as follows:
• Specify the tool and the spindle speed
• Select the machining plane
• Program the machining
• Program any further machining
The following machining options are available:
• Straight
• Circle with known center point
• Circle with known radius
• Line with polar coordinates
• Circle with polar coordinates
If you want to program a line or a circle using polar coordinates, you
must define the pole first.


Caution
If you use a straight or circular path movement to move the tool into
the retraction zone specified in the program header, you must also
move the tool out again. Otherwise a collision could occur as a result
of the traversing movements in a subsequently programmed
ShopTurn cycle.

5

ShopTurn functions 01/2008
5.1 Straight or circular path movements

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
5-152 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
5.1.1 Selecting a tool and machining plane
Before you can program a line or circle, you have to select the tool,
spindle, spindle speed and machining plane.

If you program a sequence of different straight or circular path
motions, the settings for the tool, spindle, spindle speed and
machining plane remain active until you change them again.
If you change the selected machining plane subsequently, the
coordinates of the programmed path motion are adjusted
automatically to the new machining plane. The originally programmed
coordinates remain unchanged only for a straight motion (right-angled,
not polar).



Tool
>



¾ Press the "Strai. Circle" and "Tool" softkeys.
¾ Enter a tool in parameter field "T".
-or-

Tools

¾ Press the "Tools" softkey and select a tool from the tool list.
-and-
¾ Place the cursor on the tool that you want to use for machining.
-and-

To
program

¾ Press the "To program" softkey.
The tool is copied into the "T" parameter field.
¾ Select the tool cutting edge number D if the tool has several
cutting edges.
¾ In the left-hand input field of the Spindle parameter, select main
spindle (S1), tool spindle (S2) or counterspindle (S3).
¾ Enter the spindle speed or cutting rate in the right-hand input field.
5

01/2008 ShopTurn functions
5.1 Straight or circular path movements

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 5-153
¾ Choose one of the machining planes (Rotate,
End face/End face C, Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C,
End face Y or Peripheral surface Y).
¾ Enter the cylinder diameter if you selected the machining plane
Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C.
-or-
¾ Enter the positioning angle for the CP machining area if you
selected machining plane End face Y.
-or-
¾ Enter reference point C0 if you selected the machining plane
Peripheral surface Y.


¾ Choose whether the spindle should be clamped or released or
whether there should be no change (input field left blank).



¾ Press the "Accept" softkey.
The values are saved and the parameterization screen form is closed.
The process plan is displayed and the newly created program block is
marked.

5

ShopTurn functions 01/2008
5.1 Straight or circular path movements

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
5-154 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
5.1.2 Straight line
When you want to program a straight line in Cartesian coordinates,
you can use the "Straight" function.

The tool moves across a straight line at the programmed feedrate or
at rapid traverse from its current position to the programmed end
position.
Radius compensation Alternately you can implement the straight line with radius
compensation. The radius compensation acts modally; therefore, you
must deactivate the radius compensation again when you want to
traverse without radius compensation. If several straight line blocks
with radius compensation are programmed sequentially, you may
select radius compensation only in the first program block.
For the first straight line with radius compensation, the tool
approaches the starting point without radius compensation and the
end point with radius compensation, i.e. if a vertical path is
programmed, a slope will be traversed. The compensation does not
act over the entire traverse path until the second programmed straight
line with radius compensation. The reverse occurs when radius
compensation is deactivated.

Programmed
path
Travel path
Programmed
path
Travel path

First straight line with radius
compensation
First straight line with deactivated radius
compensation

If you want to prevent deviation from the programmed path, you can
program the first straight line with radius compensation or with
deactivated radius compensation at a distance from the workpiece.
Programming without coordinate data is not possible.

5

01/2008 ShopTurn functions
5.1 Straight or circular path movements

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 5-155


Straight
>

¾ Press the "Strai. Circle" and "Straight" softkeys.

Rapid
traverse

¾ Press the "Rapid traverse" softkey if you want to use rapid
traverse instead of a programmed machining feedrate.

Parameter Description Unit
X

Z

Y

C1

C3

Z3
Target position in the X direction (abs or inc)
Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.
Target position in the Z direction (abs or inc)
Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.
Target position in the Y direction (abs or inc)
Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.
Target position of C axis of main spindle (abs or inc)
Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.
Target position of C axis of counterspindle (abs or inc)
Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.
Target position of special axis (abs or inc)
Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.
mm

mm

mm

mm

mm

mm
F Machining feedrate mm/rev
mm/min
mm/tooth
Radius
compensation
Input defining which side of the contour the tool machines in the programmed
direction:
Radius compensation to right of contour
Radius compensation to left of contour
Radius compensation off
The previously programmed setting for radius compensation is used


5

ShopTurn functions 01/2008
5.1 Straight or circular path movements

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
5-156 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
5.1.3 Circle with known center point
To program a circle or arc with a known center point in Cartesian
coordinates, use the "Circle center point" function.

The tool traverses a circular path from its current position to the
programmed target position at the machining feedrate. ShopTurn
calculates the radius of the circle/arc on the basis of the entered
interpolation parameter settings I and K.



Circle center
point >

¾ Press the "Strai. Circle" and "Circle center point" softkeys.

Parameter Description Unit
Direction of
rotation
Direction of rotation in which the tool travels from the circle starting point to the circle
end point
Direction of rotation clockwise (right)
Direction of rotation counterclockwise (left)


X

Y

I

J
Machining plane End face/End face C:
Target position in the X direction (abs or inc)
Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.
Target position in the Y direction (abs or inc)
Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.
Distance between the circle starting point and the circle center point in the X
direction (inc). The plus/minus sign is evaluated.
Distance between the circle starting point and the circle center point in the Y
direction (inc). The plus/minus sign is evaluated.

mm

mm

mm

mm

Y

Z

J

K
Machining plane Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C:
Target position in the Y direction (abs or inc)
Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.
Target position in the Z direction (abs or inc)
Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.
Distance between the circle starting point and the circle center point in the Y
direction (inc). The plus/minus sign is evaluated.
Distance between the circle starting point and the circle center point in the Z
direction (inc). The plus/minus sign is evaluated.

mm

mm

mm

mm

X

Y

I

J
Machining plane End face Y:
Target position in the X direction (abs or inc)
Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.
Target position in the Y direction (abs or inc)
Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.
Distance between the circle starting point and the circle center point in the X
direction (inc). The plus/minus sign is evaluated.
Distance between the circle starting point and the circle center point in the Y
direction (inc). The plus/minus sign is evaluated.

mm

mm

mm

mm

5

01/2008 ShopTurn functions
5.1 Straight or circular path movements

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 5-157

Y

Z

J

K
Machining plane Peripheral surface Y:
Target position in the Y direction (abs or inc)
Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.
Target position in the Z direction (abs or inc)
Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.
Distance between the circle starting point and the circle center point in the Y
direction (inc). The plus/minus sign is evaluated.
Distance between the circle starting point and the circle center point in the Z
direction (inc). The plus/minus sign is evaluated.

mm

mm

mm

mm

X

Z

I

K
Machining plane Rotate:
Target position ∅ in the X direction (abs) or target position in the X direction (inc)
Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.
Target position in the Z direction (abs or inc)
Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.
Distance between the circle starting point and the circle center point in the X
direction (inc). The plus/minus sign is evaluated.
Distance between the circle starting point and the circle center point in the Z
direction (inc). The plus/minus sign is evaluated.

mm

mm

mm

mm
F Machining feedrate mm/rev
mm/min
mm/tooth

5.1.4 Circle with known radius
To program a circle or arc with a known radius in Cartesian
coordinates, use the "Circle radius" function.

The tool traverses a circular arc with the programmed radius from its
current position to the programmed target position at the machining
feedrate. The position of the circle center point is calculated by
ShopTurn.
You can choose to traverse the arc in the clockwise or anticlockwise
direction. Depending on the direction of rotation, there are two
options for approaching the target position from the current position
via an arc of the specified radius. You can select the arc of your
choice by entering a positive or a negative sign for the radius.

+

Target
Start
Arc angles of up to 180°: +
Arc angles larger than 180°: –

Arcs with different arc angles

5

ShopTurn functions 01/2008
5.1 Straight or circular path movements

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
5-158 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008


Circle
radius >

¾ Press the "Strai. Circle" and "Circle radius" softkeys.

Parameter Description Unit
Direction of
rotation
Direction of rotation in which the tool travels from the circle starting point to the circle
end point
Direction of rotation clockwise (right)
Direction of rotation counterclockwise (left)


X

Y
Machining plane End face/End face C:
Target position in the X direction (abs or inc)
Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.
Target position in the Y direction (abs or inc)
Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.

mm

mm

Y

Z
Machining plane Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C:
Target position in the Y direction (abs or inc)
Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.
Target position in the Z direction (abs or inc)
Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.

mm

mm

X

Y
Machining plane End face Y:
Target position in the X direction (abs or inc)
Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.
Target position in the Y direction (abs or inc)
Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.

mm

mm

Y

Z
Machining plane Peripheral surface Y:
Target position in the Y direction (abs or inc)
Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.
Target position in the Z direction (abs or inc)
Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.

mm

mm

X

Z
Machining plane Rotate:
Target position ∅ in the X direction (abs) or target position in the X direction (inc)
Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.
Target position in the Z direction (abs or inc)
Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.

mm

mm
R Radius of arc
The sign determines the type of arc traversed.
mm
F Machining feedrate mm/rev
mm/min
mm/tooth

5

01/2008 ShopTurn functions
5.1 Straight or circular path movements

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 5-159
5.1.5 Polar coordinates
If a workpiece has been dimensioned from a central point (pole) with
radius and angles, you will find it helpful to program these dimensions
as polar coordinates.
Before you program a straight line or circle in polar coordinates, you
must define the pole, i.e. the reference point, of the polar coordinate
system.



Polar
>

Pole >

¾ Press the "Strai. Circle", "Polar" and "Pole" softkeys.

Parameter Description Unit

X

Y
Machining plane End face/End face C:
X position of the pole (abs or inc)
Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.
Y position of the pole (abs or inc)
Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.

mm

mm

Y

Z
Machining plane Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C:
Y position of the pole (abs or inc)
Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.
Z position of the pole (abs or inc)
Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.

mm

mm

X

Y
Machining plane End face Y:
X position of the pole (abs or inc)
Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.
Y position of the pole (abs or inc)
Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.

mm

mm

Y

Z
Machining plane Peripheral surface Y:
Y position of the pole (abs or inc)
Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.
Z position of the pole (abs or inc)
Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.

mm

mm

X

Z
Machining plane Rotate:
X position of the pole ∅ (abs) or X position of the pole (inc)
Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.
Z position of the pole (abs or inc)
Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.

mm

mm

5

ShopTurn functions 01/2008
5.1 Straight or circular path movements

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
5-160 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
5.1.6 Straight polar
When you want to program a straight line in polar coordinates, you
can use the "Straight polar" function.

A straight line in the polar coordinate system is defined by the length L
and the angle α. The angle is based on another axis depending on the
machining plane. The direction in which a positive angle points also
depends on the machining plane.
Machining plane Turning Face Peripheral
Reference axis for angle Z X Y
Positive angle in direction of the axis X Y Z

The tool traverses a straight line from its current position to the
programmed end point at the machining feedrate or at rapid traverse.
The 1st line in polar coordinates entered after the pole must be
programmed in absolute dimensions. You can program any further
lines or circles with incremental coordinates.
Radius compensation Alternately you can implement the straight line with radius
compensation. The radius compensation acts modally, therefore you
must deactivate the radius compensation again when you want to
traverse without radius compensation. Where several straight line
blocks with radius compensation are programmed sequentially, you
may select radius compensation only in the first program block.
For the first straight line with radius compensation, the tool
approaches the starting point without radius compensation and the
end point with radius compensation, i.e. if a vertical path is
programmed, a slope will be traversed. The compensation does not
act over the entire traverse path until the second programmed straight
line with radius compensation. The reverse occurs when radius
compensation is deactivated.

Programmed
path
Travel path

Programmed
path
Travel path

First straight line with radius compensation

First straight line with deactivated radius
compensation
5

01/2008 ShopTurn functions
5.1 Straight or circular path movements

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 5-161
If you want to prevent deviation from the programmed path, you can
program the first straight line with radius compensation or with
deactivated radius compensation at a distance from the workpiece.
Programming without coordinate data is not possible.



Polar
>

Straight
polar >

¾ Press the "Strai. Circle", "Polar" and "Straight polar" softkeys.

Rapid
traverse

¾ Press the "Rapid traverse" softkey if you want to use rapid
traverse instead of a programmed machining feedrate.

Parameter Description Unit
L Distance between the pole and the end point of line mm
α Polar angle (abs or inc)
The sign specifies the direction.
Degrees
F Machining feedrate mm/rev
mm/min
mm/tooth
Radius
compensation
Input defining which side of the contour the tool machines in the programmed
direction:
Radius compensation to right of contour
Radius compensation to left of contour
Radius compensation off
The previously programmed setting for radius compensation is used


5

ShopTurn functions 01/2008
5.1 Straight or circular path movements

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
5-162 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
5.1.7 Circle polar
If you want to program a circle or arc using polar coordinates, you can
use the "Circle polar" function.

A circle in the polar coordinate system is defined by an angle α. The
angle is based on another axis depending on the machining plane.
The direction in which a positive angle points also depends on the
machining plane.
Machining plane Turning Face Peripheral
Reference axis for angle Z X Y
Positive angle in direction of the axis X Y Z

The tool traverses a circular path from its current position to the
programmed end point (angle) at the machining feedrate.
The radius is obtained from the distance between the current tool
position and the defined pole, i.e. the circle start and end point
positions are at the same distance from the pole.
The 1st arc in polar coordinates entered after the pole must be
programmed in absolute dimensions. You can program any further
lines or circles with incremental coordinates.



Polar
>

Circle
polar >

¾ Press the "Strai. Circle", "Polar" and "Circle polar" softkeys.

Parameter Description Unit
Direction of
rotation
Direction of rotation in which the tool travels from the circle starting point to the circle
end point
Direction of rotation clockwise (right)
Direction of rotation counterclockwise (left)

α Polar angle (abs or inc)
The sign specifies the direction.
Degrees
F Machining feedrate mm/rev
mm/min
mm/tooth











5

01/2008 ShopTurn functions
5.2 Drilling

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition 5-163
5.2 Drilling
The functions explained in this section are used when you want to
program various drill holes on the end face or peripheral surface.

You program drilling operations in the order in which they are
performed. The following technology cycles can be used:
• Drilling centered
• Thread centered
• Centering
• Drilling
• Reaming
• Deep hole drilling
• Tapping
• Thread milling
You have to program the positions or position pattern after the
technology cycles.
All program blocks involved in the drilling operation are shown in the
process plan in square brackets.

Example: Drilling
Clamping a spindle With off-center drilling, it can be helpful to clamp the spindle to avoid
spindle distortions. The "Clamp spindle" function must be set up by
the machine manufacturer. The machine manufacturer also specifies
whether ShopTurn will clamp the spindle automatically if this would
facilitate machining, or if you can decide the types of machining for
which the spindle should be clamped.
Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.
If you are to decide the types of machining for which the spindle is to
be clamped, the following applies:
You should note that when machining in planes End face/End face C
and Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C, clamping remains
activated only until the drilling operation ends. When machining in
planes End face Y and Peripheral surface Y, on the other hand,
clamping is modal, i.e. it remains activated until the machining plane is
changed or clamping is deselected in the "Straight circle" Æ "Tool"
menu.

5

ShopTurn functions 01/2008
5.2 Drilling

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
5-164 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition
5.2.1 Centered drilling
The "Drill centered" function is used to make a drill hole in the center
of the end face.

You can choose between chip breakage during drilling or retraction
from the workpiece for stock removal.
During machining, either the main spindle or counterspindle rotates.
You can use a drill, rotary drill or milling cutter as the tool.
The tool is moved at rapid traverse to the programmed position,
allowing for the return plane and safety clearance.
Chipbreaking

1. The tool drills at the programmed feedrate F as far as the first
infeed depth.
2. The tool retracts by the retraction value V2 and drills as far as the
next infeed depth that can be reduced by the factor DF.
3. Step 2 is repeated until final drilling depth Z1 has been reached
and dwell time DT has expired.
4. The tool moves back to the safety distance at rapid traverse.
Stock removal

1. The tool drills at the programmed feedrate F as far as the first
infeed depth.
2. The tool is retracted from the workpiece at rapid traverse to the
safety clearance for stock removal and is then re-inserted at the
1st infeed depth reduced by a clearance distance calculated by the
control system.
3. The tool then drills down to the next infeed depth that can be
reduced by the factor DF and the tool retracts again for stock
removal.
4. Step 3 is repeated until final drilling depth Z1 has been reached
and dwell time DT has expired.
5. The tool moves back to the safety distance at rapid traverse.
If you want, for example, to drill very deep holes, you can also employ
a rotating tool spindle. First specify the required tool and tool spindle
speed under "Straight/Circle" Æ "Tool" (see Section "Select tool and
machining plane"). Then program the "Drill centered" function.

5

01/2008 ShopTurn functions
5.2 Drilling

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition 5-165


Drilling
centric >

¾ Press the "Drilling" and "Drilling centric" softkeys.

Break
chips
-or-
Solid
machin.

¾ Press the "Break chips" or "Solid machin." softkey.

Parameter Description Unit
T, D, F, S, V See Section "Creating program blocks".
Shank

Tip
The drill is inserted into the workpiece until the drill shank reaches the value
programmed for Z1. The insertion angle entered in the tool list is applied.
The drill is inserted into the workpiece until the drill tip reaches the value
programmed for Z1.

Z0 Reference point (abs) mm
Z1 Insertion depth with reference to Z0 for drill tip or drill shank.
(abs. or inc.)
mm
D Maximum infeed mm
DF Percentage for each additional infeed
DF = 100: Amount of infeed remains constant
DF < 100: Amount of infeed is reduced in direction of final drilling depth.
Example: DF = 80
Last infeed was 4 mm;
4 x 80% = 3.2; next infeed increment is 3.2 mm
3.2 x 80% = 2.56; next infeed increment is 2.56 mm, etc.
%
V1 Minimum infeed
Parameter V1 is available only if DF<100% has been programmed.
If the amount of infeed is very small a minimum infeed can be programmed with
parameter V1.
V1 < Amount of infeed: Infeed with infeed value.
V1 < Amount of infeed: Infeed with the value programmed in V1.
mm
V2 Retraction amount (for chipbreaking only)
Amount by which the drill is retracted for chipbreaking.
mm
DT Dwell time for release cut s
rev
XD Center offset in X direction
The center offset can be used for example to produce a drill hole with an exact fit. A
rotary drill (rotary drill type) or U drill (drill type) is required. A "normal" drill is not
suitable.
The maximum center offset is stored in a machine data code.
mm

5

ShopTurn functions 01/2008
5.2 Drilling

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
5-166 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition
5.2.2 Thread centered
The "Thread centered" function is used to tap a right-hand or left-hand
thread in the center of the end face.

During machining, either the main spindle or counterspindle rotates.
You can alter the spindle speed via the spindle override; feedrate
override is not operative.
You can select drilling in one cut, chipbreaking or retraction from the
workpiece for stock removal.
The tool is moved at rapid traverse to the programmed position,
allowing for the retraction plane and safety distance.
1 cut 1. The tool drills at the programmed spindle speed S or cut rate V as
far as the final drilling depth Z1.
2. The direction of rotation of the spindle reverses and the tool
retracts to the safety distance at the programmed spindle speed
SR or cut rate VR.
Stock removal

1. The tool drills at the programmed spindle speed S or feedrate V as
far as the first infeed depth (maximum infeed depth D).
2. The tool retracts from the workpiece to the safety distance at
spindle speed SR or cut rate VR for stock removal.
3. Then the tool is inserted again as far as the 1st infeed depth at
spindle speed S or feedrate V and drills to the next infeed depth.
4. Steps 2 and 3 are repeated until the programmed final drilling
depth Z1 is reached.
5. The direction of rotation of the spindle reverses and the tool
retracts to the safety distance at spindle speed SR or cut rate VR.
Chipbreaking

1. The tool drills at the programmed spindle speed S or feedrate V as
far as the first infeed depth (maximum infeed depth D).
2. The tool retracts by the retraction amount V2 for chipbreaking.
3. The tool then drills to the next infeed depth at spindle speed S or
feedrate V.
4. Steps 2 and 3 are repeated until the programmed final drilling
depth Z1 is reached.
5. The direction of rotation of the spindle reverses and the tool
retracts to the safety distance at spindle speed SR or cut rate VR.
5

01/2008 ShopTurn functions
5.2 Drilling

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition 5-167
The machine manufacturer may have made specific settings for
centered tapping in a machine data code.
Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.



Thread
centric >

¾ Press the "Drilling" and "Thread centric" softkeys.

Parameter Description Unit
T, D, F, S, V See Section "Creating program blocks".
P Thread pitch
The pitch is determined by the tool used.
mm/rev
in/rev
Turns/"
MODULE
1 cut
Stock removal
Chipbreaking
The thread is drilled in one cut without stopping.
The drill is retracted from the workpiece for stock removal.
The drill is retracted by the retraction amount V2 for chipbreaking.

Z0 Reference point (abs) mm
Z1 Tapping depth with reference to Z0 (abs. or inc.) mm
D Maximum infeed (for stock removal or chipbreaking only) mm
V2 Retraction amount (for chipbreaking only)
Amount by which the tap is retracted for chipbreaking.
V2=automatic: The tool is retracted by one revolution.
mm

5.2.3 Drilling and reaming
The "Drilling" and "Reaming" functions are used when you want to
program various drill holes on the end face or peripheral surface.

The tool is moved at rapid traverse to the programmed position,
allowing for the retraction plane and safety distance.
Centering

1. The tool is inserted into the workpiece at the programmed feedrate
F until it reaches the depth or diameter.
2. On expiry of dwell time DT, the tool is retracted at rapid traverse to
the safety clearance.
Drilling

1. The tool is inserted into the workpiece at programmed feedrate (F)
until it reaches the depth X1 or Z1.
2. On expiry of dwell time DT, the tool is retracted at rapid traverse to
the safety clearance.
Reaming

1. The tool is inserted into the workpiece at programmed feedrate (F)
until it reaches the depth X1 or Z1.
2. On expiry of dwell time DT, the tool is retracted at the programmed
feedrate to the safety clearance.

5

ShopTurn functions 01/2008
5.2 Drilling

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
5-168 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition


Drilling
reaming >

¾ Press the "Drilling" and "Drilling reaming" softkeys.

Centering
-or-
Drilling

-or-
Reaming

¾ Press the "Centering", "Drilling" or "Reaming" softkey.

Parameter Description Unit
T, D, F, S, V See Section "Creating program blocks".
FB Retraction feedrate (for reaming only) mm/min
Position Select from 8 different positions:
• End face/End face C – Front
• End face/End face C – Rear
• Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Inner
• Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Outer
• End face Y – Front (only when Y axis exists)
• End face Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists)
• Peripheral surface Y – Inner (only when Y axis exists)
• Peripheral surface Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists)



Clamp/release spindle
The function must be set up by the machine manufacturer.

Diameter


Shank

Tip
The tool is inserted into the workpiece until the diameter of the tool reaches the
workpiece surface. The angle of the center drill specified in the tool list is taken into
account (only for centering).
The drill is inserted into the workpiece until the drill shank reaches the programmed
depth 1. The angle specified in the tool list is taken into account (only for drilling).
The drill is inserted into the workpiece until the drill tip reaches programmed depth 1
(only for centering and drilling).

∅ Diameter of centering (only for centering – diameter) mm
Z1 Insertion depth for the drill tip or the drill shank with reference to Z0
(abs. or inc.) – (only for end face/end face C and end face Y)
mm
X1 Insertion depth for the drill tip or the drill shank with reference to Z0
(abs. or inc.) – (only for peripheral surface/peripheral surface C and peripheral
surface Y)
mm
DT Dwell time before retraction to release from cut s
rev

5

01/2008 ShopTurn functions
5.2 Drilling

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition 5-169
5.2.4 Deep hole drilling
The "Deep hole drilling" function is used when you want to drill deep
holes with several infeed steps on the end face or peripheral surface.

You can choose between chip breakage during drilling or retraction
from the workpiece for stock removal.
The tool is moved at rapid traverse to the programmed position,
allowing for the retraction plane and safety distance.
Chipbreaking

1. The tool drills at the programmed feedrate F as far as the first
infeed depth.
2. The tool is retracted by retraction amount V2 for chipbreaking and
drills up to the next infeed depth.
3. Step 2 is repeated until final drilling depth Z1 has been reached
and dwell time DT has expired.
4. The tool moves back to the safety distance at rapid traverse.

Stock removal

1. The tool drills at the programmed feedrate F as far as the first
infeed depth.
2. The tool is retracted from the workpiece at rapid traverse to the
safety distance for stock removal and is then re-inserted as far as
the 1st infeed depth, reduced by a clearance distance V3.
3. Following this, drilling is then resumed up to the next infeed depth
and the tool is then retracted again.
4. Step 3 is repeated until the programmed end drilling depth Z1 has
been reached and dwell time DT has expired.
5. The tool moves back to the safety distance at rapid traverse.



Deep hole
drilling >

¾ Press the "Drilling" and "Deep hole drilling" softkeys.

5

ShopTurn functions 01/2008
5.2 Drilling

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
5-170 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition
Parameter Description Unit
T, D, F, S, V See Section "Creating program blocks".
Position Select from 8 different positions:
• End face/End face C – Front
• End face/End face C – Rear
• Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Inner
• Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Outer
• End face Y – Front (only when Y axis exists)
• End face Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists)
• Peripheral surface Y – Inner (only when Y axis exists)
• Peripheral surface Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists)



Clamp/release spindle
The function must be set up by the machine manufacturer.

Stock removal
Chipbreaking
The drill is retracted from the workpiece for stock removal.
The drill is retracted by the retraction amount V2 for chipbreaking.

Shank

Tip
The drill is inserted into the workpiece until the drill shank reaches the programmed
depth 1.
The insertion angle entered in the tool list is applied.
The drill is inserted into the workpiece until the drill tip reaches the programmed
depth 1.

Z1 Insertion depth for drill tip or drill shank with reference to Z0.
(abs. or inc.) – (only for end face/end face C and end face Y)
mm
X1 Insertion depth for drill tip or drill shank with reference to X0.
(abs. or inc.) – (only for peripheral surface/peripheral surface C and peripheral
surface Y)
mm
D Maximum infeed mm
DF Percentage for each additional infeed
DF = 100: Amount of infeed remains constant
DF < 100: Amount of infeed is reduced in direction of final drilling depth.
Example: DF = 80
Last infeed was 4 mm;
4 x 80% = 3.2; next infeed increment is 3.2 mm
3.2 x 80% = 2.56; next infeed increment is 2.56 mm, etc.
%
V1 Minimum infeed
Parameter V1 is available only if DF<100% has been programmed.
If the amount of infeed is very small a minimum infeed can be programmed with
parameter V1.
V1 < Amount of infeed: Infeed with infeed value.
V1 < Amount of infeed: Infeed with the value programmed in V1.
mm
V2 Retraction amount (for chipbreaking only)
Amount by which the drill is retracted for chipbreaking.
V2=0: The tool is not retracted but is left in place for one revolution.
mm
V3 Limit distance (for stock removal only)
Distance to last infeed depth that the drill approaches at rapid traverse after stock
removal.
Automatic: The clearance distance is calculated by ShopTurn.
mm
DT Dwell time for release cut s
rev

5

01/2008 ShopTurn functions
5.2 Drilling

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition 5-171
5.2.5 Tapping
The "Tapping" function is used when you want to tap an internal
thread on the end face or peripheral surface.

The spindle speed can be changed with the spindle override during
tapping. The feedrate override has no effect during this process.
You can select drilling in one cut, chipbreaking or retraction from the
workpiece for stock removal.
The tool is moved at rapid traverse to the programmed position,
allowing for the retraction plane and safety distance.
While the spindle is stationary, the tool moves at rapid traverse to the
retraction plane and then to the safety distance.
At this point, the spindle begins to rotate and the spindle speed and
feedrate are synchronized.
The tool continues to move at rapid traverse towards the programmed
position.
1 cut 1. The tool drills at the programmed spindle speed S or cut rate V as
far as the tapping depth X1 or Z1.
2. The direction of rotation of the spindle reverses and the tool
retracts to the safety distance at the programmed spindle speed
SR or cut rate VR.
Stock removal

1. The tool drills at the programmed spindle speed S or feedrate V
as far as the first infeed depth (maximum infeed depth D).
2. The tool retracts from the workpiece to the safety distance at
spindle speed SR or cut rate VR for stock removal.
3. Then the tool enters the workpiece again at spindle speed SR and
feedrate VR to the 1st infeed depth with an anticipation point of
1 mm. The spindle speed changes to S and the feedrate to V, and
the tool then drills to the next infeed depth.
4. Steps 2 and 3 are repeated until the programmed final drilling
depth X1 or Z1 is reached.
5. The direction of rotation of the spindle reverses and the tool
retracts to the safety distance at spindle speed SR or cut rate VR.
Chipbreaking

1. The tool drills at the programmed spindle speed S or feedrate V
as far as the first infeed depth (maximum infeed depth D).
2. The tool retracts by the retraction amount V2 for chipbreaking.
3. The tool then drills to the next infeed depth at spindle speed S or
feedrate V.
4. Steps 2 and 3 are repeated until the programmed final drilling
depth X1 or Z1 is reached.
5. The direction of rotation of the spindle reverses and the tool
retracts to the safety distance at spindle speed SR or cut rate VR.
5

ShopTurn functions 01/2008
5.2 Drilling

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
5-172 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition
The machine manufacturer may have made specific settings for
tapping in a machine data element.
Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.



Thread
>

Tapping

¾ Press the "Drilling", "Thread", and "Tapping" softkeys.

Parameter Description Unit
T, D, S, V See Section "Creating program blocks".
P Thread pitch
The pitch is determined by the tool used.
MODULE: Used with endless screws, for example, which extend into a gear wheel.
Filets/" : Used with pipe threads, for example.
For values entered in turns/", enter the integer in front of the decimal point in the first
parameter field and the figures after the decimal point as a fraction in the second
and third field.
For example, 13.5 turns/" is entered as follows:
mm/rev
in/rev
Turns/"
MODULE
SR Spindle speed for retraction rev/min
VR Cutting rate for retraction (alternative to SR) m/min
Position Select from 8 different positions:
• End face/End face C – Front
• End face/End face C – Rear
• Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Inner
• Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Outer
• End face Y – Front (only when Y axis exists)
• End face Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists)
• Peripheral surface Y – Inner (only when Y axis exists)
• Peripheral surface Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists)



Clamp/release spindle
The function must be set up by the machine manufacturer.

1 cut
Stock removal
Chipbreaking
The thread is drilled in one cut without stopping.
The drill is retracted from the workpiece for stock removal.
The drill is retracted by the retraction amount V2 for chipbreaking.

Z1 Tapping depth with reference to Z0 (abs. or inc.) – (only for end face/end face C and
end face Y)
mm
X1 Tapping depth with reference to X0 (abs. or inc.) – (only for peripheral
surface/peripheral surface C and peripheral surface Y)
mm

5

01/2008 ShopTurn functions
5.2 Drilling

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition 5-173
D Maximum infeed (for stock removal or chipbreaking only) mm
V2 Retraction amount (for chipbreaking only)
Amount by which the drill is retracted for chipbreaking.
V2=automatic: The tool is retracted by one revolution.
mm

5.2.6 Thread milling
The "Thread milling" function is used when you want to mill an internal
or external thread on the end face.

For metric threads (thread pitch P in mm/rev) ShopTurn assigns a
value calculated from the thread pitch to the Thread depth K
parameter. You can change this value.
The default selection must be activated via a machine data element.

Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.
The entered feedrate refers to the machining. However the feedrate of
the cutter center point is displayed. That is why a smaller value is
displayed for internal threads and a larger value is displayed for
external threads than was entered.

You can mill a right-hand thread or a left-hand thread.

Internal thread

1. The tool is moved at rapid traverse to the thread center point on
the return plane, and then to the safety clearance.
2. The tool describes an approach circle calculated by the control and
then approaches the thread diameter at the programmed feedrate
along a helical path.
3. The thread is cut along a helical path in clockwise or
counterclockwise direction (depending on whether it is a left-hand
or right-hand thread).
4. The tool is retracted from the workpiece along a helical path at the
programmed feedrate.
5. The tool moves back to the safety clearance at rapid traverse.
External thread

1. The tool is moved at rapid traverse to the starting point on the
return plane, and then to the safety clearance.
2. The tool describes an approach circle calculated by the control and
then approaches the thread diameter at the programmed feedrate
along a helical path.
3. The thread is cut along a helical path in clockwise or
counterclockwise direction (depending on whether it is a left-hand
or right-hand thread).
4. The tool is retracted from the thread along a helical path at the
programmed feedrate.
5. The tool moves back to the safety clearance at rapid traverse.

5

ShopTurn functions 01/2008
5.2 Drilling

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
5-174 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition


Thread
>

Thread
drilling

¾ Press the "Drilling", "Thread" and "Thread drilling" softkeys.

Parameter Description Unit
T, D, F, S, V See Section "Creating program blocks".
Position Select from 6 different positions:
• End face/End face C – Front
• End face/End face C – Rear
• End face Y – Front (only when Y axis exists)
• End face Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists)
• Peripheral surface Y – Inner (only when Y axis exists)
• Peripheral surface Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists)



Clamp/release spindle (for End face Y/Peripheral surface Y only)
The function must be set up by the machine manufacturer.

Machining
protection
Roughing
Finishing

Direction Depending on the rotational direction of the spindle, a change in direction also
changes the machining direction (climb/conventional).
Z0 to Z1: Machining starts at workpiece surface Z0
(only for end face/end face C and end face Y)
Z1 to Z0: Machining starts at the thread depth
(only for end face/end face C and end face Y)
X0 to X1: Machining starts at workpiece surface X0
(only for peripheral surface Y)
X1 to X0: Machining starts at the thread depth (only for peripheral surface Y)

Internal thread
External
thread
Internal thread
External thread

Left-hand
thread
Right-hand
thread
Left-hand thread

Right-hand thread

NT Number of teeth in a milling insert.
Single or multiple toothed milling inserts can be used. The motions required are
executed by the cycle internally, so that the tip of the bottom tooth on the milling
insert corresponds to the programmed end position when the thread end position is
reached. Depending on the cutting edge geometry of the milling insert, the retraction
path must be taken into account at the base of the workpiece.

Z1 Thread length (abs. or inc.) – (only for end face/end face C and end face Y) mm
X1 Thread length (abs. or inc.) – (only for peripheral surface Y) mm
∅ Nominal thread diameter, example: nominal thread diameter of M12=12mm mm
P Thread pitch
If the cutter has several teeth, the thread pitch is determined by the tool.
mm/rev
in/rev
Turns/"
MODULE
5

01/2008 ShopTurn functions
5.2 Drilling

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition 5-175
K Thread depth mm
DXY Infeed per cut (for roughing only) – (only for end face/end face C and end face Y)
Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm)
mm
%
DYZ Infeed per cut (for roughing only) – (only for peripheral surface Y)
Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm)
mm
%
U Final machining allowance (for roughing only) mm
α0 Start angle Degrees

5.2.7 Positioning and position patterns
The drilling positions must be programmed after you have
programmed the drilling technologies (centering, tapping, etc.).

The following position patterns are available:
• Freely programmable positions
• Positioning on a line, matrix, or box
• Position on a full or pitch circle
You can program several position patterns in succession (up to 20
technologies and position patterns together). They are traversed in the
order in which you program them.
The programmed technologies and subsequently programmed
positions are automatically chained by the control.
Sequence of execution 1. The first tool in the program (e.g. centering tool) initially traverses
all programmed positions.
Machining of the positions always starts at the reference point.
In the case of a matrix, machining is performed first in the direction
of the 1st axis and then back and forth.
The box and hole circle are machined counterclockwise.
2. All programmed positions are then machined with the second tool
in the program.
3. This procedure is repeated until each programmed technology has
been executed at all of the programmed positions.
Tool traverse path Within a position pattern, or while approaching the next position
pattern, the tool is retracted to the safety distance and the new
position or position pattern is then approached at rapid traverse.
Including/skipping
positions
You can include or skip any positions (see chapter titled "Including
and skipping positions").

5

ShopTurn functions 01/2008
5.2 Drilling

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
5-176 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition
5.2.8 Freely programmable positions
You can use the "Freely programmable positions" function to program
any number of positions on the peripheral surface or end face.

ShopTurn approaches the individual positions in the order in which
you enter them.
In a program block, you can specify up to 8 positions. To program
other freely programmable positions, you must call the "Freely
programmable positions" function again.



Positions
>


¾ Press the "Drilling", "Positions" and "Freely Programmable
Positions" softkeys.

Delete all

¾ Press the "Delete all" softkey if you want to delete all the
programmed positions.

Parameter Description Unit
Position Select from 8 different positions:
• End face/End face C – Front
• End face/End face C – Rear
• Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Inner
• Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Outer
• End face Y – Front (only when Y axis exists)
• End face Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists)
• Peripheral surface Y – Inner (only when Y axis exists)
• Peripheral surface Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists)

Cartesian/
polar
Cartesian/
cylindrical
Dimensioning in Cartesian coordinates or polar coordinates
(only for end face/end face C and end face Y)
Dimensioning in Cartesian coordinates or cylinder coordinates
(only for peripheral surface/peripheral surface C)
mm

mm

Z0
CP
X0
Y0
X1 ... X7

Y1 ...Y7
End face/end face C and end face Y - Cartesian:
Z coordinate of the reference point (abs.)
Positioning angle for machining area (only for end face Y)
X coordinate for first position (abs.)
Y coordinate for first position (abs.)
X coordinate for further positions (abs. or inc.)
Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.
Y coordinate for further positions (abs. or inc.)
Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.

mm
Degrees
mm
mm
mm

mm

5

01/2008 ShopTurn functions
5.2 Drilling

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition 5-177

Z0
CP
C0
L0
C1...C7

L1...L7
End face/end face C and end face Y - Polar:
Z coordinate of the reference point (abs.)
Positioning angle for machining area (only for end face Y)
C coordinate for first position (abs.)
1st position of hole with reference to Y axis (abs.)
C coordinate for further positions (abs. or inc.)
Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.
Distance to position (abs. or inc.)
Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.

mm
Degrees
Degrees
mm
Degrees

mm

X0
Y0
Z0
Y1 ...Y7

Z1 ... Z7
Peripheral surface/peripheral surface C - Cartesian:
Cylinder diameter ∅ (abs.)
Y coordinate for first position (abs.)
Z coordinate for first position (abs.)
Y coordinate for further positions (abs. or inc.)
Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.
Z coordinate for further positions (abs. or inc.)
Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.

mm
mm
mm
mm

mm

C0
Z0
C1...C7

Z1 ... Z7
Peripheral surface/peripheral surface C - Cylindrical
C coordinate for first position (abs.)
1st position of hole with reference to Z axis (abs.)
C coordinate for further positions (abs. or inc.)
Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.
Further positions in the Z axis (abs. or inc.)
Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.

Degrees
mm
Degrees

mm

X0
C0
Y0
Z0
Y1 ...Y7

Z1 ... Z7
Peripheral surface Y:
Reference point in X direction (abs)
Reference point
Y coordinate for first position (abs.)
Z coordinate for first position (abs.)
Y coordinate for further positions (abs. or inc.)
Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.
Z coordinate for further positions (abs. or inc.)
Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.

mm
Degrees
mm
mm
mm

mm

5

ShopTurn functions 01/2008
5.2 Drilling

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
5-178 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition
5.2.9 Line position pattern
The "Line position pattern" function is used to program any number of
positions that lie equidistant on a line.



Positions
>


¾ Press the "Drilling", "Positions" and "Line/Matrix/Box" softkeys.


¾ Select the “Line” position pattern in the "Line/Matrix/Box”
parameter field.

Parameter Description Unit
Position Select from 8 different positions:
• End face/End face C – Front
• End face/End face C – Rear
• Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Inner
• Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Outer
• End face Y – Front (only when Y axis exists)
• End face Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists)
• Peripheral surface Y – Inner (only when Y axis exists)
• Peripheral surface Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists)


Z0
X0
Y0
α0
End face/End face C:
Z coordinate of the reference point (abs.)
X coordinate of the reference point – first position (abs.)
Y coordinate of the reference point – first position (abs.)
Angle of rotation of line in relation to the X axis
Positive angle: Line is rotated counterclockwise.
Negative angle: Line is rotated clockwise.

mm
mm
mm
Degrees

X0
Y0
Z0
α0
Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C:
Cylinder diameter ∅ (abs.)
Y coordinate of the reference point – first position (abs.)
Z coordinate of the reference point – first position (abs.)
Angle of rotation of line with reference to Y axis
Positive angle: Line is rotated counterclockwise.
Negative angle: Line is rotated clockwise.

mm
mm
mm
Degrees

Z0
CP
X0
Y0
α0
End face Y:
Z coordinate of the reference point (abs.)
Positioning angle for machining area
X coordinate of the reference point – first position (abs.)
Y coordinate of the reference point – first position (abs.)
Angle of rotation of line in relation to the X axis
Positive angle: Line is rotated counterclockwise.
Negative angle: Line is rotated clockwise.

mm
Degrees
mm
mm
Degrees
5

01/2008 ShopTurn functions
5.2 Drilling

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition 5-179

X0
C0
Y0
Z0
α0
Peripheral surface Y:
X coordinate of the reference point (abs.)
Reference point
Y coordinate of the reference point – first position (abs.)
Z coordinate of the reference point – first position (abs.)
Angle of rotation of line with reference to Y axis
Positive angle: Line is rotated counterclockwise.
Negative angle: Line is rotated clockwise.

mm
Degrees
mm
mm
Degrees
L Position spacing mm
N Number of positions

5.2.10 Matrix position pattern
The "Matrix position pattern" function is used to program any number
of positions that lie equidistant on several parallel straight lines.
If you want to program a rhombus-shaped matrix, enter the angle αX
or αY.



Positions
>


¾ Press the "Drilling", "Positions" and "Line/Matrix/Box" softkeys.


¾ Select the “Matrix” position pattern in the "Line/Matrix/Box”
parameter field.

Parameter Description Unit
Position Select from 8 different positions:
• End face/End face C – Front
• End face/End face C – Rear
• Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Inner
• Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Outer
• End face Y – Front (only when Y axis exists)
• End face Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists)
• Peripheral surface Y – Inner (only when Y axis exists)
• Peripheral surface Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists)


5

ShopTurn functions 01/2008
5.2 Drilling

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
5-180 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition

Z0
X0
Y0
α0


αX


αY


L1
L2
N1
N2
End face/End face C:
Z coordinate of the reference point (abs.)
X coordinate of the reference point – first position (abs.)
Y coordinate of the reference point – first position (abs.)
Angle of rotation of matrix
Positive angle: Matrix is rotated counterclockwise.
Negative angle: Matrix is rotated clockwise.
Shear angle of matrix relative to X axis
Positive angle: Matrix is rotated counterclockwise.
Negative angle: Matrix is rotated clockwise.
Shear angle of matrix relative to Y axis
Positive angle: Matrix is rotated counterclockwise.
Negative angle: Matrix is rotated clockwise.
Column spacing in X direction
Line spacing in Y direction
Number of columns in X direction
Number of lines in Y direction

mm
mm
mm
Degrees


Degrees


Degrees


mm
mm


X0
Y0
Z0
α0


αX


αY


L1
L2
N1
N2
Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C:
Cylinder diameter ∅ (abs.)
Y coordinate of the reference point – first position (abs.)
Z coordinate of the reference point – first position (abs.)
Angle of rotation of matrix
Positive angle: Matrix is rotated counter-clockwise
Negative angle: Matrix is rotated in CW direction.
Shear angle of matrix relative to X axis
Positive angle: Matrix is rotated counter-clockwise
Negative angle: Matrix is rotated in CW direction.
Shear angle of matrix relative to Y axis
Positive angle: Matrix is rotated counter-clockwise
Negative angle: Matrix is rotated in CW direction.
Column spacing in Y direction
Line spacing in Z direction
Number of columns in Y direction
Number of lines in Z direction

mm
mm
mm
Degrees


Degrees


Degrees


mm
mm

5

01/2008 ShopTurn functions
5.2 Drilling

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition 5-181

Z0
CP
X0
Y0
α0


αX


αY


L1
L2
N1
N2
End face Y:
Z coordinate of the reference point (abs.)
Positioning angle for machining area
X coordinate of the reference point – first position (abs.)
Y coordinate of the reference point – first position (abs.)
Angle of rotation of matrix
Positive angle: Matrix is rotated counter-clockwise
Negative angle: Matrix is rotated in CW direction.
Shear angle of matrix relative to X axis
Positive angle: Matrix is rotated counter-clockwise
Negative angle: Matrix is rotated in CW direction.
Shear angle of matrix relative to Y axis
Positive angle: Matrix is rotated counter-clockwise
Negative angle: Matrix is rotated in CW direction.
Column spacing in X direction
Line spacing in Y direction
Number of columns in X direction
Number of lines in Y direction

mm
Degrees
mm
mm
Degrees


Degrees


Degrees


mm
mm

X0
C0
Y0
Z0
α0


αX


αY


L1
L2
N1
N2
Peripheral surface Y:
X coordinate of the reference point (abs.)
Reference point
Y coordinate of the reference point – first position (abs.)
Z coordinate of the reference point – first position (abs.)
Angle of rotation of matrix
Positive angle: Matrix is rotated counterclockwise.
Negative angle: Matrix is rotated clockwise.
Shear angle of matrix relative to X axis
Positive angle: Matrix is rotated counter-clockwise
Negative angle: Matrix is rotated in CW direction.
Shear angle of matrix relative to X axis
Positive angle: Matrix is rotated counter-clockwise
Negative angle: Matrix is rotated in CW direction.
Column spacing in Y direction
Line spacing in Z direction
Number of columns in Y direction
Number of lines in Z direction

mm
Degrees
mm
mm
Degrees


Degrees


Degrees


mm
mm


5

ShopTurn functions 01/2008
5.2 Drilling

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
5-182 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition
5.2.11 Box position pattern
You can use this function to program any number of positions spaced
at an equal distance along on a box. The spacing may be different on
both axes.
If you want to program a rhombus-shaped box, enter the angle αX or
αY.



Positions
>


¾ Press the "Drilling", "Positions" and "Line/Matrix/Box" softkeys.


¾ Select the “Box” position pattern in the "Line/Matrix/Box”
parameter field.

Parameter Description Unit
Position Select from 8 different positions:
• End face/End face C – Front
• End face/End face C – Rear
• Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Inner
• Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Outer
• End face Y – Front (only when Y axis exists)
• End face Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists)
• Peripheral surface Y – Inner (only when Y axis exists)
• Peripheral surface Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists)


Z0
X0
Y0
α0


αX


αY


L1
L2
N1
N2
End face/End face C:
Z coordinate of the reference point (abs.)
X coordinate of the reference point – first position (abs.)
Y coordinate of the reference point – first position (abs.)
Angle of rotation of box
Positive angle: Box is rotated counterclockwise.
Negative angle: Box is rotated clockwise.
Shear angle of box relative to X axis
Positive angle: Box is rotated counterclockwise.
Negative angle: Box is rotated clockwise.
Shear angle of box relative to Y axis
Positive angle: Box is rotated counterclockwise.
Negative angle: Box is rotated clockwise.
Column spacing in X direction
Line spacing in Y direction
Number of columns in X direction
Number of lines in Y direction

mm
mm
mm
Degrees


Degrees


Degrees


mm
mm


5

01/2008 ShopTurn functions
5.2 Drilling

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition 5-183

X0
Y0
Z0
α0


αX


αY


L1
L2
N1
N2
Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C:
Cylinder diameter ∅ (abs.)
Y coordinate of the reference point – first position (abs.)
Z coordinate of the reference point – first position (abs.)
Angle of rotation of box
Positive angle: Box is rotated counterclockwise
Negative angle: Box is rotated clockwise
Shear angle of box relative to X axis
Positive angle: Box is rotated counterclockwise
Negative angle: Box is rotated clockwise
Shear angle of box relative to Y axis
Positive angle: Box is rotated counterclockwise
Negative angle: Box is rotated clockwise
Column spacing in Y direction
Line spacing in Z direction
Number of columns in Y direction
Number of lines in Z direction

mm
mm
mm
Degrees


Degrees


Degrees



mm
mm


Z0
CP
X0
Y0
α0


αX


αY


L1
L2
N1
N2
End face Y:
Z coordinate of the reference point (abs.)
Positioning angle for machining area
X coordinate of the reference point – first position (abs.)
Y coordinate of the reference point – first position (abs.)
Angle of rotation of box
Positive angle: Box is rotated counterclockwise
Negative angle: Box is rotated clockwise
Shear angle of box relative to X axis
Positive angle: Box is rotated counterclockwise
Negative angle: Box is rotated clockwise
Shear angle of box relative to Y axis
Positive angle: Box is rotated counterclockwise
Negative angle: Box is rotated clockwise
Column spacing in X direction
Line spacing in Y direction
Number of columns in X direction
Number of lines in Y direction

mm
Degrees
mm
mm
Degrees


Degrees


Degrees


mm
mm
5

ShopTurn functions 01/2008
5.2 Drilling

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
5-184 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition

X0
C0
Y0
Z0
α0


αX


αY


L1
L2
N1
N2
Peripheral surface Y:
X coordinate of the reference point (abs.)
Reference point
Y coordinate of the reference point – first position (abs.)
Z coordinate of the reference point – first position (abs.)
Angle of rotation of box
Positive angle: Box is rotated counterclockwise
Negative angle: Box is rotated clockwise
Shear angle of box relative to X axis
Positive angle: Box is rotated counterclockwise
Negative angle: Box is rotated clockwise
Shear angle of box relative to Y axis
Positive angle: Box is rotated counterclockwise
Negative angle: Box is rotated clockwise
Column spacing in Y direction
Line spacing in Z direction
Number of columns in Y direction
Number of lines in Z direction

mm
Degrees
mm
mm
Degrees


Degrees


Degrees


mm
mm


5.2.12 Full circle position pattern
The "Full circle position pattern" function is used to program any
number of positions that lie on a circle with a defined radius.

ShopTurn calculates the distance (angle) between the individual
positions from the number of positions. This distance is always the
same.
You can choose whether the tool should approach the next position
on a straight line or circular path. The rapid traverse feedrate for
positioning on a circular path is defined in a machine date code.
Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.
If you approach the next position in a straight line in a circumferential
groove, a collision may result.

Approach next position
on a straight line
Approach next position
in a circle



Approach positions on a linear or circular path
5

01/2008 ShopTurn functions
5.2 Drilling

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition 5-185


Positions
>


¾ Press the "Drilling", "Positions" and "Full/Pitch Circle" softkeys.


¾ Select the “Full circle” position pattern in the "Full/Pitch Circle”
parameter field.

Parameter Description Unit
Position Select from 8 different positions:
• End face/End face C – Front
• End face/End face C – Rear
• Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Inner
• Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Outer
• End face Y – Front (only when Y axis exists)
• End face Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists)
• Peripheral surface Y – Inner (only when Y axis exists)
• Peripheral surface Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists)


centered
off-center
Z0
X0
Y0
α0


R
End face/End face C:
Position full circle centered on the end face
Position full circle off-center on the end face
Z coordinate of the reference point (abs.)
X coordinate of the reference point (abs.) – (only for off-center)
Y coordinate of the reference point (abs.) – (only for off-center)
Starting angle: Angle of 1st hole with reference to X axis.
Positive angle: Full circle is rotated counterclockwise.
Negative angle: Full circle is rotated in clockwise direction.
Radius of full circle



mm
mm
mm
Degrees


mm

X0
Z0
α0

Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C:
Cylinder diameter ∅ (abs.)
Z coordinate of the reference point (abs.)
Starting angle: Angle of 1st hole with reference to Y axis.
Positive angle: Full circle is rotated counterclockwise.
Negative angle: Full circle is rotated in clockwise direction.

mm
mm
Degrees



centered
off-center
Z0
CP
X0
Y0
C0
L0
α0


R
Positioning


End face Y:
Position full circle centered on the end face
Position full circle off-center on the end face
Z coordinate of the reference point (abs.)
Positioning angle for machining area
X coordinate of reference point (abs.) – (for off-center only) (alternative to C0)
Y coordinate of reference point (abs.) – (for off-center only) (alternative to L0)
Reference point (abs.) – (for off-center only) (alternative to X0)
Reference point (abs.) – (for off-center only) (alternative to Y0)
Starting angle: Angle of 1st hole with reference to X axis.
Positive angle: Full circle is rotated counterclockwise.
Negative angle: Full circle is rotated in clockwise direction.
Radius of full circle
Linear: Next position is approached linearly at rapid traverse.
Circular: Next position is approached along a circular path at the feedrate defined in
a machine data code.



mm
Degrees
mm
mm
mm
mm
Degrees


mm



5

ShopTurn functions 01/2008
5.2 Drilling

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
5-186 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition

X0
C0
Y0
Z0
α0


R
Positioning


Peripheral surface Y:
X coordinate of the reference point (abs.)
Reference point
Y coordinate of the reference point (abs.)
Z coordinate of the reference point (abs.)
Starting angle: Angle of 1st hole with reference to Y axis.
Positive angle: Full circle is rotated counterclockwise.
Negative angle: Full circle is rotated in clockwise direction.
Radius of full circle
Linear: Next position is approached linearly at rapid traverse.
Circular: Next position is approached along a circular path at the feedrate defined in
a machine data code.

mm
Degrees
mm
mm
Degrees


mm



N Number of positions on full circle

5.2.13 Pitch circle position pattern
The "Pitch circle position pattern" function is used to program any
number of positions that lie on a pitch circle with a defined radius.

You can specify whether the tool should approach the next position
along a straight line or circular path (for detailed description, see
Section "Full circle position pattern").



Positions
>


¾ Press the "Drilling", "Positions" and "Full/Pitch Circle" softkeys.


¾ Select the “Pitch Circle" position sample in the “Full/Pitch Circle”
parameter field.

Parameter Description Unit
Position Select from 8 different positions:
• End face/End face C – Front
• End face/End face C – Rear
• Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Inner
• Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Outer
• End face Y – Front (only when Y axis exists)
• End face Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists)
• Peripheral surface Y – Inner (only when Y axis exists)
• Peripheral surface Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists)

5

01/2008 ShopTurn functions
5.2 Drilling

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition 5-187

centered
off-center
Z0
X0
Y0
α0


R
End face/End face C:
Position full circle centered on the end face
Position full circle off-center on the end face
Z coordinate of the reference point (abs.)
X coordinate of the reference point (abs.) – (only for off-center)
Y coordinate of the reference point (abs.) – (only for off-center)
Starting angle: Angle of 1st hole with reference to X axis.
Positive angle: Full circle is rotated counterclockwise.
Negative angle: Full circle is rotated in clockwise direction.
Radius



mm
mm
mm
Degrees


mm

X0
Z0
α0


Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C:
Cylinder diameter ∅ (abs.)
Z coordinate of the reference point (abs.)
Starting angle: Angle of 1st hole with reference to Y axis.
Positive angle: Full circle is rotated counterclockwise.
Negative angle: Full circle is rotated in clockwise direction.

mm
mm
Degrees



centered
off-center
Z0
CP
X0
Y0
C0
L0
α0


R
Positioning


End face Y:
Position full circle centered on the end face.
Position full circle off-center on the end face.
Z coordinate of the reference point (abs.)
Positioning angle for machining area
X coordinate of reference point (abs.) – (for off-center only) (alternative to C0)
Y coordinate of reference point (abs.) – (for off-center only) (alternative to L0)
Reference point (abs.) – (for off-center only) (alternative to X0)
Reference point (abs.) – (for off-center only) (alternative to Y0)
Starting angle: Angle of 1st hole with reference to X axis.
Positive angle: Full circle is rotated counterclockwise.
Negative angle: Full circle is rotated in clockwise direction.
Radius
Linear: Next position is approached linearly at rapid traverse.
Circular: Next position is approached along a circular path at the feedrate defined in
a machine data code.



mm
Degrees
mm
mm
mm
mm
Degrees


mm




X0
C0
Y0
Z0
α0


R
Positioning


Peripheral surface Y:
X coordinate of the reference point (abs.)
Reference point
Y coordinate of the reference point (abs.)
Z coordinate of the reference point (abs.)
Starting angle: Angle of 1st hole with reference to Y axis.
Positive angle: Full circle is rotated counterclockwise.
Negative angle: Full circle is rotated in clockwise direction.
Radius
Linear: Next position is approached linearly at rapid traverse.
Circular: Next position is approached along a circular path at the feedrate defined in
a machine data code.

mm
Degrees
mm
mm
Degrees


mm



α1 Advance angle; after the first hole has been drilled, all further positions are
approached at this angle.
Positive angle: Further positions are rotated in counterclockwise direction.
Negative angle: Further positions are rotated in clockwise direction.
Degrees
N Number of positions on pitch circle

5

ShopTurn functions 01/2008
5.2 Drilling

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
5-188 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition
5.2.14 Including and skipping positions
You can skip any positions in the following position patterns:
• Position pattern line
• Position pattern matrix
• Position pattern box
• Full circle position pattern
• Pitch circle position pattern

The suppressed positions are skipped during machining.

Including/skipping any
positions



Positions
>


¾ Press the "Drilling" and "Positions" softkeys.

or
¾ Press the "Line/Matrix/Box" or "Full/Pitch Circle" softkeys.

Skip pos.
>

¾ Press the "Skip pos." softkey.
The "Skip positions" window opens on top of the input form of the
position pattern.
The number of the current position is displayed along with its status
(on/off) and its coordinates (X, Y).
The current position is highlighted by a circle.
¾ Enter the number of the point you want to skip in the "Position"
field (in accordance with the machining sequence).
- OR -

Position
+


¾ Press the "Position +" softkey to select the next position (in the
machining direction).
- OR -

Position
-

¾ Press the "Position -" softkey to select the previous position
(opposite direction to the machining direction).


¾ Press the "Alternat." softkey to include or skip the current position.
The skipped positions are indicated by an enabled cross in the
graphic.

5

01/2008 ShopTurn functions
5.2 Drilling

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition 5-189
Including or skipping all
positions at once


Skip all


¾ Press the "Skip all" softkey to skip all positions.

Include all


¾ Press the "Include all" softkey to include all positions again.

5.2.15 Repeating positions
If you want to approach positions that you have already programmed
again, you can do this quickly with the function "Repeat position".

ShopTurn automatically allocates a number for each position pattern
and displays it next to the block number in the process plan.

Position pattern 001
Repeat position
pattern 001

Repeat position pattern



Repeat
position >

¾ Press the "Drilling", and "Repeat position" softkeys.
¾ Enter the number of the position pattern that you want to repeat.

5

ShopTurn functions 01/2008
5.3 Turning

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
5-190 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition
5.3 Turning
If your turning machine has a Y axis and if you want to work with a
position Y ≠ 0, proceed as follows:
1. Select the "Turning" machining level from the "Straight/Circle"
function group (see Section "Selecting the tool and the machining
plane").
2. Program a straight line to the required Y position using the
"Straight/Circle" function group (see Section "Straight").
3. Program the turning function.
The Y position is retained until you deactivate the "Turning" machining
plane.

5.3.1 Roughing cycles
The stock removal cycles are used to remove stock from corners at
external and internal contours in the longitudinal or transverse
direction.

You can select the machining mode (roughing, finishing).
Roughing In roughing applications, paraxial cuts are machined to the finishing
allowance that has been programmed. If no finishing allowance has
been programmed, the workpiece is roughed down to the final
contour.
During roughing, ShopTurn reduces the programmed infeed depth D if
necessary to make cuts of an equal size. For example, if the overall
infeed depth is 10 and you have specified an infeed depth of 3, this
would result in cuts of 3, 3, 3 and 1. ShopTurn would reduce the
infeed depth to 2.5 to create 4 cuts of equal size.
The angle between the contour and the tool cutting edge determines
whether the tool rounds the contour at the end of each cut by the
infeed depth D, in order to remove residual corners, or is raised
immediately.
The angle beyond which rounding is performed is stored in a machine
data element.
Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.
If the tool does not round the corner at the end of the cut, it is raised
by the safety distance or a value specified in the machine data at rapid
traverse. ShopTurn always observes the lower value, since otherwise
stock removal at inside contours, for example, could cause the
contour to be damaged.
Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.
5

01/2008 ShopTurn functions
5.3 Turning

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition 5-191
Finishing Finishing is performed in the same direction as roughing.
ShopTurn automatically selects and deselects tool radius
compensation during finishing.


Longitudinal stock removal from external
contour

Paraxial roughing
Approach/retraction 1. The tool is moved at rapid traverse to the retraction plane, followed
by the safety distance.
2. The tool moves to the first infeed depth at rapid traverse.
3. The first cut is made at machining feedrate.
4. The tool rounds the contour at machining feedrate or is raised at
rapid traverse (see "Roughing").
5. The tool is moved at rapid traverse to the starting point for the next
infeed depth.
6. The next cut is made at machining feedrate.
7. Steps 4 to 6 are repeated until the final depth is reached.
8. The tool moves back to the safety distance at rapid traverse.



Stock
removal >

¾ Press the "Turning" and "Stock removal" softkeys.





¾ Select one of the three stock removal cycles via the softkeys:
Simple stock removal cycle straight line
-or-
Stock removal cycle straight line with radii or chamfers
-or-
Stock removal cycle with oblique lines, radii or chamfers

5

ShopTurn functions 01/2008
5.3 Turning

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
5-192 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition
Parameter Description Unit
T, D, F, S, V See Section "Creating program blocks".
Machining
protection
Roughing
Finishing

Position Stock removal position:


Direction Roughing direction (flat or lengthwise) in the coordinate system:

Außen Innen
Z
X
parallel zur X-Achse (Plan) parallel zur Z-Achse (Längs)
Z
X
Z
X
Z
X
Stirnseite
Z
X
Z
X
Z
X
Z
X
Rückseite
parallel to Z axis (longitudinal)
Outside Inside Face Rear
parallel to X axis (plane)



X0 Reference point ∅ (abs) mm
Z0 Reference point (abs) mm
X1 End point ∅ (abs) or end point (inc) mm
Z1 End point (abs or inc) mm
D Infeed depth (inc) – (for roughing only) mm
UX Final machining allowance in X direction (inc) – (for roughing only) mm
UZ Final machining allowance in Z direction (inc) – (for roughing only) mm
FSn Chamfer (n=1 to 3) alternative to Rn mm
Rn Radius (n=1 to 3) alternative to FSn mm
Xm-Zm-α1-α2 Select which of the parameters Xm, Zm, α1 and α2 should be displayed – (only for
stock removal cycle with oblique lines, radii and chamfers)

Xm Intermediate point ∅ (abs) or intermediate point (inc) mm
Zm Intermediate point (abs or inc) mm
α1 Angle of first path (only for stock removal cycle with oblique lines, radii and
chamfers)
Degrees
α2 Angle of second path (only for stock removal cycle with oblique lines, radii and
chamfers)
Degrees

5

01/2008 ShopTurn functions
5.3 Turning

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition 5-193
5.3.2 Recessing cycles
Recessing cycles are used when you want to machine symmetrical
and asymmetrical grooves on any straight contour element.


Z
X

Inclined recess
You can machine outer or inner recesses in the longitudinal or
transverse directions.
Use the "Recess width" and "Recess depth" parameters to determine
the shape of the recess. If a recess is wider than the active tool, it is
machined in several cuts. The tool is moved by (a maximum of) 80%
of the tool width for each recess.
You can specify a finishing allowance for the recess base and the
flanks; roughing is then performed down to this point.
The dwell time between recessing and retraction is stored in a
machine data element.
Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.
Approach/retraction Roughing (infeed depth D > 0)

D
D
Safety clearance
(1)
(3)
(2)
(5)
(4)
(7) (6) (8)
D D + safety clearance
D + safety clearance

Machining steps in recessing
1. The tool is moved at rapid traverse to the retraction plane, followed
by the safety distance.
2. The tool cuts a recess in the center of infeed depth D (1).
3. The tool moves back by D + safety distance at rapid traverse.
4. The tool cuts a recess next to the first recess of infeed depth
2D (2).
5. The tool moves back by D + safety distance at rapid traverse.



5

ShopTurn functions 01/2008
5.3 Turning

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
5-194 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition
6. The tool cuts alternately in the first and second recess by the
infeed depth 2D, until the final depth T1 is reached (3) and (4).
Between the individual recesses, the tool moves back by D +
safety distance at rapid traverse. After the last recess, the tool is
retracted at rapid traverse to the safety distance.
7. All subsequent recess cuts are made alternately and directly down
to the final depth T1 (5) to (8). Between the individual recesses, the
tool moves back to the safety distance at rapid traverse.

Finishing
1. The tool is moved at rapid traverse to the retraction plane, followed
by the safety distance.
2. The tool moves at the machining feedrate down one flank and then
along the bottom to the center.
3. The tool moves back to the safety distance at rapid traverse.
4. The tool moves at the machining feedrate down the other flank and
then along the bottom to the center.
5. The tool moves back to the safety distance at rapid traverse.



Recess
>

¾ Press the "Turning" and "Recess" softkeys.





¾ Select one of the three recess cycles with the softkey:
Simple recessing cycle
-or-
Recessing cycle with oblique lines, radii or chamfers
-or-
Recessing on an incline with oblique lines, radii or chamfers
5

01/2008 ShopTurn functions
5.3 Turning

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition 5-195
Parameter Description Unit
T, D, F, S, V See Section "Creating program blocks".
Machining
protection
Roughing
Finishing
+ Complete machining

Position Recess position:


Reference
point
Reference point:


X0 Reference point ∅ (abs) mm
Z0 Reference point (abs) mm
B1 Recess width, bottom (inc) mm
B2 Recess width, top (inc) alternative to B1 – (only for recess with oblique lines and
radii)
mm
T1 Recess depth at reference point (abs or inc) mm
T2 Recess depth opposite reference point (abs or inc) alternative to T1 –
(only for inclined recess with oblique lines, radii and chamfers)
mm
α0 Angle of the incline on which the recess should be machined – (only for inclined
recess with oblique lines, radii and chamfers)
The angles can be between -180 and +180°
Longitudinal recess: α
0
= 0° ⇒ Parallel to the Z axis
Transverse recess: α
0
= 0° ⇒ Parallel to the X axis
A positive angle indicates rotation from the X axis to the Z axis
Degrees
α1, α2 Flank angle (not for simple recess cycle)
Asymmetrical recesses can be described by separate flank angles. The angles can
be between 0 and < 90°.
Degrees
FS Chamfer (n = 1 ... 4) alternative to R (not for simple recess cycle) mm
R Radius (n = 1 ... 4) alternative to FS (not for simple recess cycle) mm
D Infeed depth for 1st cut (inc) – (for roughing only)
D=0: 1st cut is made directly to final depth T1
D>0: The 1st and 2nd cuts are made alternately to infeed depth D
for improved chip clearance and
avoidance of tool breakage.

1 2
3
4
5
D
T1
D

All further cuts are made directly to final depth T1.
The lateral infeed for the alternate cuts is determined automatically in the cycle.
Alternate cutting is not possible if the tool can only reach the recess base at one
position.
mm
U Contour-parallel finishing allowance in X and Z direction (inc) – (roughing only) –
(alternative to UX and UZ)
mm
UX Finishing allowance in X direction (inc) – (roughing only) – (alternative to U) mm
5

ShopTurn functions 01/2008
5.3 Turning

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
5-196 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition
UZ Finishing allowance in Z direction (inc) – (roughing only) – (alternative to U) mm
N Number of recesses (N=1....65535)
P Distance between recesses (inc)
P is not displayed when N=1
mm

5.3.3 Undercut form E and F
The "Undercut form E" and "Undercut form F" are used when you
want to turn undercuts to DIN509 in form E or form F.

Approach/retraction 1. The tool is moved at rapid traverse to the retraction plane, followed
by the safety distance.
2. The undercut is made in one cut at machining feedrate, starting
from the flank through to the cross-feed V.
3. The tool moves back to the retraction plane at rapid traverse.


Undercut form E

Undercut form F



Undercut
>

¾ Press the "Turning" and "Undercut" softkeys.

Undercut
form E
-or-
Undercut
form F

¾ Press the "Undercut form E" or
"Undercut form F" softkey.

5

01/2008 ShopTurn functions
5.3 Turning

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition 5-197
Parameter Description Unit
T, D, F, S, V See Section "Creating program blocks".
Position Position of undercut form E:

Position of undercut form F:


Undercut size Undercut size according to DIN table:
Radius/depth, e.g.: E1.0x0.4 (undercut form E) or
F0.6x0.3 (undercut form F)

X0 Reference point for dimensioning ∅ (abs) mm
Z0 Reference point for dimensioning (abs) mm
X1 Allowance in X direction ∅ (abs) or allowance in X direction (inc) mm
Z1 Allowance in Z direction (abs or inc) – (for undercut form F only) mm
V Cross-feed X ∅ (abs) or cross-feed X (inc) mm

5.3.4 Thread undercuts
The "Thread undercut DIN" or "Thread undercut" functions are used
when you want to program thread undercuts to DIN 76 for workpieces
with metric ISO threads or freely-definable thread undercuts.

Approach/retraction 1. The tool is moved at rapid traverse to the retraction plane, followed
by the safety distance.
2. The first cut is made at the machining feedrate, starting from the
flank and traveling along the shape of the thread undercut as far as
the safety distance.
3. The tool moves to the next starting position at rapid traverse.
4. Steps 2 and 3 are repeated until the thread undercut is finished.
5. The tool moves back to the retraction plane at rapid traverse.
During finishing the tool travels as far as cross-feed V.



Thread undercut

5

ShopTurn functions 01/2008
5.3 Turning

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
5-198 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition


Undercut
>

¾ Press the "Turning" and "Undercut" softkeys.

Undercut
thread DIN
-or-
Undercut
thread

¾ Press the "Undercut thread DIN" or "Undercut thread" softkey.

Parameter Description Unit
T, D, F, S, V See Section "Creating program blocks".
Machining
protection
Roughing
Finishing
+ Complete machining

Position Position of thread undercut:


P Select the pitch from the preset DIN table or enter – (for "Thread undercut DIN" only) mm/rev
X0 Reference point ∅ (abs) mm
Z0 Reference point (abs) mm
X1 Allowance in X direction ∅ (abs) or
Allowance in X direction (inc) – (for "Thread undercut" only)
mm
Z1 Allowance in Z direction (abs or inc) – (for "Thread undercut" only) mm
R1,R2 Radius1, Radius2 (inc) – (for "Thread undercut" only) mm
α Insertion angle Degrees
V Cross-feed X ∅ (abs) or cross-feed X (inc) mm
D Infeed (inc) – (for roughing only) mm
U Contour-parallel finishing allowance in X and Z direction (inc) – (roughing only) –
(alternative to UX and UZ)
mm
UX Finishing allowance in X direction (inc) – (roughing only) – (alternative to U) mm
UZ Finishing allowance in Z direction (inc) – (roughing only) – (alternative to U) mm

5

01/2008 ShopTurn functions
5.3 Turning

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition 5-199
5.3.5 Thread cutting
The "Longitudinal thread", "Conical thread" and "Face thread"
functions are used when you want to cut external or internal threads
with constant or variable pitch.

There may be single or multiple threads.
You define a right or left-hand thread by the direction of spindle
rotation and the feed direction.
The infeed is performed automatically with a constant infeed depth or
constant cutting cross-section.
• With a constant infeed depth, the cutting cross-section increases
from cut to cut. The finishing allowance is machined in one cut
after roughing.
A constant infeed depth can produce better cutting conditions at
small thread depths.
• With a constant cutting cross-section, the cutting pressure
remains constant over all roughing cuts and the infeed depth is
reduced.
For metric threads (thread pitch P in mm/rev) ShopTurn assigns a
value calculated from the thread pitch to the Thread depth K
parameter. You can change this value.
The default selection must be activated via a machine data element.
Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.
The cycle requires a speed-controlled spindle with a position
measuring system.
Approach/retraction 1. The tool moves to the retraction plane at rapid traverse.
2. Thread with advance:
The tool moves at rapid traverse to the first starting position
displaced by the thread advance W.
Thread with run-in:
The tool moves at rapid traverse to the starting position displaced
by the thread run-in W2.
3. The first cut is made with thread pitch P as far as the thread run-
out R.
4. Thread with advance:
The tool moves at rapid traverse to the return distance V and then
to the next starting position.
Thread with run-in:
The tool moves at rapid traverse to the return distance V and then
back to the starting position.
5. Steps 3 and 4 are repeated until the thread is finished.
6. The tool moves back to the retraction plane at rapid traverse.
5

ShopTurn functions 01/2008
5.3 Turning

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
5-200 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition



Thread longitudinal
Thread machining can be stopped at any time thanks to the "Quick-
raise" function. It ensures that the tool does not damage the thread
when it is raised.



Thread
>

¾ Press the "Turning" and "Thread" softkeys.

Thread
long.
-or-
Thread
cone

-or-
Thread
face

¾ Press the "Thread long.", "Thread cone" or "Thread face" softkey.

Parameter Description Unit
T, D, S, V See Section "Creating program blocks".
P Thread pitch

mm/rev
in/rev
Turns/"
MODULE
G Pitch change – only for P= mm/rev or inch/rev
G = 0 The thread pitch P does not change.
G > 0 The thread pitch P increases by the value G per revolution.
G < 0 The thread pitch P decreases by the value G per revolution.
If the start and end pitch of the thread are known, the pitch change to be
programmed can be calculated as follows:
|P
e
2

- P
2
|
G = ⎯⎯⎯⎯⎯ [mm/rev
2
]
2*Z
1

The identifiers have the following meanings:
P
e
End pitch of thread [mm/rev]
P Start pitch of thread [mm/rev]
Z
1
Thread length [mm]
A larger pitch results in a larger distance between the threads on the workpieces.

5

01/2008 ShopTurn functions
5.3 Turning

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition 5-201
Linear:
Degressive:
Infeed with constant cutting depth (for roughing only)
Infeed with constant cutting cross-section (for roughing only)

Machining
protection
Roughing
Finishing
+ Complete machining

Internal thread
External thread
Internal thread
External thread

X0 Reference point for dimensioning ∅ (abs) mm
Z0 Reference point for dimensioning (abs) mm
X1/Xα Thread incline ∅ (abs or inc) – (for conical thread only)
Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.
mm/degr.
X1 Thread length ∅ (abs) or thread length (inc) – (for face thread only)
Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.
mm
Z1 Thread length (abs or inc) – (only for longitudinal and conical threads)
Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.
mm
W



W2


W2=R
Thread advance (inc)
The starting point for the thread is the reference point (X0, Z0) displaced by the
thread advance W. The thread advance can be used if you wish to begin the
individual cuts slightly earlier in order to produce a precise start of thread as well.
Thread run-in (inc)
The thread run-in can be used if you cannot approach the thread from the side and
instead have to insert the tool into the material (e.g. lubrication groove on a shaft).
Thread run-in = thread run-out (inc)
mm



mm


mm
R Thread run-out (inc)
The thread run-out can be used if you wish to retract the tool obliquely at the end of
the thread (e.g. lubrication groove on a shaft).
mm
K Thread depth (inc)
If the value is calculated by ShopTurn, the field is displayed with a gray background.
The value can still be changed, however, in which case the field is displayed with a
white background again.
The programmed final machining allowance U is subtracted from the preset thread
depth K and the remainder is segmented into a number of roughing cuts. The cycle
automatically calculates the individual current infeed depths as a function of the
specified cut segmentation.
mm
α Infeed slope as angle – alternative to infeed slope as flank
α > 0: Infeed along the rear flank
α < 0: Infeed along the front flank
α = 0: Infeed at right angles to cutting direction
If you wish to infeed along the flanks, the absolute value for this parameter must not
exceed half the flank angle of the tool.
Degrees
I Infeed slope as flank (inc) – alternative to infeed slope as angle
I > 0: Infeed along the rear flank
I < 0: Infeed along the front flank
mm




Infeed along the flank


Infeed with alternate flanks (alternative)
Instead of infeeding along one flank, you can infeed along alternate flanks to avoid
loading the same tool cutting edge at all times, and thus increase the tool life.

5

ShopTurn functions 01/2008
5.3 Turning

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
5-202 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition
α > 0: Start at rear flank
α < 0: Start at front flank
AS Number of roughing cuts or first infeed (for roughing only)
The respective value is displayed when you switch between the number of roughing
cuts and the first infeed.
mm
U Final machining allowance (inc) – (for roughing only) mm
NN Number of non-cuts (finishing only)
To improve the surface finish the tool moves along the thread depth K a further NN
times.

V Return distance (inc) mm
Q Starting angle offset for single-start threads, i.e. angle that determines the initial cut
of the start of thread on the circumference of the turned part (-360°<Q<360°).
E.g. Q = 30.0
The initial cut of the thread is at 30°.
Degrees

Multiple thread

The sequence of motions for single and multiple threads is
fundamentally the same.

¾ Place the cursor on parameter field "Q".


¾ Press the "Alternat." softkey.
Instead of parameter "Q", the parameters for a multiple thread are
displayed.

Parameter Description Unit
L Number of threads (max. 6)
The threads are distributed evenly across the periphery of the turned part; the first
thread is always placed at 0°.
If a multiple thread is to be machined with the first thread not starting at 0°, a cycle
must be programmed for each thread and the appropriate starting angle offset must
be entered for Q.

A Thread changeover depth (inc)
First machine all threads in sequence to thread change depth A, then machine all
threads in sequence to depth 2A, etc., until the final depth is reached.
A=0: Thread changeover depth is not taken into account, i.e. finish machining each
thread before starting the next thread.
mm
N 1 of L threads
N ≠ 0: Only machine thread N
N = 0: Machine all threads

P Start thread P = 1 ... L only when N=0
If P > 1, the previous threads are not taken into account.


5

01/2008 ShopTurn functions
5.3 Turning

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition 5-203
5.3.6 Thread re-machining
The "Thread re-machining" function is used if you want to machine a
thread again, e.g. if the tool cutting tip breaks while the thread is being
cut.

ShopTurn takes into account the angular offset of a thread that occurs
due to reclamping the workpiece.


Jog

¾ Switch the spindle off.
¾ Select "Machine Manual" mode.
¾ Thread the thread cutting tool into the thread groove.


Thread
>

¾ Press the "Turning" and "Thread" softkeys.

Sync.
Point

¾ Press the "Sync. Point" softkey when the thread cutting tool is
exactly in the thread groove.


¾ Press the "OK" softkey.
¾ Enter the value 0 in parameter field "Q" (starting angle offset).
¾ Press the "Accept" softkey.
¾ Move the thread cutting tool back until the reference point (X0, Z0)
can be reached without a collision.
¾ Load the program in "Machine Auto" mode (see Section
"Starting/stopping program execution").
¾ Place the cursor on the thread cutting program block.


Start
search run

¾ Press the "Block search" and "Start search run" softkeys.

Cycle Start


¾ Press the "Cycle Start" key.
ShopTurn sets all the necessary parameters.

Cycle Start

¾ Press the "Cycle Start" key again.
The new start position is approached and re-machining of the thread
starts. The angular offset is taken into account.

5

ShopTurn functions 01/2008
5.3 Turning

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
5-204 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition
5.3.7 Parting
The "Parting" function is used when you want to cut off dynamically
balanced parts (e.g. screws, bolts or barrels).

You can program a chamfer or rounding on the edge of the machined
part.
You can machine at a constant cutting rate V or speed S up to a depth
X1, from which point the workpiece is machined at a constant speed.
As of depth X1, you can also program a reduced feedrate FR or a
reduced speed SR, in order to adapt the velocity to the smaller
diameter.
Use parameter X2 to enter the final depth that you wish to reach with
parting. With pipes, for example, you do not need to part until you
reach the center; parting slightly more than the wall thickness of the
pipe is sufficient.
Approach/retraction 1. The tool is moved at rapid traverse to the retraction plane, followed
by the safety distance.
2. The chamfer or radius, if applicable, is created at the machining
feedrate.
3. Parting down to depth X1 is performed at the machining feedrate.
4. Parting is continued down to depth X2 at reduced feedrate FR and
reduced speed SR.
5. The tool moves back to the safety distance at rapid traverse.
If your turning machine is appropriately set up, you can extend a
workpiece drawer to accept the cut-off workpiece. Extension of the
workpiece drawer must be enabled in a machine data element.
Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

5

01/2008 ShopTurn functions
5.3 Turning

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition 5-205


Parting
>

¾ Press the "Turning" and "Parting" softkeys.

Parameter Description Unit
T, D, F, S, V See Section "Creating program blocks".
SV Speed limit for constant cutting rate (with V only) rev/min
X0 Reference point ∅ (abs) mm
Z0 Reference point (abs) mm
FS Chamfering, alternative to R mm
R Radius alternative to FS mm
X1 Depth for feedrate reduction ∅ (abs) or depth for feedrate reduction (inc) mm
FR Reduced feedrate mm/rev
SR Reduced speed rev/min
Parts gripper Yes: Extend workpiece drawer
No: Do not extend workpiece drawer

XM Depth to which the drawer must be extended (abs) mm
X2 Final depth ∅ (abs) or final depth (inc) mm


5

ShopTurn functions 01/2008
5.4 Contour turning

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
5-206 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition
5.4 Contour turning
The "Contour turning" function is used when you want to create and
cut complex contours. A contour comprises separate contour
elements, whereby at least two and up to 250 elements result in a
defined contour. You can also program chamfers, radii, undercuts or
tangential transitions between the contour elements.

The integrated contour calculator calculates the intersection points of
the individual contour elements taking into account the geometrical
relationships, which allows you to enter incompletely dimensioned
elements.
When you machine the contour, you can make allowance for a blank
contour which must be entered before the finished part contour. You
then choose one of the following machining technologies:
• Stock removal
• Grooving
• Plunge-turning
You can rough, remove residual material and finish for each of the
three technologies above.
For example, the programming procedure for stock removal is as
follows:
1. Enter unmachined-part contour
If you want to base cutting of the contour on a contour of an
unmachined part (instead of a cylinder or allowance), you have to
define the contour of the unmachined part before you define the
finished-part contour. You build up the unmachined-part contour
gradually from a series of different contour elements.
2. Enter finished-part contour
You build up the finished-part contour gradually from a series of
different contour elements.
3. Stock removal towards the contour (roughing)
The contour is machined in the longitudinal or transverse directions
or parallel to the contour.
4. Remove residual material (roughing)
During stock removal, ShopTurn automatically detects residual
material that has been left. A suitable tool will allow you to remove
this without having to machine the contour again.
5. Stock removal towards the contour (finishing)
If you programmed a finishing allowance for roughing, the contour
is machined again.
5

01/2008 ShopTurn functions
5.4 Contour turning

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition 5-207
All machining steps involved in the contour turning operation are
shown in the process plan in square brackets.


Example: Cut a contour

If your turning machine has a Y axis and if you want to work with a
position Y ≠ 0, proceed as follows:
1. Select the "Turning" machining level from the "Straight/Circle"
function group (see Section "Selecting the tool and the machining
plane").
2. Program a straight line to the required Y position using the
"Straight/Circle" function group (see Section "Straight").
3. Program the turning function.
The Y position is retained until you deactivate the "Turning" machining
plane.
5

ShopTurn functions 01/2008
5.4 Contour turning

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
5-208 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition
5.4.1 Representation of the contour
ShopTurn presents a contour as one program block in the process
plan. If you open this block, the individual contour elements are listed
symbolically and displayed in broken-line graphics.

Symbolic representation The individual contour elements are represented by symbols adjacent
to the graphics window. They appear in the order in which they were
entered.
Contour element Icon Description


Starting point

Start point of contour

Straight line up

Straight line down






Straight line in 90° matrix

Straight line in 90° matrix

Straight line left

Straight line right





Straight line in 90° matrix

Straight line in 90° matrix

Straight line in any
direction



Straight line with any gradient

Arc
Right

Arc
Left





Circle


Circle

Pole




Straight diagonal or
circle in polar coordinates
Finish contour END End of contour definition

The different color of the symbols indicates their status:
Foreground Background Description
- Red Cursor on new element
Black Red Cursor on current element
Black White Normal element
Red White Element not currently evaluated
(element will only be evaluated when
it is selected with the cursor)

5

01/2008 ShopTurn functions
5.4 Contour turning

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition 5-209

Graphical representation The progress of contour programming is shown in broken-line
graphics while the contour elements are being entered.


Graphical presentation of the contour during contour turning

When the contour element has been created, it can be displayed in
different line styles and colors:
• Black: Programmed contour
• Orange: Current contour element
• Green dashed: Alternative element
• Blue dotted: Partially defined element
The scaling of the coordinate system is adjusted automatically to
match the complete contour.
The symmetry axis of the contour is represented as a line with dots
and dashes.
The position of the coordinate system is displayed in the graphics
window.

5

ShopTurn functions 01/2008
5.4 Contour turning

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
5-210 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition
5.4.2 Creating a new contour
For each contour that you want to cut, you must create a new contour.

The first step in creating a contour is to specify a starting point.
ShopTurn automatically defines the end of the contour.
You have the option of beginning the contour with a transition element
to the blank. You can also enter any additional commands (up to
40 characters) in G code format for the start point.
Additional commands You can program feedrates and M commands, for example, with
additional G code commands (see also Section "Create exact contour
transitions" in Chapter "Create contour elements”). However, make
sure that the additional commands do not collide with the generated
G code of the contour. Therefore do not use any G code commands of
group 1 (G0, G1, G2, G3), no coordinates in the plane and no G code
commands that have to be programmed in a separate block.
If you want to create a contour that is similar to an existing contour,
you can copy the existing one, rename it and just alter selected
contour elements.
In contrast, if you want to use an identical contour at another place in
the program, you must not rename the copy. Changes to the one
contour will then automatically be applied to the other contour with the
same name.



New
contour >



¾ Press the "Cont. turn." and "New contour" softkeys.
¾ Enter a name for the new contour.
The contour name must be unique.


¾ Press the "OK" softkey.
The input form for the start point of the contour appears.
¾ Enter the parameters.


¾ Press the "Accept" softkey.
¾ Enter the individual contour elements (see Sec. "Creating contour
elements").

5

01/2008 ShopTurn functions
5.4 Contour turning

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition 5-211
Parameter Description Unit
X Start point in X direction ∅ (abs.) mm
Z Start point in Z direction (abs.) mm
FS: Chamfer as transition element at contour start
R: Radius as transition element at contour start
FS=0 or R=0: No transition element
mm
mm

Transition to
contour start
Location of transition element relative to contour start point


Additional
command
Additional G code commands; see above

5.4.3 Creating contour elements
When you have created a new contour and specified the start point,
you can define the individual elements that the contour comprises.

The following contour elements are available for the definition of a
contour:


• Straight vertical line


• Straight horizontal line


• Diagonal line


• Circle/arc
For each contour element, you must parameterize a separate screen
form. Parameter entry is supported by various "help displays" that
explain the parameters.
If you leave certain fields blank, ShopTurn assumes that the values
are unknown and attempts to calculate them from other parameters.
Conflicts may result if you enter more parameters than are absolutely
necessary for a contour. In such a case, try entering less parameters
and allowing ShopTurn to calculate as many parameters as possible.
Contour transition
elements

As the transition element between two contour elements, you can
select a radius or a chamfer or, in the case of linear contour elements,
an undercut. The transition is always appended to the end of a
contour element. The contour transition is selected in the
parameterization screen form of the contour element.
5

ShopTurn functions 01/2008
5.4 Contour turning

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
5-212 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition
You can use a contour transition element whenever there is an
intersection between two successive elements which can be
calculated from input values. Otherwise you must use the
"Straight/Circle" contour elements.
The contour end is an exception. Although there is no interface to
another element, you can still define a radius or a chamfer as a
transition element to the blank.
Additional commands

You can enter additional commands in the form of G code for each
contour element.
You can enter the additional commands (max. 40 characters) in the
extended parameterization screen form ("All parameters" softkey).
You can program feedrates and M commands, for example, using
additional G code commands. However, make sure that the additional
commands do not collide with the generated G code of the contour.
Therefore do not use any G code commands of group 1 (G0, G1, G2,
G3), no coordinates in the plane and no G code commands that have
to be programmed in a separate block.
Additional functions

The following additional functions are available for programming a
contour:
• Tangent to preceding element
You can program the transition to the preceding element as a
tangent.
• Dialog selection
If two different possible contours result from the parameters
entered thus far, one of the options must be selected.
• Close contour
From the current position, you can close the contour with a
straight line to the starting point.

Create exact contour
transitions
The contour is finished in continuous-path mode (G64). As a result,
contour transitions such as corners, chamfers or radii may not be
machined precisely.
To prevent this you have a choice of two different programming
options (using an additional command or programming a special
feedrate for the transition element).
• Additional command
For the contour illustrated below, first program the vertical straight
line and enter the additional command "G9" (Non-modal exact
stop) for the parameter. Then program the horizontal straight line.
The corner will be machined exactly, since the feedrate at the end
of the vertical straight line is briefly zero.
5

01/2008 ShopTurn functions
5.4 Contour turning

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition 5-213


G64
G9
Machining direction
Workpiece

Finishing contour edges
• Feedrate for transition element
If you have chosen a chamfer or a radius as the transition
element, enter a reduced feedrate in the "FRC" parameter. The
slower machining rate means that the transition element is turned
more accurately.

Creating a contour
element


...

¾ Select a contour element via softkey.
¾ Enter all the data available from the workpiece drawing in the
input form (e.g. length of straight line, target position, transition to
next element, angle of lead, etc.).


¾ Press the "Accept" softkey.
The contour element is added to the contour.
¾ Repeat the procedure until the contour is complete.


¾ Press the "Accept" softkey.
The programmed contour is transferred to the machining plan.


All
parameters

If you want to display further parameters for certain contour elements,
e.g. to enter additional commands, press the "All parameters" softkey.


5

ShopTurn functions 01/2008
5.4 Contour turning

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
5-214 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition
Tangent to preceding
element
When entering data for a contour element you can program the
transition to the preceding element as a tangent.

Tangent to
prec. elem.

¾ Press the "Tangent to prec. elem." softkey.
The angle to the preceding element α2 is set to 0°. The "tangential"
selection appears in the parameter input field.

Selecting a dialog When entering data for a contour element, there may be two different
contour options, one of which you have to select.

Select
dialog

¾ Press the "Select dialog" softkey to switch between the two
different contour options.
The selected contour appears in the graphics window as a solid black
line and the alternative contour appears as a dashed green line.
Close contour

A contour always has to be closed. If you do not wish to create all
contour elements from starting point to starting point, you can close
the contour from the current position to the starting point.

Close
contour

¾ Press the "Close contour" softkey.
ShopTurn inserts a straight line between your current position and the
starting point.

Transition element at
contour end
When you have created all contour elements, you can still define a
transition element to the blank at the end of the contour before you
transfer the contour to the process plan.
¾ Place the cursor on the last contour element.


¾ Press the "Right cursor" key.
The associated input screen form opens.
¾ Enter a transition element.


¾ Press the "Accept" softkey.

¾ Place the cursor on the contour end .


¾ Press the "Right cursor" key.
The associated input screen form opens.
¾ Choose the position you require for the transition element.


¾ Press the "Accept" softkey.
A transition element to the blank is added at the end of the contour.

5

01/2008 ShopTurn functions
5.4 Contour turning

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition 5-215
Parameter Description for contour element "straight line" Unit
X Target position in the X direction ∅ (abs.) or target position in the X direction (inc.)
Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.
mm
Z Target position in the Z direction (abs. or inc.)
Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.
mm
L Length of straight line mm
α1 Angle of lead with reference to the Z axis Degrees
α2 Angle to preceding element
Tangential transition: α2=0
Degrees
FB Feedrate for contour element "Straight line" mm/rev
Transition to
next element
FS: Chamfer as transition element to next contour element
R: Radius as transition element to next contour element
Undercut: Undercut (thread, DIN thread, Form E or Form F) as transition element to
the next contour element
mm
mm
Z1 Length 1 (inc.) – (thread only) mm
Z2 Length 2 (inc.) – (thread only) mm
R1 Radius 1 (inc.) – (thread only) mm
R2 Radius 2 (inc.) – (thread only) mm
T Depth (inc.) – (thread only) mm
P Pitch (for DIN thread only) mm/rev
α Insertion angle (for DIN thread only) Degrees
Undercut size Undercut size acc. to DIN table (for forms E and F only):
Radius/depth, e.g.: E1.0x0.4 (undercut form E) or
F0.6x0.3 (undercut form F)

FRC Feedrate for transition element chamfer or radius mm/rev
CA Allowance for subsequent grinding mm



Grinding allowance to right of contour (viewed from starting point)
Grinding allowance to left of contour (viewed from starting point)

Additional
command
Additional G code commands; see above

Parameter Description for contour element "circle" Unit
Direction of
rotation
Clockwise rotation
Counterclockwise rotation

R Radius of circle mm
X Target position in the X direction ∅ (abs.) or target position in the X direction (inc.)
Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.
mm
Z Target position in the Z direction (abs. or inc.)
Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.
mm
I Position of circle center point in X direction ∅ (abs.) or
Position of circle center point in X direction (inc.)
Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.
mm
K Position of circle center point in Z direction (abs. or inc.)
Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.
mm
5

ShopTurn functions 01/2008
5.4 Contour turning

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
5-216 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition
α1 Start angle with reference to Z axis Degrees
α2 Angle to preceding element
Tangential transition: α2=0
Degrees
β1 End angle with reference to Z axis Degrees
β2 Angle of aperture of circle Degrees
FB Feedrate for circle contour element mm/rev
Transition to
next element
FS: Chamfer as transition element to next contour element
R: Radius as transition element to next contour element
mm
mm
FRC Feedrate for transition element chamfer or radius mm/rev
CA Allowance for subsequent grinding mm



Grinding allowance to right of contour (viewed from starting point)
Grinding allowance to left of contour (viewed from starting point)

Additional
command
Additional G code commands; see above

Parameter Description for end of contour Unit
Transition to
contour end
Location of transition element relative to contour end point


5.4.4 Changing a contour
You can change a previously created contour later.
Individual contour elements can be
• appended,
• modified,
• inserted or
• deleted.

If your program contains two contours of the same name, changes to
the one contour are automatically applied to the second contour with
the same name.

Append contour element

¾ Select the contour in the machining plan.


¾ Press the "Right cursor" key.
The individual contour elements are listed.
¾ Place the cursor on the last element before the end of the contour.

...
¾ Select the required contour element via softkey.
¾ Enter the parameters in the input screen.


¾ Press the "Accept" softkey.
The required contour element is appended to the contour.


5

01/2008 ShopTurn functions
5.4 Contour turning

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition 5-217
Modifying contour
element

¾ Select the contour in the machining plan.


¾ Press the "Right cursor" key.
The individual contour elements are listed.
¾ Position the cursor on the contour element that you want to
modify.


¾ Press the "Right cursor" key.
The associated input form is opened and an enlarged view of the
selected element appears in the programming graphics.
¾ Enter the desired changes.


¾ Press the "Accept" softkey.
The current values for the contour element are accepted and the
change is immediately visible in the programming graphics.


Changing dialog
selection

If when you entered the data for a contour element there were two
different contour options and you chose the wrong one, you can alter
your choice afterwards. If the contour is unique as a result of other
parameters, the system will not prompt you to make a selection.
¾ Open the input screen form for the contour element.

Change
selection

¾ Press the "Change selection" softkey.
The two selection options appear again.

Select
dialog

¾ Press the "Select dialog" softkey to switch between the two
different contour options.

Accept
dialog

¾ Press the "Accept dialog" softkey.
The chosen alternative is accepted.


Insert a contour element

¾ Select the contour in the machining plan.


¾ Press the "Right cursor" key.
The individual contour elements are listed.
¾ Place the cursor on the contour element after which the new
element is to be inserted.

...
¾ Select a new contour element via softkey.
¾ Enter the parameters in the input screen.
5

ShopTurn functions 01/2008
5.4 Contour turning

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
5-218 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition


¾ Press the "Accept" softkey.
The contour element is inserted in the contour. Subsequent contour
elements are updated automatically according to the new contour
status.
Delete contour element

¾ Select the contour in the machining plan.


¾ Press the "Right cursor" key.
The individual contour elements are listed.
¾ Place the cursor on the contour element that you want to delete.

Delete
element

¾ Press the "Delete element" softkey.


¾ Press the "OK" softkey.
The selected contour element is deleted.

5.4.5 Stock removal
You can use the "Stock removal" function to machine contours in the
longitudinal or transverse direction or parallel to the contour.

Stock removal
Before you can machine the contour, you must enter the contour.

Blank For stock removal, ShopTurn can start from a blank that is defined as
a cylinder, an allowance on the finished-part contour or any
unmachined-part contour. You must define an unmachined-part
contour as a separate closed contour in advance of the finished-part
contour.
If the blank and finished-part contours do not intersect, ShopTurn
defines the boundary between blank and finished part.
If the angle between the straight line and the Z axis is greater than 1°,
the boundary is placed at the top and if the angle is less than or equal
to 1°, the boundary is placed at the side.
5

01/2008 ShopTurn functions
5.4 Contour turning

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition 5-219

Contour finish
Unmachined part
Finished part
α
α > 1: Finish to top
X
Z
α =45°
Boundary between unmachined and finished parts at the top


Contour finish
Unmachined part
Finished part
α
α ≤ 1: Finish to side
X
Z
α = − 45°
Boundary between unmachined and finished parts at the side
Alternating cutting depth

Instead of working with constant cutting depth D, you can use an
alternating cutting depth to vary the load on the tool edge and thus
increase the tool life.

First cut
Second cut
D
D
D - 10%
D - 10%
Alternating cutting depth

The percentage for alternating cutting depth is stored in a machine
data code.
Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.
5

ShopTurn functions 01/2008
5.4 Contour turning

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
5-220 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition
Rounding at the contour

In order to avoid residual corners during roughing, you can enable the
"Always round the contour" function. This will remove the protrusions
that are always left at the end with each cut (due to the cut geometry).
The "Do not round contour" setting accelerates machining of the
contour. However, any resulting residual corners will not be
recognized or machined. Thus, it is imperative that you check the
behavior before machining using the simulation.
When set to "automatic", rounding is always performed if the angle
between the cutting edge and the contour exceeds a certain value.
The angle is set in a machine data code.
Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.
Cut segmentation

To avoid the occurrence of very thin cuts in cut segmentation due to
contour edges, you can align the cut segmentation to the contour
edges. During machining the contour is then divided by the edges into
individual sections and cut segmentation is performed separately for
each section.
Set machining area
limits

If, for example, you want to machine a certain area of the contour with
a different tool, you can set machining area limits so that machining
only takes place in the area of the contour you have selected.
You can define between 1 and 4 limit lines.
Feed interruption

To prevent the occurrence of excessively long chips during machining,
you can program a feed interruption. Parameter DI specifies the
distance after which the feed interruption should occur.
The interruption time or retraction distance is defined in machine data.
Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.
Machining method You can select the machining mode (roughing or finishing). During
contour roughing, parallel cuts of maximum infeed depth are created.
Roughing is performed up to the final machining allowance
programmed.
You can also specify a compensation allowance U1 for finishing
operations, which allows you to either finish several times (positive
allowance) or to shrink the contour (negative allowance).
Finishing is performed in the same direction as roughing.
5

01/2008 ShopTurn functions
5.4 Contour turning

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition 5-221
If you want to rough and then finish, you have to call the machining
cycle twice (Block 1 = roughing, Block 2 = finishing). The programmed
parameters are retained when the cycle is called for the second time.
If you want to finish a contour more than once, you must program the
machining cycle a corresponding number of times.



Stock
removal

¾ Press the "Cont. turn." and "Stock removal" softkeys.

Parameter Description Unit
T, D, F, S, V See Section "Creating program blocks".
Machining
protection
Roughing
Finishing

Stock removal
direction
Stock removal direction: Longitudinal, transverse or parallel to contour.
Machining side Machining side:
For stock removal direction longitudinal and parallel to contour: external or internal
For stock removal direction transverse and parallel to contour: end face or rear side

Machining
direction
Machining direction:
↑: From inside to outside
↓: From outside to inside
←: From end face to rear side
→: From rear side to end face
The machining direction depends on the stock removal direction and choice of tool.

D Infeed depth for roughing (inc.) mm
DX Infeed depth for roughing in X direction (inc) – (for parallel to contour alternative to D
only)
mm
DZ Infeed depth for roughing in Z direction (inc) – (for parallel to contour alternative to D
only)
mm




Do not round contour at end of cut
Always round contour at end of cut
Round contour automatically at end of cut




Equal cut segmentation
Align cut segmentation to edges




Constant cutting depth
Alternating cutting depth - (only with align cut segmentation to edges)


5

ShopTurn functions 01/2008
5.4 Contour turning

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
5-222 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition
U Finishing allowance in X and Z direction (inc) – (roughing only) – (alternative to UX
and UZ)
mm
UX Finishing allowance in X direction (inc) – (roughing only) – (alternative to U) mm
UZ Finishing allowance in Z direction (inc) – (roughing only) – (alternative to U) mm
Stock
allowance
Compensation allowance for contour or not – (finishing only)
U1 Compensation allowance in X and Z direction (inc) – (with allowance only)
Positive value: Compensation allowance is not removed
Negative value: Compensation allowance is removed in addition to finishing
allowance
mm
DI Distance after which feed interruption occurs - (only for roughing) mm
BL Description of unmachined part: Cylinder. allowance or contour (only for roughing)
XD Allowance or cylinder dimension in X direction ∅ (abs.) – (for cylinder only)
Allowance or cylinder dimension in X direction (inc.) – (for cylinder only)
Allowance based on contour in X direction (inc.) – (for allowance only)
mm
ZD Allowance or cylinder dimension in Z direction (abs. or inc.) – (for cylinder only)
Allowance based on contour in Z direction (inc.) – (for allowance only)
mm
Set machining
area limits
Limit machining area or not
XA Limit X (abs) – (with limited machining area only) mm
XB Limit X (abs or inc) – (with limited machining area only) mm
ZA Limit Z (abs) – (with limited machining area only) mm
ZB Limit Z (abs or inc) – (with limited machining area only) mm
Relief cuts Machine relief cut elements or not
FR Insertion feedrate relief cut mm/rev

5.4.6 Stock removal of residual material
The "Residual material" function is used when you want to machine
the material that remained after stock removal along the contour.

During stock removal along the contour, ShopTurn automatically
detects any residual material and generates an updated blank
contour. Material that remains as part of the finishing allowance is not
residual material. The "Residual material" function allows you to
remove unwanted material with a suitable tool.
The "Residual material" function is a software option.



St. remov.
resid.

¾ Press the "Cont. turn." and "St. remov. resid." softkeys.
5

01/2008 ShopTurn functions
5.4 Contour turning

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition 5-223
Parameter Description Unit
T, D, F, S, V See Section "Creating program blocks".
Machining
protection
Roughing
Finishing

Stock removal
direction
Stock removal direction: longitudinal, transverse or parallel to contour.
Machining side Machining side:
For stock removal direction longitudinal and parallel to contour: external or internal
For stock removal direction transverse and parallel to contour: end face or rear side

Machining
direction
Machining direction:
↑: From inside to outside
↓: From outside to inside
←: From end face to rear side
→: From rear side to end face
The machining direction depends on the stock removal direction.

D Infeed depth for roughing (inc.) mm
DX Infeed depth for roughing in X direction (inc) – (for parallel to contour alternative to D
only)
mm
DZ Infeed depth for roughing in Z direction (inc) – (for parallel to contour alternative to D
only)
mm




Do not round contour at end of cut
Always round contour at end of cut
Round contour automatically at end of cut




Equal cut segmentation
Align cut segmentation to edges




Constant cutting depth
Alternating cutting depth - (only with align cut segmentation to edges)

U Finishing allowance in X and Z direction (inc) – (roughing only) – (alternative to UX
and UZ)
mm
UX Finishing allowance in X direction (inc) – (roughing only) – (alternative to U) mm
UZ Finishing allowance in Z direction (inc) – (roughing only) – (alternative to U) mm
Stock
allowance
Compensation allowance for contour or not – (finishing only)
U1 Compensation allowance in X and Z direction (inc) – (with allowance only)
Positive value: Compensation allowance is not removed
Negative value: Compens. allowance is removed in addition to finishing allowance
mm
DI Distance after which feed interruption occurs - (only for roughing) mm
Set machining
area limits
Limit machining area or not
XA Limit X (abs) – (with limited machining area only) mm
XB Limit X (abs or inc) – (with limited machining area only) mm
ZA Limit Z (abs) – (with limited machining area only) mm
ZB Limit Z (abs or inc) – (with limited machining area only) mm
Relief cuts Machine relief cut elements or not
FR Insertion feedrate relief cut mm/rev

5

ShopTurn functions 01/2008
5.4 Contour turning

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
5-224 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition
5.4.7 Grooving
The "Grooving" function is used to machine grooves of any shape.

Grooving

Before you program the groove, you must define the groove contour.

If a recess is wider than the active tool, it is machined in several cuts.
The tool is moved by (a maximum of) 80% of the tool width for each
recess.
Blank With grooving, ShopTurn can start from a blank that is defined as a
cylinder, an allowance on the finished-part contour or any blank
contour.
Set machining area
limits
If, for example, you want to machine a certain area of the contour with
a different tool, you can set machining area limits so that machining
only takes place in the area of the contour you have selected.
Feed interruption To prevent the occurrence of excessively long chips during machining,
you can program a feed interruption.
Machining method You can select the machining mode (roughing or finishing).
For more detailed information, please refer to section "Stock removal"
in each case.

5

01/2008 ShopTurn functions
5.4 Contour turning

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition 5-225


Grooving

¾ Press the "Cont. turn." and "Grooving" softkeys.

Parameter Description Unit
T, D, F, S, V See Section "Creating program blocks".
Machining
protection
Roughing
Finishing

Stock removal
direction
Stock removal direction: Longitudinal or transverse
Machining side Machining side:
For stock removal in longitudinal direction: external or internal
For stock removal in transverse direction: end face or rear side

D Infeed depth for roughing (inc.) mm
XDA 1st grooving limit tool (inc) – (end face or rear face only) mm
XDB 2nd grooving limit tool (inc) – (end face or rear face only) mm
U Finishing allowance in X and Z direction (inc) – (roughing only) – (alternative to UX
and UZ)
mm
UX Finishing allowance in X direction (inc) – (roughing only) – (alternative to U) mm
UZ Finishing allowance in Z direction (inc) – (roughing only) – (alternative to U) mm
Stock
allowance
Compensation allowance for contour or not – (finishing only)
U1 Compensation allowance in X and Z direction (inc) – (with allowance only)
Positive value: Compensation allowance is not removed
Negative value: Compensation allowance is removed in addition to finishing
allowance
mm
DI Distance after which feed interruption occurs - (only for roughing) mm
BL Description of unmachined part: Cylinder. allowance or contour (only for roughing)
XD Allowance or cylinder dimension in X direction ∅ (abs.) – (for cylinder only)
Allowance or cylinder dimension in X direction (inc.) – (for cylinder only)
Allowance based on contour in X direction (inc.) – (for allowance only)
mm
ZD Allowance or cylinder dimension in Z direction (abs. or inc.) – (for cylinder only)
Allowance based on contour in Z direction (inc.) – (for allowance only)
mm
Set machining
area limits
Limit machining area or not
XA Limit X (abs) – (with limited machining area only) mm
XB Limit X (abs or inc) – (with limited machining area only) mm
ZA Limit Z (abs) – (with limited machining area only) mm
ZB Limit Z (abs or inc) – (with limited machining area only) mm
N Number of grooves

5

ShopTurn functions 01/2008
5.4 Contour turning

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
5-226 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition
5.4.8 Grooving residual material
The "Grooving residual material" function is used when you want to
machine the material that remained after grooving along the contour.

During grooving, ShopTurn detects automatically any residual material
and generates an updated blank contour. Material that remains as
part of the finishing allowance is not residual material. The "Grooving
residual material" function allows you to remove unwanted material
with a suitable tool.
The "Grooving residual material" function is a software option.



Grooving
resid.

¾ Press the "Cont. turn." and "Grooving resid." softkeys.

Parameter Description Unit
T, D, F, S, V See Section "Creating program blocks".
Machining
protection
Roughing
Finishing

Stock removal
direction
Stock removal direction: Longitudinal or transverse
Machining side Machining side:
For stock removal in longitudinal direction: external or internal
For stock removal in transverse direction: end face or rear side

D Infeed depth for roughing (inc.) mm
XDA 1st grooving limit tool (inc) – (end face or rear face only) mm
XDB 2nd grooving limit tool (inc) – (end face or rear face only) mm
U Finishing allowance in X and Z direction (inc) – (roughing only) – (alternative to UX
and UZ)
mm
UX Finishing allowance in X direction (inc) – (roughing only) – (alternative to U) mm
UZ Finishing allowance in Z direction (inc) – (roughing only) – (alternative to U) mm
Stock allow. Compensation allowance for contour or not – (finishing only)
U1 Compensation allowance in X and Z direction (inc) – (with allowance only)
Positive value: Compensation allowance is not removed
Negative value: Compens. allowance is removed in addition to finishing allowance
mm
DI Distance after which feed interruption occurs - (only for roughing) mm
Set machining
area limits
Limit machining area or not
XA Limit X (abs) – (with limited machining area only) mm
XB Limit X (abs or inc) – (with limited machining area only) mm
ZA Limit Z (abs) – (with limited machining area only) mm
ZB Limit Z (abs or inc) – (with limited machining area only) mm
N Number of grooves

5

01/2008 ShopTurn functions
5.4 Contour turning

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition 5-227
5.4.9 Plunge-turning
The "Plunge-turning" function is used to machine grooves of any
shape.
In contrast to grooving, the plunge-turning function removes material
on the sides after the groove has been machined in order to reduce
machining time. Unlike grooving, the plunge-turning function allows
you to machine contours that the tool must enter vertically.

Plunge-turning

You will need a special tool for plunge-turning.
Before you program the "Plunge-turning" cycle, you must define the
contour.

Blank With plunge-turning, ShopTurn can start from a blank that is defined
as a cylinder, an allowance on the finished-part contour or any
unmachined-part contour.
Set machining area
limits
If, for example, you want to machine a certain area of the contour with
a different tool, you can set machining area limits so that machining
only takes place in the area of the contour you have selected.
Feed interruption To prevent the occurrence of excessively long chips during machining,
you can program a feed interruption.
Machining method You can select the machining mode (roughing or finishing).
For more detailed information, please refer to section "Stock removal"
in each case.

5

ShopTurn functions 01/2008
5.4 Contour turning

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
5-228 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition


Plunge-
turning

¾ Press the "Cont. turn." and "Plunge-turning" softkeys.

Parameter Description Unit
T, D, S, V See Section "Creating program blocks".
FX Feed in X direction mm/rev
FZ Feed in Z direction mm/rev
Machining
protection
Roughing
Finishing

Stock removal
direction
Stock removal direction: Longitudinal or transverse
Machining side Machining side:
For stock removal in longitudinal direction: external or internal
For stock removal in transverse direction: end face or rear side

D Infeed depth for roughing (inc.) mm
XDA 1st grooving limit tool (inc) – (end face or rear face only) mm
XDB 2nd grooving limit tool (inc) – (end face or rear face only) mm
U Finishing allowance in X and Z direction (inc) – (roughing only) – (alternative to UX
and UZ)
mm
UX Finishing allowance in X direction (inc) – (roughing only) – (alternative to U) mm
UZ Finishing allowance in Z direction (inc) – (roughing only) – (alternative to U) mm
Stock
allowance
Compensation allowance for contour or not – (finishing only)
U1 Compensation allowance in X and Z direction (inc) – (with allowance only)
Positive value: Compensation allowance is not removed
Negative value: Compensation allowance is removed in addition to finishing
allowance
mm
DI Distance after which feed interruption occurs - (only for roughing) mm
BL Description of unmachined part: Cylinder. allowance or contour (only for roughing)
XD Allowance or cylinder dimension in X direction ∅ (abs.) – (for cylinder only)
Allowance or cylinder dimension in X direction (inc.) – (for cylinder only)
Allowance based on contour in X direction (inc.) – (for allowance only)
mm
ZD Allowance or cylinder dimension in Z direction (abs. or inc.) – (for cylinder only)
Allowance based on contour in Z direction (inc.) – (for allowance only)
mm
Set machining
area limits
Limit machining area or not
XA Limit X (abs) – (with limited machining area only) mm
XB Limit X (abs or inc) – (with limited machining area only) mm
ZA Limit Z (abs) – (with limited machining area only) mm
ZB Limit Z (abs or inc) – (with limited machining area only) mm
N Number of grooves

5

01/2008 ShopTurn functions
5.4 Contour turning

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition 5-229
5.4.10 Plunge-turning residual material
The "Plunge-turning residual material" function is used when you want
to machine the material that remained after grooving along the
contour.

During plunge-turning, ShopTurn automatically detects any residual
material and generates an updated blank contour. Material that
remains as part of the finishing allowance is not residual material. The
"Plunge-turning residual material" function allows you to remove
unwanted material with a suitable tool.
The "Plunge-turning residual material" function is a software option.



Plunge-turn.
resid.

¾ Press the "Cont. turn." and "Plunge-turn. resid." softkeys.

Parameter Description Unit
T, D, S, V See Section "Creating program blocks".
FX Feed in X direction mm/rev
FZ Feed in Z direction mm/rev
Machining
protection
Roughing
Finishing

Stock removal
direction
Stock removal direction: Longitudinal or transverse
Machining side Machining side:
For stock removal in longitudinal direction: external or internal
For stock removal in transverse direction: end face or rear side

D Infeed depth for roughing (inc.) mm
XDA 1st grooving limit tool (inc) – (end face or rear face only) mm
XDB 2nd grooving limit tool (inc) – (end face or rear face only) mm
U Finishing allowance in X and Z direction (inc) – (roughing only) – (alternative to UX
and UZ)
mm
UX Finishing allowance in X direction (inc) – (roughing only) – (alternative to U) mm
UZ Finishing allowance in Z direction (inc) – (roughing only) – (alternative to U) mm
Stock
allowance
Compensation allowance for contour or not – (finishing only)

5

ShopTurn functions 01/2008
5.4 Contour turning

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
5-230 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition
U1 Compensation allowance in X and Z direction (inc) – (with allowance only)
Positive value: Compensation allowance is not removed
Negative value: Compensation allowance is removed in addition to finishing
allowance
mm
DI Distance after which feed interruption occurs - (only for roughing) mm
Set machining
area limits
Limit machining area or not
XA Limit X (abs) – (with limited machining area only) mm
XB Limit X (abs or inc) – (with limited machining area only) mm
ZA Limit Z (abs) – (with limited machining area only) mm
ZB Limit Z (abs or inc) – (with limited machining area only) mm
N Number of grooves


5

01/2008 ShopTurn functions
5.5 Milling

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition 5-231
5.5 Milling
The functions explained in this section are used when you want to mill
simple geometric shapes on the end face or peripheral surface.

The following geometric shapes are available for milling:
• Rectangular pocket
• Circular pocket
• Rectangular spigot
• Circular spigot
• Longitudinal slot
• Circumferential slot
• Open slot
• Multiple edge
• Engraving
To mill pockets, spigots or slots at one position only, enter the position
in the technology block. If you want to mill these shapes at more than
one position, however, you must program the positions or position
pattern in a separate block after the technology block.
The technology block and the positioning block are shown in the
process plan in square brackets.


Example: Milling

Clamping a spindle When milling, it can be useful, for example, during vertical insertion
into the material, to clamp the spindle to avoid spindle distortions. The
"Clamp spindle" function must be set up by the machine manufacturer.
The machine manufacturer also specifies whether ShopTurn will
clamp the spindle automatically if this would facilitate machining, or if
you can decide the types of machining for which the spindle should be
clamped.
Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.
5

ShopTurn functions 01/2008
5.5 Milling

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
5-232 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition
If you are to decide the types of machining for which the spindle is to
be clamped, the following applies:
You should note that when machining in planes End face/End face C
and Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C, clamping is automatically
released after insertion. When machining in planes End face Y
and Peripheral surface Y, on the other hand, clamping is modal,
i.e. it remains activated until the machining plane is changed or
clamping is deselected in the "Straight circle" Æ "Tool" menu.

5.5.1 Rectangular pocket
The "Rectangular pocket" function is used when you want to mill any
rectangular pocket on the end face or peripheral surface.

The following machining methods are available:
• Milling rectangular pocket from solid material
• Pre-drilling a rectangular pocket in the center first if, for example,
the milling cutter does not cut across the center (program the
drilling, rectangular pocket and position program blocks one after
the other).
Approach/retraction 1. The tool approaches the center point of the pocket at rapid
traverse at the height of the retraction plane and adjusts to the
safety clearance.
2. The tool is inserted into the material according to the method
selected.
3. The pocket is always machined from inside out using the selected
machining method.
4. The tool moves back to the safety distance at rapid traverse.

5

01/2008 ShopTurn functions
5.5 Milling

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition 5-233
Machining method You can select the machining mode for milling the rectangular pocket
as follows:
• Roughing
In "Roughing" mode, the individual planes of the pocket are
machined one after another from inside out until depth Z1 or X1 is
reached.
• Finishing
In "Finishing" mode, the edge is always machined first. The pocket
edge is approached on the quadrant that joins the corner radius.
During the last infeed, the base is finished from the center out.
• Edge finishing
Edge finishing is performed in the same way as finishing, except
that the last infeed (finish base) is omitted.
• Chamfer
Chamfering involves edge breaking at the upper edge of the
pocket.



Pocket
>

Rectangu-
lar pocket

¾ Press the "Milling", "Pocket" and "Rectangular pocket" softkeys.
If you want to mill a chamfer and the corner radius was R = 0 during
finishing, you must specify the radius of the finishing milling tool in
parameter R during chamfering.

Parameter Description Unit
T, D, F, S, V See Section "Creating program blocks".
Position Select from 8 different positions:
• End face/End face C – Front
• End face/End face C – Rear
• Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Inner
• Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Outer
• End face Y – Front (only when Y axis exists)
• End face Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists)
• Peripheral surface Y – Inner (only when Y axis exists)
• Peripheral surface Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists)



Clamp/release spindle (only for End face Y/Peripheral surface Y, and for End face
C/Peripheral surface C if the tool is inserted in the center for roughing)
The function must be set up by the machine manufacturer.

Machining
method
Roughing
Finishing
Edge finishing
Chamfering

Single pos.
Pos. pattern
Mill rectangular pocket at the programmed position (X0, Y0, Z0, L0, C0, CP).
Mill several rectangular pockets in a positioning pattern (e.g. full circle or matrix).

5

ShopTurn functions 01/2008
5.5 Milling

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
5-234 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition


X0
Y0
L0
C0
Z0
Z1
DXY

DZ
UXY
UZ
FS
ZFS
Single position End face/End face C:
The reference point is always the center point of the rectangular pocket.
Reference point in X direction (abs)
Reference point in Y direction (abs.)
Reference point on longitudinal polar axis (alternative to X0)
Reference point on angular polar axis (alternative to Y0)
Reference point in Z direction (abs.)
Pocket depth based on Z0 (abs or inc) – (only for roughing and finishing)
Maximum infeed in the XY plane – (for roughing and finishing only)
Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm)
Maximum depth infeed (Z direction) – (for roughing and finishing only)
Finishing allowance in the plane (pocket edge) – (for roughing and finishing only)
Finishing allowance in depth (pocket base) – (for roughing and finishing only)
Chamfer width (inc) – (for chamfer only)
Insertion depth of tool tip (abs or inc) – (for chamfer only)


mm
mm
mm
Degrees
mm
mm
mm
%
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm


Y0
C0
Z0
X0
X1
DYZ

DX
UYZ
UX
FS
ZFS
Single position Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C:
The reference point is always the center point of the rectangular pocket.
Reference point in Y direction (abs.)
Reference point on angular polar axis (alternative to Y0)
Reference point in Z direction (abs.)
Cylinder diameter ∅ (abs.)
Pocket depth based on X0 ∅ (abs or inc) – (only for roughing and finishing)
Maximum infeed in the YZ plane – (for roughing and finishing only)
Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm)
Maximum depth infeed (X direction) – (for roughing and finishing only)
Finishing allowance in the plane (pocket edge) – (for roughing and finishing only)
Finishing allowance in depth (pocket base) – (for roughing and finishing only)
Chamfer width (inc) – (for chamfer only)
Insertion depth of tool tip (abs or inc) – (for chamfer only)


mm
Degrees
mm
mm
mm
mm
%
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm


CP
X0
Y0
L0
C0
Z0
Z1
DXY

DZ
UXY
UZ
FS
ZFS
Single position End face Y:
The reference point is always the center point of the rectangular pocket.
Positioning angle for machining area
Reference point in X direction (abs)
Reference point in Y direction (abs.)
Reference point on longitudinal polar axis (alternative to X0)
Reference point on angular polar axis (alternative to Y0)
Reference point in Z direction (abs.)
Pocket depth based on Z0 (abs or inc) – (only for roughing and finishing)
Maximum infeed in the XY plane – (for roughing and finishing only)
Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm)
Maximum depth infeed (Z direction) – (for roughing and finishing only)
Finishing allowance in the plane (pocket edge) – (for roughing and finishing only)
Finishing allowance in depth (pocket base) – (for roughing and finishing only)
Chamfer width (inc) – (for chamfer only)
Insertion depth of tool tip (abs or inc) – (for chamfer only)


Degrees
mm
mm
mm
Degrees
mm
mm
mm
%
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
5

01/2008 ShopTurn functions
5.5 Milling

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition 5-235


C0
Y0
Z0
X0
X1
DYZ

DX
UYZ
UX
FS
ZFS
Single position Peripheral surface Y:
The reference point is always the center point of the rectangular pocket.
Reference point
Reference point in Y direction (abs.)
Reference point in Z direction (abs.)
Reference point (abs)
Pocket depth based on X0 (abs or inc) – (only for roughing and finishing)
Maximum infeed in the YZ plane – (for roughing and finishing only)
Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm)
Maximum depth infeed (X direction) – (for roughing and finishing only)
Finishing allowance in the plane (pocket edge) – (for roughing and finishing only)
Finishing allowance in depth (pocket base) – (for roughing and finishing only)
Chamfer width (inc) – (for chamfer only)
Insertion depth of tool tip (abs or inc) – (for chamfer only)


Degrees
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
%
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
W Pocket width mm
L Pocket length mm
R Radius at pocket corners mm
α0 Angle of rotation of pocket
Face: α0 refers to the X axis or to the position of C0 with a polar reference point
Peripheral surface: α0 refers to the Y axis
Degrees
Insertion

Insertion strategy
Helical: Insertion along helical path
The cutter center point traverses along the helical path determined by the radius and
depth per revolution. If the depth for one infeed has been reached, a full circle
motion is executed in the plane.
Oscillating: Insertion with oscillation along center axis of pocket
The cutter center point oscillates along a linear path until it reaches the depth infeed.
If the depth has been reached, the path is executed again in the plane without depth
infeed.
Center: Insert vertically in center of pocket
The tool executes the calculated depth infeed vertically in the center of the pocket.
Note: This setting can be used only if the cutter can cut across center or if the
pocket has been predrilled.

EP Maximum insertion pitch (for helical insertion only)
The helix gradient might be smaller in some geometric conditions.
mm/rev
ER Insertion radius (only for helical insertion)
The radius must not be larger than the cutter radius, otherwise material will remain.
Also make sure the pocket is not violated.
mm
EW Insertion angle (for insertion with oscillation only) Degrees
FZ Depth infeed feedrate (for end face/end face C and end face Y with central insertion
only)
mm/tooth
mm/min
FX Depth infeed feedrate (for peripheral surface/peripheral surface C and peripheral
surface Y with central insertion only)
mm/tooth
mm/min

5

ShopTurn functions 01/2008
5.5 Milling

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
5-236 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition
5.5.2 Circular pocket
The "Circular pocket" function is used when you want to mill any
circular pocket on the end face or peripheral surface.

The following machining variants are available:
• Milling a circular pocket from solid material
• Pre-drilling a circular pocket in the center first if, for example, the
milling cutter does not cut across the center (program the drilling,
circular pocket and position program blocks one after the other).
For milling with the “circular pocket” function two methods are
available, the plane-by-plane method and the helical method.
Plane-by-plane machining In plane-by-plane machining of the pocket, the material is removed
horizontally, one layer at a time.
Approach/retraction 1. The tool approaches the center point of the pocket at rapid
traverse at the height of the retraction plane and adjusts to the
safety distance.
2. The tool is inserted into the material according to the method
selected.
3. The pocket is always machined from inside out using the selected
machining method.
4. The tool moves back to the safety distance at rapid traverse.
Machining method You can select the machining mode for milling the circular pocket as
follows:
• Roughing
In "Roughing" mode, the individual planes of the pocket are
machined one after another from inside out until depth Z1 or X1 is
reached.
• Finishing
In "Finishing" mode, the edge is always machined first. The pocket
edge is approached on the quadrant that joins the pocket radius.
During the last infeed, the base is finished from the center out.
• Edge finishing
Edge finishing is performed in the same way as finishing, except
that the last infeed (finish base) is omitted.
• Chamfer
Chamfering involves edge breaking at the upper edge of the
pocket.

5

01/2008 ShopTurn functions
5.5 Milling

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition 5-237
Helical machining In helical machining, the material is removed down to pocket depth in
a helical movement.
Approach/retraction 1. The tool approaches the center point of the pocket at rapid
traverse at the height of the retraction plane and adjusts to the
safety distance.
2. Infeed to the first machining diameter.
3. The pocket is machined to pocket depth using the selected
machining method.
4. The tool moves back to the safety distance at rapid traverse.
Machining method You can select the machining mode for milling the circular pocket as
follows:
• Roughing
During roughing, the pocket is machined downward with helical
movements.
A full circle is made at pocket depth to remove the residual
material.
The tool is retracted from the edge and base of the pocket in a
quadrant and retracted with rapid traverse to a safety clearance.
This process is repeated layer by layer, from inside out, until the
pocket has been completely machined.
• Finishing
During finishing, the edge is first machined down to the base with a
helical movement.
A full circle is made at pocket depth to remove the residual
material.
The base is milled from outside in, using a spiral movement.
The tool is retracted with rapid traverse from the center of the
pocket to a safety distance.
• Finishing the edge
During finishing the edge, the edge is first machined down to the
base with a helical movement.
A full circle is made at pocket depth to remove the residual
material.
The tool is retracted from the edge and base of the pocket in a
quadrant and retracted with rapid traverse to a safety clearance.



Pocket
>

Circular
pocket

¾ Press the "Milling", "Pocket" and "Circular pocket" softkeys.

5

ShopTurn functions 01/2008
5.5 Milling

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
5-238 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition
Parameter Description Unit
T, D, F, S, V See Section "Creating program blocks".
Position Select from 8 different positions:
• End face/End face C – Front
• End face/End face C – Rear
• Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Inner
• Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Outer
• End face Y – Front (only when Y axis exists)
• End face Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists)
• Peripheral surface Y – Inner (only when Y axis exists)
• Peripheral surface Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists)



Clamp/release spindle (only for End face Y/Peripheral surface Y, and for End face
C/Peripheral surface C if the tool is inserted in the center for roughing)
The function must be set up by the machine manufacturer.


Machining
method
Roughing
Finishing
Edge finishing
Chamfering (only plane by plane)

Plane-by-
plane helical
Machine pocket plane by plane
Machine pocket helically

Single pos.
Pos. pattern
Mill circular pocket at the programmed position (X0, Y0, Z0, L0, C0, CP).
Mill several circular pockets in a positioning pattern (e.g. full circle or matrix).



X0
Y0
L0
C0
Z0
Z1
DXY

DZ



UXY
UZ
FS
ZFS
Single position End face/End face C:
The reference point is always the center point of the circular pocket.
Reference point in X direction (abs)
Reference point in Y direction (abs.)
Reference point on longitudinal polar axis (alternative to X0)
Reference point on angular polar axis (alternative to Y0)
Reference point in Z direction (abs.)
Pocket depth based on Z0 (abs or inc) – (only for roughing and finishing)
Maximum infeed in the XY plane – (for roughing and finishing only)
Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm)
Plane by plane:
Maximum depth infeed (Z direction) – (for roughing and finishing only)
Helical:
Maximum pitch of the helix
Finishing allowance in the plane (pocket edge) – (for roughing and finishing only)
Finishing allowance in depth (pocket base) – (for roughing and finishing only)
Chamfer width (inc) – (for chamfer only)
Insertion depth of tool tip (abs or inc) – (for chamfer only)


mm
mm
mm
Degrees
mm
mm
mm
%

mm

mm/rev
mm
mm
mm
mm


Y0
C0
Z0
X0
X1
Single position Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C:
The reference point is always the center point of the circular pocket.
Reference point in Y direction (abs.)
Reference point on angular polar axis (alternative to Y0)
Reference point in Z direction (abs.)
Cylinder diameter ∅ (abs.)
Pocket depth based on X0 ∅ (abs or inc) – (only for roughing and finishing)


mm
Degrees
mm
mm
mm
5

01/2008 ShopTurn functions
5.5 Milling

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition 5-239
DYZ

DX

UYZ
UX
FS
ZFS
Maximum infeed in the YZ plane – (for roughing and finishing only)
Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm)
Maximum depth infeed (X direction) – (for roughing and finishing only)
Finishing allowance in the plane (pocket edge) – (for roughing and finishing only)
Finishing allowance in depth (pocket base) – (for roughing and finishing only)
Chamfer width (inc) – (for chamfer only)
Insertion depth of tool tip (abs or inc) – (for chamfer only)
Chamfer width (inc) – (for chamfer only)
mm
%
mm

mm

mm
mm


CP
X0
Y0
L0
C0
Z0
Z1
DXY

DZ
UXY
UZ
FS
ZFS
Single position End face Y:
The reference point is always the center point of the circular pocket.
Positioning angle for machining area
Reference point in X direction (abs)
Reference point in Y direction (abs.)
Reference point on longitudinal polar axis (alternative to X0)
Reference point on angular polar axis (alternative to Y0)
Reference point in Z direction (abs.)
Pocket depth based on Z0 (abs or inc) – (only for roughing and finishing)
Maximum infeed in the XY plane – (for roughing and finishing only)
Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm)
Maximum depth infeed (Z direction) – (for roughing and finishing only)
Finishing allowance in the plane (pocket edge) – (for roughing and finishing only)
Finishing allowance in depth (pocket base) – (for roughing and finishing only)
Chamfer width (inc) – (for chamfer only)
Insertion depth of tool tip (abs or inc) – (for chamfer only)


mm
mm
mm
mm
Degrees
mm
mm
mm
%
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm


C0
Y0
Z0
X0
X1
DYZ

DX
UYZ
UX
FS
ZFS
Single position Peripheral surface Y:
The reference point is always the center point of the circular pocket.
Reference point
Reference point in Y direction (abs.)
Reference point in Z direction (abs.)
Reference point (abs)
Pocket depth based on X0 (abs or inc) – (only for roughing and finishing)
Maximum infeed in the YZ plane – (for roughing and finishing only)
Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm)
Maximum depth infeed (X direction) – (for roughing and finishing only)
Finishing allowance in the plane (pocket edge) – (for roughing and finishing only)
Finishing allowance in depth (pocket base) – (for roughing and finishing only)
Chamfer width (inc) – (for chamfer only)
Insertion depth of tool tip (abs or inc) – (for chamfer only)


Degrees
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
%
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm

∅ Diameter of pocket mm
Insertion

Insertion strategy (only for “plane by plane” machining variant)
Helical: Insertion in a helical path
The cutter center point traverses along the helical path determined by the radius and
depth per revolution. If the depth for one infeed has been reached, a full circle
motion is executed in the plane.
Feedrate: Machining feed
Center: Vertical insertion at center of pocket
The tool executes the calculated depth infeed vertically in the center of the pocket.
Feedrate: Infeed rate as programmed under FZ
Note: Vertical insertion into the pocket center can be used only if the tool can cut
across center or if the workpiece has been predrilled.

5

ShopTurn functions 01/2008
5.5 Milling

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
5-240 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition

EP Maximum insertion pitch (for helical insertion only)
The helix gradient might be smaller in some geometric conditions.
mm/rev

ER Insertion radius (for helical insertion only)
The radius cannot be any larger than the milling cutter radius; otherwise, material
will remain. Also make sure the pocket is not violated.

mm

FZ Depth infeed feedrate (for end face/end face C and end face Y with central insertion
only)
mm/tooth
mm/min

FX Depth infeed feedrate (for peripheral surface/peripheral surface C and peripheral
surface Y with central insertion only)
mm/tooth
mm/min

5.5.3 Rectangular spigot
The "Rectangular spigot" function is used when you want to mill
various rectangular spigots.

You can select from the following shapes with or without a corner
radius:

Rectangular spigot

In addition to the required rectangular spigot, you must also specify a
blank spigot, i.e. the outer limits of the material. The tool moves at
rapid traverse outside this area. The blank spigot must not overlap any
adjacent blank spigots. ShopTurn automatically centers the finished
spigot within the blank.
The spigot is machined using only one infeed. If you want to machine
the spigot using multiple infeeds, you must program the "Rectangular
spigot" function several times, with a continually decreasing finishing
allowance.


5

01/2008 ShopTurn functions
5.5 Milling

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition 5-241
Approach/retraction 1. The tool approaches the starting point at rapid traverse at the
height of the retraction plane and adjusts to the safety distance.
The starting point is on the positive X axis rotated through α0.
2. The tool traverses the spigot contour sideways in a semicircle at
the machining feedrate. The tool first executes the infeed at
machining depth, followed by the movement in the plane.
Depending on the machining direction that has been programmed
(up-cut/synchronism), the spigot is machined in a clockwise or
counterclockwise direction.
3. When the spigot has been circumnavigated once, the tool is
removed from the contour in a semicircle; the infeed to the next
machining depth is then executed.
4. The spigot is approached again in a semicircle and
circumnavigated once. This process is repeated until the
programmed spigot depth is reached.
5. The tool moves back to the safety distance at rapid traverse.

X
Y
Retracting
contour Approaching
contour
Tool
Rectangular
spigot


Approaching and retracting from the rectangular spigot in a semicircle


Machining method You can select the machining mode for milling the rectangular spigot
as follows:
• Roughing
Roughing involves moving round the spigot until the programmed
finishing allowance has been reached.
• Finishing
If you have programmed a finishing allowance, the spigot is moved
round until depth Z1 is reached.
• Chamfer
Chamfering involves edge breaking at the upper edge of the
rectangular spigot.

5

ShopTurn functions 01/2008
5.5 Milling

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
5-242 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition


Spigot
>

Rectangu-
lar spigot

¾ Press the "Milling", "Spigot" and "Rectangular spigot" softkeys.

Parameter Description Unit
T, D, F, S, V See Section "Creating program blocks".
Position Select from 6 different positions:
• End face/End face C – Front
• End face/End face C – Rear
• End face Y – Front (only when Y axis exists)
• End face Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists)
• Peripheral surface Y – Inner (only when Y axis exists)
• Peripheral surface Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists)



Clamp/release spindle (for End face Y/Peripheral surface Y only)
The function must be set up by the machine manufacturer.


Machining
method
Roughing
Finishing
Chamfering

Single pos.
Pos. pattern
Mill rectangular spigot at the programmed position (X0, Y0, Z0, L0, C0, CP).
Mill several rectangular spigots in a position pattern (full circle or matrix).



X0
Y0
L0
C0
Z0
Z1
DZ
UXY
UZ
FS
ZFS
Single position End face/End face C:
The reference point is always the center point of the rectangular spigot.
Reference point in X direction (abs)
Reference point in Y direction (abs.)
Reference point on longitudinal polar axis (alternative to X0)
Reference point on angular polar axis (alternative to Y0)
Reference point in Z direction (abs.)
Spigot depth based on Z0 (abs or inc) – (only for roughing and finishing)
Maximum depth infeed (Z direction) – (for roughing and finishing only)
Finishing allowance in depth (spigot edge) – (for roughing and finishing only)
Finishing allowance in depth (spigot depth) – (for chamfer only)
Chamfer width (inc) – (for chamfer only)
Insertion depth of tool tip (abs or inc) – (for chamfer only)


mm
mm
mm
Degrees
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
5

01/2008 ShopTurn functions
5.5 Milling

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition 5-243


CP
X0
Y0
L0
C0
Z0
Z1
DZ
UXY
UZ
FS
ZFS
Single position End face Y:
The reference point is always the center point of the rectangular spigot.
Positioning angle for machining area
Reference point in X direction (abs)
Reference point in Y direction (abs.)
Reference point on longitudinal polar axis (alternative to X0)
Reference point on angular polar axis (alternative to Y0)
Reference point in Z direction (abs.)
Spigot depth based on Z0 (abs or inc) – (only for roughing and finishing)
Maximum depth infeed (Z direction) – (for roughing and finishing only)
Finishing allowance in the plane (spigot edge) – (for roughing and finishing only)
Finishing allowance in depth (spigot base) – (for roughing and finishing only)
Chamfer width (inc) – (for chamfer only)
Insertion depth of tool tip (abs or inc) – (for chamfer only)


Degrees
mm
mm
mm
Degrees
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm


C0
Y0
Z0
X0
X1
DX
UYZ
UX
FS
ZFS
Single position Peripheral surface Y:
The reference point is always the center point of the rectangular spigot.
Reference point
Reference point in Y direction (abs.)
Reference point in Z direction (abs.)
Reference point in X direction (abs)
Spigot depth based on X0 (abs or inc) – (only for roughing and finishing)
Maximum depth infeed (X direction) – (for roughing and finishing only)
Finishing allowance in the plane (spigot edge) – (for roughing and finishing only)
Finishing allowance in depth (spigot base) – (for roughing and finishing only)
Chamfer width (inc) – (for chamfer only)
Insertion depth of tool tip (abs or inc) – (for chamfer only)


Degrees
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm

W Width of finished-part spigot mm

L Length of finished-part spigot mm

R Radius at edges of spigot (corner radius) mm
α0 Angle of rotation of spigot
Face: α0 refers to the X axis or to the position of C0 with a polar reference point
Peripheral surface: α0 refers to the Y axis
Degrees

W1 Width of specified blank spigot (important for determining approach position) mm

L1 Length of specified blank spigot (important for determining approach position) mm

5

ShopTurn functions 01/2008
5.5 Milling

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
5-244 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition
5.5.4 Circular spigot
The "Circular spigot" function is used when you want to mill a circular
spigot.

In addition to the required circular spigot, you must also define a blank
spigot, i.e. the outer limits of the material. The tool moves at rapid
traverse outside this area. The blank spigot must not overlap any
adjacent blank spigots. ShopTurn automatically centers the finished
spigot within the blank.
The spigot is machined using only one infeed. If you want to machine
the spigot using multiple infeeds, you must program the "Circular
spigot" function several times with a reducing finishing allowance.

Approach/retraction 1. The tool approaches the starting point at rapid traverse at the
height of the retraction plane and adjusts to the safety distance.
The starting point is always on the positive X axis.
2. The tool traverses the spigot contour sideways in a semicircle at
the machining feedrate. The tool first executes the infeed at
machining depth, followed by the movement in the plane.
Depending on the machining direction that has been programmed
(up-cut/synchronism), the spigot is machined in a clockwise or
counterclockwise direction.
3. When the spigot has been circumnavigated once, the tool is
removed from the contour in a semicircle; the infeed to the next
machining depth is then executed.
4. The spigot is approached again in a semicircle and
circumnavigated once. This process is repeated until the
programmed spigot depth is reached.
5. The tool moves back to the safety distance at rapid traverse.
5

01/2008 ShopTurn functions
5.5 Milling

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition 5-245

X
Y
Retracting
contour
Approaching
contour
Tool
Circular
spigot


Approaching and retracting from the circular spigot in a semicircle



Spigot
>

Circular
spigot

¾ Press the "Milling", "Spigot" and "Circular spigot" softkeys.

Parameter Description Unit
T, D, F, S, V See Section "Creating program blocks".
Position Select from 6 different positions:
• End face/End face C – Front
• End face/End face C – Rear
• End face Y – Front (only when Y axis exists)
• End face Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists)
• Peripheral surface Y – Inner (only when Y axis exists)
• Peripheral surface Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists)



Clamp/release spindle (for End face Y/Peripheral surface Y only)
The function must be set up by the machine manufacturer.


Machining
method
Roughing
Finishing
Chamfering

Single pos.
Pos. pattern
Mill circular spigot at the programmed position (X0, Y0, Z0, L0, C0, CP).
Mill several circular spigots in a positioning pattern (e.g. full circle or matrix).



X0
Y0
L0
C0
Z0
Z1
DZ
UXY
Single position End face/End face C:
The reference point is always the center point of the circular spigot.
Reference point in X direction (abs)
Reference point in Y direction (abs.)
Reference point on longitudinal polar axis (alternative to X0)
Reference point on angular polar axis (alternative to Y0)
Reference point in Z direction (abs.)
Spigot depth based on Z0 (abs or inc) – (only for roughing and finishing)
Maximum depth infeed (Z direction) – (for roughing and finishing only)
Finishing allowance in the plane (spigot edge) – (for roughing and finishing only)


mm
mm
mm
Degrees
mm
mm
mm
mm
5

ShopTurn functions 01/2008
5.5 Milling

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
5-246 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition
UZ
FS
ZFS
Finishing allowance in depth (spigot base) – (for roughing and finishing only)
Chamfer width (inc) – (for chamfer only)
Insertion depth of tool tip (abs or inc) – (for chamfer only)
mm
mm
mm


CP
X0
Y0
L0
C0
Z0
Z1
DZ
UXY
UZ
FS
ZFS
Single position End face Y:
The reference point is always the center point of the circular spigot.
Positioning angle for machining area
Reference point in X direction (abs)
Reference point in Y direction (abs.)
Reference point on longitudinal polar axis (alternative to X0)
Reference point on angular polar axis (alternative to Y0)
Reference point in Z direction (abs.)
Spigot depth based on Z0 (abs or inc) – (only for roughing and finishing)
Maximum depth infeed (Z direction) – (for roughing and finishing only)
Finishing allowance in the plane (spigot edge) – (for roughing and finishing only)
Finishing allowance in depth (spigot base) – (for roughing and finishing only)
Chamfer width (inc) – (for chamfer only)
Insertion depth of tool tip (abs or inc) – (for chamfer only)


Degrees
mm
mm
mm
Degrees
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm


C0
Y0
Z0
X0
X1
DX
UYZ
UX
FS
ZFS
Single position Peripheral surface Y:
The reference point is always the center point of the circular spigot.
Reference point
Reference point in Y direction (abs.)
Reference point in Z direction (abs.)
Reference point in X direction (abs)
Spigot depth based on X0 (abs or inc) – (only for roughing and finishing)
Maximum depth infeed (X direction) – (for roughing and finishing only)
Finishing allowance in the plane (spigot edge) – (for roughing and finishing only)
Finishing allowance in depth (spigot base) – (for roughing and finishing only)
Chamfer width (inc) – (for chamfer only)
Insertion depth of tool tip (abs or inc) – (for chamfer only)


Degrees
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm

∅ Diameter of finished-part spigot mm

∅1 Diameter of blank spigot (important for determining approach position) mm

5

01/2008 ShopTurn functions
5.5 Milling

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition 5-247
5.5.5 Longitudinal slot
The "Longitudinal slot" function is used when you want to mill a
longitudinal slot on the end face or peripheral surface.

The following machining methods are available:
• Milling a longitudinal slot from solid material.
• Pre-drilling a longitudinal slot in the center first if, for example, the
milling cutter does not cut across the center (program the drilling,
rectangular pocket and position program blocks one after the
other).
Approach/retraction 1. The tool approaches the center point of the slot at rapid traverse at
the height of the retraction plane and adjusts to the safety distance.
2. The tool is inserted into the material according to the method
selected.
3. The longitudinal slot is always machined from inside out using the
selected machining method.
4. The tool moves back to the safety distance at rapid traverse.
Machining method You can select any of the following machining methods for milling the
longitudinal slot:
• Roughing
In "Roughing" mode, the individual planes of the slot are machined
one after another from inside out until depth Z1 or X1 is reached.
• Finishing
In "Finishing" mode, the edge is always machined first. The slot
edge is approached on the quadrant that joins the corner radius.
During the last infeed, the base is finished from the center out.
• Edge finishing
Edge finishing is performed in the same way as finishing, except
that the last infeed (finish base) is omitted.
• Chamfer
Chamfering involves edge breaking at the upper edge of the
longitudinal slot.

5

ShopTurn functions 01/2008
5.5 Milling

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
5-248 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition


Slot
>

Long. slot

¾ Press the "Milling", "Slot" and "Long. slot" softkeys.

Parameter Description Unit
T, D, F, S, V See Section "Creating program blocks".
Position Select position:
• End face/End face C – Front
• End face/End face C – Rear
• Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Inner
• Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Outer
• End face Y – Front (only when Y axis exists)
• End face Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists)
• Peripheral surface Y – Inner (only when Y axis exists)
• Peripheral surface Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists)



Clamp/release spindle (only for End face Y/Peripheral surface Y, and for End face
C/Peripheral surface C if the tool is inserted in the center for roughing)
The function must be set up by the machine manufacturer.


Machining
method
Roughing
Finishing
Edge finishing
Chamfering

Single pos.
Pos. pattern
Mill longitudinal slot at the programmed position (X0, Y0, Z0, L0, C0, CP).
Mill several longitudinal slots in a positioning pattern (e.g. full circle or matrix).



X0
Y0
L0
C0
Z0
Z1
DXY


DZ
UXY
UZ
FS
ZFS
Single position End face/End face C:
The reference point is always the center point of the longitudinal slot.
Reference point in X direction (abs)
Reference point in Y direction (abs.)
Reference point on longitudinal polar axis (alternative to X0)
Reference point on angular polar axis (alternative to Y0)
Reference point in Z direction (abs.)
Slot depth based on Z0 (abs or inc) – (only for roughing and finishing)
Maximum infeed in the XY plane
Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm) – (for
roughing and finishing only)
Maximum depth infeed (Z direction) – (for roughing and finishing only)
Finishing allowance in the plane (slot edge) – (for roughing and finishing only)
Finishing allowance in depth (slot base) – (for roughing and finishing only)
Chamfer width (inc) – (for chamfer only)
Insertion depth of tool tip (abs or inc) – (for chamfer only)


mm
mm
mm
Degrees
mm
mm
mm
%

mm
mm
mm
mm
mm


Y0
C0
Z0
X0
X1
Single position Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C:
The reference point is always the center point of the longitudinal slot.
Reference point in Y direction (abs.)
Reference point on angular polar axis (alternative to Y0)
Reference point in Z direction (abs.)
Cylinder diameter ∅ (abs.)
Slot depth based on X0 ∅ (abs or inc) – (only for roughing and finishing)


mm
Degrees
mm
mm
mm
5

01/2008 ShopTurn functions
5.5 Milling

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition 5-249
DYZ


DX
UYZ
UX
FS
ZFS
Maximum infeed in the YZ plane
Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm) – (for
roughing and finishing only)
Maximum depth infeed (X direction) – (for roughing and finishing only)
Finishing allowance in the plane (slot edge) – (for roughing and finishing only)
Finishing allowance in depth (slot base) – (for roughing and finishing only)
Chamfer width (inc) – (for chamfer only)
Insertion depth of tool tip (abs or inc) – (for chamfer only)
mm
%

mm
mm
mm
mm
mm


CP
X0
Y0
L0
C0
Z0
Z1
DXY


DZ
UXY
UZ
FS
ZFS
Single position End face Y:
The reference point is always the center point of the longitudinal slot.
Positioning angle for machining area
Reference point in X direction (abs)
Reference point in Y direction (abs.)
Reference point on longitudinal polar axis (alternative to X0)
Reference point on angular polar axis (alternative to Y0)
Reference point in Z direction (abs.)
Slot depth based on Z0 (abs or inc) – (only for roughing and finishing)
Maximum infeed in the XY plane
Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm) – (for
roughing and finishing only)
Maximum depth infeed (Z direction) – (for roughing and finishing only)
Finishing allowance in the plane (slot edge) – (for roughing and finishing only)
Finishing allowance in depth (slot base) – (for roughing and finishing only)
Chamfer width (inc) – (for chamfer only)
Insertion depth of tool tip (abs or inc) – (for chamfer only)


Degrees
mm
mm
mm
Degrees
mm
mm
mm
%

mm
mm
mm
mm
mm


C0
Y0
Z0
X0
X1
DYZ


DX
UYZ
UX
FS
ZFS
Single position Peripheral surface Y:
The reference point is always the center point of the longitudinal slot.
Reference point
Reference point in Y direction (abs.)
Reference point in Z direction (abs.)
Reference point (abs)
Slot depth based on X0 (abs or inc) – (only for roughing and finishing)
Maximum infeed in the YZ plane
Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm) – (for
roughing and finishing only)
Maximum depth infeed (X direction) – (for roughing and finishing only)
Finishing allowance in the plane (slot edge) – (for roughing and finishing only)
Finishing allowance in depth (slot base) – (for roughing and finishing only)
Chamfer width (inc) – (for chamfer only)
Insertion depth of tool tip (abs or inc) – (for chamfer only)


Degrees
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
%

mm
mm
mm
mm
mm

W Slot width
mm

L Slot length
mm
α0 Angle of rotation of slot
Face: α0 refers to the X axis or to the position of C0 with a polar reference point
Peripheral surface: α0 refers to the Y axis
Degrees
5

ShopTurn functions 01/2008
5.5 Milling

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
5-250 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition

Insertion Insertion strategy
Central: Vertical insertion at center of slot
The tool executes the depth infeed vertically in the center of the slot.
Note: This setting can be used only if the cutter can cut across center.
Oscillating: Insert with oscillation along center axis of longitudinal slot:
The cutter center point oscillates along a linear path until it reaches the depth infeed.
If the depth has been reached, the path is executed again in the plane without depth
infeed.
mm
EW Insertion angle (for oscillation only) Degrees

FZ Depth infeed feedrate (for end face/end face C and end face Y with central insertion
only)
mm/tooth
mm/min

FX Depth infeed feedrate (for peripheral surface/peripheral surface C and peripheral
surface Y with central insertion only)
mm/tooth
mm/min


5.5.6 Circumferential slot
The "Circumferential slot" function is used when you want to mill one
or more circumferential slots of the same size in a full circle or pitch
circle.

Tool size Please note that there is a minimum size for the milling cutter used to
machine the circumferential slot:
• Roughing:
1/2 slot width W – finishing allowance UXY ≤ milling cutter diameter
• Finishing:
1/2 slot width W ≤ milling cutter diameter
• Edge finishing:
Finishing allowance UXY ≤ milling cutter diameter
Annular slot

To create an annular slot, you must enter the following values for the
"Number N" and "Aperture angle α
1
" parameters:
N = 1
α
1
= 360°
Approach/retraction 1. At the height of the retraction plane, the tool approaches the center
point of the semicircle at the end of the slot at rapid traverse and
adjusts to the safety distance.
2. It is then inserted into the workpiece at the machining feedrate,
allowing for the maximum Z direction infeed (for face machining),
X direction infeed (for peripheral machining), and the finishing
allowance. Depending on the machining direction (up-cut or
synchronism), the circumferential slot is machined in a clockwise or
counterclockwise direction.
5

01/2008 ShopTurn functions
5.5 Milling

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition 5-251
3. When the first circumferential slot is finished, the tool moves to the
retraction plane at rapid traverse.
4. The next circumferential slot is approached along a straight line or
circular path and then machined.
The rapid traverse feedrate for positioning on a circular path is
specified in a machine data element.
Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.
5. The tool moves back to the safety distance at rapid traverse.
Machining method You can select the machining mode for milling the circumferential slot as
follows:
• Roughing
During roughing, the individual planes of the slot are machined one
after the other from center point of the semicircle at the end of the
slot until depth Z1 is reached.
• Finishing
In "Finishing" mode, the edge is always machined first until depth Z1
is reached. The slot edge is approached on the quadrant, which
joins the radius. In the last infeed, the base is finished from the
center point of the semicircle to the end of the slot.
• Edge finishing
Edge finishing is performed in the same way as finishing, except that
the last infeed (finish base) is omitted.
• Chamfer
Chamfering involves edge breaking at the upper edge of the
circumferential slot.



Slot
>

Circ. slot

¾ Press the "Milling", "Slot" and "Circ. slot" softkeys.

Parameter Description Unit
T, D, F, S, V See Section "Creating program blocks".
FZ Depth infeed rate mm/tooth
mm/min
Position You can select 8 different positions:
• End face/End face C – Front
• End face/End face C – Rear
• Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Inner
• Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Outer
• End face Y – Front (only when Y axis exists)
• End face Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists)
• Peripheral surface Y – Inner (only when Y axis exists)
• Peripheral surface Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists)

5

ShopTurn functions 01/2008
5.5 Milling

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
5-252 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition


Clamp/release spindle (only for End face Y/Peripheral surface Y, and for End face
C/Peripheral surface C if the tool is inserted in the center for roughing)
The function must be set up by the machine manufacturer.


Machining
method
Roughing
Finishing
Edge finishing
Chamfering

Full circle

Pitch circle
Position slots around a full circle. The slot spacing is uniform and is calculated by
the control.
Position slots around a pitch circle. The slot spacing can be determined on the basis
of angle α2.



X0
Y0
L0
C0
Z0
Z1
DZ
UXY
FS
ZFS
End face/End face C:
The reference point is always the center point of the full or pitch circle.
Reference point in X direction (abs)
Reference point in Y direction (abs.)
Reference point on longitudinal polar axis (alternative to X0)
Reference point on angular polar axis (alternative to Y0)
Reference point in Z direction (abs.)
Slot depth based on Z0 (abs or inc) – (only for roughing and finishing)
Maximum depth infeed (Z direction) – (for roughing and finishing only)
Finishing allowance in the plane (slot edge) – (for roughing and finishing only)
Chamfer width (abs) – (for chamfer only)
Insertion depth for the drill tip (abs or inc) – (only for chamfer)


mm
mm
mm
Degrees
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm


Y0
C0
Z0
X0
X1
DX
UYZ
FS
ZFS
Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C:
The reference point is always the center point of the full or pitch circle.
Reference point in Y direction (abs.)
Reference point on angular polar axis (alternative to Y0)
Reference point in Z direction (abs.)
Cylinder diameter ∅ (abs.)
Slot depth based on X0 ∅ (abs or inc) – (only for roughing and finishing)
Maximum depth infeed (X direction) – (for roughing and finishing only)
Finishing allowance in the plane (slot edge) – (for roughing and finishing only)
Chamfer width (abs) – (for chamfer only)
Insertion depth of tool tip (abs or inc) – (for chamfer only)


mm
Degrees
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm


CP
X0
Y0
L0
C0
Z0
Z1
DZ
UXY
FS
ZFS
End face Y:
The reference point is always the center point of the full or pitch circle.
Positioning angle for machining area
Reference point in X direction (abs)
Reference point in Y direction (abs.)
Reference point on longitudinal polar axis (alternative to X0)
Reference point on angular polar axis (alternative to Y0)
Reference point in Z direction (abs.)
Slot depth based on Z0 (abs or inc) – (only for roughing and finishing)
Maximum depth infeed (Z direction) – (for roughing and finishing only)
Finishing allowance in the plane (slot edge) – (for roughing and finishing only)
Chamfer width (abs) – (for chamfer only)
Insertion depth of tool tip (abs or inc) – (for chamfer only)


Degrees
mm
mm
mm
Degrees
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
5

01/2008 ShopTurn functions
5.5 Milling

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition 5-253


C0
Y0
Z0
X0
X1
DX
UYZ
FS
ZFS
Peripheral surface Y:
The reference point is always the center point of the full or pitch circle.
Reference point
Reference point in Y direction (abs.)
Reference point in Z direction (abs.)
Reference point in X direction (abs)
Slot depth based on X0 (abs or inc) – (only for roughing and finishing)
Maximum depth infeed (X direction) – (for roughing and finishing only)
Finishing allowance in the plane (slot edge) – (for roughing and finishing only)
Chamfer width (abs) – (for chamfer only)
Insertion depth of tool tip (abs or inc) – (for chamfer only)


Degrees
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm

W Slot width
mm

R Radius of circumferential slot
mm

α0 Start angle
α0 is based on the end face on the X axis and the peripheral surface on the Y axis
Degrees

α1 Angle of aperture of a slot
Degrees

α2 Advance angle (for pitch circle only)
Degrees

N Number of slots


Positioning Linear: Next position is approached linearly at rapid traverse.
Circular: Next position is approached along a circular path at the feedrate defined in
a machine data code.


5.5.7 Open slot
Use the "Open slot" function if you want to machine open slots.
You can choose between the following machining strategies,
depending on your workpiece and machine properties.
• Vortex milling
• Plunge cutting

Vortex milling

Particularly where hardened materials are concerned, this process is
used for roughing and contour preparation with coated VHM milling
cutters. Vortex milling is the preferred technique for HSC roughing, as
it ensures that the tool is never completely inserted. This means that
the level of overlap set is adhered to exactly.
Supplementary
conditions for vortex
milling
• Roughing
1/2 slot width W – finishing allowance UXY ≤ milling cutter
diameter
• Finishing
1/2 slot width W ≤ milling cutter diameter
• Edge finishing
Finishing allowance UXY ≤ milling cutter diameter
• Slot width
At least 1.15 x milling cutter diameter + finishing allowance
Maximum 2 x milling cutter diameter + 2 x finishing allowance
5

ShopTurn functions 01/2008
5.5 Milling

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
5-254 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition
• Radial infeed
At least 0.02 x milling cutter diameter
Maximum 0.25 x milling cutter diameter
• Maximum infeed depth ≤ section height of milling cutter

Please note that the section height of the milling cutter cannot be
tested.
The maximum radial infeed depends on the milling cutter.
For hard materials, use a smaller infeed.
Approach/retraction 1. The tool approaches the starting point in front of the slot at rapid
traverse and remains at the safety distance.
2. The tool adjusts to the cutting depth.
3. The open slot is always machined along its entire length, using the
selected machining method.
4. The tool moves back to the safety distance at rapid traverse.
Machining method
You can select any of the following machining methods for machining
open slots:
• Roughing
To perform roughing, the milling cutter executes circular
movements. While in motion, the milling cutter is continuously fed
more and more in the plane. If the milling cutter has traveled
through the entire slot, it returns to its starting point, while
continuing to move in a circular fashion. By doing this, it removes
the next layer (infeed depth) in the Z direction. This process is
repeated until the set slot depth plus the finishing allowance has
been achieved.
• Finishing
When finishing walls, the milling cutter travels along the slot walls.
In order to do this, it is once again fed in the Z direction, unit by
unit. During this process, the milling cutter travels along the safety
distance beyond the beginning and end of the slot, so that it can
guarantee an even slot wall surface across the entire length of the
slot.
• Edge finishing
Edge finishing is performed in the same way as finishing, except
that the last infeed (finish base) is omitted.
• Base finishing
When finishing the base, the milling cutter executes one motion
across the finished slot and back again.
• Rough finishing
If there is too much residual material on the slot walls, unwanted
corners are removed to the finishing dimension level.
• Chamfering
Chamfering involves edge breaking at the upper edge of the slot.

Plunge cutting Plunge cutting is the preferred method of machining pockets and slots
for "unstable" machines and workpiece geometries.
5

01/2008 ShopTurn functions
5.5 Milling

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition 5-255
This method generally only exerts forces along the tool axis, i.e.
perpendicular to the surface of the pocket/slot to be machined (with
XY plane in Z direction).
For this reason, the tool is subject to virtually no deformation. Thanks
to the axial loading of the tool, there is hardly any danger of vibrations
affecting unstable work pieces.
The depth of cut can be increased considerably. The plunge cutter, as
it is known, ensures a longer service life due to fewer vibrations
occurring with longer collar lengths.
Supplementary
conditions for plunge
cutting
• Maximum radial infeed
The maximum infeed is dependent on the width of the milling
cutter’s cutting edge.
• Increment
The lateral increment is calculated on the basis of the required slot
width, milling cutter diameter, and finishing allowance.
• Returning
Returning involves the milling cutter being retracted at a 45° angle
following insertion, if the wrap angle is less than 180°. Otherwise,
retraction is vertical, as is the case with drilling.
• Retraction
Retraction is performed perpendicular to the wrapped surface.
• Safety distance
The milling cutter motion travels beyond the end of the workpiece,
along the length of the safety distance, to prevent rounding of the
slot walls at the ends.

Please note that the milling cutter’s cutting edge cannot be checked
for the maximum radial infeed.

Approach/retraction 1. The tool moves at rapid traverse to the start point in front of the
slot and stops at the safety distance.
2. The open slot is always machined along its entire length, using the
selected machining method.
3. The tool moves back to the safety distance at rapid traverse.

Machining method You can select any of the following machining methods for machining
open slots:
• Roughing
Roughing of the slot takes place sequentially along the length of
the slot, with the milling cutter performing vertical insertions at the
machining feedrate. The milling cutter is then retracted and
repositioned at the next insertion point.
The milling cutter moves along the length of the groove, at half the
infeed rate, and inserts alternately at the left-hand and right-hand
wall. The first insertion takes place at the groove edge, with the
milling cutter inserted at half the infeed, less the safety clearance
5

ShopTurn functions 01/2008
5.5 Milling

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
5-256 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition
If the safety distance is greater than the infeed, this will take place
on the outside. For this cycle, the maximum width of the slot must
be less than double the width of the milling cutter, plus the
finishing allowance.
Following each insertion, the milling cutter is lifted by the height of
the safety clearance at the machining feedrate. As far as possible,
this occurs during what is known as the retraction process, i.e. if
the milling cutter's wrap angle is less than 180°, it is lifted at a 45°
angle from the base in the opposite direction to the bisector of the
wrap area.
The milling cutter then travels rapidly along the material.
• Finishing
When finishing walls, the milling cutter travels along the slot walls.
In order to do this, it is once again fed in the Z direction, unit by
unit. During this process, the milling cutter travels along the safety
distance beyond the beginning and end of the slot, so that it can
guarantee an even slot wall surface across the entire length of the
slot.
• Edge finishing
Edge finishing is performed in the same way as finishing, except
that the last infeed (finish base) is omitted.
• Base finishing
When finishing the base, the milling cutter executes one motion
across the finished slot and back again.
• Rough finishing
If there is too much residual material on the slot walls, unwanted
corners are removed to the finishing dimension level.
• Chamfering
Chamfering involves edge breaking at the upper edge of the slot.




Slot
>

Open slot

¾ Press the "Milling", "Slot" and "Open slot" softkeys.

Parameter Description Unit
T, D, F, S, V See Section "Creating program blocks".
Position You can select 4 different positions:
• Face/Face C
• Peripheral/Peripheral C
• End face Y (only when Y axis exists)
• Peripheral surface Y (only when Y axis exists)



Clamp/release spindle (for End face Y/Peripheral surface Y only)
The function must be set up by the machine manufacturer.

5

01/2008 ShopTurn functions
5.5 Milling

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition 5-257
Machining
method

Roughing
Finishing
Rough-finishing
Edge finishing
Base finishing
Chamfering

Machining
strategy
Vortex milling:
The milling cutter performs circular motions along the length of the slot and back
again.
Plunge cutting:
Sequential vertical insertions with drilling motions along the length of the tool axis.

Milling
direction
Down – for vortex milling
Up – for vortex milling
Up + down (alternately) – for vortex milling (roughing only)

Single position
Pos. pattern
Machine slot the programmed position (X0, Y0, Z0, L0, C0, CP).
Machine several slots in a position pattern (e.g. full circle or matrix).



X0
Y0
Z0
Z1
DXY


DZ

UXY

UZ

FS
ZFS
Single position End face/End face C:
The reference point is always the center point of the slot.
Reference point in X direction (abs)
Reference point in Y direction (abs.)
Reference point in Z direction (abs.)
Depth of slot in relation to Z0 (abs. or inc.) – not for chamfering
Maximum infeed in the XY plane
Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm) – for
roughing only
Maximum depth infeed (Z direction) – not for roughing (for plunge cutting only), base
finishing or chamfering
Finishing allowance in plane (slot edge) – not for finishing, edge finishing or
chamfering
Finishing allowance in depth (slot base) – not for finishing, edge finishing or
chamfering
Chamfer width (inc) – for chamfering only
Insertion depth of tool tip (abs or inc) – for chamfering only


mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
%

mm

mm

mm

mm



Y0
C0
Z0
X0
X1
DYZ


DX

UYZ

UX

Single position Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C:
The reference point is always the center point of the slot.
Reference point in Y direction (abs.)
Reference point on angular polar axis (alternative to Y0)
Reference point in Z direction (abs.)
Cylinder diameter ∅ (abs.)
Depth of slot in relation to X0 ∅ (abs. or inc.) – not for chamfering
Maximum infeed in the YZ plane
Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm) – for
roughing only
Maximum depth infeed (X direction) – not for roughing (for plunge cutting only), base
finishing or chamfering
Finishing allowance in plane (slot edge) – not for finishing, edge finishing or
chamfering
Finishing allowance in depth (slot base) – not for finishing, base finishing or
chamfering


mm
Degrees
mm
mm
mm
mm
%

mm

mm

mm

5

ShopTurn functions 01/2008
5.5 Milling

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
5-258 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition
FS
XFS
Chamfer width (inc) – for chamfering only
Insertion depth of tool tip (abs or inc) – for chamfering only
mm
mm


CP
X0
Y0
L0
C0
Z0
Z1
DXY


DZ

UXY

UZ

FS
ZFS
Single position End face Y:
The reference point is always the center point of the slot.
Positioning angle for machining area
Reference point in X direction (abs)
Reference point in Y direction (abs.)
Reference point on longitudinal polar axis (alternative to X0)
Reference point on angular polar axis (alternative to Y0)
Reference point in Z direction (abs.)
Depth of slot in relation to Z0 (abs. or inc.) – not for chamfering
Maximum infeed in the XY plane
Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to
milling cutter diameter (mm) – not for roughing
Maximum depth infeed (Z direction) – not for roughing (for plunge cutting only), base
finishing or chamfering
Finishing allowance in plane (slot edge) – not for finishing, edge finishing or
chamfering
Finishing allowance in depth (slot base) – not for finishing, base finishing or
chamfering
Chamfer width (inc) – not for chamfering
Insertion depth of tool tip (abs or inc) – not for chamfering


Degrees
mm
mm
mm
Degrees
mm
mm
mm
%

mm

mm

mm

mm
mm


C0
Y0
Z0
X0
X1
DYZ


DX

UYZ

UX

FS
XFS
Single position Peripheral surface Y:
The reference point is always the center point of the slot.
Reference point
Reference point in Y direction (abs.)
Reference point in Z direction (abs.)
Reference point (abs)
Depth of slot in relation to X0 (abs. or inc.) – not for chamfering
Maximum infeed in the YZ plane
Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to
milling cutter diameter (mm) – for roughing only
Maximum depth infeed (X direction) – not for roughing (for plunge cutting only), base
finishing or chamfering
Finishing allowance in plane (slot edge) – not for finishing, edge finishing or
chamfering
Finishing allowance in depth (slot base) – not for finishing, base finishing or
chamfering
Chamfer width (inc) – for chamfering only
Insertion depth of tool tip (abs or inc) – for chamfering only


Degrees
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
%

mm

mm

mm

mm
mm
W Slot width mm
L Slot length mm
α0 Angle of rotation of slot
Face: α0 refers to the X axis or to the position of C0 with a polar reference point
Peripheral surface: α0 refers to the Y axis
Degrees
5

01/2008 ShopTurn functions
5.5 Milling

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition 5-259
5.5.8 Positions
If you want to mill a pocket, spigot or longitudinal slot at more than one
position, you must program a separate positioning block.

You must set "Pos. Pattern" for the milling cycle if you want to mill at
more than one position.


Position pattern

You will find further information about freely definable positions or
position patterns in the Section "Drilling".



Positions
>

¾ Press the "Drilling" and "Positions" softkeys.

...
¾ Select the required position pattern via softkey.
¾ Then proceed as described in the Section "Drilling".
5.5.9 Multiple edge
The "Multiple edge" function is used when you want to mill a multiple
edge with any number of edges on the end face.

You can select from the following shapes with or without a corner
radius or chamfer:


Multiple edge

Approach/retraction 1. The tool approaches the starting point at rapid traverse at the
height of the retraction plane and adjusts to the safety distance.
2. The tool traverses the multiple edge in a quadrant at machining
feed. The tool first executes the infeed at machining depth,
followed by the movement in the plane. The multiple edge is
machined as a function of the programmed machining direction
(climb/conventional) in a clockwise or counterclockwise direction.
5

ShopTurn functions 01/2008
5.5 Milling

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
5-260 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition
3. When the first plane has been machined, the tool retracts from the
contour in the plane in a quadrant and then infeeds to the next
machining depth.
4. The multiple edge is traversed again in a quadrant. It repeats the
process until the depth of the multiple edge has been reached.
5. The tool moves back to the safety clearance at rapid traverse.
A multiple edge with more than two edges is circumnavigated
helically; with a single or double edge, each edge is machined
separately.

Y
X
Retracting
contour
Approaching
contour
Tool
Multiple
edge


Approaching and retraction from the multiple edge in a quadrant



Multiple
edge >

¾ Press the "Milling", and "Multiple edge" softkeys.

Parameter Description Unit
T, D, F, S, V See Section "Creating program blocks".
Position You can select 3 different positions:
• End face/End face C – Front
• End face/End face C – Rear
• End face Y – Front (only when Y axis exists)

5

01/2008 ShopTurn functions
5.5 Milling

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition 5-261


Clamp/release spindle (for End face Y only)
The function must be set up by the machine manufacturer.


Machining
method
Roughing
Finishing
Edge finishing
Chamfering



Diameter of blank part mm

Z0
Reference point (abs) mm
N Number of edges (1, 2,.....)
SW Across the flats (alternative to L) – (for N = 1 or N = integer only) mm
L Edge length (alternative to SW) mm
α0 Angle of rotation of first edge with reference to X axis
α0 > 0: Multiple edge is rotated in CCW direction.
α0 < 0: Multiple edge is rotated in CW direction.
Degrees
FS1 Chamfer in XY plane (alternative to R1) – (3 edges or more)
R1 Rounding in XY plane (alternative to FS1) – (3 edges or more) mm
Z1 End point Z1 (abs or inc) – (for roughing and finishing only) mm
FS Chamfer width (abs) – (for chamfer only) mm
ZFS Insertion depth of tool tip (abs or inc) – (for chamfer only)
DZ Maximum depth infeed (Z direction) – (for roughing and finishing only) mm
DXY Maximum infeed in the XY plane – (for roughing and finishing only)
Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm)
mm
%
UZ Finishing allowance in depth – (for roughing and finishing only) mm
UXY Finishing allowance in the plane – (for roughing and finishing only) mm

5.5.10 Engraving
The "Engraving" function is used when you want to mill a text along a
line or arc.
You can enter the text directly in the text field as "fixed text" or assign
it via a variable as "variable text".

ShopTurn uses a proportional font for engraving, i.e. the width of the
individual characters varies.
Approach/retraction 1. The tool approaches the starting point at rapid traverse at the
height of the retraction plane and adjusts to the safety distance.
2. The tool traverses at infeed FZ or FX to machining depth Z1 and
X1 and mills the character.
3. The tool retracts to the safety clearance at rapid traverse and
moves along a straight line to the next character.
4. Steps 2 and 3 are repeated until the entire text has been milled.
5

ShopTurn functions 01/2008
5.5 Milling

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
5-262 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition
Variable texts There are various ways of defining variable text:
• Date and time
You can engrave workpieces with the production date and current
time of day, for example. The values for date and time are read
from the NCK.
• Workpiece count
Using the workpiece variables you can assign a consecutive
number to the workpieces. You can define the format (number of
digits, leading zeroes). The “workpiece count” variable is defined
as a user variable (_E_PART[0]) in the GUD 7 data block.
The place holder (#) is used to format the number of digits at
which the workpiece counts output will begin.


If you output the workpiece count 1 for the first workpiece, you can
specify an additive value (e.g. <#,_E_PART[0] + 100>). The
workpiece count output is then incremented by this value (e.g. 101,
102, 103,...).
• Numbers
When outputting number (e.g. measurement results), you can
select the output format (digits either side of the point) of the
number to be engraved.
• Text
Instead of entering a fixed text in the engraving text field, you can
specify the text to be engraved via a text variable (e.g.
VARTEXT=“ABC123“).
Mirror writing

Programming engraving in the "End face rear" or "Peripheral surface
inner" machining planes produces mirrored text. To obtain normal text
here, you must first program mirroring (see "Defining the coordinate
transformations") and then the "Engraving" function.
At the counterspindle (where mirroring in Z is essentially active), it
behaves in the opposite manner. In this case, you need to program
additional mirroring for “Front end face” or “External peripheral
surface” in order to obtain normal text. When machining a front face,
mirroring is typically in X or Y, whereas it is typically in Y or Z when
machining a peripheral surface.
Please note that before mirroring you are in the machining plane in
which you want to engrave. (To change the machining plane, see
"Selecting the tool and the machining plane".)
To engrave mirrored text in the "End face front" and "Peripheral
surface outer" or “End face rear" and “Peripheral surface inner”
machining planes on the counterspindle, first program mirroring and
then enter the normal text in the "Engraving" function.

5

01/2008 ShopTurn functions
5.5 Milling

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition 5-263
Full circle To distribute the characters evenly around a full circle, there is no
need to calculate the arc angle α2 between the first and the last
character; instead simply enter α2=360°. ShopTurn then distributes
the characters evenly around the full circle.



Engraving

¾ Press the "Milling" and "Engraving" softkeys.
Lowercase letters

Lowercase

¾ Press the "Lowercase" softkey to enter lowercase letters.
Press it again to enter uppercase letters.

Special characters

Special
characters

¾ Press the "Special characters" softkey if you need a character that
does not appear on the input keys.
The "Special characters" window appears.
¾ Place the cursor on the character you require.



¾ Press the "OK" softkey.
The desired character will be inserted in the text.
The “Special characters” softkey is not available in all languages.

Entering a date

Variable >

Date

¾ Press the "Variable" and "Date" softkeys if you want to engrave
the current date.
The data is inserted in the European date format
(<DD>.<MM>.<YYYY>).
To obtain a different date format, you must adapt the format specified
in the text field. For example, to engrave the date in the American date
format (month/day/year => 8/16/04), change the format to
<M>/<D>/<YY> .

Entering a time

Variable >

Time

¾ Press the "Variable" and "Time" softkeys if you want to engrave
the current time.
The time is inserted in the European format (<TIME24>).
To have the time in the American format, change the format to
<TIME12>.

5

ShopTurn functions 01/2008
5.5 Milling

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
5-264 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition
Example:
Text entry: Time: <TIME24> Execution: Time: 16.35
Time: <TIME12> Time: 04.35 PM

Entering workpiece
counts


Variable >

Workpc. ct.
000123


¾ Press the "Variable" and "Workpc. ct. 000123" softkeys to engrave
a workpiece count with a fixed number of digits and leading
zeroes.
The format text <######,_E_PART[0]> is inserted and you return to
the engraving field with the softkey bar.
¾ Define the number of digits by adjusting the number of place
holders (#) in the engraving field.
If the specified number of digits (e.g. ## ) is not enough to display the
workpiece count, ShopTurn will increase the number digits
automatically.
- OR -

Variable >

Workpiece
ct.123

¾ Press the "Variable" and "Workpiece ct. 123" softkeys if you want
to engrave a workpiece count without lead zeroes.
The format text <#,_E_PART[0]> is inserted and you return to the
engraving field with the softkey bar.
If the specified number of digits is not enough to display the workpiece
count (e.g. 123), ShopTurn will increase the number digits
automatically.
You can enter an additive value, for example, if you want to resume
production of workpieces after an interruption. The workpiece count
output is then increased by this value.
Entering a variable
number


Variable >

Number
123.456

¾ Press the "Variable" and "Number 123.456" softkeys if you want to
engrave a any number in a certain format.
The format text <#.###,_VAR_NUM> is inserted and you return to the
engraving field with the softkey bar.
¾ The placeholders #.### define the digit format in which the
number defined in VARNUM will be engraved.
For example, if you have stored 12.35 in VARNUM, you can format
the variable as follows.

5

01/2008 ShopTurn functions
5.5 Milling

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition 5-265
Entry Edition Description
<#,_VAR_NUM> 12 Integer digits not formatted,
no fractional digits
<####,_VAR_NUM> 0012 4 integer digits, leading
zeroes, no fractional digits
<#,_VAR_NUM> 12 4 integer digits, leading
zeroes, no fractional digits
<#.,_VAR_NUM> 12.35 Integer and fractional digits
not formatted.
<#.#,_VAR_NUM> 12.4 Integer digits not formatted,
1 fractional digit (rounded)
<#.##,_VAR_NUM> 12.35 Integer digits not formatted,
2 fractional digits (rounded)
<#.####,_VAR_NUM> 12.3500 Integer digits not formatted,
4 fractional digits (rounded)

If there is insufficient space in front of the decimal point to display the
number entered, it is automatically extended. If the specified number
of digits is larger than the number to be engraved, the output format is
automatically filled with the appropriate number of leading and trailing
zeroes.
Instead of the decimal point you can also use a blank.
Instead of VARNUM you can use any other numeric variable (e.g. R0).

Entering a variable text

Variable >

Variable
text

¾ Press the "Variable" and "Variable text" softkeys if you want to
take the text to be engraved (up to 200 characters) from a
variable.
The format text <Text, VARTEXT> is inserted and you return to the
engraving field with the softkey bar.
You can use any other text variable instead of VARTEXT.

Deleting text

Delete text

¾ Press the "Delete text" softkey to remove the entire text.

5

ShopTurn functions 01/2008
5.5 Milling

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
5-266 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition
The format text for the variables is always inserted at the current
cursor position.
The "Lowercase", "Special characters", "Variable", and "Delete text"
softkeys only appear when you place the cursor in the input field for
engraving text.

Parameter Description Unit
T, D, F, S, V See Sec. "Creating program blocks".
Position You can select 8 different positions:
• End face/End face C – Front
• End face/End face C – Rear
• Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Inner
• Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Outer
• End face Y – Front (only when Y axis exists)
• End face Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists)
• Peripheral surface Y – Inner (only when Y axis exists)
• Peripheral surface Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists)



Clamp/release spindle (for End face Y and Peripheral surface Y only)
The function must be set up by the machine manufacturer.


Alignment
Align text to line
Align text to arc
Align text to arc


Reference
point
Position of reference point within text


Engraving text maximum 91 characters


X0
L0
Y0
C0
Z0
Z1
FZ

W
DX1
DX2
α1
α2
End face/End face C:
Reference point in X direction (abs)
Reference point on longitudinal polar axis (alternative to X0)
Reference point in Y direction (abs.)
Reference point on angular polar axis (alternative to Y0)
Reference point in Z direction (abs.)
Machining depth (inc.)
Depth infeed rate

Character height
Character spacing
Total width (alternative to DX1) – (for linear alignment only)
Text direction (for linear alignment only)
Arc angle (alternative to DX1) – (for curved alignment only)
The center point of the arc is the workpiece zero.

mm
mm
mm
Degrees
mm
mm
mm/min
mm/tooth
mm
mm
mm
Degrees
Degrees

Y0
C0
R
Z0
α0
X0
X1
Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C:
Reference point in Y direction (abs.)
Reference point (alternative to Y0) – (for linear alignment only)
Reference point on longitud. polar axis (alternative to Y0) – (for curved alignm. only)
Reference point in Z direction (abs.)
Reference point on angular polar axis (alternative to Z0) – (for curved alignm. only)
Reference point in X direction (abs)
Machining depth (inc.)

mm
mm
mm
mm
Degrees
mm
mm
5

01/2008 ShopTurn functions
5.5 Milling

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition 5-267
FX

W
DY1
DY2
α1
α2
YM
CM
ZM
Depth infeed rate

Character height
Character spacing
Total width (alternative to DY1) – (for linear alignment only)
Text direction (for linear alignment only)
Arc angle (alternative to DY1) – (for curved alignment only)
Center point of arc (abs.) – (for curved alignment only)
Center point of arc (abs.) – (alternative to YM)
Center point of arc (abs.) – (for curved alignment only)
mm/min
mm/tooth
mm
mm
mm
Degrees
Degrees
mm
Degrees
mm

CP
X0
L0
Y0
C0
Z0
Z1
FZ

W
DX1
DX2
α1
α2
End face Y:
Positioning angle for machining area
Reference point in X direction (abs)
Reference point on longitudinal polar axis (alternative to X0)
Reference point in Y direction (abs.)
Reference point on angular polar axis (alternative to Y0)
Reference point in Z direction (abs.)
Machining depth (inc.)
Depth infeed rate

Character height
Character spacing
Total width (alternative to DX1) – (for linear alignment only)
Text direction (for linear alignment only)
Arc angle (alternative to DX1) – (for curved alignment only)
The center point of the arc is the workpiece zero.


mm
mm
mm
Degrees
mm
mm
mm/min
mm/tooth
mm
mm
mm
Degrees
Degrees

C0
Y0
R

Z0
α0

X0
X1
FX

W
DY1
DY2
α1
α2
YM
ZM
Peripheral surface Y:
Reference point
Reference point in Y direction (abs.)
Reference point on longitudinal polar axis (alternative to Y0) – (for curved alignment
only)
Reference point in Z direction (abs.)
Reference point on angular polar axis (alternative to Z0) – (for curved alignment
only)
Reference point in X direction (abs)
Machining depth (inc.)
Depth infeed rate

Character height
Character spacing
Total width (alternative to DY1) – (for linear alignment only)
Text direction (for linear alignment only)
Arc angle (alternative to DY1) – (for curved alignment only)
Center point of arc (abs.) – (for curved alignment only)
Center point of arc (abs.) – (for curved alignment only)

mm
mm
mm

mm
Degrees

mm
mm
mm/min
mm/tooth
mm
mm
mm
Degrees
Degrees
mm
mm


5

ShopTurn functions 01/2008
5.6 Contour milling

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
5-268 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition
5.6 Contour milling
The "Contour milling" function is used when you want to mill simple
and complex contours. You can define open contours or closed
contours (pockets, islands, spigots) and machine them with path
milling or milling cycles.

A contour comprises separate contour elements, whereby at least two
and up to 250 elements result in a defined contour. You can also
program chamfers, radii or tangential transitions between the contour
elements.
The integrated contour calculator calculates the intersection points of
the individual contour elements taking into account the geometrical
relationships, which allows you to enter incompletely dimensioned
elements.
With contour milling, you must always program the geometry of the
contour before you program the technology.
You have the option of machining contours of any type by path milling,
stock removal from pockets with or without islands, or clearing spigots.
Freely-definable
contours
The machining of freely-definable open or closed contours is generally
programmed as follows:
1. Enter contour
You build up the contour gradually from a series of different
contour elements.
2. Path milling (roughing)
The contour is machined taking into account various approach and
retract strategies.
3. Path milling (finishing)
If you programmed a finishing allowance for roughing, the contour
is machined again.
4. Path milling (chamfer)
If you have planned edge breaking, chamfer the workpiece with a
special tool.

Contours for pockets or
islands

Contours for pockets or islands must be closed, i.e. the start point and
end point of the contour are identical. You can also mill pockets that
contain one or more islands. The islands can also be located partially
outside the pocket or overlap each other. ShopTurn interprets the first
contour specified as a pocket contour and all others as islands.
5

01/2008 ShopTurn functions
5.6 Contour milling

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition 5-269
The machining of contour pockets with islands is generally
programmed as follows:
1. Enter contour for the pocket
You build up the contour pocket gradually from a series of different
contour elements.
2. Enter contour for the island
You enter the contour for the island after the contour for the
pocket.
3. Centering predrilling of the contour pocket
If you want to predrill the contour pocket, you can center the drill
hole first to prevent the drill slipping.
4. Predrill contour pocket
If you want the cutter to plunge into the material vertically and if a
milling cutter with an end tooth is not available, you can predrill the
pocket.
5. Remove stock from contour pocket with island (roughing)
The stock is removed from the contour pocket complete with island
taking into account various insertion strategies.
6. Remove residual material (roughing)
During stock removal from the pocket, ShopTurn automatically
detects residual material that has been left. A suitable tool will
allow you to remove this without having to machine the complete
pocket again.
7. Finish contour pocket with island (finish edge/base)
If you programmed a finishing allowance for the edge/base when
you programmed roughing, the pocket edge/base will be machined
again.
All machining steps involved in the contour milling operation are
shown in the machining plan in square brackets.


Example: Removing stock from a contour pocket

5

ShopTurn functions 01/2008
5.6 Contour milling

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
5-270 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition
Contours for spigots

Contours for spigots must be closed, i.e. the start point and end point
of the contour are identical. You can define multiple spigots, which
can also overlap. ShopTurn interprets the first contour specified as a
blank contour and all others as spigots.
The machining of contour spigots is generally programmed as follows:
1. Enter the blank contour
i.e. the outer limits of the material. The tool moves at rapid traverse
outside this area. Material is then removed between the blank
contour and spigot contour.
2. Enter contour for the spigot
You enter the contour for the spigot after the blank contour.
3. Clear contour spigot (roughing)
The contour spigot is cleared.
4. Remove residual material (roughing)
As it mills the spigot, ShopTurn automatically detects residual
material that has been left behind. A suitable tool will allow you to
remove this without having to machine the complete spigot again.
5. Finish contour spigot (edge/base finishing)
If you programmed a finishing allowance for roughing, the spigot
edge/base is machined again.
6. Chamfer contour spigot
If you have planned edge breaking, subsequently chamfer the
workpiece.

Clamping a spindle When milling contours, it can be useful, for example, during vertical
insertion into the material, to clamp the spindle to avoid spindle
distortions. The "Clamp spindle" function must be set up by the
machine manufacturer.
The machine manufacturer also specifies whether ShopTurn will
clamp the spindle automatically if this would facilitate machining, or if
you can decide the types of machining for which the spindle should be
clamped.
Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.
If you are to decide the types of machining for which the spindle is to
be clamped, the following applies:
You should note that when machining in planes End face/End face C
and Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C, clamping is automatically
released after insertion. When machining in planes End face Y and
Peripheral surface Y, the clamping is modal, i.e. it remains activated
until the machining plane is changed or clamping is deselected in the
"Straight circle" Æ "Tool" menu.

5

01/2008 ShopTurn functions
5.6 Contour milling

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition 5-271
5.6.1 Representation of the contour
ShopTurn presents a contour as one program block in the process
plan. If you open this block, the individual contour elements are listed
symbolically and displayed in broken-line graphics.

Symbolic representation The individual contour elements are represented by symbols adjacent
to the graphics window. They appear in the order in which they were
entered.
Contour element Icon Description


Starting point

Start point of contour

Straight line up

Straight line down






Straight line in 90° matrix

Straight line in 90° matrix

Straight line left

Straight line right






Straight line in 90° matrix

Straight line in 90° matrix


Straight line in any
direction




Straight line with any gradient


Arc right

Arc left





Circle


Circle
Finish contour END End of contour definition

The different color of the symbols indicates their status:
Foreground Background Description
- Red Cursor on new element
Black Red Cursor on current element
Black White Normal element
Red White Element not currently evaluated
(element will only be evaluated when
it is selected with the cursor)

5

ShopTurn functions 01/2008
5.6 Contour milling

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
5-272 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition
Graphical representation The progress of contour programming is shown in broken-line
graphics while the contour elements are being entered.


Graphical presentation of the contour during contour milling

When the contour element has been created, it can be displayed in
different line styles and colors:
• Black: Programmed contour
• Orange: Current contour element
• Green dashed: Alternative element
• Blue dotted: Partially defined element
The scaling of the coordinate system is adjusted automatically to
match the complete contour.
The position of the coordinate system is displayed in the graphics
window.

5

01/2008 ShopTurn functions
5.6 Contour milling

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition 5-273
5.6.2 Creating a new contour
For each contour that you want to mill, you must create a new contour.

The contours are stored at the end of the program.
The first step in creating a contour is to specify a starting point.
ShopTurn automatically defines the end of the contour.
You can enter any additional commands (up to 40 characters) in
G code format for the start point.
Additional commands You can program feedrates and M commands, for example, with
additional G code commands (see also Section "Create exact contour
transitions" in Chapter "Create contour elements”). However, make
sure that the additional commands do not collide with the generated G
code of the contour. Therefore do not use any G code commands of
group 1 (G0, G1, G2, G3), no coordinates in the plane and no G code
commands that have to be programmed in a separate block.
If you want to create a contour that is similar to an existing contour,
you can copy the existing one, rename it and just alter selected
contour elements.
In contrast, if you want to use an identical contour at another place in
the program, you must not rename the copy. Changes to the one
contour will then automatically be applied to the other contour with the
same name.



Contour
milling >

New
contour >

¾ Press the "Milling", "Contour milling" and "New contour" softkeys.
¾ Enter a name for the new contour.
The contour name must be unique.


¾ Press the "OK" softkey.
The input form for the start point of the contour appears. You can
enter Cartesian or polar coordinates.

Cartesian starting point ¾ Select the machining plane.
¾ Enter the starting point for the contour.
¾ Enter any additional commands in G code format, as required.
5

ShopTurn functions 01/2008
5.6 Contour milling

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
5-274 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition


¾ Press the "Accept" softkey.
¾ Enter the individual contour elements (see Sec. "Creating contour
elements").

Polar starting point ¾ Select the machining plane.

Pole

¾ Press the "Pole" softkey.
¾ Enter the pole position in Cartesian coordinates.
¾ Enter the starting point for the contour in polar coordinates.
¾ Enter any additional commands in G code format, as required.


¾ Press the "Accept" softkey.
¾ Enter the individual contour elements (see Sec. "Creating contour
elements").

Parameter Description Unit
Position Select from 4 different positions:
• Face/Face C
• Peripheral/Peripheral C
• End face Y (only when Y axis exists)
• Peripheral surface Y (only when Y axis exists)


X
Y
End face/End face C and End face Y - Cartesian:
Start point in X direction (abs.)
Start point in Y direction (abs.)

mm
mm

X
Y
L1
ϕ1
End face/End face C and End face Y - Polar:
Pole position in X direction (abs.)
Pole position in Y direction (abs.)
Distance between pole and start point for contour (abs.)
Polar angle between pole and start point for contour (abs.)

mm
mm
mm
Degrees


Y

Z
Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C - Cartesian:
Cylinder surface
Start point in Y direction (abs.) – (calculated from Yα or vice versa)
Starting angle (abs.) – (calculated from Y or vice versa)
Start point in Z direction (abs.)

mm
mm
Degrees
mm


Y
Z
L1
ϕ1
Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C - Polar:
Cylinder surface
Pole position in Y direction (abs.)
Pole position in Z direction (abs.)
Distance between pole and start point for contour (abs.)
Polar angle between pole and start point for contour (abs.)

mm
mm
mm
mm
Degrees
5

01/2008 ShopTurn functions
5.6 Contour milling

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition 5-275

Y
Z
Peripheral surface Y - Cartesian:
Start point in Y direction (abs.)
Start point in Z direction (abs.)

mm
mm

Y
Z
L1
ϕ1
Peripheral surface Y - Polar:
Pole position in Y direction (abs.)
Pole position in Z direction (abs.)
Distance between pole and start point for contour (abs.)
Polar angle between pole and start point for contour (abs.)

mm
mm
mm
Degrees
Additional
command
Additional G code commands; see above

5.6.3 Creating contour elements
When you have created a new contour and specified the start point,
you can define the individual elements that the contour comprises.

The following contour elements are available for the definition of a
contour:


• Straight horizontal line


• Straight vertical line


• Diagonal line


• Circle/arc
For each contour element, you must parameterize a separate screen
form. The coordinates for a horizontal or vertical line are entered in
Cartesian format; however, for the contour elements Diagonal line and
Circle/arc you can choose between Cartesian and polar coordinates. If
you wish to enter polar coordinates you must first define a pole. If you
have already defined a pole for the start point, you can also relate the
polar coordinates to this pole. In this case there is therefore no need
to define another pole.
Parameter input Parameter entry is supported by various "help displays" that explain
the parameters.
If you leave certain fields blank, ShopTurn assumes that the values
are unknown and attempts to calculate them from other parameters.
Conflicts may result if you enter more parameters than are absolutely
necessary for a contour. In such a case, try entering less parameters
and allowing ShopTurn to calculate as many parameters as possible.
5

ShopTurn functions 01/2008
5.6 Contour milling

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
5-276 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition
Machining direction In the case of path milling, the contour is always machined in the
programmed direction. By programming the contour in the clockwise
direction or counterclockwise direction, you can determine whether the
contour is machined with down-cut milling or up-cut milling (see the
following table).
Outside contour
Required direction of
rotation for machining
CW spindle rotation CCW spindle rotation
Synchronism Programming in clockwise direction
CCW cutter radius compensation
Programming in counterclockwise
direction, CW cutter radius compensation
Up-cut Programming in counterclockwise
direction, CW cutter radius compensation
Programming in clockwise direction
CCW cutter radius compensation

Inside contour
Required direction of
rotation for machining
CW spindle rotation CCW spindle rotation
Synchronism Programming in counterclockwise
direction, CCW cutter radius
compensation
Programming in clockwise direction
CW cutter radius compensation
Up-cut Programming in clockwise direction
CW cutter radius compensation
Programming in counterclockwise
direction, CCW cutter radius
compensation

Contour transition
elements

As a transition between two contour elements, you can choose a
radius or a chamfer. The transition is always appended to the end of a
contour element. The contour transition is selected in the
parameterization screen form of the contour element.
You can use a contour transition element whenever there is an
intersection between two successive elements which can be
calculated from input values. Otherwise you must use the
"Straight/Circle" contour elements.
That means that for a closed counter, you can also program a
transition element from the last to the first element of the contour. The
contour starting point is outside the contour after you have
programmed the transition.
Additional commands

For each contour element, you can enter any additional commands in
G code format, for example, you can program a special feedrate for
the circle contour element.
You can enter the additional commands (max. 40 characters) in the
extended parameterization screen form ("All parameters" softkey).
You can program feedrates and M commands, for example, using
additional G code commands. However, make sure that the additional
commands do not collide with the generated G code of the contour.
Therefore do not use any G code commands of group 1 (G0, G1, G2,
G3), no coordinates in the plane and no G code commands that have
to be programmed in a separate block.
5

01/2008 ShopTurn functions
5.6 Contour milling

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition 5-277
Additional functions

The following additional functions are available for programming a
contour:
• Tangent to preceding element
You can program the transition to the preceding element as a
tangent.
• Dialog selection
If two different possible contours result from the parameters
entered thus far, one of the options must be selected.
• Close contour
From the current position, you can close the contour with a straight
line to the starting point.

Creating a contour
element


...
¾ Select a contour element via softkey.
¾ Enter all the data available from the workpiece drawing in the
input form (e.g. length of straight line, target position, transition to
next element, angle of lead, etc.).


¾ Press the "Accept" softkey.
The contour element is added to the contour.
¾ Repeat the procedure until the contour is complete.


¾ Press the "Accept" softkey.
The programmed contour is transferred to the machining plan.


All
parameters

If you want to display further parameters for certain contour elements,
e.g. to enter additional commands, press the "All parameters" softkey.


Defining a pole If you wish to enter the contour elements Diagonal line and Circle/arc
in polar coordinates, you must first define a pole.

Continue

Pole

¾ Press the "Continue" and "Pole" softkeys.
¾ Enter the coordinates of the pole.


¾ Press the "Accept" softkey.
The pole is defined. You can now choose between "Cartesian" and
"Polar" in the input screen form for the Diagonal line and Circle/Arc
contour elements.


5

ShopTurn functions 01/2008
5.6 Contour milling

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
5-278 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition
Tangent to preceding
element
When entering data for a contour element you can program the
transition to the preceding element as a tangent.

Tangent to
prec. elem.

¾ Press the "Tangent to prec. elem." softkey.
The angle to the preceding element α2 is set to 0°. The "tangential"
selection appears in the parameter input field.

Selecting a dialog When entering data for a contour element, there may be two different
contour options, one of which you have to select.

Select
dialog

¾ Press the "Select dialog" softkey to switch between the two
different contour options.
The selected contour appears in the graphics window as a solid black
line and the alternative contour appears as a dashed green line.

Accept
dialog

¾ Press the "Accept dialog" softkey to accept the chosen alternative.

Close contour

A contour always has to be closed. If you do not wish to create all
contour elements from starting point to starting point, you can close
the contour from the current position to the starting point.

Continue

Close
contour

¾ Press the "Continue" and "Close contour" softkeys.
ShopTurn inserts a straight line between your current position and the
starting point.

Parameter Description for contour element "straight line" Unit

X

Y

L
α1
α2
End face/End face C and End face Y - Cartesian:
End point in the X direction (abs. or inc.)
Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.
End point in the Y direction (abs. or inc.)
Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.
Length of straight line
Starting angle to X axis
Angle to preceding element
Tangential transition: α2=0

mm

mm

mm
Degrees
Degrees

L1


ϕ1


L
α1
α2
End face/End face C and End face Y - Polar:
abs: distance between pole and end point
inc: distance between final point and end point
Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.
abs: polar angle between pole and end point
inc: polar angle between final point and end point
Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.
Length of straight line
Starting angle to X axis
Angle to preceding element
Tangential transition: α2=0

mm
mm

Degrees
Degrees

mm
Degrees
Degrees
5

01/2008 ShopTurn functions
5.6 Contour milling

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition 5-279

Y



Z

L
α1
α2
Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C - Cartesian:
End point in Y direction (abs. or inc.) – (calculated from Yα or vice versa)
Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.
End angle (abs. or inc.) – (calculated from Y or vice versa)
Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.
End point in the Z direction (abs. or inc.)
Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.
Length of straight line
Starting angle to Y axis
Angle to preceding element
Tangential transition: α2=0

mm

Degrees

mm

mm
Degrees
Degrees

L1


ϕ1


L
α1
α2
Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C and Peripheral surface Y – Polar:
abs: distance between pole and end point
inc: distance between final point and end point
Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.
abs: polar angle between pole and end point
inc: polar angle between final point and end point
Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.
Length of straight line
Starting angle to Y axis
Angle to preceding element
Tangential transition: α2=0

mm
mm

Degrees
Degrees

mm
Degrees
Degrees

Y

Z

L
α1
α2
Peripheral surface Y - Cartesian:
End point in the Y direction (abs. or inc.)
Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.
End point in the Z direction (abs. or inc.)
Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.
Length of straight line
Starting angle to Y axis
Angle to preceding element
Tangential transition: α2=0

mm

mm

mm
Degrees
Degrees
Transition to
next element
FS: Chamfer as transition element to next contour element
R: Radius as transition element to next contour element
mm
mm
Additional
command
Additional G code commands; see above
5

ShopTurn functions 01/2008
5.6 Contour milling

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
5-280 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition

Parameter Description for contour element "circle" Unit
Direction of
rotation
Clockwise rotation
Counterclockwise rotation


R Radius of circle mm

X

Y

I

J

α1
α2

β1
β2
End face/End face C and End face Y - Cartesian:
End point in the X direction (abs. or inc.)
Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.
End point in the Y direction (abs. or inc.)
Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.
Circle center point in X direction (abs. or inc.)
Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.
Circle center point in Y direction (abs. or inc.)
Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.
Starting angle to X axis
Angle to preceding element
Tangential transition: α2=0
End angle to X axis
Angle of aperture of circle

mm

mm

mm

mm

Degrees
Degrees

Degrees
Degrees

L1


ϕ1


L2


ϕ2

α1
α2

β1
β2
End face/End face C and End face Y - Polar:
abs: distance between pole and end point
inc: distance between final point and end point
Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.
abs: polar angle between pole and end point
inc: polar angle between final point and end point
Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.
abs: distance between pole and center of circle
inc: distance between final point and center of circle
Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.
abs: polar angle between pole and center of circle
inc: polar angle between final point and center of circle
Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.
Starting angle to X axis
Angle to preceding element
Tangential transition: α2=0
End angle to X axis
Angle of aperture of circle

mm
mm

Degrees
Degrees

mm
mm

Degrees
Degrees

Degrees
Degrees

Degrees
Degrees

Y



Z

J



Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C - Cartesian:
End point in Y direction (abs. or inc.) – (calculated from Yα or vice versa)
Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.
End angle (abs. or inc.) – (calculated from Y or vice versa)
Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.
End point in the Z direction (abs. or inc.)
Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.
Circle center point in Y direction (abs. or inc.)
Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.
Circle center point in Y direction (abs. or inc.)
Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.

mm

Degrees

mm

mm

Degrees

5

01/2008 ShopTurn functions
5.6 Contour milling

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition 5-281
K

α1
α2

β1
β2
Circle center point in Z direction (abs. or inc.)
Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.
Starting angle to Y axis
Angle to preceding element
Tangential transition: α2=0
End angle to Y axis
Angle of aperture of circle
mm

Degrees
Degrees

Degrees
Degrees

L1


ϕ1


L2


ϕ2


α1
α2

β1
β2
Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C and Peripheral surface Y – Polar:
abs: distance between pole and end point
inc: distance between final point and end point
Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.
abs: polar angle between pole and end point
inc: polar angle between final point and end point
Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.
abs: distance between pole and center of circle
inc: distance between final point and center of circle
Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.
abs: polar angle between pole and center of circle
inc: polar angle between final point and center of circle
Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.
Starting angle to Y axis
Angle to preceding element
Tangential transition: α2=0

End angle to Y axis
Angle of aperture of circle

mm
mm

Degrees
Degrees

mm
mm

Degrees
Degrees


Degrees
Degrees

Degrees
Degrees

Y

Z

J

K

α1
α2

β1
β2
Peripheral surface Y - Cartesian:
End point in the Y direction (abs. or inc.)
Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.
End point in the Z direction (abs. or inc.)
Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.
Circle center point in Y direction (abs. or inc.)
Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.
Circle center point in Z direction (abs. or inc.)
Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.
Starting angle to Y axis
Angle to preceding element
Tangential transition: α2=0
End angle to Y axis
Angle of aperture of circle

mm

mm

mm

mm

Degrees
Degrees

Degrees
Degrees
Transition to
next element
FS: Chamfer as transition element to next contour element
R: Radius as transition element to next contour element
mm
mm
Additional
command
Additional G code commands; see above

5

ShopTurn functions 01/2008
5.6 Contour milling

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
5-282 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition
5.6.4 Changing a contour
You can change a previously created contour later. Individual contour
elements can be
• appended,
• modified,
• inserted or
• deleted.

If your program contains two contours of the same name, changes to
the one contour are automatically applied to the second contour with
the same name.

Append contour element

¾ Select the contour in the machining plan.


¾ Press the "Right cursor" key.
The individual contour elements are listed.
¾ Place the cursor on the last element before the end of the contour.

...
¾ Select the required contour element via softkey.
¾ Enter the parameters in the input screen.


¾ Press the "Accept" softkey.
The required contour element is appended to the contour.


Modifying contour
element

¾ Select the contour in the machining plan.


¾ Press the "Right cursor" key.
The individual contour elements are listed.
¾ Position the cursor on the contour element that you want to
modify.


¾ Press the "Right cursor" key.
The associated input form is opened and an enlarged view of the
selected element appears in the programming graphics.
¾ Enter the desired changes.


¾ Press the "Accept" softkey.
The current values for the contour element are accepted and the
change is immediately visible in the programming graphics.

5

01/2008 ShopTurn functions
5.6 Contour milling

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition 5-283
Changing dialog
selection

If when you entered the data for a contour element there were two
different contour options and you chose the wrong one, you can alter
your choice afterwards. If the contour is unique as a result of other
parameters, the system will not prompt you to make a selection.
¾ Open the input screen form for the contour element.

Change
selection

¾ Press the "Change selection" softkey.
The two selection options appear again.

Select
dialog

¾ Press the "Select dialog" softkey to switch between the two
different contour options.

Accept
dialog

¾ Press the "Accept dialog" softkey.
The chosen alternative is accepted.


Insert a contour element

¾ Select the contour in the machining plan.


¾ Press the "Right cursor" key.
The individual contour elements are listed.
¾ Place the cursor on the contour element after which the new
element is to be inserted.

... .
¾ Select a new contour element via softkey.
¾ Enter the parameters in the input screen.


¾ Press the "Accept" softkey.
The contour element is inserted in the contour. Subsequent contour
elements are updated automatically according to the new contour
status.
When you insert a new element into a contour, the remaining contour
elements are not interpreted until you select the symbol for the first
subsequent element alongside the graphics window using the cursor.
The end point of the inserted element may not correspond to the start
point of the subsequent element. In this case, ShopTurn outputs the
error message "Geometrical data contradictory". To rectify the
problem, insert an incline without entering parameter values.


5

ShopTurn functions 01/2008
5.6 Contour milling

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
5-284 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition
Delete contour element

¾ Select the contour in the machining plan.


¾ Press the "Right cursor" key.
The individual contour elements are listed.
¾ Place the cursor on the contour element that you want to delete.

Delete
element

¾ Press the "Delete element" softkey.


¾ Press the "OK" softkey.
The selected contour element is deleted.

5.6.5 Path milling
The "Path milling" function is used when you want to machine open or
closed contours. Before you can mill the contour, you must enter the
contour.
Machining can be performed in either direction, i.e. in the direction of
the programmed contour or in the opposite direction.
For machining in the opposite direction, contours must not consist of
more than 170 contour elements (incl. chamfers/radii).
Special aspects (except for feed values) of free G code input are
ignored during path milling in the opposite direction to the contour.

You can select the machining mode (roughing, finishing, or chamfer)
for path milling. If you want to rough and then finish, you have to call
the machining cycle twice (Block 1 = roughing, Block 2 = finishing).
The programmed parameters are retained when the cycle is called for
the second time.
It is also possible to choose between machining the contour with a
cutter radius offset and traversing the center path.
Cutter radius
compensation

The cutter radius offset allows you to machine a programmed contour
to the right or left of the contour. You can choose between different
approach and retract modes as well as between different approach
and retract strategies.

5

01/2008 ShopTurn functions
5.6 Contour milling

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition 5-285
• Approach/Retract mode
You can approach or retract from the contour in a quadrant,
semicircle or along a straight line.
In the case of a quadrant or semicircle, you have to specify the
radius of the cutter center path and for a straight line, the distance
from the outer edge of the cutter to the start point or end point of
the contour.
You can also specify different modes for approach and retraction,
for example, approach in quadrant mode and retract in semicircle
mode.


Approaching on a straight line, in a quadrant and in a semicircle

• Approach/Retract strategy
Approaching in the plane is performed first in the Z direction in the
depth and then in the XY plane. Retraction is performed in reverse
order.
In the case of three-dimensional approach/retraction, traversing is
performed simultaneously in the depth and in the plane.
You can also specify different strategies for approach and
retraction, for example, approach in the plane and retract three-
dimensionally.
Center path

If you do not want to use cutter radius compensation, the programmed
contour is milled on the center path.
In this case, approaching and retraction is only possible along a
straight line or vertical. Vertical approach/retraction can be used for
closed contours, for example.
5

ShopTurn functions 01/2008
5.6 Contour milling

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
5-286 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition
Slot side compensation

When you want to mill a contour on the peripheral surface ("peripheral
surface/peripheral surface C" machining plane), you can work with or
without a slot wall offset.
• Slot wall offset Off
ShopTurn creates slots with parallel walls when the tool diameter is
equal to the slot width.
If the slot width is larger than the tool diameter, the slot walls will
not be parallel.
• Slot wall offset On
ShopTurn creates slots with parallel walls also when the slot width
is larger than the tool diameter.
If you want to work with a slot wall offset, you must not program the
contour of the slot, but instead the imagined center path of a bolt
inserted in the slot whereby the bolt touches both walls. The
parameter D is used to specify the slot width.



Contour
milling >

Path
milling >

¾ Press the "Milling", "Contour milling" and "Path milling" softkeys.

Parameter Description Unit
T, D, F, S, V See Section "Creating program blocks".
Position Select from 8 different positions:
• End face/End face C – Front
• End face/End face C – Rear
• Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Inner
• Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Outer
• End face Y – Front (only when Y axis exists)
• End face Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists)
• Peripheral surface Y – Inner (only when Y axis exists)
• Peripheral surface Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists)



Clamp/release spindle (only for End face Y/Peripheral surface Y, and for End face
C/Peripheral surface C if the tool is approached vertically for roughing)
The function must be set up by the machine manufacturer.

Machining
method
Roughing

Finishing
Chamfering

Machining
direction
Forward: machining is performed in the programmed contour direction
Backward: machining is performed in the opposite direction to the programmed
contour


5

01/2008 ShopTurn functions
5.6 Contour milling

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition 5-287
Radius
compensation
Input defining which side of the contour the milling cutter machines in the
programmed direction:
Machining to the right of the contour
Machining to the left of the contour
Machining along the center path


Z0
Z1
DZ
UZ
UXY
FS
ZFS
End face/End face C:
Reference point in Z direction (abs.)
Depth based on Z0 (abs or inc) – (only for roughing and finishing)
Maximum depth infeed (Z direction) – (for roughing and finishing only)
Finishing allowance in depth (for roughing only)
Finishing allowance in the plane (only for roughing and to the left of the contour)
Chamfer width (inc) – (for chamfer only)
Insertion depth of tool tip (abs or inc) -- (for chamfer only)

mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm

Slot wall offset
D
X0
X1
DX
UX
UYZ
FS
ZFS
Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C:
Activate slot wall offset
Offset to programmed path (only with activated slot wall offset)
Cylinder diameter ∅ (abs.)
Depth based on Z0 ∅ (abs or inc) – (only for roughing and finishing)
Maximum depth infeed (X direction) – (for roughing and finishing only)
Finishing allowance in depth (for roughing only)
Finishing allowance in the plane (only for roughing and to the left of the contour)
Chamfer width (inc) – (for chamfer only)
Insertion depth of tool tip (abs or inc) -- (for chamfer only)


mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm

CP
Z0
Z1
DZ
UZ
UXY
FS
ZFS
End face Y:
Reference point
Reference point in Z direction (abs.)
Depth based on Z0 (abs or inc) – (only for roughing and finishing)
Maximum depth infeed (Z direction) – (for roughing and finishing only)
Finishing allowance in depth (for roughing only)
Finishing allowance in the plane (only for roughing and to the left of the contour)
Chamfer width (inc) – (for chamfer only)
Insertion depth of tool tip (abs or inc) -- (for chamfer only)

Degrees
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm

C0
X0
X1
DX
UX
UYZ
FS
ZFS
Peripheral surface Y:
Reference point
Reference point in X direction (abs)
Depth based on X0 (abs or inc) – (only for roughing and finishing)
Maximum depth infeed (X direction) – (for roughing and finishing only)
Finishing allowance in depth (for roughing only)
Finishing allowance in the plane (only for roughing and to the left of the contour)
Chamfer width (inc) – (for chamfer only)
Insertion depth of tool tip (abs or inc) -- (for chamfer only)

Degrees
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
5

ShopTurn functions 01/2008
5.6 Contour milling

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
5-288 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition
Approach
mode
Approach mode:
In a quadrant: Part of a spiral (only with path milling left and right of the contour)
In a semicircle: Part of a spiral (only with path milling left and right of the contour)
In a straight line: Slope in space
Perpendicular: Perpendicular to the path (only with path milling on the center path)

Approach
strategy Axis by axis

Spatial (not with perpendicular approach mode)

R1 Approach radius (only for quadrant or semicircle approach mode) mm
L1 Approach distance (only for straight-line approach mode) mm
FZ Depth infeed feedrate
(for end face/end face C and end face Y with axis-by-axis approach strategy)
mm/tooth
mm/min
FX Depth infeed feedrate
(for peripheral surface/peripheral surface C and peripheral surface Y with axis-by-
axis approach strategy)
mm/tooth
mm/min
Retract mode Retract mode
In a quadrant: Part of a spiral (only with path milling left and right of the contour)
In a semicircle: Part of a spiral (only with path milling left and right of the contour)
In a straight line: Slope in space
Perpendicular: Perpendicular to the path (only with path milling on the center path)

Retract
strategy
Axis by axis

Three-dimensionally (not with perpendicular retraction mode)

R2 Retraction radius (only for quadrant or semicircle retraction mode) mm
L2 Retraction distance (only for straight-line retraction mode) mm
Retraction
mode
If more than one depth infeed is necessary, specify the retraction height to which the
tool retracts between the separate infeeds (in the transition from the end of the
contour to the beginning).
• To retraction plane
• Z0+safety clearance (for end face/end face C and end face Y only) or X0+safety
clearance (for peripheral surface/peripheral surface C and peripheral surface Y
only)
• Safety clearance
• No retraction


5

01/2008 ShopTurn functions
5.6 Contour milling

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition 5-289
5.6.6 Predrilling a contour pocket
When removing stock from a contour pocket, if you want the cutter to
plunge into the material vertically and if a milling cutter with an end
tooth is not available, you must predrill the pocket first. To prevent the
drill slipping during drilling, you can center it first.

Before you drill the pocket, you must enter the pocket contour. If you
want to center before predrilling, you have to program the two
machining steps in separate blocks.
The number and positions of the necessary predrilled holes depend
on the specific circumstances (such as shape of contour, tool, plane
infeed, finishing allowance) and are calculated by ShopTurn.
If you mill several pockets and want to avoid unnecessary tool
changeover, predrill all the pockets first and then remove the stock. In
this case, for centering/predrilling, you also have to enter the
parameters that appear when you press the "All parameters" softkey.
These parameters must correspond to the parameters from the
previous removal step. Then program as follows:
1. Contour pocket 1
2. Centering
3. Contour pocket 2
4. Centering
5. Contour pocket 1
6. Predrilling
7. Contour pocket 2
8. Predrilling
9. Contour pocket 1
10. Machining
11. Contour pocket 2
12. Machining
If you machine a pocket completely, i.e. center, predrill and remove
stock in immediate succession, and do not complete the additional
parameters on centering/predrilling, ShopTurn loads these parameter
values from the stock removal (roughing) machining step.

5

ShopTurn functions 01/2008
5.6 Contour milling

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
5-290 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition
Centering


Contour
milling >

Predrilling
>

Centering

¾ Press the "Milling", "Contour milling", "Predrilling" and "Centering"
softkeys.

All
parameters

¾ Press the "All Parameters" softkey if you want to enter additional
parameters.

Parameter Description of centering Unit
T, D, F, S, V See Section "Creating program blocks".
Position Select from 8 different positions:
• End face/End face C – Front
• End face/End face C – Rear
• Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Inner
• Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Outer
• End face Y – Front (only when Y axis exists)
• End face Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists)
• Peripheral surface Y – Inner (only when Y axis exists)
• Peripheral surface Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists)



Clamp/release spindle
The function must be set up by the machine manufacturer.

TR Reference tool for centering
D Cutting edge of reference tool (1 or 2)

Z0
Z1
DXY

UXY
End face/End face C:
Reference point in Z direction (abs.)
Depth with reference to Z0 (inc.)
Maximum infeed in the XY plane
Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm)
Finishing allowance in plane

mm
mm
mm
%
mm

X0
X1
DYZ

UYZ
Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C:
Cylinder diameter ∅ (abs.)
Depth with reference to X0 (inc.)
Maximum infeed in the YZ plane
Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm)
Finishing allowance in plane

mm
mm
mm
%
mm

CP
Z0
Z1
DXY

UXY
End face Y:
Reference point
Reference point in Z direction (abs.)
Depth with reference to Z0 (inc.)
Maximum infeed in the XY plane
Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm)
Finishing allowance in plane

Degrees
mm
mm
mm
%
mm

5

01/2008 ShopTurn functions
5.6 Contour milling

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition 5-291

C0
X0
X1
DYZ

UYZ
Peripheral surface Y:
Reference point
Reference point in X direction (abs)
Depth with reference to X0 (inc.)
Maximum infeed in the YZ plane
Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm)
Finishing allowance in plane

Degrees
mm
mm
mm
%
mm
Retraction
mode
If more than one insertion point is necessary, specify the retraction height to which
the tool retracts between insertion points:
• To retraction plane
• Z0+safety clearance (for end face/end face C and end face Y only) or
X0+safety clearance (for peripheral surface/peripheral surface C and peripheral
surface Y only)
If there are no islands larger than Z0 (X0) in the pocket area, Z0 + safety clearance
(X0 + safety clearance) can be programmed as the retraction mode.



Predrilling


Contour
milling >

Predrilling
>

Predrilling

¾ Press the "Milling", "Contour milling", "Predrilling" and "Predrilling"
softkeys in this order.

All
parameters

¾ Press the "All parameters" softkey if you want to enter additional
parameters.

Parameter Description of predrilling Unit
T, D, F, S, V See Section "Creating program blocks".
Position Select from 8 different positions:
• End face/End face C – Front
• End face/End face C – Rear
• Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Inner
• Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Outer
• End face Y – Front (only when Y axis exists)
• End face Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists)
• Peripheral surface Y – Inner (only when Y axis exists)
• Peripheral surface Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists)



Clamp/release spindle
The function must be set up by the machine manufacturer.

TR Reference tool for predrilling
D Cutting edge of reference tool (1 or 2)

Z0
Z1
DXY

UXY
UZ
End face/End face C:
Reference point in Z direction (abs.)
Depth with reference to Z0 (abs. or inc.)
Maximum infeed in the XY plane
Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm)
Finishing allowance in plane
Finishing allowance in depth

mm
mm
mm
%
mm
mm
5

ShopTurn functions 01/2008
5.6 Contour milling

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
5-292 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition

X0
X1
DYZ

UYZ
UX
Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C:
Cylinder diameter ∅ (abs.)
Depth with reference to X0 ∅ (abs. or inc.)
Maximum infeed in the YZ plane
Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm)
Finishing allowance in plane
Finishing allowance in depth

mm
mm
mm
%
mm
mm

CP
Z0
Z1
DXY

UXY
UZ
End face Y:
Reference point
Reference point in Z direction (abs.)
Depth with reference to Z0 (abs. or inc.)
Maximum infeed in the XY plane
Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm)
Finishing allowance in plane
Finishing allowance in depth

Degrees
mm
mm
mm
%
mm
mm

C0
X0
X1
DYZ

UYZ
UX
Peripheral surface Y:
Reference point
Reference point in X direction (abs)
Depth with reference to X0 (abs. or inc.)
Maximum infeed in the YZ plane
Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm)
Finishing allowance in plane
Finishing allowance in depth

Degrees
mm
mm
mm
%
mm
mm
Retraction
mode
If more than one insertion point is necessary, specify the retraction height to which
the tool retracts between insertion points:
• To retraction plane
• Z0+safety clearance (for end face/end face C and end face Y only) or
X0+safety clearance (for peripheral surface/peripheral surface C and peripheral
surface Y only)
If there are no islands larger than Z0 (X0) in the pocket area, Z0 + safety clearance
(X0 + safety clearance) can be programmed as the retraction mode.


5

01/2008 ShopTurn functions
5.6 Contour milling

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition 5-293
5.6.7 Milling a contour pocket (roughing)
The "Mill pocket" function is used when you want to mill a pocket on
the end face or peripheral surface.

Before you can program stock removal from the pocket, you must
enter the contour of the pocket and, if applicable, the contour of an
island.
Stock is removed from the pocket parallel to the contour from the
inside to the outside. The direction is determined by the machining
direction (climb/conventional) (see "Changing program settings").
If an island is located in the pocket, ShopTurn automatically takes this
into account during stock removal.
You can select the machining mode (roughing or finishing) for
removal. If you want to rough and then finish, you have to call the
machining cycle twice (Block 1 = roughing, Block 2 = finishing). The
programmed parameters are retained when the cycle is called for the
second time. For further details on finishing, please read the Section
"Finishing the contour pocket".
During insertion with oscillation, the message “Ramp distance too
short” will appear if the tool on the ramp distance is removed from the
insertion point by less than the milling cutter diameter. If this occurs,
please reduce the angle of insertion.



Contour
milling >

Pocket
milling

¾ Press the "Milling", "Contour milling" and "Pocket milling" softkeys.
¾ Select "Roughing" machining mode.

Parameter Description for roughing Unit
T, D, F, S, V See Section "Creating program blocks".
Position Select from 8 different positions:
• End face/End face C – Front
• End face/End face C – Rear
• Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Inner
• Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Outer
• End face Y – Front (only when Y axis exists)
• End face Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists)
• Peripheral surface Y – Inner (only when Y axis exists)
• Peripheral surface Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists)



Clamp/release spindle (only for End face Y/Peripheral surface Y, and for End face
C/Peripheral surface C if the tool is inserted in the center for roughing)
The function must be set up by the machine manufacturer.


5

ShopTurn functions 01/2008
5.6 Contour milling

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
5-294 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition
Machining
method
Roughing


Z0
Z1
DXY

DZ
UXY
UZ
End face/End face C:
Reference point in Z direction (abs.)
Depth with reference to Z0 (abs. or inc.)
Maximum infeed in the XY plane
Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm)
Maximum depth infeed (Z direction)
Finishing allowance in plane
Finishing allowance in depth

mm
mm
mm
%
mm
mm
mm

X0
X1
DYZ

DX
UYZ
UX
Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C:
Cylinder diameter ∅ (abs.)
Depth with reference to X0 ∅ (abs. or inc.)
Maximum infeed in the YZ plane
Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm)
Maximum depth infeed (X direction)
Finishing allowance in plane
Finishing allowance in depth

mm
mm
mm
%
mm
mm
mm

CP
Z0
Z1
DXY

DZ
UXY
UZ
End face Y:
Reference point
Reference point in Z direction (abs.)
Depth with reference to Z0 (abs. or inc.)
Maximum infeed in the XY plane
Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm)
Maximum depth infeed (Z direction)
Finishing allowance in plane
Finishing allowance in depth

Degrees
mm
mm
mm
%
mm
mm
mm

C0
X0
X1
DYZ

DX
UYZ
UX
Peripheral surface Y:
Reference point
Reference point in X direction (abs)
Depth with reference to X0 (abs. or inc.)
Maximum infeed in the YZ plane
Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm)
Maximum depth infeed (X direction)
Finishing allowance in plane
Finishing allowance in depth

Degrees
mm
mm
mm
%
mm
mm
mm
Starting point



X

Y

Y

Z
Determine start point automatically or enter it manually
Manual entry allows for a start point outside the pocket, whereby straight line
machining into the pocket is performed first, e.g. for a pocket with a side opening
without any insertion.
Start point X (abs.) – (only for end face/end face C and end face Y with manual start
point)
Start point Y (abs.) – (only for end face/end face C and end face Y with manual start
point)
Start point Y (abs.) – (only for peripheral face/peripheral face C and peripheral face
Y with manual start point)
Start point Z (abs.) – (only for peripheral face/peripheral face C and peripheral face
Y with manual start point)




mm

mm

mm

mm
5

01/2008 ShopTurn functions
5.6 Contour milling

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition 5-295
Insertion Insertion strategy:
Oscillating: Oscillating insertion with the programmed angle (EW).
Helical: Helical insertion with the programmed radius (ER) and the programmed
gradient (EP).
Center: For this insertion strategy, a milling cutter is required that cuts in the center.
It is inserted at the programmed feedrate (FZ or FX).

EW Insertion angle (for oscillation only) Degrees
EP Maximum Insertion gradient (only for helical)
The gradient of the helix may be smaller in some geometric conditions.
mm/rev
ER Insertion radius (only for helical)
The radius must not be larger than the cutter radius, otherwise material will remain.
Also make sure the pocket is not violated.
mm
FZ Depth infeed feedrate (for end face/end face C and end face Y with central insertion
only)
mm/tooth
mm/min
FX Depth infeed feedrate (for peripheral surface/peripheral surface C and peripheral
surface Y with central insertion only)
mm/tooth
mm/min
Retraction
mode
If more than one insertion point is necessary, specify the retraction height to which
the tool retracts between insertion points:
• To retraction plane
• Z0+safety clearance (for end face/end face C and end face Y only) or
X0+safety clearance (for peripheral surface/peripheral surface C and peripheral
surface Y only)
If there are no islands larger than Z0 (X0) in the pocket area, Z0 + safety clearance
(X0 + safety clearance) can be programmed as the retraction mode.


5

ShopTurn functions 01/2008
5.6 Contour milling

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
5-296 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition
5.6.8 Removing residual material from a contour pocket
When you have removed stock from a pocket (with/without islands)
and residual material remains in place, this is automatically detected
by ShopTurn. You can use a suitable tool to remove this residual
material without having to machine the whole pocket again, i.e.
avoiding unnecessary idle motions.
Material that remains as part of the finishing allowance is not residual
material.

The residual material is calculated on the basis of the milling cutter
used for stock removal.
If you mill several pockets and want to avoid unnecessary tool
changeover, remove stock from all the pockets first and then remove
the residual material. In this case, for removing the residual material,
you also have to enter a value for the "Reference tool TR" parameter
that appears when you press the "All parameters" softkey. Then
program as follows:
1. Contour pocket 1
2. Machining
3. Contour pocket 2
4. Machining
5. Contour pocket 1
6. Solid machine residual material
7. Contour pocket 2
8. Solid machine residual material
The "Residual material" function is a software option.



Contour
milling >

Pocket
resid. mat.

¾ Press the "Milling", "Contour milling" and "Pocket resid. mat."
softkeys.

All
parameters

¾ Press the "All parameters" softkey if you want to enter additional
parameters.

5

01/2008 ShopTurn functions
5.6 Contour milling

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition 5-297
Parameter Description Unit
T, D, F, S, V See Section "Creating program blocks".
Position Select from 8 different positions:
• End face/End face C – Front
• End face/End face C – Rear
• Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Inner
• Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Outer
• End face Y – Front (only when Y axis exists)
• End face Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists)
• Peripheral surface Y – Inner (only when Y axis exists)
• Peripheral surface Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists)



Clamp/release spindle (for End face Y/Peripheral surface Y only)
The function must be set up by the machine manufacturer.

Machining
method
Roughing

TR Reference tool for residual material
D Cutting edge of reference tool (1 or 2)

Z0
Z1
DXY

DZ
UXY
UZ
End face/End face C:
Reference point in Z direction (abs.)
Depth with reference to Z0 (abs. or inc.)
Maximum infeed in the XY plane
Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm)
Maximum depth infeed (Z direction)
Finishing allowance in plane
Finishing allowance in depth

mm
mm
mm
%
mm
mm
mm

X0
X1
DYZ

DX
UYZ
UX
Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C:
Cylinder diameter ∅ (abs.)
Depth with reference to X0 ∅ (abs. or inc.)
Maximum infeed in the YZ plane
Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm)
Maximum depth infeed (X direction)
Finishing allowance in plane
Finishing allowance in depth

mm
mm
mm
%
mm
mm
mm

CP
Z0
Z1
DXY

DZ
UXY
UZ
End face Y:
Reference point
Reference point in Z direction (abs.)
Depth with reference to Z0 (abs. or inc.)
Maximum infeed in the XY plane
Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm)
Maximum depth infeed (Z direction)
Finishing allowance in plane
Finishing allowance in depth

Degrees
mm
mm
mm
%
mm
mm
mm
5

ShopTurn functions 01/2008
5.6 Contour milling

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
5-298 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition

C0
X0
X1
DYZ

DX
UYZ
UX
Peripheral surface Y:
Reference point
Reference point in X direction (abs)
Depth with reference to X0 (abs. or inc.)
Maximum infeed in the YZ plane
Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm)
Maximum depth infeed (X direction)
Finishing allowance in plane
Finishing allowance in depth

Degrees
mm
mm
mm
%
mm
mm
mm
Retraction
mode
If more than one insertion point is necessary, specify the retraction height to which
the tool retracts between insertion points:
• To retraction plane
• Z0+safety clearance (for end face/end face C and end face Y only) or
X0+safety clearance (for peripheral surface/peripheral surface C and peripheral
surface Y only)
If there are no islands larger than Z0 (X0) in the pocket area, Z0 + safety clearance
(X0 + safety clearance) can be programmed as the retraction mode.


5.6.9 Finishing the contour pocket
If you programmed stock removal from the pocket with a finishing
allowance for the base or edge of the pocket, you still have to finish
the pocket.

Separate blocks must be programmed for finishing the base and/or for
finishing the edge. In each case, the pocket will only be machined
once.
ShopTurn takes into account any islands as was the case for
roughing.
You can program "Path milling" as an alternative to "Edge finishing".
Optimization possibilities are also offered for the approach/retract
strategy and the approach/retract mode. Then program as follows:
1. Contour pocket
2. Contour island
3. Remove stock (roughing)
4. Contour pocket
5. Path milling (finishing)
6. Contour island
7. Path milling (finishing)

5

01/2008 ShopTurn functions
5.6 Contour milling

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition 5-299


Contour
milling >

Pocket
milling

¾ Press the "Milling", "Contour milling" and "Pocket milling" softkeys.
¾ Select "Finish base" or "Finish edge" machining mode.

Parameter Description of finishing the base Unit
T, D, F, S, V See Section "Creating program blocks".
Position Select from 8 different positions:
• End face/End face C – Front
• End face/End face C – Rear
• Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Inner
• Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Outer
• End face Y – Front (only when Y axis exists)
• End face Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists)
• Peripheral surface Y – Inner (only when Y axis exists)
• Peripheral surface Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists)



Clamp/release spindle (for End face Y/Peripheral surface Y only)
The function must be set up by the machine manufacturer.

Machining
protection
Finishing the base


Z0
Z1
DXY

UXY
UZ
End face/End face C:
Reference point in Z direction (abs.)
Depth with reference to Z0 (abs. or inc.)
Maximum infeed in the XY plane
Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm)
Finishing allowance in plane
Finishing allowance in depth

mm
mm
mm
%
mm
mm

X0
X1
DYZ

UYZ
UX
Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C:
Cylinder diameter ∅ (abs.)
Depth with reference to X0 ∅ (abs. or inc.)
Maximum infeed in the YZ plane
Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm)
Finishing allowance in plane
Finishing allowance in depth

mm
mm
mm
%
mm
mm

CP
Z0
Z1
DXY

UXY
UZ
End face Y:
Reference point
Reference point in Z direction (abs.)
Depth with reference to Z0 (abs. or inc.)
Maximum infeed in the XY plane
Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm)
Finishing allowance in plane
Finishing allowance in depth

Degrees
mm
mm
mm
%
mm
mm
5

ShopTurn functions 01/2008
5.6 Contour milling

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
5-300 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition

C0
X0
X1
DYZ

UYZ
UX
Peripheral surface Y:
Reference point
Reference point in X direction (abs)
Depth with reference to X0 (abs. or inc.)
Maximum infeed in the YZ plane
Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm)
Finishing allowance in plane
Finishing allowance in depth

Degrees
mm
mm
mm
%
mm
mm
Starting point



X

Y

Y

Z
Determine start point automatically or enter it manually
Manual entry allows for a start point outside the pocket, whereby straight line
machining into the pocket is performed first, e.g. for a pocket with a side opening
without any insertion.
Start point X (abs.) – (only for end face/end face C and end face Y with manual start
point)
Start point Y (abs.) – (only for end face/end face C and end face Y with manual start
point)
Start point Y (abs.) – (only for peripheral face/peripheral face C and peripheral face
Y with manual start point)
Start point Z (abs.) – (only for peripheral face/peripheral face C and peripheral face
Y with manual start point)




mm

mm

mm

mm
Insertion Insertion strategy:
Oscillating: Oscillating insertion with the programmed angle (EW).
Helical: Helical insertion with the programmed radius (ER) and the programmed
gradient (EP).
Center: For this insertion strategy, a milling cutter is required that cuts in the center.
It is inserted at the programmed feedrate (FZ or FX).

EW Insertion angle (for oscillation only) Degrees
EP Maximum Insertion gradient (only for helical)
The gradient of the helix may be smaller in some geometric conditions.
mm/rev
ER Insertion radius (only for helical)
The radius must not be larger than the cutter radius, otherwise material will remain.
Also make sure the pocket is not violated.
mm
FZ Depth infeed feedrate (for end face/end face C and end face Y with central insertion
only)
mm/tooth
mm/min
FX Depth infeed feedrate (for peripheral surface/peripheral surface C and peripheral
surface Y with central insertion only)
mm/tooth
mm/min
Retraction
mode
If more than one insertion point is necessary, specify the retraction height to which
the tool retracts between insertion points:
• To retraction plane
• Z0+safety clearance (for end face/end face C and end face Y only) or
X0+safety clearance (for peripheral surface/peripheral surface C and peripheral
surface Y only)
If there are no islands larger than Z0 (X0) in the pocket area, Z0 + safety clearance
(X0 + safety clearance) can be programmed as the retraction mode.


5

01/2008 ShopTurn functions
5.6 Contour milling

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition 5-301
Parameter Description of finishing the edge Unit
T, D, F, S, V See Section "Creating program blocks".
Position Select from 8 different positions:
• End face/End face C – Front
• End face/End face C – Rear
• Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Inner
• Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Outer
• End face Y – Front (only when Y axis exists)
• End face Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists)
• Peripheral surface Y – Inner (only when Y axis exists)
• Peripheral surface Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists)



Clamp/release spindle (for End face Y/Peripheral surface Y only)
The function must be set up by the machine manufacturer.

Machining
mode
Edge finishing


Z0
Z1
DZ
UXY
End face/End face C:
Reference point in Z direction (abs.)
Depth with reference to Z0 (abs. or inc.)
Maximum depth infeed (Z direction)
Finishing allowance in plane

mm
mm
mm
mm

X0
X1
DX
UYZ
Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C:
Cylinder diameter ∅ (abs.)
Depth with reference to X0 ∅ (abs. or inc.)
Maximum depth infeed (X direction)
Finishing allowance in plane

mm
mm
mm
mm

CP
Z0
Z1
DZ
UXY
End face Y:
Reference point
Reference point in Z direction (abs.)
Depth with reference to Z0 (abs. or inc.)
Maximum depth infeed (Z direction)
Finishing allowance in plane

Degrees
mm
mm
mm
mm

C0
X0
X1
DX
UYZ
Peripheral surface Y:
Reference point
Reference point in X direction (abs)
Depth with reference to X0 (abs. or inc.)
Maximum depth infeed (X direction)
Finishing allowance in plane

Degrees
mm
mm
mm
mm
Retraction
mode
If more than one insertion point is necessary, specify the retraction height to which
the tool retracts between insertion points:
• To retraction plane
• Z0+safety clearance (for end face/end face C and end face Y only) or
X0+safety clearance (for peripheral surface/peripheral surface C and peripheral
surface Y only)
If there are no islands larger than Z0 (X0) in the pocket area, Z0 + safety clearance
(X0 + safety clearance) can be programmed as the retraction mode.


5

ShopTurn functions 01/2008
5.6 Contour milling

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
5-302 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition
5.6.10 Chamfering a contour pocket


Contour
milling >

Pocket
milling

¾ Press the "Milling", "Contour milling" and "Pocket milling" softkeys.
¾ Select "Chamfer" machining mode.
If you want to mill a chamfer and have programmed inside corners
without filleting during rounding, you must specify the radius of the
finishing tool as the rounding in the contour.

Parameter
Description for chamfer:
Unit
T, D, F, S, V See Section "Creating program blocks".
Position Select from 8 different positions:
• End face/End face C – Front
• End face/End face C – Rear
• Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Inner
• Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Outer
• End face Y – Front (only when Y axis exists)
• End face Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists)
• Peripheral surface Y – Inner (only when Y axis exists)
• Peripheral surface Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists)



Clamp/release spindle (for End face Y/Peripheral surface Y only)
The function must be set up by the machine manufacturer.

Machining
method
Chamfering

Z0
FS
ZFS
End face/End face C:
Reference point in Z direction (abs.)
Chamfer width, inc
Insertion depth for tool tip; abs or inc

mm
mm
mm

X0
FS
ZFS
Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C:
Cylinder diameter ∅ (abs.)
Chamfer width, inc
Insertion depth for tool tip; abs or inc

mm
mm
mm

5

01/2008 ShopTurn functions
5.6 Contour milling

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition 5-303

CP
Z0
FS
ZFS
End face Y:
Reference point
Reference point in Z direction (abs.)
Chamfer width, inc
Insertion depth for tool tip; abs or inc

Degrees
mm
mm
mm

C0
X0
FS
ZFS
Peripheral surface Y:
Reference point
Reference point in X direction (abs)
Chamfer width, inc
Insertion depth for tool tip; abs or inc

Degrees
mm
mm
mm
Retraction
mode
If more than one insertion point is necessary, specify the retraction height to which
the tool retracts between insertion points:
• To retraction plane
• Z0+safety clearance (for end face/end face C and end face Y only) or
X0+safety clearance (for peripheral surface/peripheral surface C and peripheral
surface Y only)
If there are no islands larger than Z0 (X0) in the pocket area, Z0 + safety clearance
(X0 + safety clearance) can be programmed as the retraction mode.


5.6.11 Milling a contour spigot (roughing)
The "Mill spigot" function is used when you want to mill a spigot on the
end face or peripheral surface.

Before you mill the spigot, you must first enter a blank contour and
then one or more spigot contours. The blank contour defines the outer
limits of the material. The tool moves at rapid traverse outside this
area. Material is then removed between the blank contour and spigot
contour.
You can select the machining mode (roughing, finishing, or chamfer)
for milling. If you want to rough and then finish, you have to call the
machining cycle twice (Block 1 = roughing, Block 2 = finishing). The
programmed parameters are retained when the cycle is called for the
second time. For more on finishing, see Section "Finishing the contour
spigot".
If you only program a blank contour without a second contour for a
spigot, you can face mill the blank contour.

5

ShopTurn functions 01/2008
5.6 Contour milling

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
5-304 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition
Approach/retraction 1. The tool approaches the starting point at rapid traverse at the
height of the retraction plane and adjusts to the safety distance.
The start point is calculated by ShopTurn.
2. The tool first infeeds to the machining depth and then approaches
the spigot contour from the side in a quadrant at machining
feedrate.
3. The spigot is cleared in parallel with the contours from the outside
in. The direction is determined by the machining direction
(climb/conventional) (see "Changing program settings").
4. When the first plane of the spigot has been cleared, the tool
retracts from the contour in a quadrant and then infeeds to the next
machining depth.
5. The spigot is again approached in a quadrant and cleared in
parallel with the contours from outside in.
6. Steps 4 and 5 are repeated until the programmed spigot depth is
reached.
7. The tool moves back to the safety distance at rapid traverse.



Contour
milling >

Spigot
milling

¾ Press the "Milling", "Contour milling" and "Spigot milling" softkeys.
¾ Select "Roughing" machining mode.

Parameter Description for roughing Unit
T, D, F, S, V See Section "Creating program blocks".
Position Select from 8 different positions:
• End face/End face C – Front
• End face/End face C – Rear
• Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Inner
• Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Outer
• End face Y – Front (only when Y axis exists)
• End face Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists)
• Peripheral surface Y – Inner (only when Y axis exists)
• Peripheral surface Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists)



Clamp/release spindle (only for End face Y/Peripheral surface Y, and for End face
C/Peripheral surface C if the tool is inserted in the center for roughing)
The function must be set up by the machine manufacturer.

Machining
protection
Roughing

5

01/2008 ShopTurn functions
5.6 Contour milling

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition 5-305

Z0
Z1
DXY

DZ
UXY
UZ
End face/End face C:
Reference point in Z direction (abs.)
Depth with reference to Z0 (abs. or inc.)
Maximum infeed in the XY plane
Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm)
Maximum depth infeed (Z direction)
Finishing allowance in plane
Finishing allowance in depth

mm
mm
mm
%
mm
mm
mm

X0
X1
DYZ

DX
UYZ
UX
Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C:
Cylinder diameter ∅ (abs.)
Depth with reference to X0 ∅ (abs. or inc.)
Maximum infeed in the YZ plane
Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm)
Maximum depth infeed (X direction)
Finishing allowance in plane
Finishing allowance in depth

mm
mm
mm
%
mm
mm
mm

CP
Z0
Z1
DXY

DZ
UXY
UZ
End face Y:
Reference point
Reference point in Z direction (abs.)
Depth with reference to Z0 (abs. or inc.)
Maximum infeed in the XY plane
Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm)
Maximum depth infeed (Z direction)
Finishing allowance in plane
Finishing allowance in depth

Degrees
mm
mm
mm
%
mm
mm
mm

C0
X0
X1
DYZ

DX
UYZ
UX
Peripheral surface Y:
Reference point
Reference point in X direction (abs)
Depth with reference to X0 (abs. or inc.)
Maximum infeed in the YZ plane
Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm)
Maximum depth infeed (X direction)
Finishing allowance in plane
Finishing allowance in depth

Degrees
mm
mm
mm
%
mm
mm
mm
Retraction
mode
If more than one approach point is necessary, specify the retraction height to which
the tool retracts between approach points.
• To retraction plane
• Z0+safety clearance (for end face/end face C and end face Y only) or
X0+safety clearance (for peripheral surface/peripheral surface C and peripheral
surface Y only)
If there are no spigots or other elements in the machining range higher than Z0 (X0),
Z0 + safety clearance (X0 + safety clearance) can be programmed as the retraction
mode.


5

ShopTurn functions 01/2008
5.6 Contour milling

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
5-306 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition
5.6.12 Removing residual material from a contour spigot
When you have milled a contour spigot and residual material remains
in place, this is automatically detected by ShopTurn. You can use a
suitable tool to remove this residual material without having to
machine the whole spigot again, i.e. avoiding unnecessary idle
motions.
Material that remains as part of the finishing allowance is not residual
material.

The residual material is calculated on the basis of the milling cutter
used for clearing.
If you mill several spigots and want to avoid unnecessary tool
changeover, clear all the spigots first and then remove the residual
material. In this case, for removing the residual material, you also
have to enter a value for the "Reference tool TR" parameter that
appears when you press the "All parameters" softkey. Then program
as follows:
1. Contour blank 1
2. Contour spigot 1
3. Clear spigot 1
4. Contour blank 2
5. Contour spigot 2
6. Clear spigot 2
7. Contour blank 1
8. Contour spigot 1
9. Clear residual material spigot 1
10. Contour blank 2
11. Contour spigot 2
12. Clear residual material spigot 2
The "Residual material" function is a software option.



Contour
milling >

Spigot
resid. mat.

¾ Press the "Milling", "Contour milling" and "Spigot resid. mat."
softkeys.

All
parameters

¾ Press the "All parameters" softkey if you want to enter additional
parameters.

5

01/2008 ShopTurn functions
5.6 Contour milling

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition 5-307
Parameter Description Unit
T, D, F, S, V See Section "Creating program blocks".
Position Select from 8 different positions:
• End face/End face C – Front
• End face/End face C – Rear
• Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Inner
• Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Outer
• End face Y – Front (only when Y axis exists)
• End face Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists)
• Peripheral surface Y – Inner (only when Y axis exists)
• Peripheral surface Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists)



Clamp/release spindle (for End face Y/Peripheral surface Y only)
The function must be set up by the machine manufacturer.

Machining
method
Roughing

TR Reference tool for residual material
D Cutting edge of reference tool (1 or 2)

Z0
Z1
DXY

DZ
UXY
UZ
End face/End face C:
Reference point in Z direction (abs.)
Depth with reference to Z0 (abs. or inc.)
Maximum infeed in the XY plane
Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm)
Maximum depth infeed (Z direction)
Finishing allowance in plane
Finishing allowance in depth

mm
mm
mm
%
mm
mm
mm

X0
X1
DYZ

DX
UYZ
UX
Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C:
Cylinder diameter ∅ (abs.)
Depth with reference to X0 ∅ (abs. or inc.)
Maximum infeed in the YZ plane
Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm)
Maximum depth infeed (X direction)
Finishing allowance in plane
Finishing allowance in depth

mm
mm
mm
%
mm
mm
mm

CP
Z0
Z1
DXY

DZ
UXY
UZ
End face Y:
Reference point
Reference point in Z direction (abs.)
Depth with reference to Z0 (abs. or inc.)
Maximum infeed in the XY plane
Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm)
Maximum depth infeed (Z direction)
Finishing allowance in plane
Finishing allowance in depth

Degrees
mm
mm
mm
%
mm
mm
mm
5

ShopTurn functions 01/2008
5.6 Contour milling

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
5-308 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition

C0
X0
X1
DYZ

DX
UYZ
UX
Peripheral surface Y:
Reference point
Reference point in X direction (abs)
Depth with reference to X0 (abs. or inc.)
Maximum infeed in the YZ plane
Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm)
Maximum depth infeed (X direction)
Finishing allowance in plane
Finishing allowance in depth

Degrees
mm
mm
mm
%
mm
mm
mm
Retraction
mode
If more than one approach point is necessary, specify the retraction height to which
the tool retracts between approach points.
• To retraction plane
• Z0+safety clearance (for end face/end face C and end face Y only) or
X0+safety clearance (for peripheral surface/peripheral surface C and peripheral
surface Y only)
If there are no spigots or other elements in the machining range higher than Z0 (X0),
Z0 + safety clearance (X0 + safety clearance) can be programmed as the retraction
mode.


5.6.13 Finishing a contour spigot
If you programmed a finishing allowance for the base or edge of the
spigot in spigot milling, you still have to finish the spigot.

Separate blocks must be programmed for finishing the base and/or for
finishing the edge. In each case, the spigot will only be machined
once.
You can program "Path milling" as an alternative to "Edge finishing".
Optimization possibilities are also offered for the approach/retract
strategy and the approach/retract mode. Then program as follows:
1. Contour blank
2. Contour spigot
3. Mill spigot (roughing)
4. Contour blank
5. Path milling (finishing)
6. Contour spigot
7. Path milling (finishing)



Contour
milling >

Spigot
milling

¾ Press the "Milling", "Contour milling" and "Spigot milling" softkeys.
¾ Select "Finish base" or "Finish edge" machining mode.

5

01/2008 ShopTurn functions
5.6 Contour milling

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition 5-309
Parameter Description of finishing the base Unit
T, D, F, S, V See Section "Creating program blocks".
Position Select from 8 different positions:
• End face/End face C – Front
• End face/End face C – Rear
• Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Inner
• Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Outer
• End face Y – Front (only when Y axis exists)
• End face Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists)
• Peripheral surface Y – Inner (only when Y axis exists)
• Peripheral surface Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists)



Clamp/release spindle (for End face Y/Peripheral surface Y only)
The function must be set up by the machine manufacturer.

Machining
protection
Finishing the base


Z0
Z1
DXY

UXY
UZ
End face/End face C:
Reference point in Z direction (abs.)
Depth with reference to Z0 (abs. or inc.)
Maximum infeed in the XY plane
Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm)
Finishing allowance in plane
Finishing allowance in depth

mm
mm
mm
%
mm
mm

X0
X1
DYZ

UYZ
UX
Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C:
Cylinder diameter ∅ (abs.)
Depth with reference to X0 ∅ (abs. or inc.)
Maximum infeed in the YZ plane
Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm)
Finishing allowance in plane
Finishing allowance in depth

mm
mm
mm
%
mm
mm

CP
Z0
Z1
DXY

UXY
UZ
End face Y:
Reference point
Reference point in Z direction (abs.)
Depth with reference to Z0 (abs. or inc.)
Maximum infeed in the XY plane
Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm)
Finishing allowance in plane
Finishing allowance in depth

Degrees
mm
mm
mm
%
mm
mm
5

ShopTurn functions 01/2008
5.6 Contour milling

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
5-310 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition

C0
X0
X1
DYZ

UYZ
UX
Peripheral surface Y:
Reference point
Reference point in X direction (abs)
Depth with reference to X0 (abs. or inc.)
Maximum infeed in the YZ plane
Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm)
Finishing allowance in plane
Finishing allowance in depth

Degrees
mm
mm
mm
%
mm
mm
Retraction
mode
If more than one approach point is necessary, specify the retraction height to which
the tool retracts between approach points.
• To retraction plane
• Z0+safety clearance (for end face/end face C and end face Y only) or
X0+safety clearance (for peripheral surface/peripheral surface C and peripheral
surface Y only)
If there are no spigots or other elements in the machining range higher than Z0 (X0),
Z0 + safety clearance (X0 + safety clearance) can be programmed as the retraction
mode.


Parameter Description of finishing the edge Unit
T, D, F, S, V See Section "Creating program blocks".
Position Select from 8 different positions:
• End face/End face C – Front
• End face/End face C – Rear
• Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Inner
• Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Outer
• End face Y – Front (only when Y axis exists)
• End face Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists)
• Peripheral surface Y – Inner (only when Y axis exists)
• Peripheral surface Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists)



Clamp/release spindle (for End face Y/Peripheral surface Y only)
The function must be set up by the machine manufacturer.

Machining
mode
Edge finishing


Z0
Z1
DZ
UXY
End face/End face C:
Reference point in Z direction (abs.)
Depth with reference to Z0 (abs. or inc.)
Maximum depth infeed (Z direction)
Finishing allowance in plane

mm
mm
mm
mm

X0
X1
DX
UYZ
Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C:
Cylinder diameter ∅ (abs.)
Depth with reference to X0 ∅ (abs. or inc.)
Maximum depth infeed (X direction)
Finishing allowance in plane

mm
mm
mm
mm
5

01/2008 ShopTurn functions
5.6 Contour milling

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition 5-311

CP
Z0
Z1
DZ
UXY
End face Y:
Reference point
Reference point in Z direction (abs.)
Depth with reference to Z0 (abs. or inc.)
Maximum depth infeed (Z direction)
Finishing allowance in plane

Degrees
mm
mm
mm
mm

C0
X0
X1
DX
UYZ
Peripheral surface Y:
Reference point
Reference point in X direction (abs)
Depth with reference to X0 (abs. or inc.)
Maximum depth infeed (X direction)
Finishing allowance in plane

Degrees
mm
mm
mm
mm
Retraction
mode
If more than one approach point is necessary, specify the retraction height to which
the tool retracts between approach points.
• To retraction plane
• Z0+safety clearance (for end face/end face C and end face Y only) or
X0+safety clearance (for peripheral surface/peripheral surface C and peripheral
surface Y only)
If there are no spigots or other elements in the machining range higher than Z0 (X0),
Z0 + safety clearance (X0 + safety clearance) can be programmed as the retraction
mode.


5.6.14 Chamfering a contour spigot
If you have planned edge breaking, mill a chamfer after that.



Contour
milling >

Spigot
milling

¾ Press the "Milling", "Contour milling" and "Spigot milling" softkeys.
¾ Select "Chamfer" machining mode.


Parameter Description of finishing the edge
T, D, F, S, V See Section "Creating program blocks".
Position Select from 8 different positions:
• End face/End face C – Front
• End face/End face C – Rear
• Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Inner
• Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Outer
• End face Y – Front (only when Y axis exists)
• End face Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists)
• Peripheral surface Y – Inner (only when Y axis exists)
• Peripheral surface Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists)



Clamp/release spindle (for End face Y/Peripheral surface Y only)
The function must be set up by the machine manufacturer.

5

ShopTurn functions 01/2008
5.6 Contour milling

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
5-312 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition
Machining
mode
Chamfering

Z0
FS
ZFS
End face/End face C:
Reference point in Z direction (abs.)
Chamfer width; abs
Insertion depth tool tip; abs or inc

mm
mm
mm

X0
FS
ZFS
Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C:
Cylinder diameter ∅ (abs.)
Chamfer width; abs
Insertion depth tool tip; abs or inc

mm
mm
mm

CP
Z0
FS
ZFS
End face Y:
Reference point
Reference point in Z direction (abs.)
Chamfer width; abs
Insertion depth tool tip; abs or inc

Degrees
mm
mm
mm

C0
X0
FS
ZFS
Peripheral surface Y:
Reference point
Reference point in X direction (abs)
Chamfer width; abs
Insertion depth tool tip; abs or inc

Degrees
mm
mm
mm
Retraction
mode
If more than one insertion point is necessary, specify the retraction height to which
the tool retracts between insertion points:
• To retraction plane
• Z0+safety clearance (for end face/end face C and end face Y only) or
X0+safety clearance (for peripheral surface/peripheral surface C and peripheral
surface Y only)
If there are no islands larger than Z0 (X0) in the pocket area, Z0 + safety clearance
(X0 + safety clearance) can be programmed as the retraction mode.


5

01/2008 ShopTurn functions
5.7 Calling a subroutine

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition 5-313
5.7 Calling a subroutine
If you require the same machining steps in the programming of
different workpieces, you can define these machining steps in a
separate routine. You can then call this subroutine in any programs.
Identical machining steps therefore only have to be programmed
once.

ShopTurn does not differentiate between main program and
subroutine. This means that you can call a "standard" sequence or G
code program as subroutine in another sequence program. In this
subroutine, you can also call another subroutine. The maximum
nesting depth is 8 subroutines.
You cannot insert subroutines among blocks chained by the control.
If you want to call a sequence program as a subroutine, the program
must already have been calculated once (load or simulate program in
Machine Auto mode). This is not necessary for G code subroutines.
The subroutine must always be stored in the NCK main memory (in a
separate directory "XYZ" or in the "ShopTurn", "Part programs", and
“Subroutines" directories).
If you want to call a subroutine located on another drive, you can use
G code command "EXTCALL".
References: /BEMsl/, Operating Manual HMI Embedded sl
SINUMERIK 840Dsl
Please note that ShopTurn evaluates the settings from the program
header of the subroutine, excluding the blank settings, when the
subroutine is called. These settings also remain active even after the
subroutine has ended.
If you wish to activate the settings from the program header for the
main program again, you can make the settings again in the main
program after calling the subroutine (see Section "Changing program
settings").

Create a ShopTurn or G code program that you would like to call
as a subroutine in another program.
Place the cursor in the machining plan of the main program on the
program block after which the subroutine call is to be inserted.
5

ShopTurn functions 01/2008
5.7 Calling a subroutine

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
5-314 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition


Sub-
routine >

Press the "Various" and "Subroutine" softkeys.

Enter the path of the subroutine if the desired subroutine is not
stored in the same directory as the main program.

Directory Path to enter

ShopTurn ShopTurn

Separate directory XYZ XYZ

Part programs MPF

Subprograms SPF

Enter the name of the subroutine that you want to insert.
You only need to enter the file extension (*.mpf or *.spf) if the
subroutine does not have the file extension specified for the
directory in which the subroutine is stored.

Directory Specified file extension

ShopTurn *.mpf

Separate directory XYZ *.mpf

Part programs *.mpf

Subprograms *.spf



Press the "Accept" softkey.
The subroutine call is inserted in the main program.

Subroutine call
"DRILL"

Subroutine call

5

01/2008 ShopTurn functions
5.8 Repeating program blocks

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition 5-315
5.8 Repeating program blocks
If certain steps in the machining of a workpiece have to be executed
more than once, it is only necessary to program these steps once.
ShopTurn allows you to repeat program blocks.

You must mark the program blocks that you want to repeat with a start
and end marker. You can then call these program blocks up to 9999
times again within a program. The markers must be unique, i.e. they
must have different names. No names used in the NCK can be used
for this.
You can also set markers and repeats after creating the program, but
not within chained program blocks.
It is also possible to use the same marker as the end marker of the
preceding program blocks and as the start marker for the following
program blocks.

Start mark
End mark
Repetition


Repeating program blocks



Set
marker >

Press the "Various" and "Set marker" softkeys.
Enter a name.


Press the "Accept" softkey.
A start marker is inserted behind the current block.
Enter the program blocks that you want to repeat later.


Set
marker >

Press the "Various" and "Set marker" softkeys.
Enter a name.


Press the "Accept" softkey.
An end marker is inserted behind the current block.
Continue programming up to the point where you want to repeat
the program blocks.
5

ShopTurn functions 01/2008
5.9 Machining with the counterspindle

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
5-316 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition


Repeat >

Press the "Various" and "Repeat" softkeys.
Enter the names of the start and end markers and the number of
times the blocks are to be repeated.


Press the "Accept" softkey.
The marked program blocks are repeated.

5.9 Machining with the counterspindle
If your turning machine has a counterspindle, you can machine
workpieces using turning, drilling and milling functions on the front and
rear faces without reclamping the workpiece manually.
Before machining commences on the rear face, the counterspindle
must grip the workpiece, remove it from the main spindle and move it
to the new machining position. You can program these operations with
the "Counterspindle" function.

ShopTurn offers the following five programming steps:
• Gripping: Gripping the workpiece with the counterspindle (with limit
stop if necessary)
• Pulling: Pulling the workpiece out of the main spindle with the
counterspindle
• Rear side: Moving the workpiece with the counterspindle to the
new machining position
• Complete: Gripping, pulling (optionally with parting) and rear face
steps
• Front face: Work offset for machining the next front face (for bars)
If you start to execute a program containing a counterspindle
machining operation, the counterspindle is first retracted to the return
position defined in a machine data code.
Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.
Work offsets In the case of the "Pulling" and "Rear face" functions, you must specify
in which work offset ShopTurn should save the shifted coordinate
system; you do not have to specify these work offsets beforehand.
In the case of the "Front face" function, however, you must specify the
work offset that you want to use.
To simplify the programming process, programming suggestions for
three typical applications are provided below:
• Machine main spindle – Transfer workpiece – Machine
counterspindle
• Machine counterspindle (without first transferring workpiece)
• Machine bars
5

01/2008 ShopTurn functions
5.9 Machining with the counterspindle

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition 5-317
Machine main spindle – Transfer workpiece – Machine
counterspindle
The programming for this operation might look like this:
Alternative 1:
1. Machine main spindle
2. Gripping
3. Pulling
4. Rear
5. Machine counterspindle
Alternative 2:
1. Machine main spindle
2. Complete (gripping, pulling
and rear face)
3. Machine counterspindle
Gripping ShopTurn first synchronizes the main spindle and counterspindle. The
counterspindle then moves towards the workpiece at rapid traverse to
programmed position ZR and then continues at reduced feedrate FR
to transfer position Z1. Whether it is the front edge or stop edge of the
counterspindle that moves up to the position is defined in the
"Spindles" screen form (see "Counterspindle settings").
As an alternative, the counterspindle moves to the limit stop as of a
particular distance. This distance and the corresponding feedrate are
programmed in a machine data code.
Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

Teach park
pos.

You can enter the XP and ZP coordinates from the park position of the
tool during the gripping, or accept the current tool positions with the
“Teach park pos.” softkey.
Teaching the park position is possible only if you have selected the
machine coordinate system (MCS = machine).

Teach angl.
offset

If you specify an angular offset α1 between the main spindle and the
counterspindle, this will have no effect on machining on the backside
of the workpiece. You can enter the angle difference directly into the
parameter mask or accept the current angular offset using the "Teach
angl. offset" softkey.
Pulling The counterspindle pulls the workpiece out of the main spindle by
amount Z1.
ShopTurn shifts the coordinate system accordingly and saves the
offset in the selected work offset.
Rear The counterspindle moves with the workpiece at rapid traverse to the
new machining position ZW. The workpiece zero moves too and shifts
by ZV (with sign) from the front face to the rear face of the workpiece.
The coordinate system is then transposed into a mirror image for
machining on the rear face and saved in the selected work offset.
Synchronous operation of both spindles is disabled.
The counterspindle is now the master spindle.
5

ShopTurn functions 01/2008
5.9 Machining with the counterspindle

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
5-318 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition
Machine counterspindle When the rear face is machined, ShopTurn automatically transposes
the coordinate system into a mirror image, i.e. you program the
machining operation for the rear face as for the front face.
Make sure that the Y axis points to the opposite direction during
milling operations. If this is not wanted, then mirroring of the Y axis
must be programmed.
Machine counterspindle (without first transferring workpiece)
The programming might look like this:
1. Rear face
WO: Work offset is only activated
ZV: Parameter is not calculated.
2. Machine counterspindle
Rear Please note the following special features of the "Rear face" program
step when machining on the counterspindle without first transferring
the workpiece.
The work offset that you choose in the parameterization screen form is
only activated and not calculated. This means that the workpiece zero
for counterspindle machining should be stored in the work offset.
In addition, parameter ZV is not calculated.
Machine bars
If you use bars to produce your workpieces, you can machine several
workpieces on the front and rear face by starting the program just
once.
Machining of bars can be programmed as follows, for example:
1. Program header specifying the work offset in which the workpiece
zero is stored
2. Machine main spindle
3. Complete (pull blank: yes; parting cycle: yes)
4. Parting
5. Machine counterspindle
6. End of program with number of workpieces to be machined
Alternatively you can program the machining of bars as follows:
1. Start marker
2. Machine main spindle
3. Complete (pull blank: yes; parting cycle: yes)
4. Parting
5. Machine counterspindle
6. Front
7. End marker
8. Repeat from start to end marker
5

01/2008 ShopTurn functions
5.9 Machining with the counterspindle

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition 5-319
Complete If you program the "Complete" program step, you must enter "Pull
blank: Yes" and "Parting cycle: Yes" in the "Pulling" step. Then you
can program the "Parting" function. The workpiece is then cut off after
it has been gripped or pulled out of the main spindle.
You do not need to specify the amount by which the workpiece is
pulled out of the main spindle in this case as this is calculated from the
parting cycle parameters.
The two program blocks "Complete" and "Parting" are linked in the
machining plan.
Front As soon as machining on the rear face of a workpiece is finished,
machining on the front of the next workpiece starts. You can activate a
work offset in the meantime for machining the front face using the
"Front face" function. You will typically use the work offset that was
active before the workpiece was gripped.
The main spindle is now the master spindle again.

Teach-in park position
and angular offset

Manually rotate the counterspindle chuck to the desired position,
and move the tool to the desired position.


Counter-
spindle >

Press the "Various" and "Counterspindle" softkeys.
Select the “Gripping” or “Complete” programming step.
Select “MKS” tool under park position.

Teach park
pos.


Press the “Teach park pos.” softkey.
The current tool park position will be saved.

Teach angl.
offset

Press the “Teach angl. offset" softkey.
The current angular difference between the main and counter spindles
will be saved.
5

ShopTurn functions 01/2008
5.9 Machining with the counterspindle

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
5-320 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition

Parameter Description Unit
Function Select from five different functions:
• Gripping
• Pulling
• Rear
• Front
• Complete


Park position


XP
ZP
Rinse chuck
S
Direction of
rotation





Gripping:
WCS: The park position is entered into the workpiece coordinate system
MCS: The park position is entered into the machine coordinate system; teaching
of the park position and the angular offset is possible
Park position of the tool in the X direction (abs)
Park position of tool in Z direction (abs)
Rinse counterspindle chuck or not
Spindle speed (main spindle and counterspindle)
Direction of rotation (main spindle and counterspindle):
Direction of rotation clockwise (right)
Direction of rotation counterclockwise (left)
No spindle rotation




mm
mm

rev/min





α1
Z1
ZR
FR
Fixed stop



Angular offset of counterspindle on gripping
Transfer position (abs.)
Position at which traversal at reduced feedrate starts (abs or inc)
Reduced feedrate
Yes: The counterspindle comes to a halt a specified distance from the
transfer position Z1 and then traverses at the specified feedrate
as far as the limit stop.
No: The counterspindle traverses to the transfer position Z1.
Degrees
mm
mm
mm/min






Work offset
Z1
F
Pulling:
Work offset in which the coordinate system displaced by Z1 must be saved.
Amount by which the workpiece is pulled out of the main spindle (inc)
Feedrate


mm
mm/min


Work offset

ZnW
ZV
Rear side:
Work offset in which the coordinate system, which was shifted according to ZW and
by ZV as well as mirrored in Z, must be saved.
Machining position for special axis (abs.); machine coordinating system
Workpiece zero offset in Z direction (inc, the sign is also evaluated)



mm
mm


Work offset
Front face:
Work offset for machining the next front face


5

01/2008 ShopTurn functions
5.9 Machining with the counterspindle

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition 5-321


Park position


XP
ZP
Complete:
WCS: The park position is entered into the workpiece coordinate system
MCS: The park position is entered in the machine coordinate system; the teaching
of the park position and the angular offset is possible
Park position of tool in X direction (abs)
Park position of tool in Z direction (abs)




mm
mm

Rinse chuck
S
Direction of
rotation





Gripping:
Rinse counterspindle chuck or not
Spindle speed (main spindle and counterspindle)
Direction of rotation (main spindle and counterspindle):
Direction of rotation clockwise (right)
Direction of rotation counterclockwise (left)
No spindle rotation


rev/min






α1
Z1
ZR
FR
Fixed stop



Angular offset of counterspindle on gripping
Transfer position (abs.)
Position at which traversal at reduced feedrate starts (abs or inc)
Reduced feedrate
Yes: The counterspindle comes to a halt a specified distance from the
transfer position Z1 and then traverses at the specified feedrate
as far as the limit stop.
No: The counterspindle traverses to the transfer position Z1.
Degrees
mm
mm
mm/min



Pull blank

F
Parting cycle
Pulling:
Yes: Pull blank one blank length (preparation for next workpiece)
No: Do not pull blank
Feedrate for pulling
Yes: The workpiece is parted after it has been pulled out.
No: No automatic parting.



mm/min


Work offset

ZnW
ZV
Rear side:
Work offset in which the coordinate system, which was shifted according to ZW and
by ZV as well as mirrored in Z, must be saved.
Machining position for special axis (abs.); machine coordinating system
Workpiece zero offset in Z direction (inc, the sign is also evaluated)



mm
mm

5

ShopTurn functions 01/2008
5.10 Changing program settings

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
5-322 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition
5.10 Changing program settings
All parameters specified in the program header with the exception of
the blank shape and the unit of measurement can be changed at any
point in the program. It is also possible to change the basic setting for
the direction of rotation of machining in the case of milling.

The settings in the program header are modal, i.e. they remain active
until they are changed.
Retraction

Any changed return plane takes effect starting with the safety
clearance of the last cycle, because the additional retraction from the
next cycle is completed.

Machining direction

The machining direction of rotation (down-cut or up-cut) is defined as
the direction of movement of the milling tooth with respect to the
workpiece, i.e. ShopTurn evaluates this parameter in conjunction with
the direction of rotation of the spindle for milling, with the exception of
path milling.
The basic setting for the direction of rotation of machining is
programmed with a machine data code.
Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.


Down-cut Up-cut

Direction of rotation of machining for milling a pocket on the end face



Settings
>

Press the "Various" and "Settings" softkeys.
Enter the desired parameters.
For a description of the parameters, see Section "Creating a new
program".


Press the "Accept" softkey.
The new settings for the program are loaded.

5

01/2008 ShopTurn functions
5.11 Calling zero offsets

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition 5-323
5.11 Calling zero offsets
You can call work offsets (G54, etc.) from any program.
You can use these offsets, for example, when you want to machine
workpieces with various blank dimensions using the same program.
The offset will, in this case, adapt the workpiece zero to the new
blank.

You define the work offsets in the work offset list (see Section
"Defining work offsets"). You can also view the coordinates of the
selected offset here.



Transfor-
mations >

Work
offset >

¾ Press the "Various", "Transformations", and "Work offset"
softkeys.
¾ Select one of the work offsets or the standard offset.
-or-
¾ Enter the desired offset directly in the input field.
-or-

Work
offset

¾ Press the "Work offset" softkey.
The work offset list is displayed.
-and-
¾ Select a work offset.
-and-

To
program

¾ Press the "To program" softkey.
The work offset is loaded into the parameterization screen form.

To deselect the work offsets, select the standard offset or enter zero in
the field.

5

ShopTurn functions 01/2008
5.12 Defining coordinate transformations

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
5-324 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition
5.12 Defining coordinate transformations
To make programming easier, you can transform the coordinate
system. Use this possibility, for example, to rotate the coordinate
system.

Coordinate transformations only apply in the current program.
You can define displacement, rotation, scaling or mirroring. You can
select between a new or an additive coordinate transformation.
In the case of a new coordinate transformation, all previously defined
coordinate transformations are deselected. An additive coordinate
transformation acts in addition to the currently selected coordinate
transformations.
• Offset
For each axis, you can program an offset of the zero point.


New offset
Additive offset
• Rotation
You can turn the X and Y axes through a specific angle. A positive
angle corresponds to counterclockwise rotation.


New rotation Additive rotation
On turning machines without a physical Y axis, problems
with the coordinate system can occur if the axis is rotated.

5

01/2008 ShopTurn functions
5.12 Defining coordinate transformations

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition 5-325
• C axis rotation
You can turn the C axis through a specific angle to enable
subsequent machining operations to be performed at a particular
position on the end face or peripheral surface.
The direction of rotation is set in a machine data code.
Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.


New C axis rotation

Additive C axis rotation
• Scaling
You can specify a scale factor for the active machining plane as
well as for the tool axis. The programmed coordinates are then
multiplied by this factor.


New scaling

Additive scaling
• Mirroring
Furthermore, you can mirror all axes.
Enter the axis to be mirrored in each case.

New mirroring
Additive mirroring

5

ShopTurn functions 01/2008
5.13 Programming the approach/retraction cycle

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
5-326 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition


Transfor-
mations >

Press the "Various" and "Transformations" softkeys.

Offset
>
...
Mirroring
>

Select the coordinate transformation using the softkey.
Select whether you want to program a new or an additive
coordinate transformation.
Enter the desired coordinates.

5.13 Programming the approach/retraction cycle
If you wish to reduce the approach to or return from a machining cycle
or solve a complex geometric situation on approach/return, you can
create a special cycle. In this case, ShopTurn ignores the standard
approach/return strategy provided (see Section "Machining cycle
approach and return").

You can insert the approach/return cycle between any sequence
program blocks, but not within chained blocks.
The starting point for the approach/return cycle is the safety clearance
approached after the last machining operation.
If you want to perform a tool change, you can move the tool through a
total of 3 positions (P1 to P3) to the tool change point and through a
further 3 positions (P4 to P6) to the next starting point.
If the tool does not need to be changed, however, you have a total of
6 positions available for the approach to the next starting position.
If 3 to 6 positions are not sufficient for the approach/return, you can
call the cycle several times in succession to program further positions.

Caution
Note that the tool will move from the last position programmed in the
approach/return cycle directly to the starting point for the next
machining operation.
5

01/2008 ShopTurn functions
5.13 Programming the approach/retraction cycle

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition 5-327



Approach/
Retract

Press the "Strai. Circle" and "Approach/Retract" softkeys.

Parameter Description Unit
F1 Feedrate for approach to first position
Alternative to rapid traverse
mm/min
X1 1st position (inc or ∅ abs) mm
Z1 1st position (inc or ∅ abs) mm
F2 Feedrate for approach to second position
Alternative to rapid traverse
mm/min
X2 2nd position (inc or ∅ abs) mm
Z2 2nd position (inc or ∅ abs) mm
F3 Feedrate for approach to third position
Alternative to rapid traverse
mm/min
X3 3rd position (inc or abs) mm
Z3 3rd position (inc or abs) mm
Tool change TlChngPt: Approach tool change point from the last position programmed
and change tool
Direct: Do not change tool at tool change point, but at the last
position programmed
No: Do not change tool

T Tool name (not with tool change "no")
D Edge number (not with tool change "no")
F4 Feedrate for approach to fourth position
Alternative to rapid traverse
mm/min
X4 4th position (inc or ∅ abs) mm
Z4 4th position (inc or ∅ abs) mm
F5 Feedrate for approach to fifth position
Alternative to rapid traverse
mm/min
X5 5th position (inc or ∅ abs) mm
Z5 5th position (inc or ∅ abs) mm
F6 Feedrate for approach to sixth position
Alternative to rapid traverse
mm/min
X6 6th position (inc or ∅ abs) mm
Z6 6th position (inc or ∅ abs) mm

5

ShopTurn functions 01/2008
5.14 Inserting G code into the sequence program

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
5-328 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition
5.14 Inserting G code into the sequence program
You can program G code blocks in a sequence program. You can also
insert comments to explain the program.
The G code blocks in sequence programs are never checked when
sequence programs are processed.

You will find a detailed description of G code blocks to DIN 66025 in:
References: /PG/, Programming Manual Fundamentals
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/840D
/PGA/, Programming Guide Advanced
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/840D
You cannot insert G code blocks before the program header, after the
end of the program or within a chained sequence of program blocks.
ShopTurn does not display G code blocks in the program graphics.
If you want to stop machining of the workpiece at specific points, you
should program the G code command "M01" at these points in the
process plan (see Section "Controlling the program run").


Caution
If you use a G code command to move the tool into the retraction zone
specified in the program header, you must also move the tool out
again. Otherwise a collision could occur as a result of the traversing
movements in a subsequently programmed ShopTurn cycle.

In the machining plan of a sequence program, position the cursor
on the program block after which you want to insert a G code
block.

5

01/2008 ShopTurn functions
5.14 Inserting G code into the sequence program

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition 5-329


Press the "Input" key.
Enter the G code commands or comments. The comment must
always start with a semicolon (;).
The newly created G code block is marked with a "G" in front of the
block number in the machining plan.

G code block

G code in sequence program

5

ShopTurn functions 01/2008
5.15 Teaching

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
5-330 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition
5.15 Teaching
The "Teach” function enables you to program and execute machining
steps while simultaneously creating a subroutine for other workpieces.
The procedure for different variants of the teaching is described in the
following:
• Teaching cycles
• Teaching position samples
• Teaching contour objects

5.15.1 Teaching a cycle
Each machining step is taught according to the following example:
Sequence of operations 1. Creating a program
You create a new program and set the program header (see
"Creating a new program").
2. Creating a machining step
You define a machining step (see “Creating program blocks”).
3. Accepting the machining step
Save the values with the “Accept” softkey. The parameter mask is
closed and the work plan is displayed.
4. Execution
Position the cursor on the program step and press the "Execute"
softkey.
A block search is automatically triggered.
5. NC Start
Fit the tool with “Cycle Start”, and then start machining using the
"Cycle Start" key.
Program the next machining step the same way if the machining
provided the desired results, or repeat steps 2 through 5 for the
program block.
You can simulate machining before every execution in order to control
the machining results.

5

01/2008 ShopTurn functions
5.15 Teaching

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition 5-331
5.15.2 Teaching a position pattern
You can teach any position pattern.
Sequence of operations 1. Creating a program
2. Programming technology cycles and positions/position samples
Program the desired drilling/milling cycles and the position sample
(see “Drilling", “Milling”, and “Positions and Position sample”).
3. Execution
Position the cursor on the position sample and press the "Execute"
softkey.
A block search is automatically triggered and you will receive a
query.
4. Select the work step and the position sample.
5. NC Start
Fit the tool with “Cycle Start”, and then start machining using the
"Cycle Start" key.

Program the next machining step the same way if the machining
provided the desired results, or repeat steps 2 through 5 for the
program block.
You can simulate machining before every execution in order to control
the machining results.

5

ShopTurn functions 01/2008
5.15 Teaching

5
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
5-332 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition
5.15.3 Teaching a contour object
You have the option of teaching contour objects for rotation and
milling operations.
Sequence of operations 1. Creating a program
2. Programming contours and technology cycles
Program the desired contours and cycles and define the individual
contour elements (see "Creating a new contour", "Contour turning",
and "Contour milling").
3. Execution
Position the cursor on the desired work step and press the
"Execute" softkey.
A block search is automatically triggered.
4. NC Start
Fit the tool with “Cycle Start”, and then start machining using the
"Cycle Start" key.
Program the next machining step the same way if the machining
provided the desired results, or repeat steps 2 through 4 for the
program block.
You can simulate machining before every execution in order to control
the machining results.




6

01/2008 Working with manual machine
6
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 6-333
Working with manual machine

6.1 Manual Machine...................................................................................................... 6-334
6.2 Zero offsets ............................................................................................................. 6-335
6.3 Simple workpiece machining in manual mode........................................................ 6-335
6.3.1 Traversing axes ...................................................................................................... 6-336
6.3.2 Taper turning........................................................................................................... 6-337
6.3.3 Straight turning........................................................................................................ 6-338
6.4 More complex workpiece machining in manual mode............................................ 6-339
6.4.1 Drilling with Manual Machine .................................................................................. 6-340
6.4.2 Turning with Manual Machine................................................................................. 6-340
6.4.3 Milling with Manual Machine................................................................................... 6-341
6.5 Simulation ............................................................................................................... 6-342




6

Working with manual machine 01/2008
6.1 Manual Machine

6
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
6-334 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
6.1 Manual Machine
"Manual Machine" offers a modified comprehensive spectrum of
functions for manual mode. You can carry out all important machining
processes in “Manual” mode without writing a program.
For working in "Manual Machine" mode, you will need the "Manual
Machine" software option.
The appearance of the displayed softkeys can vary, according to
which coordinate system is set. Machining before the center of
rotation is typical.

Please see the machine manufacturer’s specifications for this.
Main screen After running up the controller, the basic "Manual Machine" screen
appears.

Basic manual machine screen
Machining options Workpieces can be machined in the following ways using "Manual
Machine":
• Manual mode
• Single-cycle machining

6

01/2008 Working with manual machine
6.2 Zero offsets

6
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 6-335
6.2 Zero offsets
As an alternative to the "Set ZPO" function (see Sec. "Setting the
zero-point offset"), you have the option of inputting the values of the
zero-point offset directly into the zero-point offsets list.

Activating the zero offset


Select the "Work offset" softkey in the "Tools WO" operating
section.
The work offset list appears.
Position the cursor on the desired zero-point offset.

ZPO
selection

Press the "ZPO selection” softkey



6.3 Simple workpiece machining in manual mode
In "manual" mode, you can directly carry out simple machining
processes without having to write a program.
The following functions are available to you for machining in manual
mode:
• Axis movements
• Taper turning
• Straight (plan or longitudinal turning)
Tool, spindle speed, and direction of spindle rotation are activated by
"Cycle Start".
A change in feedrate immediately becomes active.
6

Working with manual machine 01/2008
6.3 Simple workpiece machining in manual mode

6
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
6-336 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
6.3.1 Traversing axes
For preparatory actions and simple traversing movements, input the
parameters directly into the "Manual" basic screen form.

Tool selection
Select the desired tool in "T".
Input the feedrate and the spindle speed.


Select the direction of spindle rotation.
-or-
Set the direction of rotation via the machine control panel.
Press the "Cycle Start" key.
The spindle starts immediately after the tool is selected.

Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

Machining

X


Select the axis to be traversed at the machine control panel.


+

Press the "-" or "+" key on the machine control panel.
-or-
Select the direction with the aid of the cross-switching lever.
The axes are moved at the set machining feedrate.

Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.
The active direction is graphically displayed in the basic screen by
means of a wind rose.

6

01/2008 Working with manual machine
6.3 Simple workpiece machining in manual mode

6
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 6-337
Parameter Description Unit
T Tool
F Machining feedrate mm/min
mm/rev
S1 Main spindle rev/min
m/min
S2 Tool spindle rev/min
Direction of
rotation
: Spindle is turning counter-clockwise
: Spindle is turning clockwise
: Spindle stops
: No change


6.3.2 Taper turning
The basic effective direction can be selected via the axis direction
keys or via the cross-switching lever. In addition, a taper angle (α) can
also be input.
The “taper turning” function is not available if two tool turrets are
installed on the X axis of your machine,


Jog

Taper
turning

¾ Press the "Taper turning" softkey in "Manual Machine" mode.
¾ Select the tool, spindle, and spindle direction and specify the
machining feedrate.
¾ Input the desired angle α.

Selecting/deselecting the taper turning and changing the angle α is
only possible in the reset state.

Parameter Description Unit
T, F, S See Sec. “Traversing the Axes“
α Turning of the coordinate system Degrees

6

Working with manual machine 01/2008
6.3 Simple workpiece machining in manual mode

6
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
6-338 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
6.3.3 Straight turning
Use this function for simple, straight machining (e.g. face or
longitudinal turning).

Jog

¾ Select the "Strght" softkey in "Manual Machine" mode.

All
axes
-or-

-or-


¾ Select the desired straight machining via the "All axes" softkeys,
"Xα" or "Zα", and input the desired values for the traversing path
or target position and the angle, if necessary.


Parameter Description Unit
F See Sec. “Traversing the Axes“

X
Z
Y
C
Z2
All Axes:
Target position in the X direction (abs or inc)
Target position in the Z direction (abs or inc)
Target position in the Y direction (abs or inc)
Target position of C axis of main spindle (abs or inc)
Target position of an added axis, if it exists (abs. or inc.)

mm
mm
mm
mm
mm

Z
α
XAlpha
Target position in direction X (abs. or inc.)
Angle of the straight line to the X axis

mm
Degrees

X
α
ZAlpha
Target position in direction Z (abs. or inc.)
Angle of the straight line to the Z axis

mm
Degrees

6

01/2008 Working with manual machine
6.4 More complex workpiece machining in manual mode

6
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 6-339
6.4 More complex workpiece machining in manual mode
The following functions are available to you for comprehensive
machining in manual mode:
• Drilling (axial drilling, axial threads, drilling, reaming, deep-drilling,
threads)
• Turning (stock removal, groove, undercut, threads, tapping)
• Milling (pocket, shank, groove, multi-edged, engraving)

General machining
sequence
For more complex machining processes, proceed in the following
order:
1. Select the desired function via the corresponding softkey.
Input the desired values in the parameter screen form.
2. Press the "OK" softkey in order to accept the values.
The input screen form closes.
A line with the specified parameters is displayed on the basic
screen.
3. Press the "Cycle Start" key.
The selected cycle is started.
You can return to the parameter screen form at any time to check and
correct the inputs.


Press the "Cursor right" key to jump back to the input screen form.

Approaching and
returning
When machining the workpiece, you traverse from the current position
to the machining start point. After the machining process, the tool is
returned along a direct path to the starting point.

6

Working with manual machine 01/2008
6.4 More complex workpiece machining in manual mode

6
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
6-340 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
6.4.1 Drilling with Manual Machine
For drilling on the face or peripheral surface of a workpiece, the
following cycles are available to you under Automatic:
• Drilling centered
• Thread centered
• Centering
• Drilling
• Reaming
• Deep hole drilling
• Tapping
• Thread milling
The parameters of the input screen forms correspond to the
parameters under Automatic (see Sec. "Drilling").
Drilling can only be performed at individual positions. To define the
position, input the parameters X0 and Y0 (face machining) or Y0 and
Z0 (peripheral surface machining).

6.4.2 Turning with Manual Machine
For turning a workpiece, the following turning cycles are available to
you under Automatic:
• Stock removal
• Recess
• Undercut
• Thread
• Parting
The parameters of the input screen forms (with the exception of
thread-cutting) correspond to the parameters under Automatic (see
Sec. "Turning").

Thread cutting In addition to the functions that are made available by "thread-cutting"
under Automatic, you can insert idle cuts during the machining
process under "Manual Machine."
You can interrupt the infeed of the cutting depth during the machining
process by inserting idle cuts, in order to smooth the flanks for
example.

Idle
cut

You can insert idle cuts using the "Idle cut" softkey.
This softkey only works during machining.
6

01/2008 Working with manual machine
6.4 More complex workpiece machining in manual mode

6
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 6-341
Reworking threads You can rework existing threads, when repairing previously cut
threads for example or as the result of changes that arise from re-
measuring (see Sec. "Reworking Threads").
If you want to rework some threads, input the initial plunge depth E
(inc.). This is the depth that was reached during a previous machining.
By inputting the plunge depth, you avoid unnecessary idle cuts when
reworking the threads.

6.4.3 Milling with Manual Machine
For milling simple geometric shapes, the following functions are
available to you just as under Automatic:
• Rectangular pocket
• Circular pocket
• Rectangular spigot
• Circular spigot
• Longitudinal slot
• Circumferential slot
• Multiple edge
• Engraving
The parameters of the input screen forms correspond to the
parameters under Automatic (see Sec. "Milling").
Machining can only be performed at individual positions. To define the
position, input the parameters X0 and Y0 (face machining) or Y0 and
Z0 (peripheral surface machining).
6

Working with manual machine 01/2008
6.5 Simulation

6
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
6-342 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
6.5 Simulation
For more complex machining processes, you can check the result of
your inputs with the aid of the simulation, without having to traverse
the axes (see Sec. "Simulating Machining"). The execution of the work
steps is graphically displayed on the screen during this.
In "Manual" mode, you can simulate a work step with an already
opened and filled out parameter screen form.
Setting up a blank shape For the graphical display, a pre-defined blank shape is used. You can
modify the blank as you like (such as for a G-code program) (see Sec.
"Changing the blank shape for a G-code program").



7

01/2008 G code program
7
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 7-343
G code program

7.1 Creating a G code program.................................................................................... 7-344
7.2 Executing a G code program.................................................................................. 7-347
7.3 G code editor........................................................................................................... 7-349
7.4 Arithmetic variables................................................................................................. 7-352




7

G code program 01/2008
7.1 Creating a G code program

7
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
7-344 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
7.1 Creating a G code program
If you do not want to program a program with ShopTurn functions, you
can also create a G-code program with G-code commands in the
ShopTurn operator interface.

You can program a G code command according to DIN 66025.
In addition, parameter screen forms provide you with support when
measuring and programming contour, drilling, turning, and milling
cycles. G code is generated from the individual forms, which you can
recompile back to the screen forms. The measuring cycle support
function must be set up by the machine manufacturer.
Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.
For a detailed description of G code commands to DIN 66025, and of
cycles and measuring cycles, please refer to:
References: /PG/, Programming Manual Fundamentals
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/840D sl
/PGA/, Programming Manual Advanced
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/840D sl
/PGZ/, Programming Manual Cycles
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/840D sl
/BNM/, Programming Manual Measuring Cycles
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/840D sl
You can call up context-sensitive help, if you require more information
on particular G code commands or cycle parameters on the PCU 50.3.
For a detailed description of the online help, please refer to:
References: /BAD/, Operating Manual HMI Advanced
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/840D sl

Creating a G code
program



Press the "Program" softkey.
Select the directory in which you want to create a new program.

New

G code
program

Press the "New" and "G code program" softkeys.
Enter a program name.
Program names may be a maximum of 24 characters in length.
You can use any letters (except umlauts), digits or the underscore
symbol (_). ShopTurn automatically replaces lowercase letters
with uppercase letters.
7

01/2008 G code program
7.1 Creating a G code program

7
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 7-345

-or-
+

¾ Press the "OK" softkey or the "Input" key.
The G code editor is opened.
¾ Enter the desired G code commands.
Calling a tool

Continue
>

Tools

¾ Select the "Continue" and "Tools" softkeys if you want to select a
tool from the tool list.
-and-
¾ Place the cursor on the tool that you want to use for machining.
-and-

To
program

¾ Press the "To program" softkey.
The selected tool is loaded into the G code editor.
Text such as the following is displayed at the current cursor position in
the G code editor: T="ROUGHING80"
In contrast to sequence programming, the settings stored in tool
management do not automatically become active when the tool is
called up.
This means that, in addition to the tool, you must also program the tool
change (M6), the direction of spindle rotation (M3/M4), the spindle
speed (S...) and the coolant (M7/M8).
Example:
...
T="ROUGHING80" ;Call tool
M6 ;Change tool
M7 M3 S1=2000 ;Switch on coolant and main spindle
...

Cycle support

Contour
...
Turning

¾ Using the softkey, select whether you would like support for
programming contours, drilling, milling, or turning cycles.

Create
contour
...
¾ Select the cycle you want via the softkey.
¾ Enter the parameters.

OK

¾ Press the "OK" softkey.
The cycle is transferred to the editor as G code.
¾ Position the cursor on a cycle in the G code editor if you want to
display the associated parameter screen form again.

Re-
compile

¾ Select the "Recompile" softkey.
The parameter screen for the selected cycle appears.
7

G code program 01/2008
7.1 Creating a G code program

7
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
7-346 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008

Edit

Select the "Edit" softkey if you want to return directly to the G code
editor from a parameter screen form.

Measuring cycle support


Switch to the extended horizontal softkey bar.

Measure
turning
-or-
Measure
milling

Press the "Measure turning" or "Measure milling".

Calibrate
meas. cal.
...
Select the required measuring cycle via the softkey.
Enter the parameters.

OK

Press the "OK" softkey.
The measuring cycle is transferred to the editor as G code.
Position the cursor on a measuring cycle in the G code editor, if
you want to display the associated parameter screen form again.

Re-
compile

Select the "Recompile" softkey.
The parameter screen for the selected measuring cycle appears.

Edit

Select the "Edit" softkey if you want to return directly to the G code
editor from a parameter screen form.

Online help (PCU 50.3)
Place the cursor on a G code command in the G code editor or on
an input field in a cycle support parameter screen form.


Press the "Help" key.
The relevant help screen is displayed.

7

01/2008 G code program
7.2 Executing a G code program

7
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 7-347
7.2 Executing a G code program
During execution of a program, the workpiece is machined in
accordance with the programming on the machine.
After the program is started in automatic mode, workpiece machining
is performed automatically. You can, however, stop the program at
any time and then resume execution later.
Execution of the program can be simulated graphically on the screen
to enable you to check the programming result without moving the
machine axes.
For more information about simulation, see Section "Simulation".

The following prerequisites must be met before executing a program:
• The measuring system of the control is synchronized with the
machine.
• A program created in G code is available.
• The necessary tool offsets and zero offsets have been entered.
• The necessary safety interlocks implemented by the machine
manufacturer are activated.
When executing a G code program, the same functions are available
as for executing a sequence program (see Section "Machining a
workpiece").

Simulating G code
program


-or-
Press the softkey or the "Program" key.
Position the cursor on the desired G code program.

-or-
Press the "Input" or "Cursor right" key.
The program is opened in the G code editor.


Press the "Simulation" softkey.
Execution of the program will be displayed in full on the screen in
graphical form.

Edit

Select the "Edit" softkey if you want to return directly to the G code
editor from the simulation screen.

7

G code program 01/2008
7.2 Executing a G code program

7
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
7-348 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
Executing G code
program


-or-
Press the softkey or the "Program" key.
-and-
Position the cursor on the desired G code program.
-and-

Execute

Press the "Execute" softkey.
-or-


Press the "Execute" softkey if you are in the "Program" operating
area.
ShopTurn automatically switches to "Machine Auto" mode and loads
the G-code program.

Cycle Start

Press the "Cycle Start" key.
Execution of the G code program starts on the machine.


7

01/2008 G code program
7.3 G code editor

7
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 7-349
7.3 G code editor
You use the G code editor when you want to change the sequence of
program blocks within a G code program, delete program blocks or
copy program blocks from one program to another.

When you want to change G code in a program that you are currently
executing, you can only change the G code blocks that have not yet
been executed. These blocks are highlighted.
The following functions are available in the G code editor:
• Select
You can select any G code.
• Copy/paste
You can copy and paste G code within a program or between
different programs.
• Cut
You can cut and therefore delete any G code. However, the
G code remains in the buffer, so you can still paste it in somewhere
else.
• Search/replace
In a G code program, you can search for a specific character string
and replace it with a different one.
• To start/end
You can jump easily to the start or end of the G code program.
• Numbering
When you insert a new or copied G-code block between two
existing G-code blocks, ShopTurn automatically assigns a new
block number. This block number may be higher than the one in
the following block. Using the "Re-number" function, you can
renumber the G-code blocks in ascending order.

The G code editor will be opened automatically if you write or open a
G code program.
Selecting a G code
Place the cursor at the position in the program where you want
your selection to start.

Mark

Press the "Mark" softkey.
Position the cursor at the point in the program at which the
highlighting should end.
The G code is selected.
7

G code program 01/2008
7.3 G code editor

7
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
7-350 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
Copying a G code
Select the G code that you want to copy.

Copy

Press the "Copy" softkey.
The G code is stored in buffer memory and remains there even if you
switch to another program.


Pasting a G code
Copy the G code that you want to insert.

Insert

Press the "Insert" softkey.
The copied G code is pasted from buffer memory into the text in front
of the cursor.

Cutting a G code
Select the G code that you want to cut.

Cut


Press the "Cut" softkey.
The selected G code is removed and stored in buffer memory.

Finding a G code

Search

Press the "Search" softkey.
A new vertical softkey bar appears.
Enter the character string that you want to locate.


Press the "OK" softkey.
The G code program is searched for the character string in the
forward direction. The character string is marked in the editor by the
cursor.

Continue
search

Press the "Continue search" softkey to continue the search, as
necessary.
The next character string found is displayed.



7

01/2008 G code program
7.3 G code editor

7
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 7-351
Finding and replacing a
G code


Search

Press the "Search" softkey.
A new vertical softkey bar appears.

Search/
replace

Press the "Search/replace" softkey.
Enter the character string that you want to find and the characters
that you want to insert in its place.


Press the "OK" softkey.
The G code program is searched for the character string in the
forward direction. The character string is marked in the editor by the
cursor.

Replace all

Press the "Replace all" softkey if you want to replace the
character string throughout the entire G code program.
-or-

Continue
search

Press the "Continue search" softkey if you want to continue the
search without replacing the instance of the character string
found.
-or-

Replace

Press the "Replace" softkey if you want to replace the character
string at this point in the G code program.

Jumping to start/end

Continue
>

To
start


To
end

Select the "Continue" and "To start" or "To end" softkeys.
The beginning or end of the G code program is displayed.

Renumbering the G code
blocks


Continue
>

Renumber
>

Select the "Continue" and "Renumber" softkeys.
Enter the number of the first block and the increment between
block numbers (e.g. 1, 5, 10).


Press the "Accept" softkey.
The blocks are renumbered.
You can cancel the numbering again by entering 0 for the increment
or block number.

7

G code program 01/2008
7.4 Arithmetic variables

7
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
7-352 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
7.4 Arithmetic variables
Arithmetic variables (R variables) are variables that you can use within
a G code program.
G code programs can read and write the variables. You can assign a
value in the R variable list to variables that can be read.
Input and deletion of variables can be disabled via the keyswitch.

Displaying R variables

-or-


Press the "Tools WOs" softkey or the "Offset" key.


Press the "R vari." softkey.
The R variable list is opened.


Finding R variables

Search

Press the "Search" softkey.
Enter the number of the variable you want to find.


Press the "Accept" softkey.
The variable is displayed.

Changing R variables
Place the cursor on the input field of the variable that you want to
change.
Enter the new value.
The new value of the variables is applied immediately.


Deleting R variables
Place the cursor on the input field of the variable whose value you
want to delete.


Press the "Backspace" key.
The value of the variable is deleted.

8

01/2008 Working with a B axis
8
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 8-353
Working with a B axis

8.1 Turning machines with a B axis .............................................................................. 8-354
8.2 Tool alignment for turning ....................................................................................... 8-356
8.3 Milling with a B axis................................................................................................. 8-356
8.3.1 Swiveling................................................................................................................. 8-357
8.3.2 Approach/retraction................................................................................................. 8-358
8.4 Position pattern ....................................................................................................... 8-360
8.5 Measuring a tool...................................................................................................... 8-361
8.6 Tool selection for manual mode.............................................................................. 8-362




8

Working with a B axis 01/2008
8.1 Turning machines with a B axis

8
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
8-354 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
8.1 Turning machines with a B axis
You can align milling and turning machines with an additional B axis.

X
C2
B
Tool spindle
Main spindle
C1
C3
Z3
Counter spindle
Z
Y
B axis
The initial setting in which all tools must be dimensioned is B=0.
In turning operations, you can align the tool for special machining
tasks via the B axis and C axis.
In milling operations, you can tilt the WCS via the B axis and C axis to
allow milling and drilling on inclined surfaces.
The B axis is also used for aligning tools for end face and lateral
surface machining.
Alignment angle β and γ Alignment angles β und γ are required for turning with tool alignment.

X
Z
Ǫ
β
β : Rotation around the Y axis (with the B axis)
γ: Rotation around the Z axis (with the tool spindle)

8

01/2008 Working with a B axis
8.1 Turning machines with a B axis

8
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 8-355
Turning Alignment angles allow you to perform a wide range of different
turning operations (for example, internal and external longitudinal
machining, surface machining with a main spindle and counterspindle,
residual material) without changing the tool.


X
Z
External longitudinal machining
˟=90°
ǩ=0°
X
Z
Surface machining main spindle
˟=0°
ǩ=180°
X
Z
˟=0°
ǩ=0°
lnternal longitudinal machining
X
ǩ=0°
˟=180°
Z
Surface machining counter spindle

Display of the B axis The B axis is displayed in the following windows:
• Axis position display in actual value window,
• In the “Positioning” window to position axes in manual operation,
• You can operate the “Additional axes” softkey to have the B axis
displayed in the zero offset list and define its offset.

8

Working with a B axis 01/2008
8.2 Tool alignment for turning

8
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
8-356 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
8.2 Tool alignment for turning
The input fields for the β and γ angle for aligning the tool are available
in the tool screenform and in all turning screenforms.
β angle Two arrow settings are available for the main alignment of the tool,
which you can toggle with the “Alternat.” softkey.
: β = 0°
: β = 90°
You can also toggle to a free input field in which you enter an angle of
your choice.
The counterspindle is programmed in exactly the same way as the
main spindle.
The direction display of the arrows depends on the settings.

Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.
γ angle In input field “γ”, you can enter two main directions (0° and 180°) via
the “Alternat.” softkey.
You can also toggle to a free input field in which you enter an angle of
your choice. However, this value may only differ slightly.

Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.



8.3 Milling with a B axis
No special entries are required for face machining and peripheral
surface machining.
Face milling is performed with β = 0° (G17). If you are machining on
the face end of the counterspindle, γ = 0° (G17) corresponds to the
opposite B axis position.
The peripheral surface is milled with β = 90° (G19), even if you are
machining with the counterspindle.
Machining on an inclined
surface
You can define inclined surfaces in a swivel mask.
You can enter the rotation of the planes around the geometry axes (X,
Y, Z) of the tool coordinate system just as described in the workpiece
drawing. The rotation of the workpiece coordinate system in the
program is then automatically converted to a rotation for the relevant B
and C axis of the machine during machining.



8

01/2008 Working with a B axis
8.3 Milling with a B axis

8
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 8-357
The swivel axes are always rotated to place the tool axis
perpendicular to the machining axis for machining. During machining,
the rotary axes are then permanently set.
The coordinate system is adapted to the surface to be machined
irrespective of the required rotary axis positions.

8.3.1 Swiveling
The main programming procedure is:
• Swivel the coordinate system into the plane to be machined via
the swivel mask.
• Machine with the setting “Face B”.
• If another machining type follows, swiveling is automatically
deselected.
The swiveled coordinates are maintained in the Reset status and after
Power On. So you can still move out of an inclined hole, for example,
with retraction in the +Z direction.
Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.
Swiveling is executed one axis at a time. In the case of axial swiveling,
the coordinate system is rotated about each axis in turn, with each
rotation starting from the previous rotation. The axis sequence can be
freely selected.



Transfor-
mations >

Swivel
>

Press the "Various" and "Transformations" softkeys.

Initial
setting

Press the "Initial setting" softkey to restore the initial state, i.e. to
zero the values again.
This is done, for example, to swivel the coordinate system back to
its original orientation.

8

Working with a B axis 01/2008
8.3 Milling with a B axis

8
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
8-358 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
Parameter Description Unit
T Tool name
RP Retraction plane for face end B mm
C0 Positioning angle for machining surface Degrees
X0 Reference point for rotation mm
Y0 Reference point for rotation mm
Z0 Reference point for rotation mm
X Axis angle The sequence of the axes Degrees
Y Axis angle can be replaced as required Degrees
Z Axis angle with "Alternat." Degrees
X1 New zero point of rotated surface mm
Y1 New zero point of rotated surface mm
Z1 New zero point of rotated surface mm

Other additive transformations can be added to the offsets before
(X0, Y0, Z0) or after (X1, Y1, Z1) swiveling (see Section "Work
offsets").

8.3.2 Approach/retraction
If you want to optimize approach/retraction for swiveling with the B
axis, you can create a special cycle that ignores the automatic
approach/retraction strategy.
You can insert the approach/retraction cycle between any sequence
program blocks, but not within chained blocks.

The starting point for the approach/retraction cycle is the safety
clearance approached after the last machining operation.
If you want to perform a tool change, you can move the tool through a
total of 3 positions (P1 to P3) to the tool change point and through a
further 3 positions (P4 to P6) to the next starting point.
The 1st, 3rd, and 6th position moves the linear axes, while the 2nd
and 5th position moves the rotary axes.
If no tool change is needed you can generate no more than 6 motion
blocks.
The numbers (1 – 6) represent the processing sequence.
If 3 to 6 positions are not sufficient for the approach/retraction, you
can call the cycle several times in succession to program further
positions.
8

01/2008 Working with a B axis
8.3 Milling with a B axis

8
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 8-359

Caution
Note that the tool will move from the last position programmed in the
approach/retraction cycle directly to the starting point for the next
machining operation.

Parameter Description Unit
F1 Feedrate for approach to first position
Alternative to rapid traverse
mm/min
X1 1st position (inc or ∅ abs) mm
Z1 1st position (inc or ∅ abs) mm
Y1 Retraction to safety clearance mm
β2 Beta angle for 1st swivel movement Degrees
γ2 Gamma angle for 1st swivel movement Degrees
Followup The position of the tool tip is maintained during swiveling.
Please read the relevant information in the machine manufacturer's instruction
manual

F3 Feedrate for approach to third position
alternative to rapid traverse
mm/min
X3 3rd position (inc or ∅ abs) mm
Z3 3rd position (inc or ∅ abs) mm
Tool change TlChngPt: Approach tool change point from the last position programmed
and change tool
Direct: Do not change tool at tool change point, but at the last
position programmed
No: Do not change tool

T Tool name (not with tool change "no")
D Edge number (not with tool change "no")
F4 Feedrate for approach to fourth position
alternative to rapid traverse
mm/min
X4 4th position (inc or ∅ abs) mm
Z4 4th position (inc or ∅ abs) mm
β5 Beta angle for 2nd swivel movement Degrees
γ5 Gamma angle for 2nd swivel movement Degrees
Followup The position of the workpiece tip is maintained during swiveling.
Please read the relevant information in the machine manufacturer's instruction
manual

F6 Feedrate for approach to sixth position
alternative to rapid traverse
mm/min
X6 6th position (inc or ∅ abs) mm
Z6 6th position (inc or ∅ abs) mm
Y6 Retraction to safety clearance mm


8

Working with a B axis 01/2008
8.4 Position pattern

8
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
8-360 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008

8.4 Position pattern
In drilling and milling operations with face end B, position patterns "full
circle/pitch circle" provide the following options for machining on
inclined surfaces
• with swivel plane
• with C axis



Positions
>


¾ Press the "Drilling", "Positions" and "Full/Pitch Circle" softkeys.

Parameter Description Unit


Z0
X0
Y0
α0


α1



R
N
Positioning


Face end B:
on swivel plane
Z coordinate of the reference point (abs.)
X coordinate of the reference point (abs.)
Y coordinate of the reference point (abs.)
Starting angle: Angle of 1st hole with reference to X axis.
Positive angle: Full circle is rotated counterclockwise.
Negative angle: Full circle is rotated in clockwise direction.
Advance angle; when the first drill hole is complete,
all remaining positions are approached with this angle (for pitch circle only)
Positive angle: Further positions are rotated in counterclockwise direction.
Negative angle: Further positions are rotated in clockwise direction.
Radius of full circle
Number of positions on the circle
Straight line Next position is approached linearly at rapid traverse.
Circular: Next position is approached along a circular path at the feedrate defined in
a machine data code.


mm
mm
mm
Degrees


Degrees



mm



Z0
X0
Y0
α0


α1



N
with C axis
Z coordinate of the reference point (abs.)
X coordinate of the reference point (abs.)
Y coordinate of the reference point (abs.)
Starting angle: Angle of 1st hole with reference to C axis.
Positive angle: Full circle is rotated counterclockwise.
Negative angle: Full circle is rotated in clockwise direction.
Advance angle; when the first drill hole is complete,
all remaining positions are approached with this angle (for pitch circle only)
Positive angle: Further positions are rotated in counterclockwise direction.
Negative angle: Further positions are rotated in clockwise direction.
Number of positions on circle

mm
mm
mm
Degrees


Degrees

8

01/2008 Working with a B axis
8.5 Measuring a tool

8
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 8-361
8.5 Measuring a tool
To determine the tool dimensions, the alignment (i.e. the β angle)
must be specified.
For turning tools, an input field for the γ angle also appears.


β angle In order to measure milling and turning tools, you can make the two
main settings β = 0° and β = 90° and set a value input field by
toggling.
γ angle In order to measure turning tools, you can set the γ angle 0° and 180°
by toggling.
Positioning rotary axes You can position rotary axes with NC Start.
Before the length is set the rotary axis positions are checked. If they
deviate too much from the prescribed values, the message “Tool
alignment beta inconsistent, press NC Start” (or gamma) is displayed.

Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.
8

Working with a B axis 01/2008
8.6 Tool selection for manual mode

8
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
8-362 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
8.6 Tool selection for manual mode
For preparatory tasks in manual mode, tool selection and spindle
control is always performed centrally in the T, S, M window (see also
Section "Selecting the tool and spindle").


Alignment angle Turning tools:
To align the turning tools, you can toggle between settings β = 0° and
β = 90° for the β angle and between settings 0° and 180° for the
γ angle. In each case, you can also select an input field to enter any
value.
Milling tools:
To align the milling tools you can toggle between settings β = 0° and
β = 90°. In each case, you can also select an input field to enter any
value.



9

01/2008 Working with two tool holders
9
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 9-363
Working with two tool holders

9.1 Turning tools with two tool holders.......................................................................... 9-364
9.2 Programming with two tool holders......................................................................... 9-364
9.3 Measuring a tool...................................................................................................... 9-365





9

Working with two tool holders 01/2008
9.1 Turning tools with two tool holders

9
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
9-364 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
9.1 Turning tools with two tool holders
ShopTurn allows you to work on a turning machine with two tool
holders, both of which are installed on an X axis. The tool holders
might be turrets, multifix, or a combination of both.
The main machining is performed in the negative X axis direction. As
both tool holders are installed on the same axis it is only ever possible
to machine with one tool.
The workpiece is always located between the two tool holders. The
tool lengths of all tools, i.e. of both tool holders, have the same
reference point, which is usually on tool holder 1. That is why the tool
lengths of the tools of the second tool holder are always longer than
those of the tools on the first tool holder.
9.2 Programming with two tool holders

You always program in the basic coordinate system (WCS of the first
tool holder). You do not have to specify in which tool holder the tool is
inserted.
If a tool on the second tool holder is selected, the X and Y axes are
mirrored and the main spindle and counter spindle are offset (rotated)
by 180°.


X
Z
Z
X
L2
L1
Tool holder 1
Tool holder 2
Workpiece coordinate
system for use with the
1st tool holder
Workpiece coordinate
system for use with the
2nd tool holder

In the simulation the tool is always displayed on the correct side, as it
will be used on the machine.
9

01/2008 Working with two tool holders
9.3 Measuring a tool

9
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 9-365
The programmed C offset around 180° only affects C axes, not
spindles.
It is not possible to machine a thread with tools that are distributed
between both tool holders.
G code programming The following points must be taken into account in G code
programming.
• After a tool change, mirroring of the tools on the second tool
holder is automatically activated.
• When a TRANSMIT command is programmed, mirroring of the
tools on the second tool holder is automatically activated.

Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

9.3 Measuring a tool
Toggle settings "Position 1" and "Position 2" are available for
scratching for tool measurement. Here you can set in which tool
holder the tool to be measured is located.

9

Working with two tool holders 01/2008
9.3 Measuring a tool

9
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
9-366 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
Notes

10
01/2008 Tool management
10
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 10-367
Tool management

10.1 Tool list, tool wear list and tool magazine............................................................. 10-368
10.2 Entering tools in the tool list .................................................................................. 10-374
10.2.1 Creating a new tool ............................................................................................... 10-374
10.2.2 Creating multiple cutting edges for each tool........................................................ 10-376
10.2.3 Creating a replacement tool .................................................................................. 10-377
10.3 Sorting tools .......................................................................................................... 10-378
10.4 Deleting tools from the tool list.............................................................................. 10-378
10.5 Loading/unloading a tool into/out of the magazine............................................... 10-379
10.6 Relocating a tool ................................................................................................... 10-381
10.7 Positioning a magazine......................................................................................... 10-383
10.8 Entering tool wear data......................................................................................... 10-383
10.9 Activating tool monitoring...................................................................................... 10-384
10.10 Managing magazine locations .............................................................................. 10-386




10
Tool management 01/2008
10.1 Tool list, tool wear list and tool magazine

10
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
10-368 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
10.1 Tool list, tool wear list and tool magazine
Various tools are used for machining workpieces. The geometry and
technology data of these tools must be known to ShopTurn before you
can execute a program (see Sec. "Setting up the Machine").
ShopTurn provides the tool list, tool wear list, and magazine list
screen forms for managing your tools. With these, you can also
manage tools that are not located in the revolver (magazine).
The various lists can possibly have been changed by the machine
manufacturer, in comparison to the following description.
Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

Tool list You must enter all the tools that you want to use on the turning
machine in the tools list. The tools that are in the tool turret must be
assigned to specific magazine locations. In addition, you have the
capability of sorting or deleting tools at this point.

Tool list
Loc. Location number in the magazine
The tool’s location number, which is located in the revolver in the
machining position, has a gray background.
If you are working with several magazines, then you will first see the
magazine number and then the location number inside the magazine
(e.g. 1/10). Tools that are not currently located in the magazine are
displayed without a location number. (You will find these tools when
sorting for a magazine location at the end of the tool list.)
For chain and disk magazines, the locations for a spindle and a dual-
gripper can also be displayed.
Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.
10
01/2008 Tool management
10.1 Tool list, tool wear list and tool magazine

10
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 10-369
Spindle location
Locations for grippers 1 and 2
Type Tool type and cutting edge position
Using the "Alternat." key, you can change the tool’s cutting edge
position.
Tool name The tool is identified by its name. The tool name can be specified as
text or numbers.
DP Duplo-number of the sister tool (replacement tool)
(DP 1 = original tool, DP 2 = first replacement tool,
DP 3 = second replacement tool, etc.)

Tool offset data
You can find a detailed description of the tool offset data in Sec.
"Setting-up the Machine" (Section "Tools").
(D No.) edge The tool offset data shown here is valid for the currently selected
cutting edge of a tool.
Length X Tool length compensation in the X direction
Length Z Tool length compensation in the Z direction
Radius or ∅ Radius or diameter of the tool
For milling and drilling tools, you can also specify the radius or the
diameter. For turning tools, you always specify the cutting edge
radius. A machine data code is used to switch from radius to diameter
specification.
Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.



Reference direction for the holder angle


The holder angle of a cutting tool
The holder angle of a cutting tool is taken into consideration when
machining rear cuts.


The plate angle of a cutting tool
The plate angle of a cutting tool is taken into consideration when
machining rear cuts.
Pitch Pitch of a screw tap in mm/rev, inch/rev, turns/", or MODULE
Drill ∅ Diameter of the drill hole for a rotary drill
Plat.width Plate width of a pin
The plate width needs ShopTurn for calculating the groove cycles.
10
Tool management 01/2008
10.1 Tool list, tool wear list and tool magazine

10
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
10-370 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
Plat.length The plate length of a cutting tool or pin
The plate length needs ShopTurn for displaying the tools during the
program execution simulation.
N Number of teeth for a milling cutter
The number of teeth for a milling machine
From this, the controller internally calculates the rotational feedrate if
the feedrate is set in mm/tooth in the program.


Angle of the tool tip for a drill
When drilling, if you want to plunge as far as the shaft and not only as
far as the tool tip, the controller takes the angle of the drill tip into
consideration.

Tool-specific
specifications



Specification of the spindle’s direction of rotation
The direction of the spindle’s rotation is relative to the tool spindle for
powered tools (drilling and milling machines) and to the main or
counter-spindle for turning tools.
If you are using a drilling or milling machine for "axial drilling" or "axial
threading", the specified direction of rotation is relative to the cutting
direction of the tool. The main spindle then rotates adapting to the
tool.

CW spindle rotation
CCW spindle rotation

Spindle not switched on




Coolant supply 1 and 2 (e.g. internal and external cooling) ON/OFF
during use of this tool

Coolant ON
Coolant OFF

Observe that some machines do not have a coolant supply.
Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

10
01/2008 Tool management
10.1 Tool list, tool wear list and tool magazine

10
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 10-371
Multifix

If you use a multifix tool holder, the tool list looks like the following:
Tool list for a multifix tool holder
If you use multifix tool holders, the tool change takes place manually,
i.e. the tools are swapped in and out by hand.
Tool selection for multifix
tool holders


Tool
selection

In the tool list, select the desired tool and activate it (the values of the
tool) with the aid of the “Tool selection” softkey.
10
Tool management 01/2008
10.1 Tool list, tool wear list and tool magazine

10
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
10-372 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
Tool wear list You must enter the wear data for your tools in the tool wear list.
ShopTurn takes this data into account on machining the workpiece.
You can also activate tool monitoring here as well as disable tools or
identify them as oversized.

Tool wear list

Loc., Type, Tool name,
DP
Display of magazine loc. number, tool type, and cutting edge position,
text/number designation of the tool and duplo number
(D No.) edge The displayed wear data is relative to the selected cutting edge of the
tool.
∆ Length X Wear in the X direction
∆ Length Z Wear in the Z direction
∆ Radius or ∆ ∅ Wear of the radius or diameter
TC Tool monitoring through service life (T),
quantity (C) or
wear (W)
Prewarning limit Pre-warning limit of service life, quantity, or wear
Service life
Quantity
Wear
Service life of the tool
Quantity of the finished workpieces
Maximum allowable tool wear
Tool condition
(last two columns)
Tool is disabled for machining (G) or over-sized (U).


10
01/2008 Tool management
10.1 Tool list, tool wear list and tool magazine

10
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 10-373
Tool magazine In the magazine list, you can disable or enable individual magazine
locations.

Magazine list

Loc., Type, Tool name,
DP
Display of magazine loc. number, tool type, and cutting edge position,
text/number designation of the tool and duplo number
Location disable Disabling of the magazine location
Tool condition Display of the specified tool condition in the tool wear list
10
Tool management 01/2008
10.2 Entering tools in the tool list

10
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
10-374 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
10.2 Entering tools in the tool list
You can input tools and their accompanying offset data directly into
the tool list or you can simply read-in existing tool data from outside of
tool management (see Sec. "Securing/reading-in tool/zero-point
data").

10.2.1 Creating a new tool
When you want to create a new tool, ShopTurn offers a range of
generally available tool types. The tool type determines what
geometry data you have to enter and how it is calculated.


Possible tool types
The rotary drill can be used for centric drilling and turning.

Create tool Install the new tool in the tool turret.


Select the "Tool list" softkey in the "Tools WOs" operating area.
Position the cursor on the location in the tool list that the tool
occupies in the revolver. The location must still be empty in the
tool list.

New >
tool

Press the "New tool" softkey.

Roughing
tool
...
3D_Probe


Select the desired tool type and the cutting edge position using
the softkeys.
Using the "Additional" softkey, additional tool types or cutting edge
positions are made available to you.
10
01/2008 Tool management
10.2 Entering tools in the tool list

10
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 10-375
The new tool is created and automatically assumes the name of the
selected tool type.
Enter a unique tool name.
You can edit the tool name as required. A tool name may contain
a maximum of 17 characters. You can use letters, digits, the
underscore symbol (_), periods (".") and slashes ("/").
If you assign a tool name that already exists, the "Create a duplo tool"
window appears. You can decide whether you would like to create a
sister tool (see Sec. "Creating a sister tool").
Enter the offset data of the tool.


-or-
If you later want to change the cutting edge position of the tool,
position the cursor in the "Type" column and select one of the preset
options using the "Alternat." softkey or the "Select" key.

Changing a tool name You have the option of later changing a tool’s name.
Position the cursor in the "Tool name" column and enter the
desired name.
If you enter a tool name that already exists, the "Create a duplo tool"
window appears. You are asked whether a duplo tool should be
created.

Do not
rename


Press the "Do not rename" softkey if you do not want to create a
sister tool.
Enter a new tool name.

Abort

Using the "Abort" softkey, you can cancel the process at any time.

10
Tool management 01/2008
10.2 Entering tools in the tool list

10
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
10-376 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
10.2.2 Creating multiple cutting edges for each tool
In the case of tools with more than one cutting edge, a separate set of
offset data is assigned to each cutting edge. You can set up a total of
9 edges for each tool.
There must be no gaps between the edges, i.e. if 3 edges are
required for a tool, these must be edges 1 to 3.

Follow the instructions given above to set up tools with more than one
edge in the tool list and enter the offset data for the 1st edge.

Cutting
edges >

New
edge

¾ Then select the "Cutting edges" and "New edge" softkeys.
Instead of the input fields for the first cutting edge, the offset data
input fields for the second cutting edge are displayed.
¾ Select another cutting edge position if appropriate.
¾ Enter the offset data for the second cutting edge.
¾ Repeat this process if you wish to create more tool edge offset
data.

Delete
edge

¾ Select the "Delete edge" softkey if you want to delete the tool
edge offset data for an edge.
You can only delete the data for the edge with the highest edge
number.

D No. +

D No. -

By selecting softkey "D No. +" or "D No. –", you can display the offset
data for the edge with the next highest or next lowest edge number
respectively.

10
01/2008 Tool management
10.2 Entering tools in the tool list

10
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 10-377
10.2.3 Creating a replacement tool


A replacement is a tool that you can use for the same machining being
performed by an already input tool. You can use it, for example, to
replace a broken tool.
For each tool in the tool list, you can create several replacement tools.
The duplo number 1 is always assigned to the original tool and duplo
numbers 2, 3, etc. are assigned to the replacement tools.
For sister tools, the following data must agree with that of the original
tool:
• Tool type
• Tool nose position
• Tool radius
• Direction of rotation
• Coolant


New >
tool

Create the sister tool as a new tool.
(see Sec. "Creating a new tool")
Assign the same name as the original tool to the replacement tool.
The “Create duplo tool” window is displayed.


Press the "OK" softkey.
The sister tool automatically receives the next available duplo number.
Input the tool offset data of the tool.

10
Tool management 01/2008
10.3 Sorting tools

10
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
10-378 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
10.3 Sorting tools
When you are working with large magazines or several magazines, it
is useful to display the tools sorted according to different criteria. Then
you will be able to find a specific tool more easily in the lists.



-or-

Select the "Tool list" or “Tool wear” softkey in the "Tools WOs"
operating section.

Sort
>

Press the "Sort" softkey.

To
magazine
-or-
To name

-or-
To type

-or-
To
T-number

Activate one of the softkeys to choose the sort criterion.
The tools are listed in the new order.

10.4 Deleting tools from the tool list
Tools that are no longer in use can be deleted from the tool list for a
clearer overview.



Select the "Tool list" softkey in the "Tools WOs" operating area.
Place the cursor on the tool that you would like to delete.

Delete tool

Delete


Press the "Delete tool" softkey.
Press the "Delete" softkey.
The tool data of the selected tool is deleted and the magazine location
is enabled again.

10
01/2008 Tool management
10.5 Loading/unloading a tool into/out of the magazine

10
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 10-379
10.5 Loading/unloading a tool into/out of the magazine
You can unload tools in the magazine that you are not using at
present. ShopTurn then automatically saves the tool data in the tool
list outside the magazine. Should you want to use the tool again later,
simply load the tool with the tool data into the corresponding
magazine location again. Then the same tool data does not have to
be entered more than once.

Loading and unloading of tools into and out of magazine locations
must be enabled in a machine data code.
Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.
When loading, ShopTurn automatically opens an empty space where
you can load a tool. The magazine in which ShopTurn searches for an
empty location first is stored in a machine data code.
Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.
Also when loading, you can directly specify an empty magazine
location or define in which magazine ShopTurn should search for an
empty location.
If your machine has only one magazine, you simply need to enter the
location number you require when loading the tool, not the magazine
number.
If a spindle location is displayed in the tool list, you can also change a
tool directly into or out of the spindle. You can lock the loading and
unloading via machine data.
Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

Loading a tool into the
magazine



Select the "Tool list" softkey in the "Tools WOs" operating area.
Place the cursor on the tool that you want to load into the
magazine (if the tools are sorted according to magazine location
number you will find it at the end of the tool list).

Load

Press the "Load" softkey.
The "Empty location" window appears. The "Location" field is
initialized with the number of the first empty magazine location.


Press the "OK" softkey to load the tool into the suggested
location.
-or-
10
Tool management 01/2008
10.5 Loading/unloading a tool into/out of the magazine

10
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
10-380 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008


Enter the location number you require and press the "OK" softkey.
-or-

Spindle

Press the "Spindle" and "OK" softkeys to load a tool into the
spindle.
The tool is loaded into the specified magazine location.


Finding an empty
location in the magazine
and loading the tool



Select the "Tool list" softkey in the "Tools WOs" operating area.
Place the cursor on the tool that you want to load into the
magazine.

Load

Press the "Load" softkey.
The "Empty location" window appears. The "Location" field is
initialized with the number of the first empty magazine location.
Enter the magazine number and a "0" for the location number if
you wish to search for an empty location in a particular magazine.
-or-
Enter a "0" for the magazine number and location number if you
wish to search for an empty location in all magazines.


Press the "OK" softkey.
An empty location is suggested.


Press the "OK" softkey.
The tool is loaded into the suggested magazine location.

Unloading an individual
tool from the magazine



Select the "Tool list" softkey in the "Tools WOs" operating area.
Position the cursor on the tool that you want to unload.

Unload

Press the "Unload" softkey.
The tool is unloaded from the magazine.

10
01/2008 Tool management
10.6 Relocating a tool

10
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 10-381
Unloading all tools from
the magazine



Select the "Magazine" softkey in the "Tools WOs" operating area.

Unload
all

Unload

Press the "Unload all" and "Unload" softkeys.
All tools are unloaded from the magazine.

Abort

You can abort the unloading process at any time by pressing the
"Abort" softkey. The current tool is unloaded and then the process is
aborted.
The unloading process is also aborted if you exit the magazine list.

10.6 Relocating a tool
Tools can be relocated within magazines or between different
magazines, which means that you do not have to unload tools from
the magazine in order to load them into a different location.

ShopTurn automatically suggests an empty location to which you can
relocate the tool. The magazine in which ShopTurn searches for an
empty location first is stored in a machine data code.
Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.
You can also specify an empty magazine location directly or define the
magazine ShopTurn should search for an empty location.
If your machine has just one magazine, you only need to enter the
location number you require, not the magazine number.
If a spindle location is shown in the tool list, you can also attach or
detach a tool directly to or from the spindle.
Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

10
Tool management 01/2008
10.6 Relocating a tool

10
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
10-382 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
Specifying an empty
location



Select the "Magazine" softkey in the "Tools WOs" operating area.
Place the cursor on the tool that you wish to relocate to a different
magazine location.

Relocate

Press the "Relocate" softkey.
The "Empty location" window appears. The "Location" field is
initialized with the number of the first empty magazine location.


Press the "OK" softkey to relocate the tool to the suggested
location.
-or-


Enter the location number you require and press the "OK" softkey.
-or-

Spindle

Press the "Spindle" and "OK" softkeys to load a tool into the
spindle.
The tool is relocated to the specified magazine location.

Finding an empty
location



Select the "Magazine" softkey in the "Tools WOs" operating area.
Place the cursor on the tool that you wish to relocate to a different
magazine location.

Relocate

Press the "Relocate" softkey.
The "Empty location" window appears. The "Location" field is
initialized with the number of the first empty magazine location.
Enter the magazine number and a "0" for the location number if
you wish to search for an empty location in a particular magazine.
-or-
Enter a "0" for the magazine number and location number if you
wish to search for an empty location in all magazines.


Press the "OK" softkey.
An empty location is suggested.


Press the "OK" softkey.
The tool is relocated to the suggested magazine location.

10
01/2008 Tool management
10.7 Positioning a magazine

10
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 10-383
10.7 Positioning a magazine
You can position magazine locations directly on the loading point.

Positioning a magazine
location



Select the "Magazine" softkey in the "Tools WOs" operating area.
Position the cursor on the magazine location that you would like to
position on the loading point.

Position

Press the "Position" softkey.
The magazine location is positioned on the loading point.

10.8 Entering tool wear data
Tools that are in use for long periods are subject to wear. You can
measure this wear and enter it in the tool wear list. ShopTurn then
takes this information into account when calculating the tool length or
radius compensation. This ensures a consistent accuracy in
workpiece machining.

When you input the wear values, ShopTurn checks whether or not the
values exceed an incremental or absolute upper limit. The incremental
upper limit indicates the maximum difference between the previous
and new wear value. The absolute upper limit indicates the maximum
total value that you can enter.
The upper limits are set in a machine data code.
Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.



Select the "Tool wear" softkey in the "Tools WOs" operating area.
Place the cursor on the tool whose wear data you want to enter.
Enter the differences for length (∆ Length X, ∆ Length Z) and
radius/diameter (∆ Radius/∆ ∅) in the appropriate columns.
The wear data entered is added to the radius but subtracted from the
tool length. A positive differential value for the radius therefore
corresponds to an oversize (e.g. for subsequent grinding).
10
Tool management 01/2008
10.9 Activating tool monitoring

10
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
10-384 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
10.9 Activating tool monitoring
ShopTurn allows you to monitor the tool life of the tools automatically
to ensure constant machining quality.
You can also disable tools that you no longer want to use or identify
them as oversize.

Tool monitoring can be activated via a machine data code.
Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.
Tool life (T) With the tool life T (Time), the service life for a tool with machining
feedrate is monitored in minutes. When the remaining tool life is = 0,
the tool is set to "disabled". The tool is not put into operation on the
next tool change. If a replacement tool is available, it is inserted in its
place.
Tool life is monitored on the basis of the selected tool cutting edge.
Count (C) With the count C, the number of workpieces machined by the tool is
counted. The tool is also disabled in this case, when the remainder
reaches "0".
Wear (W) With wear W, the greatest value in the wear parameters ∆ Length X,
∆ Length Z, or ∆ Radius or ∆ ∅ in the wear list is monitored. Here, too,
the tool is disabled if one of the wear parameters reaches the value for
wear W.
The wear monitoring function must be set up by the machine
manufacturer.
Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.
Pre-warning limit The pre-warning limit specifies a tool life, workpiece count or wear at
which the first warning is displayed.
The value for output of a warning due to the wear stage reached is
calculated from the difference between the maximum wear and the
warning limit entered.
Disabled (G) Individual tools can also be disabled manually if you no longer want to
use them for workpiece machining.
Oversize (U) In the case of oversize tools, neighboring magazine locations (left and
right adjacent location) are only reserved alternately, i.e. you can only
insert the next tool in the next magazine location but one. (This can
also contain an oversize tool.)

10
01/2008 Tool management
10.9 Activating tool monitoring

10
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 10-385
Monitoring tool use


Select the "Tool wear" softkey in the "Tools WOs" operating area.
Position the cursor on the tool that you want to monitor.
In the column "T/C" select the parameter that you wish to monitor
(T = Tool life, C = Count, W = Wear).
Enter a pre-warning limit for the tool life, count, or wear.
Enter the scheduled service life for the tool, the scheduled number
of workpieces to be machined or the maximum permissible wear.
The tool is disabled when the tool life, count or wear is reached.

If you wish to monitor the count, you must also insert the following G
code commands before the end of the program in every program that
calls the tools to be monitored:
SETPIECE(1) ; increase count by 1
SETPIECE(0) ; delete T no.

Entering tool statuses


Select the "Tool wear" softkey in the "Tools WOs" operating area.
Place the cursor on a tool.
Select the option "G" in the first field of the last column if you want
to disable the tool for machining.
-or-
Select the option "U" in the second field of the last column if you
want to mark the tool as oversize.
The tool disable or location disable for neighboring magazine
locations is now active.

10
Tool management 01/2008
10.10 Managing magazine locations

10
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
10-386 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
10.10 Managing magazine locations
If a magazine location is defective, or when an oversize tool requires
more than half a neighboring location, you can disable the magazine
location.

It is no longer possible to assign any tool data to a disabled magazine
location.
In the "Tool condition" columns, you can also read whether a tool is
disabled (G) or over-sized (U).
You can change the tool conditions in the tool wear list (see Sec.
"Activating tool monitoring").

Disable magazine
location




Select the "Magazine" softkey in the "Tools WOs" operating area.
Place the cursor on the relevant empty magazine location in the
"Location disable" column.


Press the "Alternat." softkey.
The letter "G" appears as a symbol for the disabling of the location.

Enable magazine
location



Select the "Magazine" softkey in the "Tools WOs" operating area.
Place the cursor on an empty magazine location in the "Location
disable" column.


Press the "Alternat." softkey.
The letter "G" is no longer visible and the magazine location is now
free again.





11
01/2008 Program management
11
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 11-387
Program management

11.1 Managing programs with ShopTurn...................................................................... 11-388
11.2 Managing programs with ShopTurn on NCU (HMI Embedded sl)........................ 11-389
11.2.1 Opening a program............................................................................................... 11-391
11.2.2 Executing a program............................................................................................. 11-392
11.2.3 Executing a G code program from USB/network drive......................................... 11-393
11.2.4 Creating a new directory/program......................................................................... 11-394
11.2.5 Selecting several programs .................................................................................. 11-395
11.2.6 Copying/renaming a directory/program ................................................................ 11-396
11.2.7 Deleting a directory/program................................................................................. 11-397
11.2.8 Saving/reading in tool/zero point data .................................................................. 11-398
11.3 Managing programs with PCU 50.3 (HMI Advanced)........................................... 11-401
11.3.1 Opening a program............................................................................................... 11-403
11.3.2 Executing a program............................................................................................. 11-404
11.3.3 Loading/unloading a program............................................................................... 11-405
11.3.4 Executing a G code program from a hard disk or floppy disk/network drive ........ 11-406
11.3.5 Creating a new directory/program......................................................................... 11-408
11.3.6 Selecting several programs .................................................................................. 11-409
11.3.7 Copying/renaming/moving a directory/program.................................................... 11-410
11.3.8 Deleting a directory/program................................................................................. 11-412
11.3.9 Saving/reading in tool/zero point data .................................................................. 11-412




11
Program management 01/2008
11.1 Managing programs with ShopTurn

11
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
11-388 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
11.1 Managing programs with ShopTurn
All the programs for workpiece machining that you have created in
ShopTurn are stored in the NCK-working memory.
You can access these programs at any time via the Program Manager
for execution, editing, copying, or renaming. Programs that you no
longer require can be deleted to release their storage space.
For exchanging programs and data with other workstations, ShopTurn
provides you with various options:
• Own hard disk (PCU 50.3 only)
• CompactFlash card
• Disk drive (PCU 50.3 only)
• USB network connection

The following sections explain the program management of ShopTurn
on either the NCU (HMI Embedded sl) or the PCU 50.3 (HMI
Advanced).
Please find out which version of ShopTurn you are running and then
read the section titled either "Managing programs with ShopTurn on
NCU (HMI Embedded sl)" or "Managing programs with PCU 50.3".

11
01/2008 Program management
11.2 Managing programs with ShopTurn on NCU (HMI Embedded sl)

11
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 11-389
11.2 Managing programs with ShopTurn on NCU (HMI Embedded sl)



For the version of ShopTurn on the NCU (HMI Embedded sl), all the
programs and data are always kept in the NCK work memory.
In addition, the directory management of a USB/network drive can be
displayed.


ShopTurn user interface on NCU
(HMI Embedded)
NC main memory
edit edit
USB/
Network drive
ShopTurn programs
ShopTurn subroutines
G code programs
ShopTurn programs
ShopTurn subroutines
G code programs

Data storage with ShopTurn on NCU (HMI Embedded sl)

You will find an overview of all directories and programs in the
Program Manager.

Program manager for ShopTurn on NCU (HMI Embedded sl)

In the horizontal softkey bar, you can select the storage medium that
contains the directories and programs that you want to display. In
addition to the "NC" softkey, via which the data of the NCK-work
memory can be displayed, another 8 softkeys can allow you to display
the directories and programs of USB/network drives and the CF-card
11
Program management 01/2008
11.2 Managing programs with ShopTurn on NCU (HMI Embedded sl)

11
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
11-390 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
drive. The "USB Front" softkey is preset to the default.
Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

In the overview, the symbols in the left-hand column have the
following meaning:


Directory


Program


Zero point/tool data
The directories and programs are always listed complete with the
following information:
• Name
The name can be up to 24 characters long. For data transfer to
external systems, the name is truncated to 8 characters.
• Type
Directory: WPD
Program: MPF
Zero point/tool data: INI
• Size (in bytes)
• Date/time (of creation or last change)
You can find additional information for data-handling, selecting and
executing a program in:
References: /BEMsl/, Operating Manual HMI Embedded sl.

In the "TEMP" directory, ShopTurn stores the programs that are
created internally for calculating the stock removal processes.


Above the horizontal softkey bar, you will find specifications for
memory space management in the NCK.

Opening the directory

-or-


¾ Press the "Program" softkey or the "Program Manager" key.
The directory overview is displayed.

...
¾ Select the storage medium using the softkey.
¾ Place the cursor on the directory that you want to open.
11
01/2008 Program management
11.2 Managing programs with ShopTurn on NCU (HMI Embedded sl)

11
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 11-391

-or-
Press the "Input" or "Cursor right" key.
All the programs in this directory are displayed.

Returning to the next
highest directory level



Press the "Cursor left" key with the cursor in any line.
-or-


Place the cursor on the Return line.
-and-

-or-
Press the "Input" or "Cursor left" key.
The next highest directory level is displayed.

11.2.1 Opening a program
To view a program in more detail or modify it, you must display the
machining plan for the program.



Press the "Program" softkey.
The directory overview is displayed.
Place the cursor on the program that you want to open.

-or-
Press the "Input" or "Cursor right" key.
The selected program is opened in the "Program" operating area. The
machining plan of the program is displayed.

11
Program management 01/2008
11.2 Managing programs with ShopTurn on NCU (HMI Embedded sl)

11
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
11-392 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
11.2.2 Executing a program
You can select any program that is stored in your system at any time
to machine workpieces automatically.

If you want to execute a program that was created on another
machine, you must observe the following: If, on the other machine, the
positive direction of rotation of the C-axis is set the other way around,
you must mirror all of the position data in the program that was
programmed using the parameter "C" ("C0", "CP"). This means that
you change the preceding symbol of the position data.
Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.



Open the Program Manager.
Place the cursor on the program that you want to execute.

Execute

Press the "Execute" softkey.
ShopTurn now switches to "Machine Auto" mode and loads the
program.

Cycle Start

Then press the "Cycle Start" key.
The machining of the workpiece is started (see Sec. "Machining a
workpiece").



If the program is already open in the "Program" operating area, press
the "Execute" softkey to load the program in "Machine Auto" mode.
Then start machining of the workpiece by pressing the "Cycle Start"
key.

11
01/2008 Program management
11.2 Managing programs with ShopTurn on NCU (HMI Embedded sl)

11
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 11-393
11.2.3 Executing a G code program from USB/network drive
If the capacity of your NCK work memory is already close to being
exhausted, you also have the option of executing G code programs
from the network drive.
In this way, instead of the entire G code program being loaded into the
NCK memory, only the first part of it is loaded. Subsequent program
blocks are then continuously reloaded as the first part is executed.
The G code program remains stored on the network drive while the
drive is being used for executing it.
Sequence programs cannot be executed from the network drive.



¾ Open the Program Manager.


¾ Select the network drive using the softkey.
¾ Place the cursor on the directory that contains the G code
program you want to execute.

-or-
¾ Press the "Input" or "Cursor right" key.
The directory opens.
¾ Place the cursor on the G code program you want to execute.

Continue
>

Exec. from
hard disk


¾ Select the "Continue" and "Exec. from hard disk" softkeys.
ShopTurn now switches to "Machine Auto" mode and loads the
G code program.

Cycle Start

¾ Press the "Cycle Start" key.
The machining of the workpiece is started (see Sec. "Machining a
workpiece"). The program contents are continuously reloaded into the
NCK work memory as the machining progresses.

11
Program management 01/2008
11.2 Managing programs with ShopTurn on NCU (HMI Embedded sl)

11
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
11-394 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
11.2.4 Creating a new directory/program
Directory structures help you to manage your program and data
transparently. You can create any number of subdirectories for this
purpose in a directory.
You can create programs and their program blocks In a sub-
directory/directory (see Sec. "Creating a sequential control program").
The new program is automatically saved for you in the NCK work
memory.

Creating a directory


Open the Program Manager.

New

Directory

Press the "New" and "Directory" softkeys.
Enter a new directory name.



Press the "OK" softkey.
The new directory is created.

Creating a program


Open the Program Manager.
Place the cursor on the directory in which you want to create a
new program.

-or-
Press the "Input" or "Cursor right" key.

New

Press the "New" softkey.

ShopTurn
program


Now press the "ShopTurn program" softkey if you want to create a
sequential control program.
(see Sec. "Creating a sequential control program")
-or-

G code
program

Press the "G code program" softkey if you want to create a G
code program.
(see Sec. "G code program")

11
01/2008 Program management
11.2 Managing programs with ShopTurn on NCU (HMI Embedded sl)

11
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 11-395
11.2.5 Selecting several programs
You can select several programs individually or in a block for
subsequent copying, deleting, etc.

Selecting several
programs as a block



Open the Program Manager.
Place the cursor on the first program that you want to select.

Mark

Press the "Mark" softkey.

-or-
Expand the program selection area by pressing the cursor up or
down key.
The entire block of programs is marked.

Selecting several
programs individually



Open the Program Manager.
Place the cursor on the first program that you want to select.


Press the "Select" key.

-or-
Move the cursor to the next program that you want to select.


Press the "Select" key again.
The individually selected programs are marked.

11
Program management 01/2008
11.2 Managing programs with ShopTurn on NCU (HMI Embedded sl)

11
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
11-396 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
11.2.6 Copying/renaming a directory/program
To create a new directory or program that is similar to an existing
program, you can save time by copying the old directory or program
and only changing selected programs or program blocks.
You can also copy and paste directories and programs to and from
other locations in order to exchange data with other ShopTurn
systems via the network drive.
You can also rename directories or programs.

It is not possible to rename a program when it is loaded in "Machine
Auto" mode at the same time.

Copying a
directory/program



Open the Program Manager.
Place the cursor on the directory/program that you want to copy.

Copy

Press the "Copy" softkey.
Select the directory level in which you want to insert your copied
directory/program.

Insert

Press the "Insert" softkey.
The copied directory/program is inserted in the selected directory
level. If a directory/program of the same name already exists in the
directory level, a prompt asks whether you want to overwrite or insert
it under a different name.


Press the "OK" softkey if you want to overwrite the
directory/program.
-or-
Enter another name if you want to insert the program/directory
under another name.
-and-


Press the "OK" softkey.


11
01/2008 Program management
11.2 Managing programs with ShopTurn on NCU (HMI Embedded sl)

11
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 11-397
Renaming a
directory/program



Open the Program Manager.
Place the cursor on the directory/program that you want to
rename.

Rename

Press the "Rename" softkey.
In the "To" field: Enter the new directory or program name.
The name must be unique, i.e. two directories or programs are not
permitted to have the same name.


Press the "OK" softkey.
The directory/program is renamed.


11.2.7 Deleting a directory/program
From time to time, delete the programs or directories that you are no
longer using in order to keep your data manageable and to free up the
NCK work memory again.
Save the data beforehand, if necessary, on an external data-carrier
(e.g. USB flash drive) or via a USB/network drive.
Please note that USB FlashDrives are not suitable for use as
persistent memory media.

Please note that when you delete a directory, all programs, tool data
and zero point data and subdirectories that this directory contains are
deleted.
If you want to free up space in the NCK memory, delete the contents
of the "TEMP" directory. This is where ShopTurn stores the programs
that are created internally for calculating the stock removal processes.



Open the Program Manager.
Place the cursor on the directory/program that you want to delete.

Delete

Press the "Delete" and "OK" softkeys.
The selected directory or program is deleted.

11
Program management 01/2008
11.2 Managing programs with ShopTurn on NCU (HMI Embedded sl)

11
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
11-398 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
11.2.8 Saving/reading in tool/zero point data
Apart from programs, you can also save tool data and zero point
settings.
You can use this function, for example, to back up the tool and zero
point data for a specific sequence program. If you want to execute this
program at a later point in time, you will then have quick access to the
relevant settings.
Even tool data that you have measured on an external tool setting
station can be copied easily into the tool management system using
this option. For further details, see:
References: /FBTsl/, CNC Commissioning: ShopTurn,
SINUMERIK 840D sl/840 DE sl


You can choose which data you want to back up:
• Tool data
• Magazine loading
• Zero points
• Basic zero point
You can also specify the amount of data to be backed up:
• Complete tool list or all zero points
• All tool data or zero points used in the program
The read-out of the magazine usage is only possible if your system
provides for loading/unloading of tool data into/out of the magazine
(see Sec. "Tool management", section "Loading/unloading a tool into
the magazine").

Saving data


Open the Program Manager.
Place the cursor on the program whose tool and zero point data
you wish to back up.

Continue
>

Back up
data

Select the "Continue" and "Back up data" softkeys.
Select the data you want to back up.
Change the suggested name if you want to.
The name of the originally selected program with extension
"..._TMZ" will be suggested as a name for your tool or zero point
file.
11
01/2008 Program management
11.2 Managing programs with ShopTurn on NCU (HMI Embedded sl)

11
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 11-399


Press the "OK" softkey.
The tool/zero point data will be set up in the same directory in which
the selected program is stored.
If a tool/zero point file with the specified name already exists, this will
now be overwritten with the new data.
If an MPF program and an INI file of the same name are located in a
directory, the INI file will be automatically started when the MPF
program is selected. In this way, unwanted tool data can be changed.

Importing data


Open the Program Manager.
Place the cursor on the tool/zero point data backup that you wish
to re-import.

Execute
-or-
Select the "Execute" softkey or the "Input" key.
The window "Read in backup data" is opened.
Select the data (tool offset data, magazine loading data, zero
point data, basic work offsets) that you wish to read in.


Press the "OK" softkey.
The data are read in.
Depending on which data you have selected, ShopTurn behaves as
follows:
All tool offset data
First, all tool management data are deleted and then the saved data
are imported.
All tool offset data used in the program
If at least one of the tools to be read in already exists in the tool
management system, you can choose between the following options.

Replace all

Select the "Replace all" softkey to import all tool data. Any existing
tools will now be overwritten without a warning prompt.
-or-

Replace
none

Select the "Replace none" softkey if you want to cancel the data
import.
-or-
11
Program management 01/2008
11.2 Managing programs with ShopTurn on NCU (HMI Embedded sl)

11
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
11-400 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008


Select the "No" softkey if you want to keep the old tool.
If the old tool is not at the saved magazine location, it is relocated
there.
-or-


Select the "Yes" softkey if you want to overwrite the old tool.
With the tool management option without loading/unloading, the old
tool is deleted; the old tool is unloaded beforehand in the variant with
loading/unloading.
If you change the tool name before importing it with "Yes", the tool will
be added as an extra tool to the tool list.

Zero offsets
Existing work offsets are always overwritten when new offsets are
imported.

Magazine loading
If magazine loading data are not imported at the same time, tools are
entered in the tool list without a location number.

11
01/2008 Program management
11.3 Managing programs with PCU 50.3 (HMI Advanced)

11
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 11-401
11.3 Managing programs with PCU 50.3 (HMI Advanced)
For the version of ShopTurn with PCU 50.3 (HMI Advanced), there is
also an individual hard disk in addition to the NCK work memory. This
makes it possible to store all the programs that are not currently
needed in the NCK on the hard-disk.
In addition, the directory management of a disk drive, USB drive, or
network drive can be displayed.


ShopTurn user interface PCU 50.3
NC main memory
edit
Data manage-
ment on hard
disk
ShopTurn programs
ShopTurn subroutines
G code programs
edit
edit
load
unload
save
Diskette drive
edit
Network drive
ShopTurn programs
ShopTurn subroutines
G code programs
ShopTurn programs
ShopTurn subroutines
G code programs
Data storage with PCU 50.3

You will find an overview of all directories and programs in the
Program Manager.


Program manager PCU 50.3 (HMI Advanced)
In the horizontal softkey bar, you can select the storage medium that
contains the directories and programs that you want to display. In
addition to the "NC" softkey, via which the data of the NCK-work
memory can be displayed, another 8 softkeys can be used. You can
11
Program management 01/2008
11.3 Managing programs with PCU 50.3 (HMI Advanced)

11
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
11-402 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
display the directories and programs of the following storage media:
• USB/Network drives (network card required)
• Diskette drive
• Local USB front interface
• The hard disk as archive directory.
Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

In the overview, the symbols in the left-hand column have the
following meaning:


Directory


Program


Zero point/tool data
The directories and programs are always listed complete with the
following information:
• Name
The name can be up to 24 characters long. For data transfer to
external systems, the name is truncated to 8 characters.
• Type
Directory: WPD
Program: MPF
Zero point/tool data: INI
• Loaded
At a cross in the "Loaded" column, you will see whether the
program is still in the NCK work memory (X) or whether it is on the
hard-disk ( ).
• Size (in bytes)
• Date/time (of creation or last change)
You can find additional information for data-handling, selecting and
executing a program in:
References: /BAD/, Operating Manual HMI Advanced

In the "TEMP" directory, ShopTurn stores the programs that are
created internally for calculating the stock removal processes.


Above the horizontal softkey bar, you will find specifications for
memory space management on the hard-disk and in the NCK.

11
01/2008 Program management
11.3 Managing programs with PCU 50.3 (HMI Advanced)

11
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 11-403
Opening the directory

-or-
¾ Press the "Program" softkey or the "Program Manager" key.
The directory overview is displayed.



¾ Select the storage medium using the softkey.
¾ Place the cursor on the directory that you want to open.

-or-
¾ Press the "Input" or "Cursor right" key.
All the programs in this directory are displayed.

Returning to the next
highest directory level



¾ Press the "Cursor left" key with the cursor in any line.
-or-


¾ Place the cursor on the Return line.
-and-

-or-
¾ Press the "Input" or "Cursor left" key.
The next highest directory level is displayed.

11.3.1 Opening a program
To view a program in more detail or modify it, you must display the
machining plan for the program.



¾ Press the "Program" softkey.
The directory overview is displayed.
¾ Place the cursor on the program that you want to open.

-or-
¾ Press the "Input" or "Cursor right" key.
The selected program is opened in the "Program" operating area. The
machining plan of the program is displayed.

11
Program management 01/2008
11.3 Managing programs with PCU 50.3 (HMI Advanced)

11
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
11-404 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
11.3.2 Executing a program
You can select any program that is stored in your system at any time
to machine workpieces automatically.

If you want to execute a program that was created on another
machine, you must observe the following: If, on the other machine, the
positive direction of rotation of the C-axis is set the other way around,
you must mirror all of the position data in the program that was
programmed using the parameter "C" ("C0", "CP"). This means that
you change the preceding symbol of the position data.
Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.



Open the Program Manager.
Place the cursor on the program that you want to execute.


Execute

Press the "Execute" softkey.
ShopTurn now switches to "Machine Auto" mode and loads the
program.

Cycle Start

Then press the "Cycle Start" key.
The machining of the workpiece is started (see Sec. "Machining a
workpiece").



If the program is already open in the "Program" operating area, press
the "Execute" softkey to load the program in "Machine Auto" mode.
Then start machining of the workpiece by pressing the "Cycle Start"
key.

11
01/2008 Program management
11.3 Managing programs with PCU 50.3 (HMI Advanced)

11
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 11-405
11.3.3 Loading/unloading a program
If you do not want to execute one or more programs in the immediate
future, you can unload them from the NCK work memory.
The programs are then stored on the hard-disk and the NCK work
memory is freed up.

As soon as you execute a program that was stored on the hard-disk,
it is automatically reloaded into the NCK work memory.
However, you can load one or more sequential control programs into
the NCK work memory without have to immediately execute them.
Programs that are in "Machine Auto" mode cannot be unloaded from
the NCK work memory to the hard-disk.

Unloading a program


Open the Program Manager.
Position the cursor on the program that you would like to unload
from the NCK work memory.

Continue
>

Manual
unload

Press the "Continue" and "Manual unload" softkeys.
The selected program is no longer marked with an "X" in the "Loaded"
column.
In the line that displays the available memory space, you will see that
the NCK work memory was freed up.


Loading a program


Open the Program Manager.
Position the cursor on the program that you would like to load into
the NCK work memory.

Continue
>

Manual
load

Press the "Continue" and "Manual load" softkeys.
The selected program is now marked with an "X" in the "Loaded"
column.

11
Program management 01/2008
11.3 Managing programs with PCU 50.3 (HMI Advanced)

11
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
11-406 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
11.3.4 Executing a G code program from a hard disk or floppy disk/network drive
If the capacity of your NCK main memory is already stretched, you
can also execute G code programs from the hard disk or a floppy disk
or network drive.
The entire G code program is not loaded into NC main memory before
it is executed, but only the first part of it. Subsequent program blocks
are then continuously reloaded as the first part is executed.
The G code program remains stored on the hard disk or floppy
disk/network drive when executed from there.
You cannot execute sequence programs from hard disk or floppy
disk/network drive.

Running a G code
program from the hard
disk



¾ Open the Program Manager.
¾ Place the cursor on the directory that contains the G code
program that you want to execute from hard disk.

-or-
¾ Press the "Input" or "Cursor right" key.
The program overview is displayed.
¾ Place the cursor on the G code program that you want to execute
from hard disk (without "X").

Continue
>

Exec. from
hard disk


¾ Select the "Continue" and "Exec. from hard disk" softkeys.
ShopTurn now switches to "Machine Auto" mode and loads the
G code program.

Cycle Start

¾ Press the "Cycle Start" key.
The machining of the workpiece is started (see Sec. "Machining a
workpiece"). The program contents are continuously reloaded into the
NCK work memory as the machining progresses.

11
01/2008 Program management
11.3 Managing programs with PCU 50.3 (HMI Advanced)

11
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 11-407
Running a G code program
from floppy disk or network
drive



Open the Program Manager.

...
Select the floppy disk/network drive via the appropriate softkey.
Place the cursor on the directory that contains the G code
program you want to execute.

-or-
Press the "Input" or "Cursor right" key.
The directory opens.
Place the cursor on the G code program you want to execute.

Continue
>

Exec. from
hard disk


Select the "Continue" and "Exec. from hard disk" softkeys.
ShopTurn now switches to "Machine Auto" mode and loads the
G code program.

Cycle Start

Press the "Cycle Start" key.
The machining of the workpiece is started (see Sec. "Machining a
workpiece"). The program contents are continuously reloaded into the
NCK work memory as the machining progresses.

11
Program management 01/2008
11.3 Managing programs with PCU 50.3 (HMI Advanced)

11
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
11-408 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
11.3.5 Creating a new directory/program
Directory structures help you to manage your program and data
transparently. You can create any number of subdirectories for this
purpose in a directory.
You can create programs and their program blocks In a sub-
directory/directory (see Sec. "Creating a sequential control program").
The new program is automatically saved for you in the NCK work
memory.

Creating a directory


Open the Program Manager.

New

Directory

Press the "New" and "Directory" softkeys.
Enter a new directory name.



Press the "OK" softkey.
The new directory is created.

Creating a program


Open the Program Manager.
Place the cursor on the directory in which you want to create a
new program.

-or-
Press the "Input" or "Cursor right" key.

New

Press the "New" softkey.

ShopTurn
program


Now press the "ShopTurn program" softkey if you want to create a
sequential control program.
(see Sec. "Creating a sequential control program")
-or-

G code
program

Press the "G code program" softkey if you want to create a
G code program.
(see Sec. "Programming G code")

11
01/2008 Program management
11.3 Managing programs with PCU 50.3 (HMI Advanced)

11
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 11-409
11.3.6 Selecting several programs
You can select several programs individually or in a block for
subsequent copying, deleting, etc.

Selecting several
programs as a block



Open the Program Manager.
Place the cursor on the first program that you want to select.


Mark

Press the "Mark" softkey.

-or-
Expand the program selection area by pressing the cursor up or
down key.
The entire block of programs is marked.

Selecting several
programs individually



Open the Program Manager.
Place the cursor on the first program that you want to select.



Press the "Select" key.

-or-
Move the cursor to the next program that you want to select.


Press the "Select" key again.
The individually selected programs are marked.

11
Program management 01/2008
11.3 Managing programs with PCU 50.3 (HMI Advanced)

11
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
11-410 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
11.3.7 Copying/renaming/moving a directory/program
To create a new directory or program that is similar to an existing
program, you can save time by copying the old directory or program
and only changing selected programs or program blocks.
You can also move directories or programs or rename them.
You can also use the copy, cut and insert capabilities for directories
and programs to exchange data with other ShopTurn systems via
diskette or the network drive.

It is not possible to rename a program when it is loaded in "Machine
Auto" mode at the same time.

Copying a
directory/program



Open the Program Manager.
Place the cursor on the directory/program that you want to copy.

Copy

Press the "Copy" softkey.
Select the directory level in which you want to insert your copied
directory/program.

Insert

Press the "Insert" softkey.
The copied directory/program is inserted in the selected directory
level. If a directory/program of the same name already exists in the
directory level, a prompt asks whether you want to overwrite or insert
it under a different name.


Press the "OK" softkey if you want to overwrite the
directory/program.
-or-
Enter another name if you want to insert the program/directory
under another name.
-and-


Press the "OK" softkey.


11
01/2008 Program management
11.3 Managing programs with PCU 50.3 (HMI Advanced)

11
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 11-411
Renaming a
directory/program



Open the Program Manager.
Place the cursor on the directory/program that you want to
rename.

Rename

Press the "Rename" softkey.
In the "To" field: Enter the new directory or program name.
The name must be unique, i.e. two directories or programs are not
permitted to have the same name.


Press the "OK" softkey.
The directory/program is renamed.

Moving a
directory/program



Open the Program Manager.
Place the cursor on the directory/program that you want to move.

Cut

Press the "Cut" softkey and then the "OK" softkey.
The selected directory/program is deleted at this point and stored in
buffer memory.
Select the directory level in which you want to insert the
directory/program.

Insert

Press the "Insert" softkey.
The directory/program is moved to the selected directory level.
If a directory/program of the same name already exists in this directory
level, a prompt asks whether you want to overwrite or insert it under a
different name.


Press the "OK" softkey if you want to overwrite the
directory/program.
-or-
Enter another name if you want to insert the program/directory
under another name.
-and-


Press the "OK" softkey.


11
Program management 01/2008
11.3 Managing programs with PCU 50.3 (HMI Advanced)

11
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
11-412 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
11.3.8 Deleting a directory/program
Delete programs or directories from time to time that you are no longer
using to maintain a clearer overview of your data management. Save
the data beforehand, if necessary, on an external data-carrier (e.g.
USB FlashDrive) or on a USB/network drive.
Please note that USB FlashDrives are not suitable for use as
persistent memory media.

Please note that when you delete a directory, all programs, tool data
and zero point data and subdirectories that this directory contains are
deleted.
If you want to free up space in the NCK memory, delete the contents
of the "TEMP" directory. This is where ShopTurn stores the programs
that are created internally for calculating the stock removal processes.



Open the Program Manager.
Place the cursor on the directory/program that you want to delete.

Cut

Press the "Cut" and "OK" softkeys.
The selected directory or program is deleted.

11.3.9 Saving/reading in tool/zero point data
In addition to the programs, you can also save/read-in tool data and
zero-point settings.
You can use this function, for example, to back up the tool and zero
point data for a specific sequence program. If you want to execute this
program at a later point in time, you will then have quick access to the
relevant settings.
Even tool data that you have measured on an external tool setting
station can be copied easily into the tool management system using
this option. For further details, see:
References: /FBTsl/, CNC Commissioning: ShopTurn,
SINUMERIK 840D sl/840 DE sl

You can choose which data you want to back up:
• Tool data
• Magazine loading
• Zero points
• Basic zero point
11
01/2008 Program management
11.3 Managing programs with PCU 50.3 (HMI Advanced)

11
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 11-413
You can also specify the amount of data to be backed up:
• Complete tool list or all zero points
• All tool data or zero points used in the program
The read-out of the magazine usage is only possible if your system
provides for loading/unloading of tool data into or out of the magazine
(see Sec. "Tool management", section "Loading/unloading a tool into
the magazine").

Saving data


Open the Program Manager.
Place the cursor on the program whose tool and zero point data
you wish to back up.

Continue
>

Back up
data

Select the "Continue" and "Back up data" softkeys.
Select the data you want to back up.
Change the suggested name if you want to.
The name of the originally selected program with extension
"..._TMZ" will be suggested as a name for your tool or zero point
file.


Press the "OK" softkey.
The tool/zero point data will be set up in the same directory in which
the selected program is stored.
If a tool/zero point file with the specified name already exists, this will
now be overwritten with the new data.
If an MPF program and an INI file of the same name are located in a
directory, the INI file will be automatically started when the MPF
program is selected. In this way, unwanted tool data can be changed.

Importing data


Open the Program Manager.
Place the cursor on the tool/zero point data backup that you wish
to re-import.

Execute
-or-
-or-
Press the "Execute" softkey or the "Input" key or "Cursor right".
The window "Read in backup data" is opened.
Select the data (tool offset data, magazine loading data, zero
point data, basic work offsets) that you wish to read in.
11
Program management 01/2008
11.3 Managing programs with PCU 50.3 (HMI Advanced)

11
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
11-414 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008


Press the "OK" softkey.
The data are read in.
Depending on which data you have selected, ShopTurn behaves as
follows:
All tool offset data
First, all tool management data are deleted and then the saved data
are imported.
All tool offset data used in the program
If at least one of the tools to be read in already exists in the tool
management system, you can choose between the following options.

Replace all

Select the "Replace all" softkey to import all tool data. Any existing
tools will now be overwritten without a warning prompt.
-or-

Replace
none

Select the "Replace none" softkey if you want to cancel the data
import.
-or-


Select the "No" softkey if you want to keep the old tool.
If the old tool is not at the saved magazine location, it is relocated
there.
-or-


Select the "Yes" softkey if you want to overwrite the old tool.
With the tool management option without loading/unloading, the old
tool is deleted; the old tool is unloaded beforehand in the variant with
loading/unloading.
If you change the tool name before importing it with "Yes", the tool will
be added as an extra tool to the tool list.

Zero offsets
Existing work offsets are always overwritten when new offsets are
imported.

Magazine loading
If magazine loading data are not imported at the same time, tools are
entered in the tool list without a location number.


12
01/2008 Messages, alarms, user data
12
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 12-415
Messages, alarms, user data

12.1 Messages.............................................................................................................. 12-416
12.2 Alarms................................................................................................................... 12-416
12.3 User data............................................................................................................... 12-417
12.4 Version display...................................................................................................... 12-419




12
Messages, alarms, user data 01/2008
12.1 Messages

12
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
12-416 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
12.1 Messages
ShopTurn displays messages in the dialogue line, which give you
operating information or inform you of the progress of the machining
process. The appearing messages do not interrupt the machining.


Dialogue line with a message

12.2 Alarms
If errors are detected in ShopTurn, the system generates an alarm
and aborts program execution if necessary. You can display the
alarms complete with alarm code, date, error text and cancel criterion.
The error text gives you more detailed information on the cause of the
error.

Warning
If you do not heed an alarm that is issued and do not clear the cause
of the alarm, it can present a hazard to the machine, the workpiece,
the saved settings and, in certain circumstances, your health.

The various alarm numbers are assigned to the following sections:
61000-62999 Cycles
100000-100999 Basic system
101000-101999 Diagnostics
102000-102999 Services
103000-103999 Machine
104000-104999 Parameters
105000-105999 Programming
106000-106999 Reserved
107000-107999 OEM
110000-111999 Reserved
112000-112999 ShopTurn
120000-120999 Reserved
A description of all the alarms can be found in
References: /DAsl/, Diagnostics Manual,
SINUMERIK 840Dsl/840Di sl


12
01/2008 Messages, alarms, user data
12.3 User data

12
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 12-417


Press the "Alarm list” softkey.
The list containing the active messages and alarms appears.
Carefully check the machine according to the description given in
the alarm.
Clear the cause of the alarm.


Reset

Cycle Start


Press the key that appears as a symbol next to the alarm if you
want to delete the alarm.
-or-


Switch the machine or controller off and then on again if the
symbol of the main switch (POWER ON) is displayed next to the
alarm.

12.3 User data
User data are variables that are used internally by both ShopTurn and
G-code programs. These user data can be displayed in a list.

The following types of variables are defined:
• Global User Data (GUD)
Global user data is valid in all programs.
The display of global user data (GUD) can be disabled via
keyswitch or password.

• Local User Data (LUD)
Local User Data is only valid in the program or subroutine in which
it was defined.
During program execution, ShopTurn displays the LUDs that are
present between the current block and the end of the program. If
you press the "Cycle Stop" key, the LUD list is updated. The
values, however, are continuously updated.
• Global Program User Data (PUD)
Global program user data is created from the local variables (LUD)
defined in the main program.
PUD is valid in all subroutines, where it can also be read and
written.
The local data is also displayed with the global program user data.
12
Messages, alarms, user data 01/2008
12.3 User data

12
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
12-418 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
• Channel-specific user data
Channel-specific user data is only applicable in one channel.
ShopTurn does not display user data of the AXIS and FRAME type.

To learn which variables ShopTurn displays, please see the machine
manufacturer’s specifications.

Displaying user data

-or-

Press the "Tools WOs" softkey or the "Offset" key.


Press the "Expansion" key.


Press the "User data" softkey.

Global
user data
...
Program
user data

Activate one of the softkeys to choose the user data that you want
to display.

GUD +
or
GUD -

You can press the "GUD +" and "GUD -" softkeys to display the
global and channel-specific user data from GUD 1 to GUD 9.

Searching user data

Search

Press the "Search" softkey.
Enter the text string that you want to locate.
You can search for any character string.



Press the "Accept" softkey.
The user data is displayed.

Continue
search

Press the "Continue search" softkey to continue the search, as
necessary.
The next user data that contains the search string is displayed.

12
01/2008 Messages, alarms, user data
12.4 Version display

12
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 12-419
12.4 Version display
You can find the ShopTurn version in the start-up screen.
The ShopTurn and NCU version can also be seen on the CNC-ISO
operator interface.

Displaying versions


Press the "Expansion” key in order to open the expanded basic
menu bar.

Diagnosis

Service
displays

Press the "Diagnosis" and "Service displays" softkeys.

Version

NCU
version

Press the "Version" and "NCU version" softkeys.
The NCU version is displayed at the top of the window that appears:
xx.yy.zz.nn.

12
Messages, alarms, user data 01/2008
12.4 Version display

12
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
12-420 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
Notes

13
01/2008 Examples
13
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 13-421
Examples

13.1 Standard machinings ............................................................................................ 13-422
13.2 Contour milling...................................................................................................... 13-434




13
Examples 01/2008
13.1 Standard machinings

13
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
13-422 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
13.1 Standard machinings
Workpiece drawing

4x∅5
∅90
2
3
∅32
X 5:1
8
4
15° 15°
R1 R1
FS3
FS2
R6
X
5
M
4
8
x
2

6
0
3x45°
10
35
70
80
85
95
R23
FS1 FS1


3
4
23

R8


Workpiece drawing

Blank Dimensions: ∅90 x 120 mm
Material: Aluminum

Tools Roughing tool_80 80°, R0.6
Roughing tool_55 55°, R0.4
Finishing tool 35°, R0.4
Recessing tool Plate width 4
Threading tool_2
Drill ∅5
Milling tool ∅8

13
01/2008 Examples
13.1 Standard machinings

13
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 13-423
Program
1. Create a new program ¾ In the required directory of the "Program manager" operating
area, press the
New
and
ShopTurn
program
softkeys.
¾ Program name (here: Enter demo part_1)
¾ Press the softkey.
2. Program header The parameter screen form “Program Header” is displayed.
¾ Define the blank:
Blank Cylinder
XA 90 abs
ZA 0 abs
ZI -120 abs
ZB -100 abs
Retraction Simple
XRA 2 inc
ZRA 5 inc
Tool change point MCS
XT 160 abs
ZT 409 abs
SC 1 inc
S1 4000 RPM
Unit of measurem. mm

¾ Press the softkey.
3. Stock removal cycle for
facing
¾ Press the
Stock
removal
softkeys.
¾ Enter parameters:
T Roughing tool_80
F 0.300 mm/rev
V 300 m/min
Machining

Position

Direction Plan (parallel to the X axis)
X0 60 abs
Z0 2 abs
X1 -1.6 abs
Z1 0 abs
D 2 inc
UX 0 inc
UZ 0.1 inc
13
Examples 01/2008
13.1 Standard machinings

13
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
13-424 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008

Press the softkey.
4. Input of blank contour with
contour computer
Press the
New
contour
softkeys.
Input contour name (here: Input Cont_1)

Press the softkey.
Determine the starting point of the contour:
X 60 abs
Z 0 abs

Press the softkey.
Enter the following contour elements and confirm each one by
pressing the softkey:

1. Z -40 abs

2. X 80 abs Z -45 abs

3. Z -65 abs

4. X 90 abs Z -70 abs

5. Z -95 abs

6. X 0 abs

7. Z 0 abs

8. X 60 abs Z 0 abs

Press the softkey.
13
01/2008 Examples
13.1 Standard machinings

13
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 13-425


Blank contour

5. Input of finished part
contour with contour
computer
Press the
New
contour
softkeys.
Input contour name (here: Input Cont_2)

Press the softkey.
Determine the starting point of the contour:
X 0 abs
Z 0 abs
Enter the following contour elements and confirm each one by
pressing the softkey:

1. X 48 abs FS 3

2. α2 90°

3. Direction of rotation
R 23 abs X 60 abs K -35 abs.
I 80 abs
Dialog
selection

Accept
dialog
FS 2

4. Z -80 abs R 6

5. X 90 abs Z -85 abs FS 3

6. Z -95 abs
13
Examples 01/2008
13.1 Standard machinings

13
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
13-426 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008

Press the softkey.


Finished-part contour

6. Stock removal (roughing)
Press the
Stock
removal
softkeys.
Enter parameters:
T Roughing tool_80
F 0.300 mm/rev
V 200 m/min
Machining

Direction of stock
removal
Longitudinal (parallel to the Z axis)
Machining side External
Machining direction ← (from front to back)
D 1.9 inc
Cutting depth

UX 0.2 inc
UZ 0.1 inc
BL Contour
Set machining area
limits
No
Relief cuts No

Press the softkey.
13
01/2008 Examples
13.1 Standard machinings

13
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 13-427


Stock removal

7. Solid machine residual
material
Press the
St. remov.
resid.
softkeys.
Enter parameters:
T Roughing tool_55
F 0.200 mm/rev
V 250 m/min
Machining

Direction of stock
removal
Longitudinal (parallel to the Z axis)
Machining side External
Machining direction ← (from front to back)
D 2 inc
Cutting depth

UX 0.200 inc
UZ 0.100 inc
Set machining area
limits
No
Relief cuts Yes
FR 0.250 mm/rev

Press the softkey.
8. Stock removal (finishing)
Press the
Stock
removal
softkeys.
Enter parameters:
T Finishing tool
F 0.150 mm/rev
V 300 m/min
13
Examples 01/2008
13.1 Standard machinings

13
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
13-428 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
Machining


Direction of stock
removal
Longitudinal (parallel to the Z axis)
Machining side External
Machining direction ← (from front to back)
Stock allowance No
Set machining area
limits
No
Relief cuts Yes

Press the softkey.
9. Groove (roughing)
Press the
Recess
softkeys
Enter parameters:
T Recessing tool
F 0.150 mm/rev
V 300 m/min
Machining

Groove position

Reference point

X0 60 abs
Z0 -70
B2 8 inc
T1 4 inc
α1 15 degrees
α2 15 degrees
FS1 1
R2 1
R3 1
FS4 1
D 2 inc
U 0.100 inc
N 1

Press the softkey.
13
01/2008 Examples
13.1 Standard machinings

13
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 13-429


Recess

10. Groove (finishing)
Press the
Recess
softkeys
Enter parameters:
T Recessing tool
F 0.150 mm/rev
V 300 m/min
Machining

Groove position

Reference point

X0 60 abs
Z0 -70
B1 5.856 inc.
T1 4 inc
α1 15 degrees
α2 15 degrees
FS1 1
R2 1
R3 1
FS4 1
N 1

Press the softkey.
11. Longitudinal threads
M48x2 (roughing)
Press the
Thread

Thread
long.
softkeys.
Enter parameters:
T Threading tool_2
13
Examples 01/2008
13.1 Standard machinings

13
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
13-430 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
P 2 mm/rev
G 0
S 400 RPM
Cut segmentation Diminishing
Machining method

Thread External thread
X0 48 abs
Z0 0 abs
Z1 -25 abs
W 4 inc
R 4 inc
K 1.226 inc.
α 30 degrees
Infeed

AS 10
U 0.020 inc
V 1 inc
Q 0 degrees

Press the softkey.
12. Longitudinal threads
M48x2 (finishing)
Press the
Thread

Thread
long.
softkeys.
Enter parameters:
T Threading tool_2
P 2 mm/rev
G 0
S 400 RPM
Machining method

Thread External thread
X0 48 abs
Z0 0 abs
Z1 -25 abs
W 4 inc
R 4 inc
K 1.226 inc.
α 30 degrees
Infeed

V 1 inc
Q 0 degrees

Press the softkey.
13
01/2008 Examples
13.1 Standard machinings

13
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 13-431
13. Drilling
Press the
Drilling
reaming >

Drilling
softkeys.
Enter parameters:
T Drill
F 200 mm/min
S 1000 RPM
Position Face
Point/Shaft Tip
Z1 10 inc
DT 0 s

Press the softkey.
14. Positioning
Press the
Positions
>
softkeys.
Enter parameters:
Position Face
Right-angle/Polar Polar
Z0 0 abs
C0 0 abs
L0 16 abs
C1 90 abs
L1 16 abs
C2 180 abs
L2 16 abs
C3 270 abs
L3 16 abs

Press the softkey.
15. Mill a rectangular pocket
Press the
Pocket
>

Rectangu-
lar pocket
softkeys.
Enter parameters:
T Milling tool
F 0.030 mm/tooth
S 1800 RPM
Position Face
Machining method

Position Single position
X0 0 abs
Y0 0 abs
Z0 0 abs
W 23
13
Examples 01/2008
13.1 Standard machinings

13
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
13-432 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
L 23
R 8
α0 4 degrees
Z1 5 inc
DXY 50%
DZ 3
UXY 0.1 mm
UZ 0.1
Insertion Center
FZ 50 mm/min

Press the softkey.

Result

Programming graphics



Process plan

13
01/2008 Examples
13.1 Standard machinings

13
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 13-433


Simulation, volume model

13
Examples 01/2008
13.2 Contour milling

13
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
13-434 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
13.2 Contour milling
Workpiece drawing
Ø120
R
4
6
R
5
0
R
1
0
R
1
4
R
6
R
1
0
40
80
T=5
T=3

Workpiece drawing

Blank Dimensions: ∅120 x 80 mm
Material: Aluminum
Tools Milling tool: ∅18
Milling tool: ∅5
Program
1. Create a new program In the required directory of the "Program manager" operating area,
press the
New
and
ShopTurn
program
softkeys.
Program name (here: input contour)
Press the softkey.
2. Fill out the program head The parameter screen form “Program Header” is displayed.
Define the blank:
Blank Cylinder
XA 120 abs
ZA 0 abs
ZI -80 abs
13
01/2008 Examples
13.2 Contour milling

13
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 13-435
ZB -50 abs
Retraction Simple
XRA 125 abs
ZRA 2 abs
Tool change point WCS
XT 200 abs
ZT 200 abs
SC 1 inc
S1 1000 RPM
Unit of measurem. mm

¾ Press the softkey.
3. Input the limiting contour
¾ Press the
Contour
milling

New
contour
softkeys.
¾ Input contour name (here: Contour_1)

¾ Press the softkey.
¾ Determine the starting point of the contour:
Position Face
X 0 abs
Y -61 abs

¾ Press the softkey.
¾ Enter the following contour elements and confirm each one by
pressing the softkey:

1. Direction of rotation
R 61 abs Y -61 abs I 0 abs.

Dialog
selection

Accept
dialog

13
Examples 01/2008
13.2 Contour milling

13
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
13-436 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008


Limiting contour

Press the softkey.
4. Input exterior contour
Press the
Contour
milling

New
contour
softkeys.
Input contour name (here: Contour_2)

Press the softkey.
Determine the starting point of the contour:
Position Face
X 0 abs
Y 50 abs

Press the softkey.
Enter the following contour elements and confirm each one by
pressing the softkey:

1. Direct. of rot.
R 50 abs X 0 abs Y -50 abs


2.
Tangent to
prec. elem.
Direct. of rot.
13
01/2008 Examples
13.2 Contour milling

13
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 13-437
R 10 abs X 0 abs

Dialog
selection

Accept
dialog


3.
Tangent to
prec. elem.
Direct. of rot.
R 10 abs X 0 abs

Dialog
selection

Accept
dialog


4.
Tangent to
prec. elem.
Direct. of rot.
R 10 abs X 0 abs

Dialog
selection

Accept
dialog


5.
Tangent to
prec. elem.
Direct. of rot.
R 10 abs X 0 abs

Dialog
selection

Accept
dialog


6.
Tangent to
prec. elem.
Direct. of rot.
R 10 abs X 0 abs

Dialog
selection

Accept
dialog



Outside contour

13
Examples 01/2008
13.2 Contour milling

13
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
13-438 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008

Press the softkey.
5. Ream outside contour
Press the
Contour
milling

Remove
softkeys.
Enter parameters:
T Milling tool_18
F 0.200 mm/tooth
V 200 m/min
Position Face
Machining

Z0 0 abs
Z1 5 inc
DXY 50%
DZ 2
UXY 0 mm
UZ 0
Starting point Auto
Insertion Center
FZ 0.100 mm/tooth
Retraction mode To retraction plane

Press the softkey.
6. Input inside contour
Press the
Contour
milling

New
contour
softkeys.
Input contour name (here: Contour_3)

Press the softkey.
Determine the starting point of the contour:
Machining plane Face
X 0 abs
Y 46 abs

Press the softkey.
Enter the following contour elements and confirm each one by
pressing the softkey:

1. Direct. of rot.
R 46 abs X 0 abs Y -46 abs
13
01/2008 Examples
13.2 Contour milling

13
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 13-439

2.
Tangent to
prec. elem.
Direct. of rot.
R 6 abs X 0 abs

Dialog
selection

Accept
dialog


3.
Tangent to
prec. elem.
Direct. of rot.
R 14 abs X 0 abs

Dialog
selection

Accept
dialog


4.
Tangent to
prec. elem.
Direct. of rot.
R 6 abs X 0 abs

Dialog
selection

Accept
dialog


5.
Tangent to
prec. elem.
Direct. of rot.
R 14 abs X 0 abs

Dialog
selection

Accept
dialog


6.
Tangent to
prec. elem.
Direct. of rot.
R 6 abs X 0 abs

Dialog
selection

Accept
dialog

13
Examples 01/2008
13.2 Contour milling

13
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
13-440 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008


Inside contour


Press the softkey.
7. Ream inside contour
Press the
Contour
milling

Remove
softkeys.
Enter parameters:
T Milling tool_5
F 0.200 mm/tooth
V 250 m/min
Position Face
Machining

Z0 0 abs
Z1 3 inc
DXY 100%
DZ 2
UXY 0 mm
UZ 0
Starting point Auto
Insertion Center
FZ 0.100 mm/tooth
Retraction mode To retraction plane

Press the softkey.
13
01/2008 Examples
13.2 Contour milling

13
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 13-441
Result
Programming graphics



Process plan





13
Examples 01/2008
13.2 Contour milling

13
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
13-442 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
Notes


A

01/2008 Appendix

A
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 A-443
Appendix


A Abbreviations ..........................................................................................................A-444
B Index ........................................................................................................................ I-447




A

Appendix 01/2008
A Abbreviations

A
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
A-444 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
A Abbreviations

ABS Absolute dimensions
CNC Computerized Numerical Control
COM Communication:
Component of NC control that performs and coordinates
communication.
D Cutting edge
DIN Deutsche Industrie Norm (German Industry Standard)
DRF Differential Resolver Function:
The function in conjunction with an electronic handwheel generates an
incremental work offset in automatic mode.
DRY Dry Run: Dry run feedrate
F Feedrate
GUD Global User Data
INC Increment
INC Incremental dimensions
INI Initializing Data
LEDs Light-Emitting Diode
M01 M function: Programmed stop
MCS Machine Coordinate System
MD Machine data
MDA Manual Data Input
MPF Main Program File
NC Numerical Control:
The NC control comprises the components NCK, PLC, PCU and
COM.
A

01/2008 Appendix
A Abbreviations

A
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 A-445
NCK Numerical Control Kernel:
A component of the NC control that processes the programs and
essentially coordinates the movement processes for the tool machine.
OP Operator Panel
PC Personal Computer
PCU Personal Computer Unit:
Component of NC control allowing communication between operator
and machine.
PLC Programmable Logic Control:
Component of NC control for processing machine tool control logic
PRT Program test
REF Approaching a reference point
REPOS Reposition
ROV Rapid override
S Spindle speed
SBL Single Block
SI Safety Integrated
SKP SKiP: Skip block
SPF Sub Program File
SW Software
T Tool
TMZ Tool Magazine Zero
V Cutting rate
WCS Workpiece coordinate system
WO Work offset
WPD Workpiece Directory

A

Appendix 01/2008
A Abbreviations

A
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
A-446 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008


Notes






I

01/2008 Appendix
Index

I
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 I-447
B Index

3
3D probe, 2-59
3-window view, 3-117
A
Abort program, 3-92
ABS, 4-128
Absolute dimensions, 4-128
Accepting parameters, 1-41
Access authorization, 1-28
Activate, 7-351
Additional command, 5-210, 5-212, 5-276
Adjustment, 4-133
Alarms, 12-416
Alignment angle, 8-354, 8-356
Angular offset, 5-203
Annular slot, 5-250
Append contour element, 5-216, 5-282
Approach, 4-126
Approach cycle, 5-326
Approach mode, 5-285
Approach strategy, 5-285
Arithmetic variables, 7-352
Automatic mode, 2-50
Auxiliary function, 3-106
Axes
Positioning, 2-81
Repositioning, 3-95
Traversing, 2-79
Axis key, 1-26
B
B axis, 8-354
Approach/retraction, 8-358
Measuring a tool, 8-361
Milling, 8-356
Position pattern, 8-360
Swiveling, 8-357
Tool selection in manual mode, 8-362
Basic block display, 3-94
Blank, 4-136
Blank shape
Changing, 3-112
Block search, 3-96
Box, 5-182
Broken-line graphics, 1-37
Button, 2-59
C
C1, 0-7
C3, 0-7
Calculation variants, 3-96
Cancelling machining, 3-92
Centering, 5-167, 5-289
Change parameter, 1-41
Changing dialog selection, 5-217, 5-283
Changing program settings, 5-322
Channel operational messages, 1-30
Channel status, 1-30
Chipbreaking, 5-164, 5-166, 5-169, 5-171
Circle
Known center point, 5-156
Known radius, 5-157
Polar, 5-162
Circular pocket, 5-236
Circular spigot, 5-244
Circumferential slot, 5-250
Clamping a spindle
Contour milling, 5-270
Drilling, 5-163
Milling, 5-231
Close contour, 5-214, 5-278
CNC ISO user interface, 1-42
Collet dimensions, 2-52
Complete, 5-316
Complete machining, 4-143
Concatenation, 4-122
Contour, 0-7
Changing, 5-216, 5-282
Copying, 4-146
Creating, 5-210, 5-273
Exact machining, 5-212
Renaming, 4-147
Representation, 5-208, 5-271
Rounding, 5-220
Start point, 5-210
Contour beginning, 5-210, 5-273
Contour calculator, 5-206, 5-268
Contour element
Creating, 5-211, 5-275
Contour end
Transition element, 5-212
Contour milling, 5-268

I

Appendix 01/2008
Index

I
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
I-448 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
Contour pocket
Centering, 5-289
Chamfering, 5-302
Finishing, 5-298
Milling, 5-293
Predrilling, 5-289
Residual material, 5-296
Roughing, 5-293
Contour spigot, 5-270
Chamfering, 5-311
Finishing, 5-308
Milling, 5-303
Residual material, 5-306
Roughing, 5-303
Contour transition element, 5-211, 5-276
Contour
Island, 5-268
Pocket, 5-268
Coolant, 2-63
Coordinate system, 1-21
Coordinate transformation, 2-71
Defining, 5-324
Count, 10-384
Counterspindle, 4-142
Counterspindle
Angular offset, 5-319
Machining, 5-316
Park position, 5-319
Settings, 2-52
Cut segmentation, 5-220
Cutting depth, 5-219
Cutting edge, 4-141
Cutting edge position
Changing, 2-60
Cutting rate, 4-142
Cycle, 0-7
Cycle approach, 4-126
Cycle support, 7-344
D
D, 4-141
Deep hole drilling, 5-169
Delete contour element, 5-218, 5-284
Deleting machining lines, 3-118
Dialog line, 1-29
Directory
Copying, 11-396, 11-410
Creating, 11-394, 11-408
Deleting, 11-397, 11-412
Moving, 11-411
Opening, 11-390, 11-403
Renaming, 11-397, 11-411
Selecting, 11-390
Disable magazine location, 10-386
DP, 2-60
Drawer, 5-204
DRF offset, 3-102
Drill, 2-58
Drilling, 5-167
Centered, 5-164
Deep, 5-169
Manual Machine, 6-340
DRY run feedrate, 3-110
Duplo number, 10-377
E
EMERGENCY OFF, 1-25
Enable magazine location, 10-386
End, 7-351
End face, 4-125
End of contour, 5-210, 5-273
End of program, 4-123, 4-136, 4-148
Engraving, 5-261
Entering parameters, 1-40
Equidistant, 2-55
External thread, 5-173
F
F, 4-142
Face, 4-125
Face milling, 5-303
Face view, 3-115
Face Y, 4-125
Feed interruption, 5-220
Feedrate, 4-142
Feedrate override, 1-27
Feedrate status, 1-30
Finding an empty location, 10-380, 10-382
Finishing, 4-143
Finishing tool, 2-57
Front, 5-316
Front C, 4-125
Front edge, 2-52
Full circle, 5-184
Function group, 4-140

I

01/2008 Appendix
Index

I
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 I-449
G
G code
Copying, 7-350
Cutting, 7-350
Finding, 7-350
Into sequence program, 5-328
Pasting, 7-350
Selecting, 7-349
Skipping, 3-102
G code block, 5-329
Renumber, 7-351
G code editor, 7-349
G code program
Executing, 7-347, 11-393, 11-406
G function, 3-106
Gearing step, 2-78
Grinding allowance, 5-215, 5-216
Gripping, 5-316
Grooving, 5-224
Residual material, 5-226
H
H function, 3-106
Hard disk, 11-406
Help screen, 1-39
I
Idle cuts
Manual Machine, 6-340
INC, 4-129
Inch, 2-50
Inclined axis, 4-124
Increment, 2-80
Incremental dimension, 4-129
Incremental dimensions, 4-129
Input field, 1-40
Insert a contour element, 5-217, 5-283
Insert mode, 1-41
Inside contour, 5-276
Internal thread, 5-173
K
Key-operated switch, 1-28
Keys
Operation, 1-32
L
Line, 5-178
Longitudinal slot, 5-247
Lowercase letters, 5-263
M
M function, 2-84, 3-106
M01, 3-101
Machine control panels, 1-25
Machine coordinate system, 2-51
Machine run times, 2-87
Machine zero, 1-21
Machining, 4-143
Simulating, 3-107
Simultaneous recording, 3-107
Machining direction, 5-322
Machining feedrate, 4-142
Machining lines, 3-108
Machining method, 4-143
Machining plane, 4-124
Magazine
Positioning, 10-383
Magazine list, 10-373
Magnifying glass, 2-69, 3-118
Main program, 5-313
Main spindle, 4-142
Settings, 2-52
Manual Data Input, 2-86
Manual Machine
Drilling, 6-340
Milling, 6-341
Simulation, 6-342
Traversing movements, 6-336
Turning, 6-340
Zero offsets, 6-335
Manual mode, 2-49, 2-77
M function, 2-84
Positioning axes, 2-81
Spindle, 2-78
Stock removal, 2-81
Tool, 2-77
Traversing axes, 2-79
Unit of measurement, 2-85
Work offset, 2-84
Marker, 5-315
Matrix, 5-179
MCS, 2-51
MDA, 2-49, 2-86
Measuring
Tool, 2-63, 2-65
Workpiece zero, 2-70
Measuring cycle support, 7-344
I

Appendix 01/2008
Index

I
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
I-450 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
Messages, 12-416
Millimeters, 2-50
Milling
Manual Machine, 6-341
Milling tool, 2-58
Mirror writing, 5-262
Mirroring, 5-325
Modifying contour element, 5-217, 5-282
Multifix tool holder
Manual Machine, 10-371
Multiple edge, 5-259
N
Network drive, 11-393, 11-406
New contour
Milling, 5-273
Turning, 5-210
New tool, 2-56, 10-374
Number of workpieces, 4-148
O
Offset, 5-324
Online help, 7-344
Operation, 1-32
Operator panel OP 010, 1-22
Origin, 3-118
Outside contour, 5-276
P
Parameter
Calculating, 1-41
Parameterization screen form, 1-38
Parameters
Deleting, 1-41
Parting, 5-204
Password, 0-4, 1-28
Path milling, 5-284
Peripheral, 4-125
Peripheral surface, 4-125
Peripheral surface C, 4-125
Peripheral Y, 4-126
Pitch circle, 5-186
Plunge cutting, 5-254
Plunge-turning, 5-227
Residual material, 5-229
Plunging, 5-254
Pocket
Circular, 5-236
Rectangular, 5-232
Pole, 4-130, 5-159
Position
Freely programmable, 5-176
Repeating, 5-189
Position pattern
Box, 5-182
Full circle, 5-184
Line, 5-178
Matrix, 5-179
Pitch circle, 5-186
Positioning block, 4-123
POWER ON, 12-417
Predrilling, 5-289
Pre-warning limit, 10-384
Probe
Calibrating, 2-67
Process plan, 1-37
Processing time, 3-108
Program, 0-6
Copying, 11-396, 11-410
Correcting, 3-105
Creating, 4-136, 11-394, 11-408
Deleting, 11-397, 11-412
Executing, 11-392, 11-404
from another machine, 11-392, 11-404
Load, 11-405
Moving, 11-411
Opening, 11-391, 11-403
Overstoring, 3-103
Renaming, 11-397, 11-411
Running in, 3-93
Select, 3-90
Selecting several, 11-395, 11-409
Starting, 3-92
Testing, 3-104
Unload, 11-405
Program block, 4-122
Chained, 4-122
Changing, 4-144
Copying, 4-146
Creating, 4-140
Cutting, 4-146
Displaying, 3-94
Number, 4-147
Pasting, 4-146
Repeating, 5-315
Searching for, 4-147
Selecting, 4-146
I

01/2008 Appendix
Index

I
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 I-451
Program control, 1-30
Test run feed rate, 3-119
Program editor, 4-145
Program header, 4-122, 4-136
Program management
PCU 50.3, 11-401
ShopTurn on NCU (HMI Embedded, 11-389
Program manager, 11-389, 11-401
Program structure, 4-122
Programmed stop, 3-101
Programming
with two tool holders, 9-364
Programming graphics, 1-37
Protection levels, 1-28
Pulling, 5-316
Q
Quantity, 4-148
R
R variables, 7-352
Radius compensation, 4-141
Rapid traverse override, 1-27
Reading in tool data, 11-398, 11-412
Reading in zero point data, 11-398, 11-412
Reaming, 5-167
Rear, 5-316
Recess, 5-193
Recessing tool, 2-58
Recompile, 7-345, 7-346
Rectangular pocket, 5-232
Rectangular spigot, 5-240
Reference point, 2-46
Remote Diagnostics, 1-42
Repeating, 5-315
Replacement tool, 10-377
Repos, 3-95
Repositioning, 3-95
Reset, 1-25
Residual material
Contour pocket, 5-296
Contour spigot, 5-306
Grooving, 5-226
Plunge-turning, 5-229
Stock removal, 5-222
Retract, 4-126
Retract mode, 5-285
Retract strategy, 5-285
Retraction, 4-137, 5-322
Retraction cycle, 5-326
Reworking threads
Manual Machine, 6-341
Rotary drill, 2-56, 2-59, 10-374
Rotation, 5-324
Rotation C, 5-325
Roughing, 4-143
Roughing tool, 2-57
S
S, 4-142
S1, 0-7, 1-29
S2, 0-7, 1-29
S3, 0-7, 1-29
Safety distance, 4-139
Safety Integrated, 2-48
Saving tool data, 11-398, 11-412
Saving zero point data, 11-398, 11-412
Scale, 2-76
Scaling, 5-325
Screw tap, 2-59
Search
Block, 3-98
Text, 3-100
Secondary mode, 1-30
Selecting a dialog, 5-212, 5-277
Selecting parameters, 1-40
Selecting the unit, 1-41
Sequence program, 4-134
Set machining area limits, 5-220
Settings
Automatic mode, 3-119
Changing, 5-322
Manual mode, 2-84
ShopTurn Open, 1-44
Side view, 3-114
Simulation, 3-109, 7-347
Manual Machine, 6-342
Simultaneous recording
During machining, 3-111
Prior to machining, 3-110
Single Block, 3-93
Skip, 3-102
Slot
Circumferential, 5-250
Longitudinal, 5-247
Slot side compensation, 5-286

I

Appendix 01/2008
Index

I
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
I-452 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008
Softkey
Abort, 1-35
Accept, 1-35
Back, 1-35
CNC ISO, 1-42
OK, 1-35
Overview, 4-134
Softkeys
Operation, 1-32
Special axis, 0-7
Special characters, 5-263
Speed limits, 4-139
Spigot
Circular, 5-244
Rectangular, 5-240
Spindle override, 1-27
Spindle speed, 4-142
Spindle status, 1-30
Stock removal, 5-164, 5-166, 5-169, 5-171, 5-190,
5-218
Manual mode, 2-81
Residual material, 5-222
Stop, 2-59
Stop edge, 2-52
Straight
Manual Machine, 6-338
Polar, 5-160
Straight line, 5-154
Switching off, 2-46
Switching on, 2-46
Synchronization point, 5-203
T
T, 4-141
Tailstock, 4-138
Tangent, 5-212, 5-277
Taper
Manual Machine, 6-337
Tapping, 5-171
Teach tool change point, 4-140
Teaching, 5-330
Contour object, 5-332
Cycle, 5-330
Position pattern, 5-331
Teaching a contour object, 5-332
Teaching a cycle, 5-330
Teaching a position pattern, 5-331
Technology block, 4-123
TEMP, 11-397, 11-412
Thread
Centered, 5-166
Cutting, 5-199
Milling, 5-173
Multiple, 5-202
Re-machining, 5-203
Thread undercut, 5-197
Threading tool, 2-58
Tolerance class, 4-133
Tolerance quality, 4-133
Tool, 4-141
Changing a name, 10-375
Creating, 2-56, 10-374
Delete, 10-378
Loading, 10-379
Measuring, 2-63, 2-65
Multiple cutting edges, 10-376
Relocating, 10-381
Sorting, 10-378
Unloading, 10-380
Tool alignment, 8-356
Tool change point, 4-138
Tool holder
Two, 9-364
Tool length compensation, 2-54
Tool life, 10-384
Tool list, 2-60, 10-368
Tool magazine, 10-373
Tool monitoring, 10-384
Tool name, 2-57
Tool nose radius compensation, 2-55
Tool offset data, 2-54, 10-369
Tool radius compensation, 2-55
Tool spindle, 4-142
Tool type, 2-60
Tool wear data, 10-383
Tool wear list, 10-372
Tool-specific specifications, 10-370
Total offset, 2-71
Trochoidal milling, 5-253
Turning, 4-125
Manual Machine, 6-340
Turning machines
with B axis, 8-354
Turning out a collet, 2-81

I

01/2008 Appendix
Index

I
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 I-453
Turning tool
with two tool holders, 9-364
U
Undercut
Form E, 5-196
Form F, 5-196
Thread, 5-197
Unit of measurement, 2-50, 4-136
USB drive, 11-393, 11-406
User agreement, 2-48
User data, 12-417
User interface, 1-29
V
V, 4-142
Variables, 12-417
Version display, 12-419
Volume model, 3-116
Vortex milling, 5-253
W
WCS, 2-51
Wear, 10-384
Work offset list, 2-75
Workpiece coordinate system, 2-51
Workpiece counter
G code programs, 3-120
Workpiece zero, 1-21
Measuring, 2-70
Workpieces, Number of, 4-148
Z
Z3, 0-7
Zero offset, 2-71
Basic, 2-71
Coordinate transformation, 2-71
Defining, 2-74
Setting, 2-72
Total, 2-71
Zero offsets
Calling, 5-323
Manual Machine, 6-335
Zoom, 3-118




I

Appendix 01/2008
Index

I
© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
I-454 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008

Notes




To
SIEMENS AG
Suggestions


Corrections
A&D MC MS1
Postfach 3180
91050 ERLANGEN, GERMANY
Phone: +49 (0) 180 5050 – 222 [Hotline]
Fax: +49 (0) 9131 98 – 63315 [Documentation]
mailto:docu.motioncontrol@siemens.com
For Publication/Manual:

SINUMERIK 840D sl
ShopTurn

User Documentation
From

Name
Address of your Company/Dept.
Address:
Zip code City:
Phone: /
Fax: /
Operation/Programming

Order No.: 6FC5398-5AP10-2BA0
01/2008 Edition

Should you come across any printing errors when
reading this publication, please notify us on this sheet.
Suggestions for improvements are also welcome.




Suggestions and/or corrections










Overview
General Documentation
SlNUMERlK
Brochure
Document Overview SlNUMERlK 840D sl / 840Di sl
SlNUMERlK
840D sl
840Di sl
Catalog NC 61 *)
SlNAMlCS
S120
Catalog
D21.1 Converter chassis units *)
User Documentation
SlNUMERlK
840D sl
Operating Manual
ದ HMl sl Universal /
Turning / Milling *)
ದ HMl Embedded *)
ದ ShopMill
ದ ShopTurn
SlNUMERlK
840D sl
840D
840Di sl
840Di
Operating Manual
ದ HMl Advanced *)
ದ Operation (compact)
SlNUMERlK
840D sl
840D
840Di sl
840Di
Programming Manual
ದ Fundamentals *)
ದ Job planning *)
ದ Programming (compact)
ದ System Variable Lists
ದ lSO Turning/Milling
Manufacturer / Service Documentation
SlNUMERlK
840D sl
Manual
ದ NCU *)
ದ Machine
configuration
SlNUMERlK
840D sl
840Di sl
Manual
Operator Components
and Networking *)
SlNUMERlK
840D sl
Commissioning
Manual CNC
ದ NCK, PLC, Drive *)
ದ HMl sl *)
ದ HMl Embedded *)
ದ HMl Advanced *)
ದ ShopMill / ShopTurn
Manufacturer / Service Documentation
SlNUMERlK
840D sl
840D
840Di sl
840Di
Function Manual
ದ Basic Functions *)
ದ Extended Functions
ದ Special Functions
ದ Synchronous Actions
SlNUMERlK
840D sl
840D
840Di sl
840Di
Function Manual
ದ Tool Management
ದ lSO Dialects
ದ SinuCOM
SlNAMlCS
S120
Function Manual
Drive Functions
SlNUMERlK
840D sl
840D
840Di sl
840Di
Programming Manual
ದ Cycles
ದ Measuring Cycles
SlNUMERlK
840D sl
840Di sl
Diagnostics Manual *)
SlNUMERlK
840Di sl
ದ Commissioning
Manual
ದ ADl4
SlNUMERlK
840D sl
840Di sl
Parameter Manual *)
ದ Part 1
ದ Part 2
SlNUMERlK
840D sl
Function Manual
Safety lntegrated
SlNUMERlK
EMC Directives
Electronic Documentation
SlNUMERlK
SlNAMlCS
Motors
DOCONCD *)
DOCONWEB *) Recommended minimum scope of documentation

SINUMERIK® Documentation

Printing history Brief details of this edition and previous editions are listed below. The status of each version is indicated by the code in the "Remarks" column. Status code in the "Remarks" column: A .... B .... C .... New documentation. Unrevised reprint with new order number. Revised edition with new status.

Edition 03/2001 01/2002 06/2003 08/2005 11/2006 01/2008

Order No. 6FC5 298-6AD50-0BP0 6FC5 298-6AD50-0BP1 6FC5 298-6AD50-0BP2 6FC5 398-5AP10-0BA0 6FC5 398-5AP10-1BA0 6FC5 398-5AP10-2BA0

Comment A C C C C C

Registered trademarks

SIMATIC®, SIMATIC HMI®, SIMATIC NET®, SIROTEC®, SINUMERIK® and SIMODRIVE® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining designations found in this publication could be trademarks whose use by a third party for its own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.

Additional information is available on the Internet at: http://www.siemens.com/motioncontrol

Other functions not described in this documentation might be executable in the control. This does not, however, represent an obligation to supply such functions with a new control or when servicing. We have checked that the contents of this document correspond to the hardware and software described. Nevertheless, differences might exist and therefore we cannot guarantee that they are completely identical. The information contained in this document is, however, reviewed regularly and any necessary changes will be included in the next edition. Suggestions for improvement are welcome. Technical data subject to change.

© Siemens AG 2008 6FC5398-5AP10 - 2BA0 Siemens AG

0

01/2008

Preface

0

Preface
SINUMERIK® Documentation The SINUMERIK documentation is organized in 3 parts: • General documentation • User documentation • Manufacturer/service documentation An overview of publications, which is updated on a monthly basis and provides information about the language versions available, can be found on the Internet at: http://www.siemens.com/motioncontrol Select the menu items "Support" "Technical Documentation" "Publications Overview.” The Internet version of DOConCD (DOConWEB) is available at: http://www.automation.siemens.com/doconweb Information about training courses and FAQs (Frequently Asked Questions) can be found at the following website: http://www.siemens.com/motioncontrol under menu item "Support" Target group Benefits This documentation is geared toward the operator of single-slide lathes with SINUMERIK 840D sl. This document familiarizes you with the operating elements and commands. Based on the manual, you are capable of responding to problems and to take corrective action. This documentation only describes the functionality of the standard version of ShopTurn. Extensions or changes made by the machine manufacturer are documented by the machine manufacturer. Other functions not described in this documentation might be executable in the control. However, no claim can be made regarding the availability of these functions when the equipment is first supplied or in the event of servicing. Further, for the sake of simplicity, this documentation does not contain all detailed information about all types of the product and cannot cover every conceivable case of installation, operation or maintenance.

Standard version

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008

iii

0

Preface

01/2008

0

Technical Support

If you have any technical questions, please contact our hotline: Europe/Africa Phone: +49 (0) 180 5050-222 Fax: +49 (0) 180 5050-223 Internet: http://www.siemens.com/automation/support-request America Phone: +1 (0) 423 262 2522 Fax: +1 (0) 423 262 2200 E-mail: mailto:techsupport.sea@siemens.com

Asia/Pacific Phone: +86 (0) 1064 719 990 Fax: +86 (0) 1064 747 474 E-mail: mailto:adsupport.asia@siemens.com Technology hotline Phone: +49 (0) 2166 5506-115 The hotline is available on weekdays between 8:00 and 17:00

National telephone numbers for technical support are provided under the following Internet address: http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support Questions on the manual If you have any queries (suggestions, corrections) in relation to this documentation, please fax or e-mail us: Fax: +49 (0) 9131 98-63315 E-mail: mailto:docu.motioncontrol@siemens.com For the fax form, see the response sheet at the end of the document. http://www.siemens.com/sinumerik

SINUMERIK Internet address

iv

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008

0

01/2008

Preface

0

Safety information

This manual contains information that must be observed to ensure your personal safety and to prevent property damage. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring to property damage only, have no safety alert symbol. Depending on the hazard level, warnings are indicated in a descending order as follows: Danger indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. Warning indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. Caution indicates that slight personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. Caution without a safety alert symbol, indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. Notice indicates that an undesirable result or condition can occur if the corresponding information is not observed. In the event of a number of levels of danger prevailing simultaneously, the warning corresponding to the highest level of danger is always used. If a warning notice is used with the safety alert symbol to warn against injury, this same notice may also include a warning regarding property damage.

Qualified personnel

The associated device/system must only be set up and operated using this documentation. A device/system must only be commissioned and operated by qualified personnel. For the purpose of the safety information in this documentation, a "qualified person" is someone who is authorized to energize, ground, and tag equipment, systems, and circuits in accordance with established safety procedures.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008

v

0

Preface

01/2008

0

Correct usage

Please note the following: Warning The equipment may only be used for single purpose applications explicitly described in the catalog and in the technical description and it may only be used along with third-party devices and components approved by Siemens. Correct, reliable operation of the product required proper transport, storage, positioning and assembly, as well as careful operation and maintenance.

Structure of the documentation

The following information blocks, marked by pictograms, are used in this documentation: Orientation Background information Operating sequence Explanation of the parameters Additional notes Software option The function described is a software option, i.e. the function can be executed on the control only if you have purchased and enabled the appropriate option.

Machine manufacturer

The following reference appears wherever particular features or functions might have been changed or supplemented by the machine manufacturer: Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

References

Whenever specific information can be found in other literature, this is indicated as follows: References:

Terminology

The meanings of some basic terms are given below in this documentation. Program A program is a sequence of instructions to the CNC which combine to produce a specific workpiece on the machine.

vi

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008

0

01/2008

Preface

0

Contour The term contour refers generally to the outline of a workpiece. More specifically, it refers to the section of the program that defines the outline of a workpiece comprising individual elements. Cycle A cycle, such as the tapping cycle, is a subroutine specified by ShopTurn for carrying out a recurring machining process. (A cycle is sometimes also referred to as a function.) Spindles/axes The various spindles/axes are designated in this documentation as follows: S1: Main spindle S2: Tool spindle S3: Counter spindle C1: C-axis main spindle C3: C-axis counter spindle Z3: Special axis (e.g. axis to move the counter spindle) Other designations may have been assigned by the machine manufacturer. Unit of measurement Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions. Metric units are used for all parameters in this document. The equivalent imperial units are shown in the table below. Metric mm mm/tooth mm/min mm/rev m/min Inch in in/tooth in/min in/rev ft/min

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008

vii

0
Notes

Preface

01/2008

0

viii

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008

0

01/2008

Contents

0

Contents Introduction
1.1 1.1.1 1.2 1.2.1 1.2.2 1.2.3 1.2.4 1.2.5 1.3 1.3.1 1.3.2 1.3.3 1.3.4 1.3.5 1.3.6

1-17

ShopTurn .................................................................................................................. 1-18 Work sequence ......................................................................................................... 1-19 Workstation ............................................................................................................... 1-20 Coordinate system .................................................................................................... 1-21 Operator panels ........................................................................................................ 1-22 Operator panel keys.................................................................................................. 1-23 Machine control panels ............................................................................................. 1-25 Machine control panel elements ............................................................................... 1-25 User interface............................................................................................................ 1-29 Overview ................................................................................................................... 1-29 Operation via softkeys and keys............................................................................... 1-32 Program views .......................................................................................................... 1-36 Entering parameters ................................................................................................. 1-40 CNC ISO user interface ............................................................................................ 1-42 ShopTurn Open (PCU 50.3) ..................................................................................... 1-44

Setting up the machine
2.1 2.2 2.2.1 2.3 2.4 2.4.1 2.4.2 2.4.3 2.5 2.5.1 2.5.2 2.5.3 2.5.4 2.5.5 2.5.6 2.6 2.7 2.7.1 2.7.2 2.7.3 2.8 2.8.1

2-45

Switching on and off.................................................................................................. 2-46 Approaching a reference point.................................................................................. 2-46 User agreement with Safety Integrated .................................................................... 2-48 Modes ....................................................................................................................... 2-49 Settings for the machine ........................................................................................... 2-50 Switching between units of measurement (millimeters/inches)................................ 2-50 Switching between coordinate systems (MKS/WKS) ............................................... 2-51 Spindles .................................................................................................................... 2-52 Tools ......................................................................................................................... 2-54 Creating a new tool ................................................................................................... 2-56 Tool list...................................................................................................................... 2-57 Measuring a tool manually ........................................................................................ 2-63 Measuring a tool with a probe................................................................................... 2-65 Calibrating the probe................................................................................................. 2-67 Measuring a tool with a magnifying glass ................................................................. 2-69 Measuring the workpiece zero.................................................................................. 2-70 Zero offsets ............................................................................................................... 2-71 Setting the zero offset ............................................................................................... 2-72 Defining zero offsets ................................................................................................. 2-74 Zero offset list ........................................................................................................... 2-75 Manual mode ............................................................................................................ 2-77 Selecting a tool and spindle ...................................................................................... 2-77

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008

ix

.................2........................2.......................................2 4..................8.............6 4......2 4................................................................................................................................................................................................................4 3.....2.................. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) ........3 3.9 3.....4-124 Machining cycle approach and retraction .......3-94 Repositioning axes........................................................................................4-134 Creating a new program...............3-107 Simulating prior to machining the workpiece .................5 2....................7 3..............................................3-112 Different workpiece views .................................................................3 4......................3-117 Settings for automatic mode .....11..............................................3..............................................................................10 Traversing axes...............................3 4........12 3.........................4-131 Adjustments................2-79 Positioning axes ..........................................................2.......................2...........................4 2..................................................2 4-121 Program structure ...........................3-106 Simulating machining .8.....2-84 MDA .4-134 Overview .........................4-136 x © Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved................11..............................................8 3....................................5 4.......6 3..4-122 Fundamentals....................................3-109 Simultaneous recording prior to machining the workpiece .........1 4.........................................................3-101 Overstoring..3-103 Testing a program ......4-128 Polar coordinates .....3 3............................................................2 3.3-119 Defining a test run feedrate.......................................................................12..................................................3-93 Displaying the current program block ..................................................2-81 Simple stock removal of workpiece...........3-110 Simultaneous recording during workpiece machining .................3-111 Changing a blank shape for a G code program...............................5 3.......................................11........................................3 2................3-90 Running in a program......12...........................................2 2..............................................................................................................4-126 Absolute and incremental dimensions ........................................................................................................2......................2 3-89 Starting/stopping machining................................11...............................................................11 3..............1 4............................................3-105 Displaying G and auxiliary functions .3-96 Controlling the program sequence............................................................2-87 Machining the workpiece 3...........................................3-120 Creating a ShopTurn program 4......................................................................................3-104 Correcting a program ......................................................................1 3..........10 3...............6 3......................................................0 Contents 01/2008 0 2.........................01/2008 ......................................................................................4-130 Pocket calculator .................................................................................................................................1 3................1 4.1 3.......................................11...........8....................................................................4 4............3-95 Starting execution at a specific program point ........4 3..........................................................................................................................4-133 Sequence program........2-81 Settings for manual mode ........................11...........................2-86 Run times ................3........................................................3-119 Parameterizing the workpiece counter..............................................................3-113 Changing the cutout ..............................9 2....4-124 Machining planes ....................5 3.........................8.............................2 3..........

................... 5-190 Roughing cycles...................12 5......................................................................................................................................... 5-152 Straight line ...................................................................................................................................................................2...........................2............................................................................. 5-186 Including and skipping positions .........................................................6 5....4............................................. 5-203 Parting.................................................................... 5-216 Stock removal .......3....2 5...1.......................................1......................................................15 5..2..... 5-179 Box position pattern ............ 5-196 Thread undercuts..................................................................4 4....................2 5........................2 5..2 5......... 5-204 Contour turning ......................................................................................................3......................................2.......10 5...............................................................................................................................14 5.............................................................. 5-206 Representation of the contour ... 5-208 Creating a new contour............................................ 5-197 Thread cutting .2....................5 4.......................3 5................4 5....................................... 5-184 Pitch circle position pattern ........................... 5-156 Circle with known radius ............................................................................1 5..3 5............................... 5-176 Line position pattern...........................4 5................................4............. 5-151 Selecting a tool and machining plane .............................. 5-175 Freely programmable positions ................................ 5-210 Creating contour elements.........2..................5 5.......................................................... 5-211 Changing a contour................................................2....................... 5-164 Thread centered......................6 Creating program blocks............ 4-144 Program editor ............. 5-167 Deep hole drilling ..........2.........3 5......1.................................................................................................................................................4 5.......3.4 5.................1 5............................................................................................................3 5.........................3............. 5-189 Turning ........................3................6 5....................3...........7 5......................................................................................................3................2............................5 5..................................4 5......................................................................3 4..........1.............................. 5-218 Stock removal of residual material........................... 4-145 Specifying a quantity.................................. 5-178 Matrix position pattern...........................2........ 4-140 Changing program blocks.........2...................................1 5..01/2008 xi .................................... 5-190 Recessing cycles ...............................................0 01/2008 Contents 0 4..........................7 5-149 Straight or circular path movements .......................... 5-157 Polar coordinates ...... 5-160 Circle polar ......... 5-173 Positioning and position patterns..........................................................................6 5.................................................................... 5-224 © Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved..... 5-162 Drilling .. 5-222 Grooving............. 5-193 Undercut form E and F....... 4-148 ShopTurn functions 5....... 5-169 Tapping ....1 5.....................................................................2.......................7 5........... 5-188 Repeating positions ...... 5-154 Circle with known center point ...................................................................................................3 5............................................................................................................................................... 5-171 Thread milling ...........................1 5.....2..........................................................................8 5...........................................11 5.........3..4.............1.......................3..4...................1.......................................9 5.. 5-163 Centered drilling.............................................................5 5.......................................................................4.....................3.1...................................................................................2..........................4..................4....................................... 5-159 Straight polar............... 5-199 Thread re-machining.........................3..........................5 5........ SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) ...................................................................................................................................................6 5.........................................................2......................................... 5-182 Full circle position pattern ......13 5..............2 5...................... 5-166 Drilling and reaming .....7 5........

............................................................................10 5........5-328 Teaching...............................................7 5.......................................5-275 Changing a contour...5-250 Open slot ............................................5-227 Plunge-turning residual material ....................5 5.......................................5........................................6...........................11 5...............................6 5......5-259 Engraving ............................................................................5.......................................1 5..................................................................................................................................5-302 Milling a contour spigot (roughing)....6.........6...............5..............................................................12 5....................4 5........5-296 Finishing the contour pocket .....5-231 Rectangular pocket ................................................................................................................5-311 Calling a subroutine ............5-282 Path milling.............................................8 5...........................4..................................................5-330 Teaching a cycle ......................................................................01/2008 ...................5-244 Longitudinal slot .................7 5..........................................................................................................................................5-240 Circular spigot .........5-303 Removing residual material from a contour spigot ......................................................5-313 Repeating program blocks ..5-315 Machining with the counterspindle..............................................................................................................2 5......................7 5...........13 5...................................................................................................................................................................3 Grooving residual material ...........................................................................................6.......5..................................................................................5-259 Multiple edge .........3 5...............................................................................5-284 Predrilling a contour pocket................................................5-261 Contour milling ................................10 5....................................8 5...............6.5-289 Milling a contour pocket (roughing).........................................5-331 Teaching a contour object...3 5....5-330 Teaching a position pattern..................................6.......................................................5..............................................14 5.................................................................................................6......................................................14 5............5-332 xii © Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved..9 5.10 5..........5-326 Inserting G code into the sequence program.........................9 5....5-247 Circumferential slot ...................5..................15...................................5-324 Programming the approach/retraction cycle ................................................................................................5 5........2 5.......6 5....................................................13 5.................6...6................6..........................................................2 5..............8 5....................8 5................................6...............6.5-308 Chamfering a contour spigot ..........................5-268 Representation of the contour..........................................................5-226 Plunge-turning ...................................................................................................................................5-306 Finishing a contour spigot .................................... SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) .............................................................................5....................................5-293 Removing residual material from a contour pocket ......4 5...5-229 Milling ......6........4................................5-236 Rectangular spigot ............5-298 Chamfering a contour pocket .................1 5........................................................................0 Contents 01/2008 0 5.........5-253 Positions....5-232 Circular pocket .......5-316 Changing program settings .....................11 5...................6 5.......................................................1 5......................5 5.15 5.....5...10 5...................15............9 5........5-323 Defining coordinate transformations ........................6............9 5..........................5-271 Creating a new contour ..........................................5-273 Creating contour elements ........15............................5....5.......................................12 5.................4.....................5-322 Calling zero offsets......................

............................................4 6................................... 8-356 Swiveling ...............................................................1 10.............................................................................. 6-340 Turning with Manual Machine..... 7-352 Working with a B axis 8...................................2 6.......................................2 10............................2 7.............................1 9.................. 6-342 G code program 7.................................................................................................................... 10-377 © Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.................4............................................... 8-360 Measuring a tool .............................................6 8-353 Turning machines with a B axis .................................................................................................................. 10-374 Creating multiple cutting edges for each tool ........................ SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) ............................................................................ 8-362 Working with two tool holders 9...................................................3..... 6-340 Milling with Manual Machine ...3 6................................ 7-347 G code editor ........................1 6........................ 6-334 Zero offsets ................................................................3 6.......................4..1 8.5 Manual Machine......1 6...................................................................................................................................... 8-356 Milling with a B axis............................................................................... 6-336 Taper turning............................................2......... 7-344 Executing a G code program ................................................... 8-354 Tool alignment for turning .................................................2 8.................................................3...............3 9-363 Turning tools with two tool holders ... 9-365 Tool management 10.........2 9.................................................................................. 10-368 Entering tools in the tool list ..............2.01/2008 xiii .......3 7............................................2 6....1 6.................... 6-335 Traversing axes ...................................3 10-367 Tool list..........................................................................................2 8... 8-361 Tool selection for manual mode............................. 9-364 Measuring a tool ......................................................................................... tool wear list and tool magazine ................................3..................................................................................................................................................... 10-376 Creating a replacement tool................3 6....................................2................................... 7-349 Arithmetic variables..............................................3..........3 8....4 7-343 Creating a G code program ........................................................................................................ 6-337 Straight turning.............0 01/2008 Contents 0 6-333 Working with manual machine 6..... 6-341 Simulation ... 6-338 More complex workpiece machining in manual mode................... 8-358 Position pattern ............................................................. 6-339 Drilling with Manual Machine ....... 8-357 Approach/retraction.....1 10....................2 6..............................................................4 8...1 7........3...1 8................................. 10-374 Creating a new tool ..............2 10......................................................................................... 9-364 Programming with two tool holders.........................................................5 8......................4.. 6-335 Simple workpiece machining in manual mode .....

..... SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) ..2........4 12-415 Messages .......................................................2 11.........................................................................................................1 11...............11-389 Opening a program ...............................................1 11..................11-397 Saving/reading in tool/zero point data...........5 11...........5 11.......................................3 10..................................................................................................................................7 10..............................3.........................1 11.............10 Sorting tools ..............................................................................3 11..................................4 11.......11-404 Loading/unloading a program .......7 11....1 13.......................11-412 Messages..6 11............................10-383 Entering tool wear data ....................................4 11.........................................................9 10...................11-394 Selecting several programs............................2............11-395 Copying/renaming a directory/program.........................6 10...........................10-379 Relocating a tool..............................12-416 Alarms ........................................................................................................11-398 Managing programs with PCU 50...............................11-393 Creating a new directory/program.3 11............11-409 Copying/renaming/moving a directory/program .5 10....12-416 User data................................11-403 Executing a program .........13-422 Contour milling .....................2...........................................................8 10.3.2 12...................3.....................7 11..............................................01/2008 ..................2 11..............................................................................................10-386 Program management 11..............................................2 13-421 Standard machinings ...........................11-396 Deleting a directory/program..........12-419 Examples 13.......................3...........3..........................................................................................3 11..................................3...........3 12.................... alarms...............................2 11............6 11...........12-417 Version display ...2...........11-408 Selecting several programs.............................................3.....3 (HMI Advanced).......................................................8 11.......10-383 Activating tool monitoring ............13-434 xiv © Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved......................3.............11-388 Managing programs with ShopTurn on NCU (HMI Embedded sl)....................3.....11-410 Deleting a directory/program.........................11-391 Executing a program .................8 11...................11-412 Saving/reading in tool/zero point data..................................1 12...............................................10-378 Loading/unloading a tool into/out of the magazine ............................2................................................................................................................................2.........................................................................................................................................10-378 Deleting tools from the tool list ...................10-381 Positioning a magazine .............................9 11-387 Managing programs with ShopTurn.......2......................11-401 Opening a program ....................................4 10..................................................10-384 Managing magazine locations ....0 Contents 01/2008 0 10.....11-406 Creating a new directory/program..11-405 Executing a G code program from a hard disk or floppy disk/network drive .........................................................................................11-392 Executing a G code program from USB/network drive ..................................................... user data 12.................................2...............

..................................... I-447 © Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.......................................................................A-444 Index ....................01/2008 xv ...........................0 01/2008 Contents 0 Appendix A B A-443 Abbreviations ...................... SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) ....................................................

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) .01/2008 .0 Contents 01/2008 0 xvi © Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

..2................................................................. 1-36 Entering parameters .......3 1..............................................3 1........................1 01/2008 Introduction 1 Introduction 1..................... 1-19 Workstation ................... 1-29 Operation via softkeys and keys ..................................2............................4 1..............................................................................................................................5 1.............................................................................................................3 1......... 1-18 Work sequence .... 1-21 Operator panels ..............................3......2....................2......2 1......3..........................................................3.1.....2........................................01/2008 1-17 ..................3........1 1...................................................................................1 1.................................................................................................................................... 1-42 ShopTurn Open (PCU 50...........................5 1............................................ 1-23 Machine control panels ...............................2 1..4 1..........................1 1.....................................3................. 1-20 Coordinate system .......................................................2 1.................. 1-25 Machine control panel elements .................................................. 1-29 Overview ......................................................6 ShopTurn ...... 1-32 Program views ........ SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) ........ 1-22 Operator panel keys............................................1 1....................................................3............ 1-25 User interface.......................3) .... 1-40 CNC ISO user interface ................................................................................... 1-44 © Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.........

The software can also manage the data of tools that are not in the revolver. Programs can be created simply by copying and modifying similar programs. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) . since it is graphically supported and doesn't require knowledge of G-code. Tool management Program management Remote diagnostics 1-18 © Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved. You can switch from ShopTurn to the CNC-ISO operator interface. You can display the program execution in 3-D on the screen. ShopTurn saves your tool data.1 1. There.1 ShopTurn 1 ShopTurn ShopTurn is an operating and programming software program for turning machines that makes it easy for you to operate the machine and to program workpieces.1 Introduction 01/2008 1.01/2008 . These are some of the features the software provides: Setting up the machine Executing a program Special measurement cycles make it easier to measure the tools and the workpiece. A stock removal cycle with residual material detection saves extra machining processes. Creating a program Programming the workpiece with ShopTurn is effortless. there is no need to start again from the beginning. To execute a sequence program. The powerful contour computer allows any contour to be input. The execution of sequence programs is a software option. you must have reading and writing rights. you can also activate a remote diagnostic which allows the machine to be operated via an external computer. ShopTurn shows the program in a user-friendly work plan and displays the individual cycles and contour elements in dynamic graphics. This makes it easy for you to check the result of programming and to observe the progress of workpiece machining at the machine (software option).

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) . however. must be created entirely out of G code commands. you must perform the following actions. of course. you can select whether you would like to make a sequence program or a G-code program (see "Creating a Sequential Control Program" or "G-code Program").01/2008 1-19 . Executing a program Before you execute a program. Programming progress is automatically indicated in a dashed-line diagram. also insert G code commands in a sequence program.1 01/2008 Introduction 1. during which you will be supported by ShopTurn (see Sec. you have to set up your machine. When creating a sequence program. A G code program. Help screens that explain the parameters in each operation also support you with programming. "Setting up the Machine"): • Approach the reference point of the machine (only for incremental position measuring systems) • Tool measuring • Define the workpiece zero • Enter any other work offsets If you have completely set up the machine. You can. you can select a program and automatically execute it (see Sec.1 1.1. • You want to create the program to be used for machining a workpiece. Creating a program If you create a new program. • You want to execute a program for the purpose of automatically machining a workpiece. "Machining a Workpiece"). ShopTurn prompts you to input all relevant parameters.1 ShopTurn 1 Work sequence Two typical working situations are considered separately in this Guide. © Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved. To do this.

of a main spindle.2 Workstation 1 Workstation In addition to the lathe with CNC/positioning control.2 Introduction 01/2008 1. Operator panel Turning machine complete with control Machine control panel Workstation configuration Turning machine Control Operator panel Machine control panel You can use ShopTurn on a single-slide lathe with three axes. You operate the lathe using the machine control panel. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) .1 1.01/2008 . Communication with ShopTurn is done via the operator panel. a ShopTurn workstation also has an operator panel and machine control panel. of a tool spindle. 1-20 © Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved. ShopTurn runs on the SINUMERIK 840D sl CNC with ShopTurn on NCU (HMI Embedded sl) and PCU 50.3 (HMI Advanced). and of a counter-spindle.

2 Workstation 1 Coordinate system When machining a workpiece on a lathe. and Z which are parallel to the machine axes.2. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) . Y+ M X+ W C Z+ M = Machine zero W = Workpiece zero Position of the coordinate system. Y. machine zero and workpiece zero (example) © Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved. The coordinate axis Y does not have to be set up. one basically uses a rightangled coordinate system.1 01/2008 Introduction 1. Spindle axis Z is an independently rotating axis and is designated with the letter C.01/2008 1-21 . This consists of the three coordinate axes X.1 1. The positions of the coordinate system and the machine zero depend on the type of machine used.

Operator panel OP 010 4 1 . The keys are described in the next section. the OP 010 operator panel front is used to illustrate the components that are available for operating the control and machine tool.1 1.2. 5 3 2 2 6 Operator panel OP 010 Screen Screen keys Horizontal softkey bar Vertical softkey bar Alphanumeric keypad Correction/cursor pad with control keys and input key 6 USB interface 1 2 3 4 5 1-22 © Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.2 Workstation 1 Operator panels You can use one of the following operator panels for the PCU: OP 010 OP 010C OP 010S OP 012 OP 015 OP 015A OP 015AT TP 015A TP15AT In this example.01/2008 .2 Introduction 01/2008 1. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) .

2. Channel Has no meaning for ShopTurn. Tab Has no meaning for ShopTurn.1 1.3 01/2008 Introduction 1. • In insertion mode. Use Cursor left to switch to the next highest level in the directory tree. End Moves the cursor to the last input field in a parameterization screen form.01/2008 1-23 . © Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved. Help Toggles between the process plan and programming graphics as well as between the parameterization screen form with programming graphics and the parameterization screen form with the help display. Use Cursor right to open a directory or program. Shift Depress the Shift key to enter the upper character shown on the dual input keys. Select Chooses one of a number of options presented. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) . Page Up or Page Down Page upward or downward in the directory or in the process plan. it deletes the character after the cursor. Cursor Navigate between different fields or lines. Next Window Has no meaning for ShopTurn. This key has the same function as the "Alternat." softkey. Backspace • Delete the value in the input field.2 Workstation 1 Operator panel keys Alarm Cancel Cancels the alarm that is marked with this symbol.

This key has the same function as the "Alarm list" softkey. This key has the same function as the "Program" softkey.2 Workstation 1 Ctrl Use the following key combinations to navigate in the process plan and in the G code editor: • Ctrl + Pos1: Jump to the beginning.only OP 010 and OP 010C Opens the "Program" operating area. Alarm . This key has the same function as the "Prog. This key has the same function as the "Tool zero point" softkey Program Manager . 1-24 © Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.1 Introduction 01/2008 1. • In insertion mode. Old Has no meaning for ShopTurn. edit" softkey. Del • Deletes the value in the parameter field. • Opens a directory or program. Insert Activates insertion mode or the pocket calculator. it deletes the character marked by the cursor.only OP 010 and OP 010C Opens the "Tools/Offsets" operating area. • Deletes the machining lines during parallel drawing and in the simulation. Offset .01/2008 .only OP 010 and OP 010C Opens the "Program Manager" operating area. Input • Terminates entry of a value in the input field. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) . Program .only OP 010 and OP 010C Opens the "Messages/Alarms" operating area. • Ctrl + End: Jump to the end.

2 Workstation 1 Machine control panels The lathe can be equipped with a machine control panel by Siemens or with a specific machine control panel from the machine manufacturer. You perform actions on the lathe via the machine control panel. Teach In Has no meaning for ShopTurn. traversing axes or starting the machining of the workpiece.2. For additional responses to pressing the Emergency Stop button.2. 1. Reset Reset • Interrupts execution of the current program.1 1. for example.01/2008 1-25 . All drives will be stopped with the greatest possible braking torque. when there is a danger to life or there is a risk of damage to the machine or workpiece.e. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) . i.5 Machine control panel elements EMERGENCY OFF pushbutton Press this pushbutton in an emergency. When functions are active. The CNC control remains synchronized with the machine. please refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions. the LEDs on the corresponding keys on the machine control panel light up.4 01/2008 Introduction 1. Jog Teach In MDA Auto © Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved. • Cancels an alarm Jog Select Machine Manual operating mode. It is in its initial state and ready for a new program run. Auto Selects Machine Auto operating mode. MDA Selects MDA mode.

Repos Repositions.. re-approaches the contour. WCS MCS 1-26 © Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved. Inc Var (incremental feed variable) Incremental mode with variable increment size.. Ref. 10000 Inc (Incremental feed) Incremental mode with predefined increment size of 1. WCS MCS Switches between the workpiece coordinate system (WCS = work) and machine coordinate system (MCS = machine).000 increments. Cycle Start Starts execution of a program... . A machine data code defines how the increment value is interpreted.01/2008 . Cycle Start Cycle Stop +X Rapid . Please refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.1 Introduction 01/2008 1. Rapid Traverses axis at rapid traverse (fastest speed). Z Axis keys Traverse axis in corresponding direction.. Repos Ref Point VAR 1 . Cycle Stop Stops execution of a program.2 Workstation 1 Single Block Single Block Executes the program block by block (single block)... Point Approach reference point. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) . 10.

2 Workstation 1 % Feedrate/Rapid Traverse Override Raises or lowers the programmed feedrate or rapid traverse. Spindle Stop Stop spindle. – only OP032S machine control panel Decreases the programmed spindle speed. 100% – only OP032S machine control panel Restores the programmed spindle speed. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) .01/2008 1-27 . Spindle Dec. 100% Spindle Stop Spindle Start © Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved. The programmed spindle speed is set to 100% and can be controlled from 50 to 120%. Spindle override Increases or decreases the programmed spindle speed.1 01/2008 Introduction 1. The new spindle speed setting appears in the spindle status display on the screen as an absolute value in percent. Feed Start Continues execution of the program in the current block and ramps up to the feedrate specified in the program. The programmed feedrate or rapid traverse is set to 100% and can be adjusted between 0% and 120% (only up to 100% for rapid traverse). Spindle Inc. Spindle Inc. Spindle Start Start spindle. Feed Stop Feed Start % Spindle Dec. The new feedrate setting appears in the feedrate status display on the screen as an absolute value and as a percentage. Feed Stop Stops execution of the running program and shuts down axis drives. – only OP032S machine control panel Increases the programmed spindle speed.

ShopTurn does not evaluate the keyswitch position. data.2 Workstation 1 Key-operated switch You can use the keyswitch to set various access rights. and functions at various protection levels. The machine manufacturer can set up protection levels 0 to 3 using a password. You have to initiate an action first (e. The keyswitch has four settings for protection levels 4 to 7. When the password is set.1 Introduction 01/2008 1. Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions. this is immediately not visible on the operator interface. If the PLC is in the Stop state (LED of the machine control panel is flashing). Machine data can be programmed to interlock access to programs. The keyswitch has three keys of different colors that you can remove in the specified positions: Position 0 No key Level of protection 7 Position 1 Key 1 black Level of protection 6 Position 2 Key 1 green Level of protection 5 Position 3 Key 1 red Level of protection 4 Lowest access rights ⏐ ⏐ ⏐ ⏐ ⏐ ⏐ ⏐ ⏐ ↓ Increasing access authorization ⏐ ⏐ ⏐ ⏐ ⏐ ⏐ ⏐ ⏐ ↓ Highest access rights When you change the key position to change the access authorization. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) .g. 1-28 © Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved. ShopTurn does not evaluate the keyswitch positions during boot up. close or open a directory).01/2008 .

S2 = tool spindle. S3 = counter spindle) • spindle utilization in percent Display of active work offsets and rotation Working window Dialog line for additional explanatory text Horizontal softkey bar Vertical softkey bar Softkeys Screen buttons 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 © Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.01/2008 1-29 . SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) .3 1.1 1.3 User interface 1 User interface Overview Screen layout User interface 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Active operating mode/operating area and secondary mode Alarm and message line Program name Program path Channel state and program control Channel operational messages Position display of the axes Display for • active tool T • current feedrate F • active spindle (S1 = main spindle.3.1 01/2008 Introduction 1.

INC10000: INC_VAR: RESET Active Interrupted Approaching a reference point Repositioning Fixed increment Variable increment Channel status Program control SKP: Skip G code block DRY: DRY run feedrate !ROV: Feedrate override only (not feedrate and rapid traverse override) SBL1: Single-block (stop after each block that has a function on the machine) SBL2: Selection not possible in ShopTurn (stop after each block) SBL3: Single-block fine (stop after each block.3 User interface 1 Secondary mode REF: REPOS: INC1 . Wait: No operator action is required.1 Introduction 01/2008 1. the remaining dwell time is displayed. Symbols for axis displays: Linear axis clamped Rotary axis clamped Feedrate status Spindle status Feed is not enabled Spindle not enabled Spindle is stationary Spindle is turning clockwise Spindle is turning counter-clockwise The display of the spindle utilization as a percentage can be 200%.01/2008 . Channel operational messages Position display of the axes The actual value display in the position display refers to the SZS coordinate system (settable zero system). It is either displayed in seconds or as spindle revolutions.. also within a cycle) M01: Programmed stop DRF: DRF offset PRT: Program test Stop: An operator action is required. If a dwell time is active. 1-30 © Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved. Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.. The position of the active tool relative to the workpiece zero is displayed. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) .

3 User interface 1 Key to the meaning of the symbol colors: Red: Machine is stationary Green: Machine is running Yellow: Waiting for operator to take action Gray: Miscellaneous Screen buttons Machine Call active operating mode (Machine Manual.1 01/2008 Introduction 1. Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions. Return jump Has no meaning for ShopTurn. or Machine Auto). The program path is then displayed together with the program name (3). Extension Changes the horizontal softkey bar. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) . MDA. © Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved. Menu Select Calls the main menu: The machine manufacturer can display defined symbols instead of the program path (4).01/2008 1-31 .

ShopTurn has 3 modes (Manual Machine. You operate the softkeys with the keys next to the softkey bars. you can call the operating areas via the hardkeys on the operator panel. and Tools/Zero-point offsets). Jog MDA Auto You can activate an operating mode directly at any time via the keys on the machine control panel. the screen form for the currently active mode appears. and Machine Auto) and 4 operating areas (Program Manager.1 1. The main menu is displayed. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) .3 User interface 1 Operation via softkeys and keys The ShopTurn operator interface consists of various screen forms in which there are eight horizontal and eight vertical softkeys respectively. Each softkey displays a new screen form. 1-32 © Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved. Alternatively. If you select the "Machine" softkey in the main menu. Program Messages/ Alarms. in which you can select the appropriate operating area via a softkey. MDA.2 Introduction 01/2008 1. press the "Menu Select" key. To switch from one operating mode/operating area to another.3.01/2008 .

Main menu Machine Manual operating mode © Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.3 User interface 1 If you select another operating mode or operating area.01/2008 1-33 .1 01/2008 Introduction 1. the horizontal and vertical softkey bars change. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) .

Machine Manual operating mode Function within Machine Manual operating mode 1-34 © Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) . only the vertical softkey bar will change.3 User interface 1 If you press a horizontal softkey within an operating mode or operating area.1 Introduction 01/2008 1.01/2008 .

This is done by pressing the "Expansion" key. Some softkeys are displayed with a black background when you activate the function assigned to them. When you have entered all the necessary parameters in the parameterization screen form correctly. On Program test Off © Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.g. Use the "OK" softkey to initiate an action immediately.3 User interface 1 When the symbol appears to the right of the dialog line on the operator interface. The softkey will then have a gray background again.1 01/2008 Introduction 1. you can use the "Back" softkey to return to the next highest screen form. e. you can deactivate the function by pressing the softkey again. Within an operating mode or operating area. to rename or delete a program. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) . Use the "Abort" softkey to exit a screen form without accepting the entered values and return to the next highest screen form.01/2008 1-35 . In that case. you can close the screen form and save the parameters using the "Accept" softkey. Pressing the "ETC" key again will take you back to the original horizontal softkey bar. you can change the horizontal softkey bar within an operating area.

-or- 1-36 © Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved. Use the "Cursor left" key to move up to the next-higher directory level. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) . Program manager -or- Select the program manager with the "Program" softkey or "Program Manager" key. Use the "Cursor right" key to open a directory.1 1. Use the "Cursor right" or "Input" key to open the process plan for a program.3 Introduction 01/2008 1.3 User interface 1 Program views You can display a work step program in various views. You can move around within a directory using the "Cursor up" and "Cursor down" keys. You can also select a program here for machining the workpiece. Program manager In the program manager. you manage all your programs.3.01/2008 .

3 User interface 1 Process plan The process plan provides an overview of the separate machining steps of a program. Programming graphics © Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.1 01/2008 Introduction 1.01/2008 1-37 . Programming graphics The programming graphics show the contour of the workpiece as a dynamic graphic with dashed lines. The program block selected in the process plan is color-highlighted in the programming graphics. Process plan You can move between the program blocks in the process plan using the "Cursor up" and "Cursor down" keys. Use the "Help" key to switch between the process plan and the programming graphics. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) .

1-38 © Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved. Use the "Help" key to switch between the programming graphics and the help display. Parameter screen with programming graphics The programming graphics in a parameterization screen form show the contour of the current machining step in broken-line graphics complete with the parameters. The appropriate parameterization mask complete with programming graphics is then displayed.01/2008 . SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) . Parameter screen with programming graphics Use the cursor keys to move between the input fields within a parameterization screen form.1 Introduction 01/2008 1.3 User interface 1 Use the "Cursor right" key to open a program block in the process plan.

1 01/2008 Introduction 1.01/2008 1-39 . Parameter screen with help display The colored symbols in the help displays have the following meaning: Yellow circle = reference point Red arrow = tool traveling at rapid traverse Green arrow = tool traveling at machining feedrate © Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.3 User interface 1 Parameter screen with help display The help display in the parameterization screen form explains the parameters of the machining step individually. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) .

01/2008 . Press the "Input" key to terminate entry. are automatically calculated by ShopTurn. The "Select" key is also only active in this situation.e. The "Alternat. -or- 1-40 © Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved. Press the "Alternat. Fields of this type do not allow you to type in a value. you must enter values in the white fields for various parameters. not even "0"." softkey is only visible when the cursor is positioned on an input field that presents a choice of options. Enter the desired value. If you do not want to enter a value.4 Introduction 01/2008 1. Parameters.3. White field input Parameter Gray field input Unit Parameterization screen form Selecting parameters Some parameters require you to select from a number of options in the input field." softkey or the "Select" key until the required setting is displayed.3 User interface 1 Entering parameters On setting up the machine and during programming. whose input fields have a gray background. -or- Entering parameters For the remaining parameters. enter a numerical value in the input field using the keys on the operator panel. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) .1 1. press the "Backspace" or "Del" key. i.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) . Use the "Backspace" or "Del" key to delete individual characters. you must position the cursor in the leftmost input field. The "Alternat. -orChanging or calculating parameters If you only want to change individual characters in an input field rather than overwriting the entire entry. -or- Deleting parameters If an input field contains an invalid value. In this case.01/2008 1-41 ." softkey or the "Select" key until the required unit is displayed. You can navigate within the input field using the "Left cursor" and "Right cursor" keys. you can close the screen form and save the parameters. Press the "Alternat. You cannot accept the parameters if they are incomplete or obviously erroneous. The "Select" key is also only active in this situation.3 User interface 1 Selecting the unit For certain parameters. you can choose between different units. In this mode. You can use it during programming to calculate parameter values." softkey is only visible when you have a choice of units for this parameter. Press the "Insert" key.1 01/2008 Introduction 1. Insertion mode and the pocket calculator are activated. -or- © Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved. the pocket calculator is also active. Accepting parameters When you have correctly entered all the necessary parameters in the parameterization screen form. you can see from the dialog line which parameters are missing or were entered incorrectly. For more information on the pocket calculator. see Section "Pocket calculator". Press the "Accept" softkey or the "Cursor left" key. If there are several input fields in a line and you want to use the "Cursor left" key to accept the parameters. Press the "Backspace" or "Del" key. switch to insertion mode. you can delete it completely.

F3 Remote diagnosis Interface utilisateur CNC ISO Press the "CNC ISO" softkey in the horizontal softkey bar. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) . you can switch to the CNC operator interface.01/2008 . you can activate remote diagnostics. This allows the controller to be operated via an external computer. Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.3. Extension Functions. 1-42 © Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved. You can find a detailed description of the CNC-ISO operator interface in: References: /BEMsl/. Programming Manual Fundamentals SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/840D sl /PGA/.1 1. Description of Functions. For further information about remote diagnosis. Programming Manual Advanced SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/840D sl The remote diagnosis is a software option. Operating Manual HMI Advanced SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/840D sl /PG/. The machine manufacturer must have released the change from the ShopTurn operator interface to the CNC-ISO operator interface. Operating Manual HMI Embedded sl SINUMERIK 840D sl /BAD/.5 Introduction 01/2008 1. -andThen press the "CNC ISO" softkey in the vertical softkey bar. please refer to: References: /FB/. There.3 User interface 1 CNC ISO user interface From the ShopTurn operator interface.

Remote diagnosis Press the "Menu Select" key in the CNC-ISO operator interface.01/2008 1-43 .3 User interface 1 CNC-ISO operator interface Press the "Menu Select" key if you want to return to the ShopTurn operator interface. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) . Press the "Remote diagnosis” softkey. Diagnosis Remote diagnosis © Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.1 01/2008 Introduction 1. -andShopTurn Press the "ShopTurn” softkey. Press the "Diagnosis” softkey.

Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions. In ShopTurn Open.3 User interface 1 ShopTurn Open (PCU 50.6 Introduction 01/2008 1. "Diagnosis". You can find a detailed description of the integrated HMI Advanced operating areas in: References: /BAD/.1 1. "Commissioning" and "Parameters" (without tool management and zero-point offsets) are located directly on the expanded horizontal softkey bar. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) . the HMI Advanced operating areas "Services".3 in the ShopTurn Open version.3.01/2008 . Operating Manual HMI Advanced SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/840D sl Some of the softkeys in the basic menu or extended menu bars may be assigned to other operating areas by the machine manufacturer. 1-44 © Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.3) There is ShopTurn software for the PCU 50.

...........................................2 2..........4 2............................................................2 2.2 2.................................................................................................8.................. 2-84 MDA .............. 2-71 Setting the zero offset ......................................................................................6 2...8............................ 2-86 Run times . 2-49 Settings for the machine ...................................................................................................................................... 2-77 Traversing axes .................7........................................................ 2-51 Spindles .....7..............................................5 2......................................................................................01/2008 2-45 ........................................ 2-81 Settings for manual mode ........................................................... 2-52 Tools .................5 2................................4.............. 2-56 Tool list..................................................................5.................7.........4 2.........................................2 01/2008 Setting up the machine 2 Setting up the machine 2............................ 2-79 Positioning axes ...2 2..................................................... 2-50 Switching between coordinate systems (MKS/WKS) ................ 2-81 Simple stock removal of workpiece ...................... 2-48 Modes ....................4...........................8.........8....................................... 2-87 © Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.....................................2 2...................................... 2-75 Manual mode .......8.......................5.................................10 Switching on and off................5....5 2..............................................................1 2...............................................................1 2......... 2-57 Measuring a tool manually .............3 2....7 2....................... 2-46 Approaching a reference point.................................................................. 2-77 Selecting a tool and spindle ........1 2.............................. 2-70 Zero offsets ....................................................................... 2-67 Measuring a tool with a magnifying glass .........................................1 2.. 2-65 Calibrating the probe...........................4...............................3 2......................1 2................................3 2.................5................8 2.....................................................................4 2......................................1 2.............................. 2-50 Switching between units of measurement (millimeters/inches) ........................................................................................... 2-63 Measuring a tool with a probe............ 2-72 Defining zero offsets ......3 2...........................................................................................................................9 2...................................................................... 2-69 Measuring the workpiece zero .............. 2-74 Zero offset list....5........3 2... 2-46 User agreement with Safety Integrated ................................. 2-54 Creating a new tool ................................................................................................................................................................2............................................................ SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) .....................6 2......5.......

During the reference point traversing. Basic manual machine screen 2.1 Setting up the machine 01/2008 2. The axes can also all approach the reference point simultaneously. the basic "Manual Machine" screen appears. but an absolute path measuring system does not. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) . please see the machine manufacturer’s specifications. Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions. all the machine axes must therefore first approach a reference point. the coordinates of which are known to be relative to the machine zero-point.1 Switching on and off 2 Switching on and off To switch the controller or machine on and off. For the incremental path measuring system.2 2. The sequence in which you must refer the axes is preset by the machine manufacturer.2 Approaching a reference point Your turning machine can be equipped with an absolute or incremental path measuring system. 2-46 © Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved. depending on the manufacturer’s settings. After running up the controller. An incremental path measuring system must be calibrated after being switched on.01/2008 . the feedrate override is in effect.

The correct coordinates of the reference point are displayed in the actual value display. + Press the "-" or “+” key. Interrupting axis motion Press the "Feed Stop" key.01/2008 2-47 . the coordinates of the actual value display are incorrect. the path measuring system is calibrated and the path limitations of the axes are in effect. It is important that you observe the movement of the axes on the machine during the approach to the reference point.. The axis is marked with an icon. . the axes travel along a direct path to the reference point. After the all machine axes have traversed to the reference point.. Jog Press the "Ref Point" key on the machine control panel. © Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved. If an axis key in the wrong direction is selected. Ref Point X … Select the axis to be traversed. Referencing axes Select "Machine Manual" mode. Therefore. The selected axis moves to the reference point and stops. The axis resumes moving in the direction of the reference point. first move the axes to a safe position in order to avoid collisions when during the approach to the reference point. The axis stops. the path limitations of the axes set by the machine manufacturer are not yet in effect. Warning During the reference point approach. The coordinate of the reference point is displayed. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) . Feed Stop Approach again with axis X Select the axis to be moved and press the desired direction key. In addition.2 01/2008 Setting up the machine 2.2 Approaching a reference point 2 Notice Before approaching the reference point. the axis does not move.

" you again deactivate the agreement. It shows a list of all machine axes with their current and SI positions. The selected axis is marked with a cross meaning "safely referenced" in the "Agreement" column. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) .2. Your confirmation is the precondition for the availability of other Safety Integrated functions. The selected axis moves to the reference point and stops.01/2008 . you will need to confirm that the current displayed position of an axis corresponds to its actual position on the machine when you reference an axis. The "User agreement" window opens. The axis is marked with an icon. Jog Press the "Ref Point" key on the machine control panel.1 Setting up the machine 01/2008 2. please refer to: References: /FBSI/. The displayed axis position always refers to the machine coordinate system (MCS = machine).2 Approaching a reference point 2 User agreement with Safety Integrated If you are using Safety Integrated (SI) on your machine. Position the cursor in the "Agreement" field for the axis in question." softkey or the "Select" key. Description of Functions SINUMERIK Safety Integrated Select "Machine Manual" mode. User agreement with Safety Integrated is only possible with a software option. … … + Press the "-" or “+” key. The coordinate of the reference point is displayed.2 2. User agreement Press the "User agreement" softkey. You can only give your user agreement for an axis after it has approached the reference point. For more information on user agreement. Give your agreement by pressing the "Alternat. -or- 2-48 © Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved. Ref Point X Select the axis to be traversed. By pressing the "toggle keys.

measuring the workpiece and. shank. threads. during a program interruption • Positioning axes • Simple stock removal of workpiece You can select the "Manual Machine“ mode using the "Jog" key. e. drilling. groove. Under "Machine Manual. undercut. tapping) • Milling (pocket. axial threads. if necessary. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) . i.g. S. You can select MDA mode via the "MDA" key. measuring tools.3 01/2008 Setting up the machine 2. groove. multi-edged.2 2. The parameters set under "T. threads) • Turning (stock removal. you are working in "Machine Manual" for the manual mode. calibrating the machine’s path measuring system • Preparing a machine for executing a program in automatic mode. If you have the "Manual Machine" option." affect all movements in manual mode with the exception of reference point approach. MDA © Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved. there is a provision for the following preparatory actions in manual mode: • Approaching the reference point." you have the option of carrying out the following machining processes without having to write a program for them: • Setting-up and simple traversing movements • Taper turning • Straight (plan or longitudinal turning) • Drilling (axial drilling.e.3 Modes 2 Modes There are various modes in which you can work in ShopTurn: • Machine Manual • MDA (Manual Data Automatic) • Machine Auto Machine Manual In "Machine Manual“ mode. reaming. defining the work offsets used in the program • Traversing axes. M. you can enter and execute G code commands nonmodally to set up the machine or to perform a single action. i.e. deep-drilling. engraving) Jog Manual machine MDA In MDA mode.01/2008 2-49 ...

2

Setting up the machine

01/2008

2.4 Settings for the machine

2

Machine Auto

In automatic mode, you can execute a program completely or only partially. You can also trace execution of the program in a graphical display on the screen. You can select "Machine Auto" via the "Auto" key.

Auto

2.4 2.4.1

Settings for the machine Switching between units of measurement (millimeters/inches)
You can set millimeters or inches as the unit of measure. Switching the unit of measure is done for the entire machine, i.e. ShopTurn automatically c